Digital PDFs

XX-02EDA-6F

2000

452 pages

Original

30MB

Document:	Digital Networks and Communications Buyers Guide 198710
Order Number:	XX-02EDA-6F
Revision:	0
Pages:	452
Original Filename:

OCR Text

Networks and
Communications
Buyer's Guide
1987 October- Doce.moer

Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide
1987 October-December

Copyright © 1987. Digital Equipment Corporation. All rights reserved.
Digital believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date;
such information is subject to change without notice. Digital is not responsible for any
inadvertent errors.
Products and product availability may differ outside of the United States.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: ALL-IN-I, DEC, DECconnect,
DECmate, DECNA, DECnet, DECnet-DOS, DECnet-11M-PLUS, DECnet-Rainbow, DECnet-RT, DECnetVAX, DECnet-vAxmate, DECnet/E, DECnet Router, DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway, DECnet-ULTRIX,
DECOM, DECserver, DECservice, DECstart, DECsupport, DEcsystem-10, DECSYSTEM-20, DEFTR, DELNI,
DELVA, DEMPR, DEQNA, DEREP, DESTA, Digital Network Architecture (DNA), the Digital logo, EDE,
ETHERJACK, IAS, Internet, Message Router, MicroPDP-11, MicroRsx, MicroVAX, MicrovMs, OSAK,
Packetnet, PDP, P/os, PRO/Communications, PRO/DECnet, Professional, PRO/SNA, PRO/Tool Kit,
Q-bus, Rainbow, RSTS/E, RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS, RSX-llS, RT-11, SERVpak, Standard Network
Packages, Terminal Server, ThinWire, TOPS-10, TOPS-20, ULTRIX, ULTRIX-11, ULTRIX-32, ULTRIX-32m,
UNIBUS, VAX, VAXcluster, VAXELN, VAXmate, VAXPAC, VAXstation, VMS, VOTS, and VT.
PRISM is a trademark of Advanced Systems Concepts, Inc.
IDMS-Dc/ucF, !CMS and IDMS/R are trademarks ofCullinet Software, Inc.
Chipcom and Ethermodem are trademarks ofChipcom, Corp.
CP/M, CPIM-80, and CP/M-86/80 are registered trademarks ofDigital Research.
IBM, CICS, TSO, PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT arc trademarks of IBM Corporation.
M/A-COM is a trademark of M/A-COM, Inc.
MICOM, NI5010-1, and NI5010-2 are trademarks ofMICOM Systems, Inc.
MS, Ms-Windows, MS-NET, MS-DOS, are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Teflon is a trademark of Dupont.
Tektronix 4010/4014 are trademarks ofTektronix, Inc.
poly-ssc/RJE, poly-xFR, poly-coM, and poly-ssc/3270 are trademarks of Polygon Associates, Inc.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
TransLAN is a trademark of Vitalink Corporation.
GALAXY is a trademark ofR. S. Means Company.
Sytek and LocalNet 20 are trademarks of Sytek, Inc.
Touch-Tone is a trademark of AT&T Corporation.
UNIX is a trademark of AT&T Bell Laboratories.
WANG is a trademark of Wang Laboratories, Inc.
3Com, IE2 and IE4 Etherlink are trademarks of 3Com Corporation.

Table of Contents

Suggestions for Using This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1x
What's New to the Networks and Communications
Buyer's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x1
Abbreviations and Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xm
Key to Symbols Used in This Guide ............................... xiv

Section 1

Digital Network Architecture Overview

DNA and ISO Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
DNA Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
DNA Layer Capabilities and Functions .............................. 1.2
DNA Layers and DECnet Protocols .................................. 1.5
Networking Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Hardware and Software Networking Products ....................... 1.6
DNA Phase IV and Ethernet ...................................... 1.8

Section 2

Ethernet Local Area Networks

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Reasons for Implementing Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Compliant Products .......................... 2.2
Ethernet Channel Access ............. , ........................ 2.2
Baseband and Broadband Ethernet Cabling ....................... 2.2
ThinWire Ethernet Cabling .................................... 2.4
Ethernet Communications Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. · . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 5
Ethernet Communications Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 7
Ethernet LAN Bridge 100 and Extended Local Area Networks ......... 2.8
Ethernet Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 9
Typical Baseband Ethernet Applications ............................ 2.10
Office Applications .......................................... 2.10
Factory Applications .......................................... 2.11
CAD/CAM Applications ........................................ 2.12
Hospital Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Laboratory Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
University Applications ....................................... 2.16
Typical Broadband Ethernet Applications/Installations ................ 2.17
Baseband Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Products ............................. 2.18
Ethernet Baseband Coaxial Cable ............................... 2.20
Fiber Optic Cable ............................................ 2.21
Transceiver Cable ............................................ 2.22
Office Transceiver Cable ...................................... 2.22
Coaxial Cable Connectors and Terminators ....................... 2.24
Etherjack (DEXJK) ............................................ 2.25
Ethernet Transceiver Installation Tool Kit ......................... 2.25
Baseband Ethernet Transceiver (H4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Ethernet Repeaters (i:>EREP) ..................................... 2.27
ThinWire Ethernet Products ..................................... 2.30
ThinWire Cable ............................................. 2.30
ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) .................... 2.30
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) ....................... 2.31

Table of Contents

Broadband Ethernet Products .................................... 2.33
Broadband-specific Ethernet Products ........................... 2.36
Broadband Ethernet Transceiver (DECOM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator (DEFTR) .................. 2.39
Chipcom Ethermodem Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Chipcom Ethermodem Frequency Translator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41
Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products ............................ 2.42
Transceiver Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
Ethernet Communications Controllers ........................... 2.47
DELUA ..................................................... 2.48
DELQA ..................................................... 2.50
DESVA ...................................................... 2.51
DEPCA ..................................................... 2.52
DECNA ..................................................... 2.53
NIA20 ...................................................... 2.54
Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
METROWAVE Bridge ........................................... 2.60
TransLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 63
Ethernet Communications Servers ................................ 2.65
Introduction ................................................ 2.65
Ordering Information ........................................ 2.67
Terminal Server Overview ..................................... 2.67
DECserver 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 70
Muxserver 100/DEcmux II Remote Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 73
DECrouter 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 77
DECnet Router Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81
DECnet/SNA Gateway ......................................... 2.87
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway ................................... 2.87
Other Ethernet Servers .......................................... 2.88
PrintServcr 40 ............................................... 2.88
Ethernet Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 90
DNA Phase IV Network Configuration Guidelines .................. 2.90
Converting Networks from Phase III to Phase IV ................... 2.92
Ethernet-based Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 95
Planning a Baseband Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. 98
Planning a ThinWire Ethernet LAN .............................. 2.104
Planning an Extended Baseband Ethernet LAN ..................... 2.106
Planning a Broadband Ethernet LAN ............................. 2.110
Planning an Extended Broadband Ethernet LAN .................... 2.113
Connecting Baseband to Broadband LANs ......................... 2.114
Connecting Shared Resources to an Ethernet LAN ................... 2.115
Connecting an Ethernet LAN to Remote Networks .................. 2.121
DECnet-to-X.25 Communications ............................... 2.124
DECnet rnM/SNA Communications ............................... 2.128

Section 3

Networks and Communications Software

Introduction .................... ;''·,··.· .......................... 3.1
Networks and Coinmunkations Software Ordering Information. . . . . . . . 3.1

Table of Contents

DECnet Communications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
DECnet Product Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 5
DECnet-RSX ................................................. 3.8
DECnet-VAX ................................................. 3.10
PRO/DECnet ................................................. 3.12
DECnet/E ................................................... 3.13
DECnet-RT .................................................. 3.13
DECnet-10 and DECnet-20 ....................................... 3.14
DECnet-ULTRIX ............................................... 3.15
DECnet-DOS ................................................. 3.17
DECnet-Rainbow ............................................. 3.19
DECnet-VAXmate ............................................. 3.20
DECnet Applications for PCs ...................................... 3.21
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS ................................... 3.22
Network Integration Packages .................................. 3.24
PC ALL-IN-1 ................................................. 3.25
Mail Interchange ............................................... 3.27
Message Router ............................................. 3.27
Message Router Base ......................................... 3.29
Message Router VMsmail Gateway .............................. 3.30
Message Router x. 400 Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 31
Message Router Programmer's Kit .............................. 3.33
Internet Communications Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Digital-to-IBM Communications Software .......................... 3.35
DECnet/SN A Gateway ......................................... 3.36
VMS/SN A ................................................... 3.38
DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces ............ 3.41
DECnet/SN A VMS Gateway Management .......................... 3.42
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator ......................... 3.43
DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry .............................. 3.44
DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility (DTF) .......................... 3.45
DECnet/SNA VMS msoss Document Exchange Facility (DDXF) ......... 3.47
EDE with IBM DISOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility (DHCF) ......... 3.49
DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator (Prn) ........................... 3.50
DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface (API) ........... 3.51
DECnet/SNA VMS Advanced Program-to-Program
Communication/Lu6.2 Programming Interface (APPC) .............. 3.52
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270 DS) .... 3.53
vAx/rnM Data Access (vrnA) .................................... 3.54
DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Access Products ............................. 3.55
Binary Synchronous Communications Protocol Emulators ........... 3.58
VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator. ............................... 3.58
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61
RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
Micro/RSX 2780/3780 Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
RSX-113271 Protocol Emulator .................................. 3.65
Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator .............................. 3.67
RSX-11M-PLUS RJE/HASP Emulator. ............................... 3.67
RSX-11M!IAs RJE/HASP Emulator ................................. 3.69
TOPS-10 and TOPS-20 2780/3780 Emulator-Terminator ................. 3. 70
Digital TOPS 2780/3780/HASP Products ......•..................... 3.72
iii

Table of Contents

Digital-to-Univac Communications Software ....................... 3. 74
VAX NTR Protocol Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 74
Digital-to-CDC Communications Software .......................... 3. 75
MUX200/vAx Protocol Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 75
Digital-to-UNIX Communications Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 76
IP/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 76
Digital-to-WANG Communications Software ........................ 3.77
EDE-W Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 77
Packetnet Communications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 79
VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access ................................. 3.81
RSX-11 P.S.I./M and RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS ........................... 3.86
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway ................................... 3.88
TOPS-10 and TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateways .............................. 3.93
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 94
VAX DEC/MAP ................................................ 3.95
VAX OSI Transport Service (voTs) ................................ 3.98
VAX OSI Applications Kernel (osAK) .............................. 3.100
File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products ...................... 3.101
Professional Host Communications Software ...................... 3.101
cx/Dx/ Ax (wPs-8 to Host Utility) ............................... 3.102
poly-coM for the Rainbow Family .............................. 3.104
VTERM II, poly-COM 220, and poly-COM 240 for the IBM pc/xT/ AT ...... 3.105
Rainbow Office Workstation ................................... 3.107
Network and System Management Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.109
NMCC/DECnet Monitor ........................................ 3.109
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim (Ethernet Network Integrity Monitor) ......... 3.111
LAN Traffic Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.113
Remote System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.115
Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) ..................... 3.117
Terminal Server Manager ...................................... 3.119
PBX/Facilities Management System (P/FM) ........................ 3.121
Cable/Facilities Management System (c/FM) ....................... 3.122
Additional Software Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.123
VAX Public Access Communications (vAXPAC) ..................... 3.123
WPS-PLUS/PC ................................................ 3.125
Software Development Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.126
HDLC Framing Software ....................................... 3.127
x.25 Link Level Software ...................................... 3.127

Tuble of Contents

Table of Contents

Section 4

Communications Hardware Products

Overview .................................................... 4.1
Communications Hardware Ordering Information ................... 4.2
Asynchronous Communications Controllers ........................ 4.4
UNIBUS Asynchronous Devices ................................... 4.6
DHU11 ...................................................... 4.6
DMZ32 ..................................................... 4.7
Q-bus Asynchronous Devices .................................... 4.9
DLVJl ...................................................... 4.9
DHQ11. ..................................................... 4.10
DZQ11 ...................................................... 4.12
ex Communications Controllers ................................ 4.13
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Asynchronous Devices ............................. 4.15
DC20/DC20F ................................................. 4.15
DN25 ....................................................... 4.16
Synchronous Communications Controllers ......................... 4.17
UNIBUS Synchronous Devices ..................................... 4.20
DMR11. ..................................................... 4.20
DUP11 ...................................................... 4.22
KMS11 ...................................................... 4.23
KMS1P ............................ ., ......................... 4.24
PCL11 ...................................................... 4.25
Q-bus Synchronous Devices ...................................... 4.26
DMV11 ..................................................... 4.26
DPV11 ............... .' ...................................... 4.28
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Synchronous Devices .............................. 4.29
DN20/oN20F ................................................. 4.29
Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers ............. 4.30
DMB32 ..................................................... 4.30
DMF32 ...................................................... 4.33
KCT32 ...................................................... 4.35
KMV1A ..................................................... 4.36
KXT11-AB ................................................... 4.37
KXT11-CA ................................................... 4.38
KXJ11-CA ................................................... 4.39
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40
DF100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42
DF224 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43
Multiple Modem (Rack Mount) Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44
Statistical Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44
DFM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44
DFM x.25 Packet Assembler/Disassembler ........................ 4.47
Computer-to-PBX Interface (CPI32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49
Mini-Exchange Personal Computer Port Selector .................... 4.50
Communications Cables ........................................ 4.51
Additional Hardware Product .................................... 4.56
DT07 ....................................................... 4.56

Table of Contents

Section 5

DECconnect Communications System

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
ThinWire Ethernet Products ..................................... 5.5
ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) .................... 5.6
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) ....................... 5.6
DEC connect ThinWire Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. 7
Faceplate Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. 9
Flushmount Faceplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. 9
Surface Mount Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. 9
Faceplate Jacks and Connectors ................................. 5.10
Satellite Equipment Room Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Terminal Interconnection Components ........................... 5.12

Section 6

Standard Network Packages

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Service Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Ordering Standard Network Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Local Area Work Group Interconnection ............................ 6.5
DECconnect Integrated Communications Package................... 6.5
Low Speed Work Group Package-Terminal Interconnection ......... 6.11
High Speed Work Group Package-Work System Interconnection ..... 6.14
IBM PC Interconnection Package ................................. 6.17
Extended Local Area Interconnection .............................. 6.19
Computer Room Package ..................................... 6.19
Building Package ............................................ 6.21
Site Package ................................................ 6.23
Wide Area Interconnection ....................................... 6.25
Wide Area Gateway Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Remote Site Interconnection Package ............................ 6.28
Multivendor Interconnection ..................................... 6.30
DECnet/SNA Gateway Package .................................. 6.30

Section 7

Network Services

Services for the Planning and Design Phase ......................... 7.2
NETplan/Requirements Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
NETplan/Design Analysis ...................................... 7.3
NHplan/Application Design ................................... 7.3
Nl-':rplan/Protocol Design ...................................... 7.4
NHplan/Physical Design ...................................... 7.4
NETplan/Planning Seminars .................................... 7.5

Table of Contents

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase ................... 7.6
NETstart/Installation Management ........... ' .................... 7.6
NETstart/ Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 7
NETstart/Startup Assistance .................................... 7.7
NETstart/Application Development .............................. 7.8
NETstart/Protocol Development ................................ 7.8
NETstart/Startup Training ...................................... 7.8
Services for the Operations and Growth Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 9
NETsupport/Maintenance Management ........................... 7.9
NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance ........................ 7. 9
NETsupport/Operations Training ................................ 7.10
Related Network Services ....................................... 7.11
Related Educational Services Training Courses ..................... 7.11
Software Installation Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Ongoing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Software Product Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Network Tool: NMcc/vAx ETHERnim ............................ 7.14
Network Tool: NMCC/DECnet Monitor ........................... 7.14
DEcsite Services .............................................. 7.15
DECmove Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Startup Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Computer Services Business ................................... 7.18
Computer Special Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19

Appendix A

Performance Guidelines

Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1
DE Crouter 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. 2
DECnet Router ................................................. A.3
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway ..................................... A. 7
DECnet ....................................................... A.9
DECnet-RSX Phase IV ........................................... A.11
DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility ................................. A.13
BISYNC Emulators .............................................. A.18
DECnet-DOS and DECnet-Rainbow File Transfer ....................... A.20
LAN Bridge 100 ................................................ A.21

Appendix B

Environmental Specifications

Appendix C

Software Product Description Listing

Appendix D

Related Documentation

Index

vii

Table of Contents

Suggestions for Using this Guide
Introduction

Customers can use this guide to find the following kinds of information about
Digital's networking and communications products:

• Background Information which presents a general overview of networking and
communications concepts and architecture.
• Product Information which describes product features and capabilities.
• Configuration Information which describes how products can be linked
into networks.
• Ordering Information which lists the codes required to purchase specific variations of a product.
To find the location of this information in this guide, find specific topics listed
below and refer to the Table of Contents for page numbers.

Background Information

General background information about Digital networking and communications is presented in Section 1: Digital Network Architecture Overview, Ethernet
Overview, and DECconnect Overview.
For more detailed information, refer to the publications lised in Appendix D.

Product Information
Locating Products

Products are listed by product area in the Table of Contents and alphabetically in
the Index.

New Products

New products are highlighted under What's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide.

Packaged Products

Network products available in pre-packaged configurations are described in
Section 6: Standard Network Packages.

Software Product Descriptions

Condensed software product descriptions are located in Section 3: Networks and
Communications Software Products. Each description is followed by order codes
and any prerequisite hardware and software.
Software required for Ethernet Communications Servers is described in
Ethernet Communications Servers.
Full Software Product Descriptions (sPD) are published separately. The SPD
number for products referred to in this guide are listed in Appendix C.

Suggestions for Using this Guide

Hardware Product Descriptions

Hardware product descriptions are in Section 2: Ethernet Local Area Networks,
Section 4: Communications Hardware Products, and Section 5: DECconnect Cabling
System. Each description is followed by specifications and order codes as well as
any prerequisite hardware and software.

Network Services Products

Network Services products are listed in Section 7: Network Services.

Product Comparisons

Tables comparing the features and capabilities of products are located in the
following subsections: Ethernet Communications Servers, Extended Ethernet Local
Area Networks, DECnet Communications Software, Digital-to-IBM Communications
Software, Asynchronous Devices, Synchronous Devices, Modems, and Communications Cables.

Product Peiformance Information

Product performance information is discussed in Appendix A and in individual
product descriptions.

Specifications

Specifications for hardware products are listed in individual product descriptions.

Prerequisite Products

Any prerequisite hardware or software necessary to use a product is listed in the
individual product description.

Configuration Information
Overview Configurations

General overview configurations are described in Ethernet Overview and Ethernet
Configuration Guidelines.

Sample Configurations

Sample configurations for the following applications are illustrated in Ethernet
Overview: Office, Factory, CAD/CAM, Hospital, Laboratory, and University.

Ethernet Configuration Information

Ethernet configuration information is located in Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines.

DECconnect Configuration Information

DECconnect configuration information is located in Section 5: DECconnect
Cabling System.

Ordering Information
Order Codes

Order codes are listed in tables after each product description.

Order Code Explanations

Order code formats are explained at the beginning of Section 3 for software and
Section 4 for hardware.

Pre-Packaged Ordering

To order network products in pre-packaged configurations, refer to Section 6:
Standard Network Packages.

l:'11ropean Ordering

European order codes are now the same as u.s order codes.

Comments and Suggestions

Comments and suggestions for the guide can be made using the comment cards
attached under the back cover.

What's New to the Networks and
Communications Buyer's Guide
DELQA Ethernet Controller

The DELQA is an Ethcrnct-to-Q-bus controller that connects MicroVAX II and
MicroPDP-11 systems to an Ethernet v2.o or IEEE 802.3 local area network. The
DELQA replaces the DEQN A Ethernet controller.
For more information about the DELQA Etherenet controller, refer to Section 2,

Ethernet Communications Controllers.
CX Asynchronous
Communications Controllers

The ex communications controllers provide asynchronous communications for
the Industrial VAX (rvAx) and Industrial PDP (IPDP) computers that utilize the
BA200 series system enclosures. Three versions are available: the CXY08 with 8
RS232-c lines, the cxA16with16 DEC423 (a superset ofRS423) lines, and the CXB16
with 16 RS422 lines.
For more information about the ex communications controllers, refer to
Section 4, Asynchronous Communications Controllers.

IBM PC Interconnection
Standard Network Package

The IBM PC Interconnection Package is a. Standard Network Package that
connects IBM PCS to a ThinWire Ethernet network using a DEPCA Ethernet
controller. The package includes DECnet-DOS and the client license for VMS
Services for MS-DOS TM. A work group of eight or less PCs connect to the network
using a DEMPR; groups larger than eight PCs use a DELNI/DEMPR configuration.
For more information about IBM PC Interconnection Package, refer to Section 6,

Local Area Work Group Interconnection.

What's New to the Networks and
Communications Buyer's Guide
(Continued)
Remote Site Interconnection
Standard Network Package

The Remote Site Interconnection Package is a Standard Network Package that
links terminals, printers, and personal computers (in terminal emulation mode)
at a remote site to an Ethernet local area network through a leased telephone
line. The package uses the terminal server and statistical multiplexing techniques of the Muxserver 100/DECmux II configuration.
For more information about the Remote Site Interconnection Package, refer to
Section 6, Wide Area Interconnection.

Message Router

Message Router is a VMS layered application that performs a store and forward
transfer service. Messages can consist of any information, including text,
data and arbitrary files, that need to be transferred within a DECnet Phase
IV network.
The Message Router is a standard component of ALL-IN-1 and PC ALL-IN-1
configurations. In addition, it is available in the following packages:
• Message Router Base for installing the Message Router on nodes running
user-written applications
• Message Router VMSmail Gateway for transferring VMS mail via the
Message Router
•Message Router X.400 Gateway for transferring x.400 mail via the
Message Router
• Message Router Programmer's Kit for developing message transfer applications
For more information about Message Router, refer to Section 3,
Mail Interchange.

xii

Abbreviations and Definitions

Abbreviations and definitions of terms used in this guide are listed below.
System Unit Space in chassis for mounting prewired backplane(s) that can
accept Hex- or Quad-sized modules.
Double Slot Space in a prewired backplane that will accept a 13. 2 cm (5. 22 in)
high module.
Quad Slot Space in prewired backplane that will accept a 26.51 cm (10.44 in)
high module.
Hex Slot Space in prewired backplane that will accept a 39.63 cm (15.6 in)
high module.
J/0 Connection Panel Insert Openings for mounting r/o Connection Panel
Inserts in the r/ o Connection Panel on the back of the CPU cabinet. These inserts
provide the transition between internal cabling and external shielded cabling.
These are two types of r/ o Connection Panel Inserts-one for UNIBUS systems
and one for Q~bus systems. r/o Connection Panel Inserts for UNIBUS options
vary in type and style depending on the amount ·and type of connectors required
by the option. Each r/o Connection Panel accepts multiple inserts. Q-bus
options have r/o Connection Panel Insert sizes of A (2.54 X 10.1cmor1 X 4 in),
B (6.6 x 8.1 cm or 2.6. X 3.2 in), or C (10.1 x 10.1 cm or 4 x 4 in).
DC Amps Drawn DC current (amps) drawn by the option at + 5 V, + 15 V,
-15 V, +12 V.
AC Watts Drawn AC current (watts) drawn by the option at 120 V, 60 Hz or

240V, so Hz.
Bus loads The number ofbus loads drawn from the appropriate system bus.

bis Bits per second.
KB!s Kilobytes per second. (K = 1,024)
Kb/s Kilobits per second. (K = 1,000)
MB!s Mbytes per second. (M = 1,048,578)
Mb!s Megabits per second. (1Mbit=1,000,000 bits)

xiii

Key to Symbols Used
,......._!_,.., ••
! __

u1 .1. 111:.1 uu1ue

Cable

Transceiver

Connector

Terminator

ThinWire

DESTA with T-Connector
DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)
DEL:UAJ

VAX 8800

Specific Host Node

Specific Host Node
with Communications
Device

Specific Host Node
with Communications
Device and
Resident Software

t;;;;;;?
Server,
Router,
Gateway

Modem

Terminal

Work Station or
Personal Computer

DEL NI

Network

CAD/CAM

DE COM,
DES TA

Disk

Local Repeater

Remote Repeater

Bridge

Printer
Tape
Statistical
Multiplexer

xiv

Section 1
Digital Network Architecture
Overview
Introduction

Digital offers extensive capabilities that permit the linking of computers and
terminals into flexible configurations called networks. Networks increase the
efficiency and cost-effectiveness of data processing operations.
Networking lets computer systems and terminals-whether located around a
facility or around the world-share resources and exchange information, files,
and programs. The smaller computers in a network have access to the powerful
capabilities oflarger systems, while the larger computers can take advantage
of smaller dedicated systems chosen for specific application environments.
Distributed processing is the general term used to describe the placement
of computers where they are needed, whether on the floor of a manufacturing
facility, in an accounting department, in a laboratory, or in a corporate office.
With the continuing proliferation of personal computers at the local level, the
ability to form integrated local networks that facilitate cost-effective resource
sharing and information exchange has become increasingly important.
In addition to the broad spectrum of product offerings, the Computer Special
Systems Group has the capability of providing technical resources to design
and manufacture high performance custom network interfaces to other vendors'
systems and non-standard networks. This capability allows customers the
flexibility of configuring and implementing multi-vendor networks which
match their unique requirements. The custom products designed by Computer
Special Systems are fully supported by Digital.
The information presented in this section is a general overview of DNA. For a
more detailed discussion of DNA, refer to the handbook Digital's Networks: An
Architecture with a Future.

DNA and ISO Overview

The Digital Network Architecture, DNA, is the framework for all Digital
communication products (DECnet, DECnet/SNA Gateway, communications
servers, and so on). The International Standards Organization (Iso), a group
responsible for promulgating industry standards, has created an architectural
model for open systems interconnection. DNA, like many other vendors'
architectures, is closely based on the ISO model. The ISO model is just that,
however-a model for future standards development. Therefore, network
architectures from different vendors can be implemented based on the ISO
model and still be mutually incompatible. Much work remains to be done in
the area of international standards; however, the vendors who currently are
implementing systems based on international standards will be the first to offer
heterogeneous connectivity in the future. Table 1.1 shows the architectural
layers of ISO and DNA.

1.1

DNA

Digital Ne~ork Ar~hitec_tu_re_O_v_e_r_v_i_e_w_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Table 1.1
Architectural Layers
of ISO and DNA

ISO Layers

DNA Layers
User

Application
Network management

DNA Phases

Presentation

Network application

Session

Session control

Transport

End-to-end communications

Network

Routing

Data Link

Data link

Physical Link

Physical link

A hierarchical, layered architecture such as DNA offers flexibility by allowing
for the substitution and addition of new technologies in future phases while
maintaining compatibility with previous phases. This means that a customer's
application-level software investment is protected while Digital adds new
products and capabilities from one phase of DNA to another. For example,
the layered structure of DNA allowed the incorporation of the CCITT x.25
data link protocol into DNA Phase III and the even more recent incorporation
of the Ethernet data link protocol into DNA Phase IV. Digital will continue to
offer products that take advantage of the latest advances in communication
technology and network applications in future phases of DNA.
Since 1976 when DECnet Phase I was introduced, each new phase of DNA has
included new features that extend its networking capabilities. Figure 1.1 shows
each of the phases of DNA and its associated capabilities. The functions and
protocols offered by each phase of DNA are implemented by an equivalent phase
of the layered software product DECnet. Specific DECnet versions are offered for
each ofDigital's operating systems.

DNA Layer Capabilities and
Functions

DNA has eight layers. Each layer has capabilities that perform a specific set
of functions and services. By interacting, the layers control the operation
of the network.
Figure 1.2 shows the DNA layers in sequence from the highest to lowest layer.
The highest layers define the functions available to the network user. The lowest
layers define the transmission media, technique, and format.

1.2

DNA

Digital Network Architecture Overview

DNA Phase IV

Figure 1.1
The Phases of DNA and
Associated Capabilities

DNA Phase III
•Adaptive
routing
•Network
terminals
• Multipoint lines
• CCITT X.25

DNA Phase II

• Record access
•Down-line
loading
•Expanded
customer base,
banks, labs, etc.

~---------1-

DNA Phase I

•All major
operating
systems/
processors
• Remote file
access
•Network
management
• Point-to-point
configurations

---------<- • RSX-11M; PDP-11S

• Program-toprogram
• File transfer
• Sophisticated,
tech. customer
base

1976

1.3 DNA

1978

1980

•Ethernet
•Large
networks
• Communications servers
• Virtual
terminal
• Addition of
Professional
300 series
personal
computers
•Office
environment
• SNA gateway
• LAN Bridge 100
• DECconnect
system
•Standard
network
packages

-----1982

Digital Network Architecture Overview

Figure 1.2
DNA Layers, Capabilities
and Functions

DNA Layers
(Highest layer)
8 User
7 Network
management

Capabilities

File transfer
Remote resource access
Downline system load

6 Network
application

Remote command
file submission
Virtual terminals

5 Session control

4 End-to-end
communication

Program
to
program

3 Routing
Adaptive routing

2 Data link
DDCMP

Point-to-point
1 Physical link

x.25

Ethernet
(Lowest layer)
---··

1.4 DNA

Multipoint

Functions
Contains user-supplied
functions and programs.
Uses Network Information
and Control Exchange
(NICE) protocol for tasks,
such as down-line loading,
up-line dumping, and
testing.
Uses Data Access Protocol
(DAP) for remote file access
and transfer. Uses Loopback
Mirror Protocol for
loopback testing.
Uses Session Control
Protocol for sending and
receiving logical link data
and disconnecting logical
links.
Uses Network Services
Protocol (NSP) to handle all
system-independent aspects
of creating logical links,
such as data flow control.
Routes user data in packets
to its destination and control
congestion on the lines.
Uses DDCMP, x.25, or
Ethernet protocol. Makes
the connection between
adjacent nodes and ensures
accuracy and sequencing
of messages.
Manages the physical
transmission of data over a
channel. Functions include
monitoring channel signals,
clocking on a channel, and
handling interrupts from the
hardware.

Digital Network Architecture Overview

DNA Layers and
DECnet Protocols

DNA defines standards for protocols, interfaces, and communications functions.
These standards allow various operating systems, communication devices,
and computer hardware to function in a network. Users are able to access
resources and programs on other network nodes, which are devices with
communication capabilities.
As mentioned earlier, DNA is the basis for the design of all DECnet software
products. Figure 1.3 shows the two types of relationships between DNA layers
and the protocols used in DECnet software.

Interfaces specify relationships between different DNA layers within the same
DECnet node. Usually one layer interfaces with the layer immediately below it
to receive a service.
Protocols specify relationships between equivalent DNA layers that are in separate
DECnet nodes. Protocols define the form and content of messages exchanged
between nodes.
Figure 1.3
Relationships between
DNA Layers and
DECnet Protocols

DECnet Node 1

DECnet Node 2

l
l

- - - - - - - Protocols - - - - - - - i •

Layer 8

Layer 6

-------Protocols ------1•

Layer 6

Layer 1 -------Protocols ------1•

Layer 8
lntccface,

Layer 7
lntc,facc;

- - - - - - - Protocols _ _ _ ____.._

Interfaces

l
l

lntcrt•m

Layer 7
Interfaces

Interfaces

Layer 1

~------Physical link ------~t
A major advantage of the DNA structure is that the layers are independent of
each other. Each layer can be changed without significantly affecting other
layers. The unique adaptive quality of DECnet software is the result ofDNA's
layered structure. DECnet software is especially important because it allows
Digital to adapt DECnet to include new communications technologies, such
as Ethernet, without affecting the user's applications.

1.5

DNA

Digital Network Architecture Overview

Networking Environments

There are basically two types of networking environments: those involving
communication strictly between Digital systems (Digital-to-Digital) and
those involving communication between Digital systems and foreign systems
(Digital-to-non-Digital). Digital therefore offers the following product lines for
both local and remote communications:
• DECnet-Products that allow communications between Digital systems, and
also Digital-to-non-Digital systems (DECnet-Dos).
• Internet-Products that connect Digital systems to IBM and other
vendors' systems
• Packetnet-Products that connect Digital-to-Digital and Digital-to-nonDigital systems via x.25 packet-switched data networks.

Hardware and Software
Networking Products

Network environments are implemented by hardware and software products. Table 1.2 divides Digital's networking product set into the following
categories: hardware communication products, software communication
products, and communications servers. Each of these categories is further
defined according to the type of communication involved: Digital-to-Digital
host communication (local traditional, local area network, remote), Digitalto-non-Digital host communication, and terminal connection.

1.6 DNA

Digital Network Architecture Overview

Table 1.2
Digital's Networking
Product Set

LAN
Hardware
Software
Communications
Communications Communications Subsystems
Products
Products
Servers

Digital-to-Digital
Host
Communication
Local Traditional

Synchronous
Devices

All DECnet
Software, DLX

N/A

LAN

Synchronous
LAN Devices,
LAN Bridge 100

DECnet-VAX,
PRO/DECnet,
DECnet-11M,
-HM-PLUS,
-US, DECnetMicro/RSX,
DECnetULTRIX,
DECnet-DOS,
DECnet/E

DECnet Router,
DECnet Router/
X.25 Gateway,
DECroutcr 200

Remote

Synchronous
Devices

All DECnet
Software,
VAX P.S.I.,
RSX-11 P.S.I.,
TOPS-20 P.S.I.

DECnet Router,
DECnet Router/
X.25 Gateway,
DECrouter 200

Digital-toNon-Digital Host
Communication

Synchronous
Devices

All Internet,
Packetnct, and OSI
products.
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet/SN A
Gateway,
DECnet Router/
X. 25 Gateway

Terminal Connection

Asynchronous
Devices

CX/DX/AX,
poly-COM,
VT ERM

DECscrvcr 200,
MUXserver100/
DECmuxll

As shqwn in Table 1.2, Digital offers a broad range of networking productsfrom basic communication devices for our OEMS to full networks complete with
network application programs for commercial business customers. For example,
communication hardware products (without higher-level network software) are
used for realtime data monitoring/control applications. Non-DECnet software
communications products are used in remote job entry (RJE) and protocol
emulation applications. DECnet products and LAN communications servers use
the full capabilities of DNA in departmental applications in the office, engineering, laboratory, manufacturing, education, and business environments.

1.7

DNA

Digital Network Architecture Overview

DNA Phase IV and Ethernet

The incorporation of the Ethernet local area network technology into DNA
Phase IV and specifically into DECnet demonstrates Digital's commitment to
providing a complete set of products to address local area networking needs.
The existing DECnet product line already offers comprehensive wide area
network support. Ethernet products improve resource sharing by increasing
performance of data traffic in a local area and by connecting to other local and
remote communications networks. Ethernet, a part of DECnet, offers remote or
long-haul connections and local connections as one integral network. Ethernet
is being developed and designed specifically for the kind of communications
and resource sharing that take place in a local work environment, most often
a room, a building, or a complex of buildings.
Ethernet protocols are added to the two lowest layers of DNA. Only these layers
change: the structure of all other layers remains unchanged. Figure 1.4 shows
the relationships that exist among Ethernet, DECnet, and DNA.

1.8 DNA

Digital Network Architecture Overview

Figure 1.4
Ethernet, DECnet, and
DNA Relationships

DECnet

Host

Baseband or
Broadband Cable

Host
Host

Host

1.9

DNA

Section 2
Ethernet Local Area Networks
Overview

A local area network (LAN) is a privately owned data communications system
that offers high-speed communications channels optimized for connecting
information processing equipment. The geographical area is usually limited to
a section of a building, an entire building, or a cluster of buildings.

Local area networks can be designed with a variety of technologies and can
be arranged in different configurations. Consequently, they vary with respect
to their transmission speeds, the distances they can span, their operating and
performance characteristics, and the capabilities and services they offer.
Ethernet is a high-speed, local area communications network. This section
provides a conceptual overview of the major operational techniques and
products that make up an Ethernet network. This section also shows how
products are configured.

Reasons for
Implementing Ethernet

Local area networks provide a fast, efficient means of exchanging information.
Many varieties of information processing equipment can be easily interconnected through a local area network. Resource sharing allows users to share
expensive peripheral devices and databases. Local area networks also expand the
possibilities for global resource sharing by offering standards for communication between equipment of different vendors and between local and
remote networks.
Ethernet is the Digital local area network. Ethernet networks provide rapid
access to data in remote locations, and the high data rate supported by Digital's
DECnet software makes file transfers practical. Ethernet can be implemented on
baseband (coaxial) or broadband (CATV) cable.
In Baseband Ethernet (Standard or ThinWire), a single network cable replaces
the numerous interconnecting cables in traditional data networks. Standard
Ethernet cable is recommended for communications between floors and buildings. ThinWire cable is recommended for communications between workstations, personal computers, and low-end systems in local work areas on a
floor. Ethernet on broadband offers customers the ability to put Ethernet, along
with video, voice, and other data communications on the same network wiring
system. It is most feasible for customers who must distribute multiple information services to a large user population over an extensive local area.
Ethernet baseband or broadband represents long-term savings in lower wiring
costs and reduction of system downtime when reconfiguring or replacing
equipment. Corporations are able to optimize their networks easily since new
systems and additional capability can be added without disturbing the operation
of the network.

2.1

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
Compliant Products

All Digital second generation Ethernet products support the IEEE 802.3 LAN
standard. The IEEE 802.3 standard is compatible with and technically very
similar to the Ethernet standard, which Digital's first-generation products
support. Digital is committed to international standards so that customers can
enjoy the benefits of multivendor networking and have flexibility in the choice
of equipment for their companies.

Ethernet Channel Access

The technique used to access the Baseband or Broadband Ethernet channel is
called Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/cn).
CSMA/ CD can be defined as follows:

Carrier Sense (CS}. A device listens for a clear channel before transmitting.
If the channel is in use (carrier sensed), the device delays transmission.
Multiple Access (MA). When the channel is clear, all users have equal access to it.
Collision Detection (CD). Two or more users may sense a clear channel and
simultaneously try to transmit. This results in collision of data. Ethernet
senses the collision condition, stops the transmission, and automatically tries
to retransmit the data after waiting a randomly selected amount of time.
Baseband and Broadband
Ethernet Cabling

For baseband, an Ethernet communications controller in the host connects
to a Digital H4000 Transceiver using a four-twisted-pair wire transceiver cable.
The H4000 Ethernet transceiver is clamped onto the Ethernet coaxial cable
without cutting the coaxial cable or interrupting data transmissions. A maximum of 100 transceivers can be used on an Ethernet coaxial cable segment.
A single segment of coaxial cable can be up to 500 meters (1,640 feet) long.
Multiple coaxial cable segments can be linked together with barrel connectors.
Multiple segments of transceiver cable can be linked together by slide-latch
connectors on the ends of standard transceiver cable.
A repeater connects segments of Ethernet coaxial cable when a larger local area
network is created. Figure 2.1 shows a basic Baseband Ethernet cabling layout.
For broadband, the Ethernet communications controller in the host connects to
the broadband transceiver (DECOM or Ethermodem) using the same fourtwisted-pair wire transceiver cable as baseband. In turn, the broadband transceiver is connected to a tap in the broadband network cable via a broadband
coaxial drop cable. Design, installation, and maintenance of broadband cable
networks are available as part of Digital Network Services. For more information, refer to Section 7, Network Services, or contact your Digital sales account
manager or local field service office. Figure 2.2 shows a basic Broadband
Ethernet cabling layout.

2.2

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Figure 2.1
Basic Baseband Ethernet
Cabling Layout

Terminator

H4000

Barrel Connector

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Transceiver Cable
DELVA

Host

Repeater

Barrel Connector

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
DELQA

Host

Figure 2.2
Basic Broadband Ethernet
Cabling Layout

Broadband Tap

Broadband Cable

DELUA

Host

2.3 Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

ThinWire Ethernet Cabling

ThinWire Ethernet offers an alternative cabling system compatible with standard Ethernet. ThinWire provides full Ethernet capability for personal computers, workstations, and low-end systems in office and other local work areas.
ThinWire is a low-cost, flexible system that utilizes ThinWire cable to connect
up to 30 stations with one 185 meter segment. With ThinWire, the following
configurations are possible:

• A single segment of up to 30 stations.

• A standalone network of up to eight segments attached to a ThinWire Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) hub. This configuration allows interconnection of up to
232 stations.

• A standalone network of up to eight DEMPR hubs connected to a Local Network
Interconnect (DELNI). This configuration allows interconnection of up to 1, 023
stations (Ethernet limit).
• A network in which the DEMPR or DELNI mentioned above is connected to a
standard Ethernet using an H4000-BA Transceiver.
Refer to ThinWire Ethernet Products in this section for more information.
ThinWire is also the cable recommended for high-speed data communication in
the floor plan portion ofDigital's DECconnect Cabling System. Refer to
Section 5 for more information about DECconnect and ThinWire Ethernet.

Figure 2.3
Basic ThinWire Cabling Layout

Ethernet
Communications Controllers

Terminator

,,. T-Connector

ThinWire Cable

Ethernet communications controllers implement the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 data
link layer functions and CSMA/ co protocol to make electrical connections
between nodes. Digital has the following Ethernet communication controllers:
• The DELVA allows VAX and PDP-11 UNIBUS systems to connect to Ethernet/IEEE
802.3 networks.
• The DELQA allows MicroPDP and MicroVAX Q-bus systems to connect to the
Ethernet network.
• The DESVA allows MicroVAX 2000 and vAxstation 2000 computers to connect to
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 ThinWire networks.
• The NIA20allows KL10-based systems to connect to the Ethernet network.
• The DECNA allows Professional 300 Series computers to connect to the
Ethernet network.
•The DEPCA allows IBM PC, PC AT, and PC/XT computers to connect to Ethernet/
IEEE 802.3 ThinWire networks.
The DELVA, DELQA, DECNA, or NIA20 is a combination of hardware module,
distribution panel, and cables that are installed in the host system. They connect via transceiver cable to the H4000 Transceiver (for baseband), a DECOM or
Ethermodem (for broadband), or an Ethernet Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI).
The DESVA and DEPCA supply a BNC connector for direct connection to ThinWire
Ethernet. They connect to standard Ethernet cable through a DEMPR, or, in the
case of the DEPCA, through a DEPCA-AU adapter.

2.4

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Servers

A server is any network node where shared resources are located. There are a
number of different types of servers: terminal servers, compute servers, disk
servers, application servers, router servers, gateway servers, and print servers.
A computer in a LAN that offers these types of services, whether or not the node
is dedicated to that function, may be viewed as providing server functions.
Figure 2.4 illustrates the various types of servers for baseband or broadband
networks.

Figure 2.4
Generic LAN Servers

Host

A host providing server functions can run other applications if its nonprocessing services do not justify total dedication. By adding servers to a network
(dedicating one or several hosts to nonprocessing functions), other hosts on the
network can be dedicated to applications processing. Adding a server to a
network frees valuable host power for user applications.
Digital has a substantial amount of software available that can be used to
provide server functions in the network. Print server, file server, terminal
server, and database server capabilities are available by using existing Digital
software on general purpose computers.
It is possible for users to build servers by providing their own unique
application software. For example, a computer node providing typesetting
services, using software written by the customer, might be viewed as an application server. Also, a VAX 8700 connected to an Ethernet running the standard
VAX/VMS operating system may be viewed as a compute server on a network,
while a VAX 8250 with a laser printer may be viewed as a print server to the
network. Table 2.1 illustrates server software alternatives.

2.5

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Table 2.1
Server Software Alternatives

General Purpose Servers
Print Server/File Server (e.g., VAX/VMS Host)
Database Access (e.g., Datatrieve Host)

Packaged/Special Purpose Servers
Terminal Server
Router
Gateway

Application Server
User Developed

2.6

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Ethernet
Communications Servers

Ethernet communications servers are dedicated, special purpose units that
promote resource sharing across many host systems within a local area network (LAN).
Currently, there are four types of communications servers for use on a
Baseband or Broadband Ethernet. The four types include: Terminal Servers,
Router Servers, DECnet Router/x.25 Gateways, and DECnet/SNA Gateways. For
additional information, refer to the product descriptions in this section.
Figure 2.5 illustrates the use of communications servers on an Ethernet LAN.

Figure 2.5
Baseband or Broadband
Ethernet LAN Configuration
Illustrating the Use of
Communications Servers

Modem

Host

Baseband or
Broadband Cable
Host

MicroVAX

Host

VMS/SNA

Baseband or Broadband Cable

2. 7

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Ethernet LAN Bridge 100 and
Extended Local Area Networks

The LAN Bridge 100 interconnects network segments, which use any standard
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 medium, to create an extended LAN. The standard Ethernet
distance limit is 2,800 meters between any two nodes. An extended LAN
lengthens this distance without degrading Ethernet's 10 Mb/s throughput
capability. An extended LAN may consist of up to 8,000 nodes and, using fiber
optic and microwave bridges, span distances of up to 22,000 meters.
The bridge dynamically manages data traffic flow between Ethernet segments,
selectively forwarding packets to keep local traffic local and reduce traffic over
the entire network. Baseband-to-baseband, broadband-to-broadband, and
baseband-to-broadband network configurations are possible using the bridge
as a link.
Figure 2.6 illustrates an Extended LAN configuration using the LAN Bridge 100.
Refer to Section 2; Extended Ethernet Local Area Networks Products for more
information.

Figure 2.6
Baseband or Broadband
Ethernet LAN Configuration
with an Ethernet LAN Bridge

VAX

Baseband or
Broadband Cable
Bridge

VAX

MicroVAX

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Bridge

Baseband or Broadband Cable

2.8 Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Ethernet Advantages

Digital's range of Ethernet local area network products has been developed to
solve a number of problems typically encountered in business and industry.
• SIMPLIFIED NETWORK DESIGN

Ethernet's architecture and design rules are streamlined and uncomplicated
given that cable, transceivers, and controllers meet the IEEE 802.3 and/or
Ethernet specifications. For specific design rules, refer to Ethernet Configuration Guidelines in this section.
• SIMPLIFIED INSTALLATION

Ethernet can be brought up one node at a time. A newly installed node can
communicate immediately with all other active nodes on the network.
• REDUCTION OF WIRING

A single network cable in Baseband Ethernet replaces the many interconnecting
cables in traditional data networks.
By implementing Ethernet on broadband with other video, data, and voice
channels, the number of wiring systems can also be significantly reduced.
• FLEXIBILITY FOR FUTURE GROWTH

Additional devices and cable segments can be connected without shutting down
the network.
• RELIABILITY

The absence of master/slave node relationships and the need for routing nodes
eliminates most single points of failure.
Extensive diagnostics minimize the time needed to locate and to repair a failure.
The H4000 Transceiver is designed with triple redundant circuitry to prevent a
single failure from disabling the network.
The Baseband Ethernet coaxial cable's heavy construction, rigid concentricity
requirements, and passive nature make it very reliable.
The Broadband Ethernet Transceivers are also designed with redundant circuitry to prevent a single failure from disabling the network.
• HIGH-SPEED COMMUNICATION

Ethernet provides high-speed (10 million b/s) links between all network nodes.
• SHARED DATABASES

The Ethernet network coupled with DECnet software provides rapid access to
large amounts of data in remote locations. Files and databases can be shared.
• SHARED RESOURCES

Ethernet allows special purpose peripherals such as high-speed printers, very large
disks, and high resolution graphics packages to be shared by multiple users.
• INTERCONNECTION OF DIVERSE EQUIPMENT

Digital Network Architecture (DNA) allows the exchange of data, files, commands, and diagnostic information among a large variety and range of Digital
products. In addition, it is possible to connect to other vendor equipment at
the Ethernet datalink level or through the x.25 and SNA Gateways.
For additional information about broadband features, benefits, and applications, refer to the product descriptions in this section.

2.9

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Typical Baseband Ethernet
Applications

The following pages describe examples of appropriate applications for Baseband
Ethernet.

Office Applications

Figure 2. 7 depicts a business office in which terminals are available for accounting, order taking, order processing, inventory control, word processing, and so
on. Two supervisory stations have access to all data. A manager with a VAXmate
can monitor accounts, display graphic data (pie charts, bar graphs, and so on),
and issue instructions to any department. The VAXmate is connected to a segment of ThinWire Ethernet cable, which allows up to 29 additional devices to
be added as the company grows.
The Ethernet coaxial cable extends from the office area to other major sources of
information, including shipping, receiving, inventory, and the shop floor. Work
can be monitored from the receipt of parts, through shipping, to receipt of
payment. A bank of modems attached to a Terminal Server permit remote
offices or sales representatives with small portable terminals to call in orders or
check a particular account at any time.

Figure 2. 7
Baseband Ethernet
Office Application

Video Display
Terminals

VAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Transceiver
Transceiver
Cable
VAX

ThinWire
8

Segments

Manager

2.10

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Factory Applications

Figure 2.8 illustrates a typical application of Ethernet in a factory. Such a
configuration provides control of automatic assembly/test devices. Data entry
stations provide timely information on the entire manufacturing process.
Exchange of data between the manufacturing site and the rest of the corporation
is handled through a router server.

Figure 2.8
Baseband Ethernet
Factory Application

To Engineering

Shipping

To Corporate
Accounting

Manufacturing
Engineering

To Corporate
Management
To Other Sites
VAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Managers

Final Assembly
and Test
Auto
Testing

VAX

IVAX

H4000

Testing
~--'---

Receiving

Stock
Kitting
Parts Inventory

2.11

Ethernet

IPDP-11

IVAX

Auto
Assembly

Auto
Testing

Ethernet Overview

Ethernet's 10 Mb/s throughput handles everything from word processing to
bit map graphics. A fully integrated Ethernet design/manufacturing network
permits smooth integration of design, automated manufacturing inventory, and
business functions.

CAD/CAM Applications

Figure 2. 9 depicts an engineering department using Ethernet to connect a
number of workstations to CAD/ CAM hosts. The workstations are connected to
a segment ofThinWire Ethernet cable, which provides cost-effective, highspeed communications. As the department grows, over 200 stations can be
added without changing this basic configuration. A terminal server is used for
the low-speed terminal communications. Note that a bridge isolates local
engineering traffic from local administrative traffic.
Figure 2.9
Baseband Ethernet
CAD/CAM Application

To Other
Corporate

VAxstation
2000

VAXStation

2000

CAD/CAM

Sites
Segments

DECSYSTEM

-20

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

PDP-11

MicroVAX

Auto
Test
Equipment

uto
Assembly
Equipment

CAD/CAM

Station

To Administrative Offices

2.12 Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Hospital Applications

Connection of testing and laboratory computers to a hospital's central computer
and to a number of remote monitoring stations requires a high-speed network.
With Ethernet's high data transfer rate, even remote access to full-color bitmaps, such as CAT scans, is practical.
Hospital accounting and legal departments use automated patient records to
perform their jobs. Ethernet provides a fast, accurate means of accessing
information critical to billing patient accounts and storing the details of patient
treatment procedures.
Figure 2.10 depicts an Ethernet network on which critical data is available at the
nurses' station and in the offices of various department heads. The system can
provide detailed medical information on any given patient, as well as comparisons to similar cases and to the accepted norms. Note that VAXmates on the
operating room segment are connected to ThinWire Ethernet, which provides
flexibility in configuration.
Figure 2.10 also shows a terminal server with modems and leased phone lines
connecting the offices of resident doctors. A physician can monitor test results
or the current conditions of patients from the office. Note that a bridge isolates
local traffic on this segment from local traffic on the other two segments.

2.13

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Figure 2.10
Baseband Ethernet
Hospital Application

Business Office
Admissions
VAX

VAX

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Laboratories
Legal
Department
VAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

PDP-11

Nurses' Stations

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Transceiver
Cable

ThinWire
8

Segments
Modem

Operating
Room

Modem

Doctors' Offices

2.14

Ethernet

Ethernet Overview

Laboratory Applications

Within a laboratory environment, monitoring test conditions and results is
extremely important. By networking a test control computer to a computer
acting as a monitoring station and to a central database on another computer,
current test conditions can be displayed along with previous or standard
conditions. Deviations from the desired conditions become apparent and can be
corrected before continuing with the test. The MicroVAX n computers are
connected to a single segment of ThinWire Ethernet cable, which provides a
cost-effective link to the high-speed devices.
Figure 2.11 illustrates how various laboratory computers and other resources are
typically connected by Ethernet.

Figure 2.11
Baseband Ethernet
Laboratory Application
Mi.cro
VAX II

Micro
VAX II

Segments
ThinWire

Micro
PDP-11
Transceiver

Cable

Data Collection Equipment

MicroVAX

Terminator

Data
Reduction

VAX

Modeling

VAX

Transceiver

VAX

Scientists' Offices

2.15

Ethernet

Report
Generation

Ethernet Overview

University Applications

The application of computers in a university system can cover everything
from maintaining student accounts and academic records to using computers
as classroom tools.
Figure 2.12 illustrates an Ethernet application used in a university system. Note
that bridges isolate local traffic on segments from local traffic throughout the
rest of the university.

Figure 2.12
Baseband Ethernet
University Application

Dormitory

Security

Liberal Arts

Dormitory

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Engineering

DECnet Link
DECnet Link

Dormitory

DECnet Link

Bridge
Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Physics
Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Dormitory

2.16

Ethernet

Dormitory

Administration

Ethernet Overview

Typical Broadband Ethernet
Applications/Installations

Along with the Ethernet channel, the broadband network can be used to
distribute data services, as well as voice and video communications. The shared
cable capability is often a cost effective networking solution for universities,
hospitals, manufacturing complexes, research parks, and other organizations
with large, dispersed user populations. Examples of some of these follow.
• Corporate Offices
Fortune 500 customers can distribute services such as corporate teleconferencing, security monitoring, and employee video training along with their
Ethernet channel onto a Broadband LAN. Among a wide variety of applications,
energy management and building access control can use the Ethernet channel.
Wiring systems in a skyscraper or plant complex can be kept to a minimum,
and changes to the organization can easily be accommodated.
• Plant Environment
Industries, such as auto or aviation manufacturing, can use the broadband
network to monitor a variety of data collection stations. The Ethernet channel
can be used for transmitting reports, energy management, and inventory
distribution control, among a variety of other tasks. On the factory floor,
broadband Ethernet can coexist with MAP.
• University Campus
Broadband is ideal for university use because it can support extensive communications needs. A single medium that can transmit television, data communication, and security is invaluable to an educational community. The broadband
Ethernet channel can provide access to important educational tools and a variety of databases, while sharing the cable with applications like video training
seminars. In addition, by wiring classrooms and dormitories with the broadband coaxial cable, universities can also connect the growing number of
personal computers via the Ethernet channel.
• Hospitals
Broadband networks are also invaluable to hospital communities. They allow
medical staffs to maintain constant watch over patients via channels from a
central location, while also having access to patient records and laboratory
results on the Ethernet channel. Meanwhile, patients can be viewing their
favorite programs on another channel on the Broadband LAN. For a hospital
to have all of these functions, all it requires is one broadband cable.

2.17

Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Baseband Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
Products
Introduction

The incorporation of the Ethernet local area network technology into DECnet
Phase IV demonstrates Digital's commitment to providing a complete set of
products to address local area networking needs. Ethernet has been developed
and designed specifically for the kinds of communications and resource sharing
that take place in a local work environment.
Digital's Ethernet LAN connects Ethernet or IEEE 802.3-compatible devices in a
small geographical area by way of a high-speed standard or ThinWire coaxial
cable. Every device attached to the cable has access to all the network resources.
The network becomes the system.
Ethernet hardware products combine to create a physical channel over which
the DECnet and Ethernet protocols are implemented. Baseband Ethernet/IEEE
802.3 products currently available include the ThinWire Ethernet Products,
Ethernet Coaxial Cable, the Transceiver Cable, connectors, terminators, Etherjack, the Local Network Interconnect (DELNI), the Ethernet Transceiver (H4000),
the Ethernet Repeaters (DEREP), the Ethernet Communications Controllers, LAN
Bridge products, and TransLAN.
Ethernet Communications Servers currently available include the DECserver
200, Muxserver 100/DECmux II, DECnet Router Server, DECrouter 200, DECnet/
x.25 Gateway, and DECnet/SNA Gateway.

2.18 Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Figure 2.13
Baseband Ethernet Products

MicroVAX

VAX

DELNI

8~
j
~

Segments
ThinWire

L____J

Terminator

H4000

~ ,

Micro

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Bridge

PDP-11

Transceiver

Cable

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Terminator

DELNI

VAX

Terminator

2.19

Ethernet

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Baseband Ethernet Products

Ethernet Baseband Coaxial Cable

Ethernet baseband coaxial cable is the main transmission medium of an
Ethernet baseband network. Coaxial cable is available in four standard lengths
(sections). Sections can be joined using barrel connectors to create segments up
to 500 meters (1,640 feet) long. Ethernet LANs can be extended beyond 500 meters
by adding Ethernet Repeaters. Refer to Ethernet Configuration Guidelines in
this section for more detailed information.

• The coaxial cable segments are premarked for transceiver placement at
2. 5-ineter (8. 2-foot) intervals providing easy installation.
• Teflon"'-insulated coaxial cable is approved by the Underwriters' Laboratory
(m) for safe use in environmental air spaces without a conduit.
• PVC-insulated coaxial cable offers a low-cost alternative to Teflon-insulated
coaxial cable. PVC-insulated coaxial cable can be used in an open space, such as
an office, laboratory, or manufacturing facility. PVC-insulated coaxial cable is
not acceptable for use in environmental airspace that is used for return airflow
because it produces toxic fumes when burned.
• High immunity to electrical noise allows the coaxial cable to be used in a
variety of environments.
• Preinstalled connectors on coaxial cable ends make terminators and barrel
connectors easy to install.

Table 2.2
Ethernet Baseband Coaxial Cable
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Teflon Coaxial Cable:
23.4 m (76.8 ft) long

BNE2A-MA

70.2 m (230.3 ft) long

BNE2A-MB

117.0 m (383. 9 ft) long

BNE2A-MC

500.0 m (1640.5 ft) long

BNE2A-ME

PVC Coaxial Cable:
23.4 m (76.8 ft) long

BNE2B-MA

70.2 m (230.3 ft) long

BNE2B-MB

117.0 m (383. 9 ft) long

BNE2B-MC

500.0 m (1640.5 ft) long

BNE2B-ME

2.20 Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Fiber Optic Cable

Fiber optic cable consists of optical fibers made of plastic or glass, allowing the
cable to serve as a very-high-performance transmission medium in certain
applications. Digital offers a general-purpose fiber optic cable suitable for use
inside a building where the cable will not be routed through air plenums. This
type of fiber optic cable can also be used in conduit between buildings where
the environmental conditions of temperature and humidity do not exceed the
cable specifications. Fiber optic cable is used with the remote LAN Bridge 100
and remote Ethernet Repeater.
The operating temperature of general purpose fiber optic cable ranges
from 0°C to 70°C with humidity conditions up to 95% noncondensing.
Digital fiber optic cable certification is needed to assess proper connectivity.
The installation must also meet acceptable attenuation limits. Your Digital
Field Service Network Planning Consultant can provide this service. Refer to
Ethernet Configuration Guidelines in this section, and Section 7, Network
Services, for more detailed information. For additional inform~.tion regarding
fiber optic cable certification, refer to The Ethernet Installation Guide, Volume II,
Appendix A.

Table 2.3
Fiber Optic Cable Order Codes

Option

Order Code

General-purpose Fiber Optic Cable:
15 m (49.2 ft) long
30 m (98.4 ft) long
60 m (196.8 ft) long
90 m (295.2 ft) long
150 m (492.0 ft) long
300 m (984.0 ft) long
500 m (1,640.5 ft) long
750 m (2,460.0 ft) long
1,000 m (3,280.0 ft) long

2.21

Ethernet

BN25B-15
BN25B-30
BN25B-60
BN25B-90
BN25B-A5
BN25B-CO
BN25B-EO
BN25B-H5
BN25B-LO

Baseband Ethernet Products

'Iransceiver Cable

A transceiver cable connects the H4000 Transceiver or the Local Network
Interconnect (DELNI) to an Ethernet communications controller, Broadband
Ethernet Transceiver (DECOM), or Ethernet LAN Bridge 100. The cable is
compatible with Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 networking products and consists of
four twisted-pair wires enclosed in a shield and a jacket of either Teflon or PVC
(polyvinyl chloride). Teflon-insulated cable is more expensive than PVC-insulated cable, but it can be used in environmental airspaces without an expensive
conduit. PVC-insulated cable can be used in an open space, such as an office,
laboratory, or manufacturing facility. PVC-insulated cable is not acceptable for
use in environmental airspace because it produces toxic fumes if it burns.
Transceiver cable is available in several lengths (sections). Sections can be
connected with built-in slide latches to form a single continuous link up to
SO meters (164 feet) long. The connection point for a transceiver cable section
can be secured to a wall and hidden with the use of an Etherjack. Each transceiver cable has either a straight or right-angled 15-pin connector on both ends.
For standard Ethernet networks or IEEE 802.3 networks use BNE3H, K, L, or M
series cable.

Office 'Iransceiver Cable

The office transceiver cable performs the same function as the transceiver cable
but is smaller in diameter and more flexible. The office transceiver cable can be
used in an open area (office, laboratory, or manufacturing area) instead of the
heavier transceiver cable.
The office transceiver cable is available only with PVC insulation. It should not
be connected to an H4000. Transceiver if the transceiver is located in environmental airspace. PVC-insulated cable is not acceptable in environmental airspace
because it produces toxic fumes ifit burns.
Office transceiver cable is available in two lengths (sections). Each office transceiver cable has either a straight or right-angled 15-pin connector on both ends.
The connection of an office transceiver cable to a standard transceiver cable is
simplified since both use the same connectors. The connection point can be
secured to the wall base and hidden with the use of an Etherjack.
The office transceiver cable attenuation is greater than that of the PVC- or
Teflon-insulated transceiver cable by a factor of four (for example, two meters, .
or 6.6 feet, of office transceiver cable is electrically equivalent to eight meters,
or 26.2 feet, of standard transceiver cable). Since office transceiver cables are not
as long as standard transceiver cables, the distance between devices connected
by office transceiver cables is less than the distance between connected standard
transceiver cables.
For standard Ethernet networks or IEEE 802.3 networks use BNE4C or D
series cable.

2.22

Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Table 2.4
Transceiver Cable and
Office Transceiver Cable
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Transceiver Cable with PVC
Insulation, Straight Connectors:

Standard Ethernet
or IEEE 802.3

5.0 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE3H-05

10.0 m (32.8 ft) long

BNE3H-10

20.0 m (65.6 ft) long

BNE3H-20

40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3H-40

Transceiver Cable
with PVC Insulation,
Right-angle Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE3K-05

10.0 m (32.8 ft) long

BNE3K-10

20.0 m (65.6 ft) long

BNE3K-20

40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3K-40

Transceiver Cable with Teflon
Insulation, Straight Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE3L-05

10.0 m (32.8 ft) long

BNE3L-10

20.0 m (65.6 ft) long

BNE3L-20

40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3L-40

Transceiver Cable
with Teflon Insulation,
Right-angle Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE3M-05

10.0 m (32.8 ft) long

BNE3M-10

20.0 m (65.6 ft) long

BNE3M-20

40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3M-40

Office Transceiver Cable
with PVC Insulation,
Straight Connector:
2 m (6.6 ft) long

BNE4C-02

5 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE4C-05

Office Transceiver Cable
with PVC Insulation,
Right-angle Connector:
2 m (6.6 ft) long

BNE4D-02

5 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE4D-05

2.23

Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Coaxial Cable Connectors
and Terminators

Digital sells Ethernet Coaxial Cable sections with connectors at each end
of the cable. Coaxial cables can be ordered separately, with end connectors
purchased later.
End connectors cannot remain open. At each end connector, a barrel connector
and another coaxial cable section, or a terminator, must be connected.

Barrel Connectors '

Barrel connectors are used to directly join two sections of Ethernet coaxial
cable. The barrel connector threads into the end connectors on the two coaxial
cable sections.

Terminators

Terminators are used to electrically complete the ends of the coaxial cable.
A terminator must be installed at each end of a coaxial cable segment that is
not connected to another coaxial cable segment.

Ground Clamp

Each Ethernet Coaxial Cable segment requires one ground connection in
each building the segment passes through. Also, the ground clamp provides
grounding for each ThinWire segment with a DEMPR.

Ethernet Turnaround Connector

The Ethernet Turnaround Connector (H4080) is a testing device used to verify
that a host controller at the user's station or a server controller and its transceiver
cable are electrically operational.
The Ethernet Turnaround Connector consists of a transceiver installed on a
short length of coaxial cable. Both ends of the Ethernet Turnaround Connector's
coaxial cable are terminated. The Turnaround Connector is attached to the transceiver cable that is connected to a host controller or to a server controller. The
Turnaround Connector is used to verify host operation prior to the transceiver
cable's actual installation onto the Ethernet cable. The Turnaround Connector
tests the controller and the transceiver cable that will connect it to the Ethernet.

2.24 Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Etherjack (DEXJK)

The Etherjack (DEXJK) is a device for mounting cable connectors. Cables can be
run either along a wall-base or within a wall.
The Etherjack can be used to secure the cable along the base of a wall, keeping the cable from the office floor area. The Etherjack also can be used to secure
transceiver cables extending from H4000 Transceivers so that they can be run
down the inside of an office wall to the desired point of entry into the office area.
A third use for the Etherjack is to cover unsightly connectors at the cable
connection points within the office area.

Ethernet Transceiver Installation
Tool Kit

Self-installation of an H4000 Transceiver requires the Ethernet Transceiver
Installation Tool Kit (12-24664-02).

Table 2.5
Additional Baseband Ethernet Product
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Ethernet coaxial cable barrel connector

12-19817-01

Ethernet coaxial cable terminator

12-19816-01

Ethernet ground clamp

12-21766-01

Ethernet turnaround connector

H4080

Ethernet transceiver cable
straight angle connector kit

H4054-00

Ethernet transceiver cable
right angle connector kit

H4055-00

Etherjack

DEXJK

Ethernet Installation Tool Kit
(H4000)

2.25

Ethernet

12-24664-02

Baseband Ethernet Products

Baseband Ethernet
Transceiver (H4000)

The Ethernet Transceiver (H4000) provides the functional interface between
network nodes and the Ethernet coaxial cable. It sends signals over the cable,
receives signals from the cable, and detects message collisions that occur. The
H4000 uses a unique tapping mechanism for the physical connection to the
cable so that cutting the cable (and interrupting traffic on the network) is not
required. The H4000 can be customer-installed using the Ethernet Installation
Tool (see appropriate product description). The H4000 Transceiver is used in
conjunction with an Ethernet communications controller at the host system.
The transceiver cables must be ordered separately (see appropriate product
description).

Features

• The transceiver clamps onto the Ethernet coaxial cable without cutting it,
allowing the unit to be installed, repaired, or removed without interrupting
network operation.
• Simple installation and replacement procedures make for quick and easy
network reconfiguration. Network devices can be added to or removed from
the network easily.
• Redundant protective circuitry, high noise immunity, and an internal self-test
make the H4000 a highly reliable physical channel, reducing maintenance cost.
• The continuous message loopback feature simplifies and speeds fault isolation,
reducing maintenance time and cost.
• The u.L.-approved, rugged, insulated housing allows the H4000 to be installed
in environmental airspace without conduits.
• New drop-in signal probe makes maintenance quicker, easier, and less expensive.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Length: 30.2 cm (11. 9 in)
Width: 9.5 cm (3. 74 in)
Height: 9.0 cm (3.54 in)
Weight: 1.1 kg (2.5 lbs)

Power Requirements:
Voltage required at transceiver:
11. 4 to 15. 75 V de through 4 ohms
at maximum distribution impedance
Maximum current: 0.50 A
Typical current: 0.35 A

Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.6
H4000

Order Codes

Installation in
Environmental Airspace

Option

Order Code

Ethernet transceiver

H4000

Ethernet transceiver (for use with a ThinWire DELNI/DEMPR
combination)

H4000-BA

Commercial buildings commonly have drop ceilings. The space between the
drop ceiling and the floor above is called environmental airspace. Environmental airspace is often used for return air for heating and air conditioning
systems (called return airspace) and to run wiring, such as coaxial cable.
Equipment in return airspace can be a potential fire hazard because there is
often no barrier to contain fire or smoke. Therefore, equipment that is not
approved by U.L. must be placed in a conduit when installing it in return
airspace.
Digital's Teflon-insulated cable and the H4000 are approved by the u.L. and
National Electric Code (NEC) for use in environmental airspace without a
conduit. (Canada, Europe, and GIA requirements may differ from those of NEC).
However, local and state regulations always take precedence over u.L. approval.
2.26

Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Ethernet Repeaters (DEREP)

Local Ethernet Repeater
(DEREP-AA)

The Ethernet Repeater (DEREP), a tabletop, standalone device, connects up to
three segments of Baseband Ethernet coaxial cable to extend an Ethernet LAN
beyond the 500-meter (1,640 feet) single coaxial cable segment. Each repeater
can add a segment of coaxial cable up to 500 meters (1,640 feet) long on which 99
additional (100 total) H4000 Transceivers can be installed. The local repeater is
used to connect two coaxial cable segments no more than 100 meters (328 feet)
apart, while the remote repeater (fiber optic) connects two coaxial cable
segments up to 1,000 meters (3,280 feet) apart. The repeater retimes, amplifies,
and repeats all signals it receives from one coaxial cable segment and passes the
signal to the next segment.
The Ethernet Repeater cannot be used in Broadband Ethernet networks, or
between Baseband and Broadband Ethernets. Repeaters cannot be directly
connected to DELNIS.

.....
Remote Ethernet Repeater
(DEREP-RA)

Local repeaters are connected to the Baseband Ethernet via two H4000 Transceivers and two transceiver cables. The remote (fiber optic) repeater has
two versions:
0

• Two local repeaters each with a fiber optic interface board. (DEREP-RA or RB).
• One local repeater with a fiber optic interface board (DEREP-RC or RD) for use
with a fiber optic LAN Bridge ioo.
The fiber optic cable (BN25B) for the remote repeater must be ordered separately.

Features

• The repeater connects segments of coaxial cable, increasing the length of an
Ethernet LAN and the numper of devices supported.
• Because the repeater connects to an H4000 Transceiver, installation does not
interrupt network operation.
• Repeaters can be installed and maintained by the customer, thus reducing cost.
• Repeaters contain an internal self-test feature that simplifies fault isolation,
increases reliability, and reduces maintenance costs.
• The remote repeater (fiber optic) is not affected by electrical or electromagnetic
interference and is protected from moisture. This provides high performance
and low error rates. The fiber optic repeater can be used between buildings,
underground, and in harsh environments.
• When the repeater detects faulty signals, it will automatically not repeat them
until good signals are detected again, at which point it resumes normal signal
transmission. This greatly increases network reliability.
• Diagnostic light-emitting diodes (LEDS) on the back panel of both the local and
remote repeater assist in network troubleshooting.

• A second local repeater can be configured into the network providing automatic
backup for any single local repeater, increasing network availability.

2.27

Ethernet

Baseband Ethernet Products

Figure 2.14 illustrates a local and remote Ethernet Repeater configuration.

Figure 2.14
Local and Remote
Ethernet Repeater
Config~ration
Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Transceiver
Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Table 2. 7
Ethernet Repeater
Order Codes

Specifications

Terminator

Option

U.S.
Order Codes

Local Repeater

DEREP-AA

DEREP-AB

Remote Repeater (two boxes)

DEREP-RA

DEREP-RB

Remote Repeater (single box)

DEREP-RC

DEREP-RD

Physical Size:
Length: 43.2 cm (17 in)
Width: 30.5 cm (12 in)
Height: 8.9 cm (3.5 in)

Power Requirements:
110 Vac, 60 Hz or 220 Vac, so Hz (switch-selectable)

Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

2.28 Ethernet

Non-U.S.
Order Codes

Baseband Ethernet Products

DEREP Country Kits

Table 2.8
Ethernet Repeater
Country Kit Order Codes

The non-u.s. versions of both the local and remote repeaters require country
kits. (u.s. versions do not require a country kit.) Each kit contains installation
instructions and a power cord. Non-u.s. local repeaters require one country kit,
and non-u.s. remote repeaters require two. For cases where the country in
which the repeater is to be used is not listed, select a country kit that uses the
same plug configuration.

Country Kits:

Local Repeater Remote Repeater

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark

DEREK-AZ
DEREK-AB
DEREK-AQ
DEREK-AC
DEREK-AD

DEREK-RZ
DEREK-RB
DEREK-RQ
DEREK-RC
DEREK-RD

Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy

DEREK-AF
DEREK-AP
DEREK-AG
DEREK-AH
DEREK-AI

DEREK-RF
I
DEREK-RP
DEREK-RG
DEREK-RH
DEREK-RI

Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)

DEREK-AN
DEREK-AS
DEREK-AM

DEREK-RN
DEREK-RS
DEREK-RM

DEREK-AL
DEREK-AK

DEREK-RL
DEREK-RK

United Kingdom
United States

DEREK-AE

DEREK-RE

None Required

2.29 Ethernet

ThinWire Ethernet Products

ThinWire Ethernet Products
Introduction

ThinWire Ethernet offers an alternative baseband cabling system that provides
full Ethernet capability for personal computers, workstations, and low-end
systems in offices and other local work areas. ThinWire Ethernet is a lowcost, flexible companion system to standard Ethernet that utilizes an industry
standard cable to connect up to 30 stations in one 185 meter segment.

ThinWire Cable
Features

• ThinWire Ethernet cable is a thin, flexible, and easy to install coaxial cable,
making it very suitable for work area installations.
• ThinWire Ethernet products are compatible with the IEEE 802.3 specification, which allows users greater capability to participate in multivendor
Ethernet networks.
• Standard Ethernet devices may be connected to ThinWire Ethernet using a
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA). The DESTA is a compact, inexpensive IEEE 802.3 transceiver.
•A maximum of eight ThinWire Ethernet segments may be connected to a
ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) to form a network of up to 232
stations. A Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) may be used to concentrate up
to eight DEMPRs. These configurations can ei.ther stand alone or connect to the
standard Ethernet using an H4000-BA Transceiver .

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport
Repeater (DEMPR)

The DEMPR is a multiport device that provides eight ports for connection of
eight ThinWire Ethernet segments, and one port for connection to an H4000
Transceiver. It can be used either as a standalone device (local) or it can be
connected to a standard Ethernet (global). The DEMPR serves as a repeater
between each of its nine ports. A DEMPR must be counted as a repeater when
configuring a standard Ethernet network.
Each ThinWire Ethernet"segment can be up to 185 meters in length (600 feet),
and can accommodate connection of up to 29 stations, for a total of232 stations
per DEMPR.
Eight DEMPRs can be connected to a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI).
This configuration provides up to 64 cable segments for connection of up to
1,023 stations (Ethernet limit). This configuration, in turn, can be used either
in a standalone network, or connected to a standard Ethernet. An H4000-BA
Transceiver is required for connecting the DELNI in this configuration to a
standard Ethernet cable.
Physical Size:
Length: 31.11 cm (12.25 in)
Width: 48. 9 cm (19.25 in)
Height: 11.43 cm (4.5 in)
Power Requirements:
Nominal Voltage
Frequency
Maximum current
Maximum power

DEMPR-AA
100 to 120 Vac
3-wire single phase
47 to 63 Hz
o.83Amp
40 watts

Operating Environment: 5° to so°C (41°to122°F)
Relative Humidity: 10% to 90% (noncondensing)

2.30

Ethernet

DEM PR-AB
189 to 240 Vac
lN +PE single phase
47 to 63 Hz
0.42Amp
40 watts

ThinWire Ethernet Products

ThinWire Ethernet Station
Adapter (DESTA)

The ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) allows connection of a single
Ethernet station to ThinWire Ethernet cabling. The Station Adapter can be
attached to Ethernet controllers designed to connect to standard Ethernet cable,
allowing connection to ThinWire Ethernet. It also allows Digital's Ethernet
Communications and Terminal Servers to connect to ThinWire Ethernet.
The DESTA has one 15-pin connector port that allows it to be mounted in or
near the Ethernet station, and a second port for connection to the ThinWire
Ethernet cable. It contains Ethernet transceiver (IEEE 802.3) logic, provides
transceiver functions, and receives its power from the controller.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Length: 7.62 cm (3.0 in)
Width: 8.38 cm (3.3 in)
Height: 3.55 cm (1.4 in)

Power Requirements:
Input voltage (from controller): +12
Voltage required at transceiver: - 9
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Typical Current: 200-250 mA

Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Thin Wire Ethernet
Con.figuration Guidelines

For ThinWire Ethernet configuration guidelines, refer to "Planning a ThinWire
Ethernet LAN" in Ethernet Con.figuration Guidelines.

Thin Wire Ethernet and DECconnect

ThinWire Ethernet is the cable recommended for high speed data communications for the floor area portion ofDigital's DECconnect Cabling System. Refer to
Section 5 for more information about DECconnect and ThinWire Ethernet.

Table 2.9
Thin Wire Ethernet Product
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport
Repeater

DEMPR-AA (120 V)

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport
Repeater

DEMPR-AB (240 V)

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter

DESTA-AA

PVC cable with connectors and boots:
3 feet

BC16M-3

6 feet

BC16M-6

10 feet

BC16M-10

15 feet

BC16M-15

30 feet
ThinWire Ethernet PVC cable (1000

BC16M-30
1)

H8243-A

ThinWire Ethernet Plenum (Teflon)
cable (1000')

H8244-A

Male coaxial connectors and boots
(12-25566-01)

H8222

T-connectors and boots (12-25534-01)

H8223

Barrel connectors and boots
(12-25567-01)

H8224

Terminators and boots (12-25535-01)

H8225

Installation kit

H8242

2.31

Ethernet

ThinWire Ethernet Products

DEMPR Country Power Cords

The non-u.s. version of the DEMPR (240v) requires a specific power cord for
installation in individual countries.

Table 2.10
DEMPR Country Power Cord

Order Codes

Country

Order Code

United Kingdom
Ireland

BN02A-2E

Austria
Belgium
Finland
France
Germany
Netherlands
Norway
Sweden
Portugal
Spain

BN03A-2E

Switzerland

BN04A-2E

Australia
New Zealand
Denmark

BN06A-2E

Italy

BN07A-2E

2.32 Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

Broadband Ethernet Products
Overview

Ethernet on broadband is most often selected by customers who have multiple
services to distribute over large local areas. Broadband networks use frequency
division multiplexing to carry many channels on one wiring system, enabling
customers to transmit data, video, and voice over the same cable, simultaneously. The broadband cable and components are the same as those used for
cable TV. Digital Network Services provides design, installation, and on-going
network maintenance and serves as the customer's single point of contact for the
broadband network, Digital hardware and software products, and qualified
vendor products.
Ethernet on broadband is an extension of what Digital has done with Ethernet
on baseband, the first form of media available for Ethernet. Baseband and
broadband provide the same capabilities, a high speed (10 Mb/s), peer-to-peer
communications link between computers and other intelligent devices for file
transfers and high-resolution graphics displays, and for transmitting text,
electronic mail, and facsimile data. The broadband Ethernet transceivers use
the same controllers and DECnet Phase IV software as baseband. In addition,
the broadband transceiver is used in conjunction with the DELNI, and the same
bridges, routers, gateways, terminal servers, and communications servers
as Baseband Ethernet networks. Note that the transceiver cable is the same
as for baseband.

Repeater Restrictions

Repeaters cannot be used in broadband networks, or between baseband and
broadband networks.

2.33 Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

Figure 2.15
Broadband Ethernet
Configuration

Baseband Coaxial Cable

Host

DELNI

Transceiver Cable

Broadband Cable

Host

2.34

Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

The following table compares the major characteristics of Ethernet on broadband, baseband and ThinWire cable:

Broadband

Baseband

ThinWire

Packets are transmitted
by a Broadband Ethernet Transceiver.

Packets are transmitted
by an H4000 Transceiver.

Packets are transmitted
by a built-in DESTA
transceiver.

Broadband Ethernet
can share the cable with
many other independent
channels, such as video,
data, and voice.

Baseband Ethernet is
the only channel on the
cable.

Network cable is the
same as for cable TV.

Network cable is designed to Ethernet or
IEEE 802.3 specifications.

Tap and drop cable are
the same as for cable TV.

Transceiver serves as the
tap, and transceiver cable
serves as the drop cable.

Transceiver serves as the
tap, and transceiver cable
serves as the drop cable
to a DEMPR. ThinWire
cable connects devices
to the DEMPR?'t

*ThinWire is also available in standalone configurations. Refer to Ethernet Configuration Guidelines
in this section for more information.

Figure 2.16
Broadband, Baseband and Thin Wire
Cable Connection Comparison
Terminator~

ThinWire

Micro

VAX II

DELQA

DELQAJ

Multiport
Repeater

Micro

VAX II

Transceiver Cable
Transceiver Cable
Broadband Drop Cable

Broadband Cable

Baseband
Ethernet Cable

Broadband Tap

Baseband Transceiver

Baseband Ethernet Cable
Baseband Transceiver

Digital's Broadband Ethernet products implement an Ethernet channel for
both single and dual cable broadband LANs. As previously noted, almost all of
the Digital networking products used with baseband technology are compatible
with broadband. These include:
• DECnet Phase IV for VMS, RSX, RSTS/E, and p/os operating systems.
• UNIBUS, (DELVA), Q-bus, (DELQA), Professional 300 Series (DECNA), and KL10based (NIA20) Ethernet controllers.
• Local Network Interconnects (DELNI).
• Communications servers (Routers, Terminal Servers, and Gateways).
• LAN Bridge 100.
For more detailed information about these products, refer to the appropriate
sections of this guide.
2.35

Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

Broadband-specific
Ethernet Products

Digital offers a complete set of Ethernet hardware and software products that
are baseband and broadband compatible. Two products have been specifically
created for the broadband environment. These are the Broadband Ethernet
Transceiver (DECOM) and the Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator
(DEFTR). Both devices can be used with the Digital networking products
originally developed for Baseband Ethernet LANs, with the exception of the
Ethernet Repeater (DEREP).
Digital's Third-Party Program has qualified two products that incorporate
additional multivendor services for use with Broadband Ethernet LANs. The
products, the Ethermodem TM and the Frequency Translator, are available through
CHIPCOM TM Corporation in most European countries. Note: Customers must use
DECOMs or Ethermodems but not both, since they are not designed to coexist on
the same cable. The figure below provides a guide for choosing between
the products.

Table 2.11
DECOM and Ethermodem
Comparison

DECOM

Chipcom
Ethermodem

Coexists with one MAP channel

Coexists with up to three MAP
channels

One port modem

Two port modem

One set of hardware transmit
and receive signals

Several fixed frequency sets

Mid split configuration

Mid or high split configuration

Single and dual cable

3800m station-to-station

In addition, Ethermodem is 802.3 compliant and coexists with Ethernet, MAP,
IBM PC NET, or Sytek LocalNet 2o:'M
Single-cable DECOM installations require a DEFTR.
Single-cable Ethermodem installations require a CHIPCOM Frequency Translator.

Broadband Ethernet Transceiver
(DECOM)

The Broadband Ethernet Transceiver is both the physical and electrical interface
to the broadband coaxial cable. The transceiver transmits signals to and receives
signals from systems connected to it and detects message collisions. DECOM is
the broadband equivalent of the H4000 (Baseband) Transceiver and uses the same
transceiver cable as the H4000. The DECOM can be conveniently mounted on a
shelf or placed on a table top.
Because there are two types of Broadband Networks-single cable and dual
cable-Digital has created two versions of the Broadband Transceiver. The
single-cable transceiver (DECOM-BA) transmits at 54 to 72 megahertz and
receives at 210.25 to 228.25 megahertz. This transceiver requires a frequency
translator (DEFTR) at the headend of the network to convert the Broadband
Ethernet signals from their transmit to their receive frequencies.
The dual-cable transceiver (DECOM-AA) transmits and receives the Ethernet
signals at the same frequencies, from 54 to 72 megahertz. For this version
of the transceiver, a frequency translator is not required at the network headend.

2.36

Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

Figure 2.17
Single-cable
Broadband Transceiver

VAX,
PDP-11, or

PRO 350/380
ETHERNET CONTROLLER

OECOM-BA

Headend

Transmit at Low Frequency
to
MHz)

•

DEFTR-AA ..,._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(54
72_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J
____

- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _J~Broadband Tap

I
\

Receive at High Frequency
(210.25 to 228.25 MHz)

' ''---.- Translates
Low to High

DECOM-BA and DEFTR-AA are used together in single-cable broadband networks.

Figure 2.18
Dual-cable
Broadband Transceiver

VAX,
PDP-11, or

PRO 350/380
ETHERNET CONTROLLER

DECOM-AA

Headcnd
,,~-

...-----------

Transmit & Receive
at Same Frequencies
(54 to 72 MHz)

I
I

Features

' ', --..

_________ _..

Broadband
>Tap
_ _ _ _ .J

• Redundant protective circuitry makes the transceiver a reliable physical channel
device. Failures are confined to a single transceiver, preventing the entire
network from going down.
• Internal self-test and loop-back capabilities allow speedy diagnosis of problems
and easy fault isolation.
• Diagnostic indicator lights help to verify correct configurations, check out
equipment, and solve any faults. Customers can install transceivers themselves.
• Adjustments at installation are unnecessary. The design of the transceiver allows
it to operate successfully in a wide range of cable environments.
• The transceiver does not interfere with other channels operating on the network
because its transmissions are well-contained within its specific bandwidth.
• Because collisions are. seen by all receiving transceivers, the Ethe.met channel
can be monitored at any Ethernet node.
• Transceiver can be mounted on a shelf or located on a table-top.

2.37

Ethernet

Broadband Ethernet Products

DECOM Specifications

Physical Size:
Power Requirements:
Length: 32.08 cm (12.63 in)
US V ac, 60 Hz or 230 V ac, SO Hz
Width: 48.89 cm (19.2S in)
Height: 10.69 cm (4.21 in)
Weight: 6.21 kg (13. 7 lb) DECOM-AA
6.44 kg (14~2 lb) DECOM-BA
Environmental Class: B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)
Transmitter Output Level: SO± 2 dBmV
Receiver Level Range: - 3 dBmV to + 1S dBmV

Table 2.12
DECOM Order Codes

DECOM Country Kits

Option

U.S.
Order Codes

Non-U.S.
Order Codes

Broadband Ethernet Transceiver
(dual cable)

DECOM-AA

DECOM-AB

Broadband Ethernet Transceiver
(single cable)

DECOM-BA

DECOM-BB

Transceiver cable is not supplied with the DECOM Transceiver and must be
ordered separately. The H4000 Transceiver and DECOM use the same transceiver
cables (see the appropriate product description).
The u.s. version of the DECOM Transceiver does not require a country kit. The
u. s. version includes the required power cord and user manual. The non-u. s.
version includes the user manual (in English) and requires one country kit.
Order the appropriate country kit for the power cord.

Table 2.13
DECOM Country Kit
Order Codes

Country

Order Code

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark

DEBBK-AZ

Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy

DEBBK-AF

Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)

DEBBK-AN

United Kingdom
United States

DEBBK-AE

2.38 Ethernet

DEBBK-AB
DEBBK-AQ
DEBBK-AC
DEBBK-AD

DEBBK-AP
DEBBK-AG
DEBBK-AH
DEBBK-AI

DEBBK-AS
DEBBK-AM
DEBBK-AL
DEBBK-AK

Not Required

Broadband Ethernet Products

Broadband Ethernet Frequency
Translator (DEFTR)

The Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator (DEFTR) is located at the network
headend making bidirectional communication on the Ethernet channel possible
in single-cable broadband LANS. The DEFTR receives all Ethernet signals transmitted by systems connected to the network by DECOM, translates them, and
retransmits them at the appropriate DECOM receive frequencies. The Frequency
Translator has a highly reliable design for consistent availability of the Ethernet
channel and front panel monitors that help customers isolate and diagnose both
headend and transceiver problems. Customers have the option of configuring
two translators in parallel when redundancy is required.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Width (rack mountable):
43.2 cm (17 in)
Height: 13.3 cm (5.25 in)
Depth: 38. 9 cm (15.13 in)
Weight: 9.1 kg (20 lbs)

Power Requirements:
Switch-selectable:
115 V ac, 60 Hz or 230 V ac, 50 Hz
Input Range: 54-72 MHz
Output Range: 210.25-228.25 MHz

Effective Frequency Translation: 156. 25 MHz
Nominal Bandwidth: 18 MHz
Maximum Output: 63 dBm V
Gain: 56 ± 2 dB
Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.14
Broadband Ethernet
Frequency Translator
Order Codes

DEFTR Country Kits

Table 2.15
Broadband Ethernet
Frequency Translator
Country Kit Order Codes

Option

U.S.
Order Codes

Broadband Ethernet Frequency
Translator

DEFTR-AA

Non-U.S.
Order Codes
DEFTR-AB

The u. s. version of the Broadband Ethernet Frequency Translator (DEFTR) does
not require a country kit. The u. s. version includes the required power cord and
the user manual. The noh-u. s. version of the DEFTR includes the user manual (in
English) and requires one country kit. Order the appropriate country kit to the
power cord.

Country

Order Code

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark

DEB BK-AZ

Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)
United Kingdom
United States
2.39

Ethernet

DEB BK-AB
DEBBK-AQ
DEBBK-AC
DEBBK-AD
DEB BK-AF
DEB BK-AP
DEBBK-AG
DEB BK-AH
DEB BK-AI
DEBBK-AN
DEBBK-AS
DEBBK-AM
DEBBK-AL
DEB BK-AK
DEBBK-AE

Not Required

Broadband Ethernet Products

Chipcom Ethermodem ™
Series

The Chipcom two-port Ethermodem links baseband Ethernet nodes to broadband networks. Ethermodems are fully IEEE 802.3 compliant and are available in
either single or dual cable configurations. Ethermodems are available in five
frequencies providing 10 Mbps performance and are transparent to higher level
network software such as DECnet, TCP/IP, and XNS. Contact your local Digital
sales representative for ordering and service information.
The DELNI, DEREP repeater, and DEMPR ThinWire repeater should not be used
with the Ethermodem as this is an unsupported configuration. Chipcom and
Digital broadband products can neither communicate nor coexist on the same
broadband cable due to frequency conflicts.

Features

• IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet v2.o compatible.
• 10 Mbps CSMA/ CD performance with full collision enforcement.
• Multiple frequency ranges to allow greater flexibility when configuring with
MAP, IBM™ PC network, and SYTEK™ services.
• Functions in either mid-split or high-split single cable networks.
• 3800m station-to-station distance coverage.
• Available in either dual or single cable versions.
• Transparent to upper level network software supporting systems that use
DECnet, XNS, TCP/IP, or TOP.
• On-board self-test, digital and RF loopback.
• Can be rack or shelf mounted.

Non- U.S. Orders

Ethermodem is available in some non-u.s. countries via distributors. Contact
a local marketing representative for country-specific information.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height: 8.89 cm (3.5 in)
Width: 44.45 cm (17.5 in)
Depth: 37.46 cm (14. 75 in)
Weight: 6.80 kg (15 lbs)
Power Requirements:
Power source: 115/220 Vac
Frequency tolerance: 50/60 Hz± 10%
Maximum AC watts drawn: 40 W
Power connector: IEC male
Transmitted power: 50 dBmv ± 2 dB, 56 dBm V optional for dual cable versions
Receiver range: 20 dB minimum ( - 4 to + 16 dBm V), 25 dB typical ( -6 to + 19
dBmV)

2.40

Ethernet

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products

Chipcom Ethermodem
Frequency Translator

The Chipcom Ethermodem Frequency Translator located at the network
headend, is used with single cable Ethermodems. The Ethermodem Frequency
Translator receives low frequency signals from the reverse direction and translates them up in frequency by 192.25 MHz (IEEE recommended standard) to the
transmit band. It amplifies, filters, and sends the signal to the user on the
forward direction. The Ethermodem Frequency Translator minimizes interference with services in nearby frequencies by providing sharp, out-of-band
filtering. It is available off-the-shelf in a range of standard frequencies. The
Ethemiodem Frequency Translator coexists with other broadband products
(such as IBM PC Network, Sytek LocalNet 20;M and MAP), video, and other
common services. Contact your local Digital sales representative for ordering
and service information.

Specifications

Physical Size:

Height: 8.89 cm (3.5 in)
Width: 44.45 cm (17.5 in)
Depth: 40.64 cm (16.0 in)
Weight: 6.80 kg (15 lbs)
Mounting: 48.26 cm (19.0 in) standard rack
Power Requirements:
Power source: 115/220 Vac
Frequency tolerance: 50/60 Hz± 10%
Maximum ac watts drawn: 40 W
Power connector: me male
Power indicator: red LED
Translation frequency: 192.25 MHz± 25 KHz
Nominal bandwidth: 18 MHz
Gain: 55 ± 2 dB

2.41

Ethernet

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products

Baseband/Broadband
Ethernet Products
Introduction

The next three sections describe a variety of products which are compatible
with both Baseband and Broadband Ethernet. These products include the
DELNI, communications controllers, LAN Bridge 100, routers, gateways, and
terminal servers. Although the text and figures primarily depict baseband
configurations, they can easily be converted to illustrate broadband. The major
difference between the two is the use of different transceivers, the H4000 for
baseband and DECOM or Ethermodem for broadband. For configuration information, including distance requirements, refer to Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines at the end of this section.

Transceiver Cable

A transceiver cable connects the H4000 Transceiver or the Local Network
Interconnect (DELNI) to an Ethernet Communications Controller.
This cable is also used to connect the DECOM Broadband Ethernet Transceiver
to an Ethernet Communications Controller, Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI), or LAN Bridge 100.
See the Transceiver Cable product description in Baseband Ethernet Products
for specific information.

2.42

Ethernet

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products

Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI)

The Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) is a low-cost, table top device with
its own power supply. It is a concentrator that allows up to eight Ethernetcompatible devices (not terminals) to be grouped together. Device performance
remains constant whether the device is connected to the Ethernet through an
H4000 or DECOM Transceiver, or a DELNI.
The DELNI can be configured three ways: standalone, hierarchical standalone,
and connected. A switch on the DELNI allows selection of either standalone or
connected mode of operation.
Figure 2.19 illustrates the standalone configuration that supports up to eight
systems using standard Ethernet transceiver cables.
Figure 2.20 illustrates the hierarchical standalone configuration that supports a
combination ofDELNIS and devices using standard transceiver cables. Hierarchical standalone configurations are not connected to the Ethernet coaxial cable.
Figures 2.21 and 2.22 illustrate the connected configuration that supports up to
eight devices using standard Ethernet transceiver cable. This configuration is
connected to the Ethernet coaxial cable via H4000 Transceivers and transceiver
cable. For specific distance requirements for baseband or broadband, refer to
Ethernet Configuration Guidelines at the end of this section.
The DELNI can also be used in ThinWire Ethernet configurations to concentrate
up to eight DEMPRs. Refer to Thin Wire Ethernet IEEE 802.3 Products in this
section or Section 5 for more information.

Features

• A connected DELNI LAN reduces the cost of multiple connections to the Ethernet
coaxial cable. It also allows rµore than 100 devices to be connected to a single
500-meter coaxial cable segment.
• The standalone and hierarchical standalone DELNI LAN configurations eliminate the need for coaxial cable and H4000 Transceivers in very small networks.
• Transceiver cable wiring to a centrally located DELNI offers added wiring
configuration flexibility.
• The DELNI can be installed by customers, reducing installation cost.

• A standalone/connected mode switch allows a user to change from the connected configuration to the standalone configuration. This allows for
the temporary isolation of traffic in the DELNI subnet for security or for
performance testing.

2.43

Ethernet

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products

Figure 2.19
DELNI Standalone
Con.figuration
40m

Transceiver Cable

40m
DELUA

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/84

Figure 2.20
DELNI Hierarchical Standalone
Con.figuraJion

VAX 8550

som
Transceiver Cable
40m
DELUA

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/84

VAX 8350
Micro
VAX II

Figure 2.21
DELNI Connected Con.figuration
Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/84

VAX 8550

MicroVAX

1 The sum of two cable lengths.

2.44 Ethernet

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products
H4000

Figure 2.22
DELNI Hierarchial Connected
Con.figuration

Bridge

DELNI

Figure 2.23
DELNI Connected Con.figuration
Using an Etheijack

DELNI

Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAXBI CTRL

VAX 8250
MicroVAX

1 Sum of three cable lengths.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Length (rack mount): 44.5 cm (17.5 in)
Length (with cover): 48. 9 cm (19.25 in)
Width (rack mount): 17.8 cm (7.0 in)
Width (with cover): 19.7 cm (7.75 in)
Height (rack mount): 6.4 cm (2.5 in)
Height (with cover): 8.9 cm (3.5 in)
Weight: 6.4 kg (14.0 lbs)

Power Requirements:
Switch-selectable:
120 V or 240 V, 47-63 Hz
AC watts drawn: 26
Inrush Currents:
1. O amps at 120 V
0.5 amps at 240 V
Surge Currents:
2 amps for 5 cycles at 120 V
1 amp for 5 cycles at 240 V

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details;)

Table 2.16
Option

U.S./Canada
Order Code

Local Network Interconnect

DELNI-AA

DELNI

Order Codes

2.45 Ethernet

Non-U.S./Canada
Order Code
DELNI-AB

Baseband/Broadband Ethernet Products

DELNI Country Kits

Table 2.17
DELNI
Country Kit Order Codes

The u.s. versions of the Local Network Interconnect do not require country
kits. Each non-u. s. version of the Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) requires
one country kit. Each kit contains installation instructions and a power cord.
For cases where the country in which the DELNI is to be used is not listed, select
a country kit that uses the same plug configuration. An Ethernet communications controller in each node and a transceiver cable to connect each controller to the DELNI are also required. For DELNI-connected configurations, an
H4000 Transceiver and transceiver cable are needed. See Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines in this section for DELNI-connected configurations in Broadband
Local Area Networks.

Country

Order Code

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark

DELNK-AZ

Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy

DELNK-AF

Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)

DELNK-AN
DELNK-AS

United Kingdom
United States

DELNK-AE

2.46

Ethernet

DELNK-AB
DELNK-AQ
DELNK-AC
DELNK-AD

DELNK-AP
DELNK-AG
DELNK-AH
DELNK-AI

DELNK-AM
DELNK-AL
DELNK-AK

Not Required

Ethernet Communications Controllers

Ethernet communications controllers are interfaces that connect systems to an
Ethernet local area network. Digital currently offers the following communications controllers:

Ethernet Communications
Controllers

• The DECNA, which connects Professional 300 series systems to standard
Ethernet cable
• The DELUA, which connects UNIBUS systems to standard Ethernet cable
• The DEPCA, which connects the IBM PC, PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT to
ThinWire Ethernet cable
• The DELQA, which connects Q-bus systems to standard Ethernet cable
• The DESVA, which connects MicroVAX 2000 and VAXstation 2000 systems to
ThinWire Ethernet cable
• The NIA20, which connects DECsystem-lOs and DECSYSTEM-20s to standard
Ethernet cable
Controllers designed for standard Ethernet cable connect to the cable via an
H4000 transceiver or a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). They can connect to
ThinWire Ethernet cable via a ThinWire Ethernet station adapter (DESTA).
Controllers designed for ThinWire Ethernet cable connect to the cable via a BNC
connector. They can connect to standard Ethernet cable via a ThinWire Ethernet
Multiport Repeater (DEMPR), which then connects to the H4000 or DELNI. With
the addition of an optional DEPCA-AU adapter, the DEPCA can connect to standard
Ethernet cable (via the H4000 or DELNI) without going through a DEMPR.

Table 2.18
Ethernet Communications Controllers
DECNA

DELUA

DEPCA

DELQA

DES VA

NIA20

PR0300 series bus

UNIBUS

IBM PC-bus

Q-bus

MicroVAX 2000
and VAXstation
2000bus

CBUS

DMA

YES

Maximum speed
(consult SPD)

lOMb/s

10 Mb/s

lOMb/s

10 Mb/s

10Mb/s

Ethernet cable

Standard 1

ThinWire

Standard'

ThinWire

Standard1

PRO/DECnet

DECnet-VAX, 2

DECnet-DOS,
DECnet-ULTRIX, PCSA/PC Client 3
DECnet-RSX

DECnet-VAX, 2

DECnet-10,
DECnet-20

VMS,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-32m,
ULTRIX-H,
RSX-HM,
RSX-HM-PLUS,
RSX-HS

Micro VMS,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-32m,
ULTRIX-H,
RSX-11M,
RSX-HM-PLUS,
RSX-HS,
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS
VAXELN

Bus

Number oflines

DECnet support

Operating
system support

P/OS

IBM PC DOS

DECnet-ULTRIX, DECnet-ULTRIX
DECnet-RSX,
DECnetMicro/RSX
DECnet/E
Micro VMS,
ULTRIX-32m

TOPS-10,
TOPS-20

1 Controllers designed for standard Ethernet cable can connect to ThinWire Ethernet cable via a ThinWire Ethernet station adapter (DESTA).

2 oEcnet-VAX allows multiple Ethernet controllers per host within the limitations listed in the Load Unit Table in SPD 25.03. Each controller must be

connected to a separate Ethernet that is not joined to .other Ethernets by a bridge or repeater, though it may be joined by a DECnet Router.
3 PCSA/Pc Client software includes DECnet-DOS support.

2.47 Hardware

Ethernet Communications Controllers

DELUA

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3-to-UNIBUS high-performance synchronous communications controller (DELVA) connects UNIBUS systems (vAx and PDP) to both
Ethernet v2.0 and IEEE 802.3 local area networks. It is M68000 microprocessor
based, operates at 10 Mb/s, and has 4 Mb/s throughput capability. (Actual
device speed and throughput depends on operating system, system configuration, and application.) The 80KB RAM is used primarily for buffering of
data at the high bus rate. A separate DMA controller is used to access host
memory locations.
The DELVA microcode implements data encapsulation and decapsulation,
data link management, and all channel access functions to ensure maximum
throughput with minimum processor intervention. It provides such network
maintainability features as remote loopback of data from other stations, resident
micro-diagnostics, system identification, and the loading and remote booting of
UNIBUS PDP-11 systems from other stations on the network.
The DELVA physically and electrically connects to the coaxial cable via transceiver cable (BNE3x or BNE4x series) and either a Baseband Ethernet Transceiver
(H4000) or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). The DELVA also connects to a
DESTA and ThinWire cable in ThinWire Ethernet networks. Transceiver cable
can be a maximum of 40 meters (131 feet) and must be ©rdered separately. Refer
to Communications Cables in Section 4 for all order codes.
The DELUA-M option is comprised of one hex module. A cabinet kit option,
which must be ordered separately with the DELUA-M, contains a distribution
panel and associated internal cabling.

Figure 2.24
Ethernet/IEEE
802 .3-to-UNIB US
Communications Controller
(DELUA) in an Ethernet LAN

DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)
VAX 8650
DELUAl

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
IEEE 802.3

2.48

Ethernet

H4000

DELUAJ

PDP 11/84

PDP-11/84

DECnet-11M-PLUS

DECneVE

(Phase IV)

Terminat;;

Ethernet Communications Controllers

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +sV: 8.0A
DC amps drawn at -15V: 1.0 (to power the H4000 transceiver)
Bus Loads: AC 4, DC 1
r/ o Connection Panel Inserts: 1 panel unit
Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.19
DELUA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Unibus single line interface
communications controller.
Includes base module only.

DELUA-M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits:
For use with VAx-11/725 shielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-KL

For general purpose use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-KM

For use with unshielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-K1

2.49

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Controllers

DEL QA

The DELQA is an Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller that connects
MicroPDP-11 and MicroVAX II systems to an Ethernet v2.0 or IEEE 802.3 local area
network.
The DELQA provides the firmware capability to support Maintenance Operation
Protocol (MOP), which offers enhanced network management features, including: remote circuit loopback, system identification messages, remote booting of
diskless systems, maintenance of data link counters, and IEEE 802.2 xm and Test.
The DELQA physically and electrically connects to the Ethernet coaxial cable by
means of a CK-DELQA-xx cabinet kit, transceiver cable (BNE3C or BNE3A series),
and an H4000 Ethernet transceiver or a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). The
DELQA also connects to ThinWire via a DESTA station adapter.

Features

• Dual size module saves on backplane space.
• Low power draw provides more available power for additional peripheral and
communications options.
• On-board selftest executes extensive testing of the DELQA circuitry at each
power-up or reset.
• On-board MOP provides the ability to decrease the demand on system software,
thus reducing processor time required to support network management
activities.

System Support

MicroPDP-11/23, MicroPDP-11/53, MicroPDP-11/73, MicroPDP-11/83, vAxstation
II, vAxstation n/GPX, and MicroVAX n.

Software Support

DECnet-VAX, DECnet-ULTRIX; DECnet-RSX, DECnet-Micro/RSX, DECnet/E, Local
Area VAXcluster software (LAVC), VMS, MicroVMS, ULTRIX-32, ULTRIX-32m,
ULTRIX-11, RSX-llM, RSX-11M-PLUS, RSX-11S, Micro/RSX, Micro/RSTS, and
VAXELN.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 dual slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 2.5
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.5
Bus Loads: AC 2.2, DC 0.5
r/o Connection Panel Insert: Size A

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.20
DELQA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller

DELQA-M

Cabinet kit for BA123 and BA11-M enclosure

CK-DELQA-YA

Cabinet kit for MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure

CK-DELQA-YB

Cabinet kit for H9642 cabinet

CK-DELQA-YF

2.50

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Controllers

DES VA

The DESVA is a synchronous Ethernet communications controller that connects
MicroVAX 2000 and VAXstation 2000 computers to ThinWire Ethernet local area
networks. The DESVA has FCC certification, is fully compatible with the IEEE
802.3 standard, and operates at 10 Mb/s.
The DESVA provides Ethernet data link layer functions and a portion of the
physical channel functions. It is supported under DECnet Phase IV software. The
DESVA is a standard component of the VAXstation 2000, and optional for the
MicroVAX 2000.

Table 2.21
DES VA
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

ThinWire Ethernet communications controller, option for
MicroVAX 2000. Includes Networking Guide, T-connector,
and two terminators.

DESVA-AA

2.51

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Controllers

DEPCA

The DEPCA is an Ethernet communications controller that connects the IBM PC,
PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT to Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 local area networks. The DEPCA operates at 10 Mb/s.
The DEPCA implements data encapsulation and decapsulation, data link management, and all channel access functions to ensure maximum throughput. It
provides network maintenance features including remote loopback, resident
selftest diagnostics, and system identification. The DEPCA implements an
asynchronous serial channel for connection to the vsxxx-AA mouse. This
interface may be operated in an interrupt driven environment.
The DEPCA contains 48 KB RAM memory, used primarily for buffering network
data at the high bus data rate. The Personal Computer's CPU is used to access the
buffer memory, and to execute datalink and selftest firmware (contained in a
16 KB ROM memory on the DEPCA module).
The DEPCA connects directly to the ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable, using
integral transceiver (MAU) circuitry. With the addition of the DEPCA-AU connector option, the DEPCA can connect to an H4000 transceiver or Local Network
Interconnect (DELNI).
The DEPCA is offered as a module-only option or as a component of the
Network Integration Packages. For more information, refer to Section 3,
Network Integration Packages.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 8-bit Pc-bus slot (2 when used with DEPCA-Au)
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at + 5V: 2.0 (max)
DC amps drawn at + 12V: 1.350 (max) (1.0 to power H4000 transceiver)
DC amps drawn at -12V: 0.050 (max)
Bus Loads: 2 LSTTL
r/o Connection Panel Inserts: 1 slot (2 when used with DEPCA-AU)
Environmental Class: Class A (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.22
DEPC A
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

ThinWire Ethernet communications controller for IBM PC,
Pc/xT, and Personal Computer AT. Includes a ThinWire
assembly kit (T-connector, terminator, and 12 foot
PVC BNC cable).

DEPCA-AA

15-pin Ethernet transceiver adapter connects the DEPCA
Ethernet communications controller to standard Ethernet
cable via an H4000 transceiver or DELNL

DEPCA-AU

2.52

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Controllers

DECNA

The Ethernet-to-Professional 300-Series synchronous communications controller (DECNA) connects Professional 300 Series personal computers to Ethernet
Local Area Networks (LANs). The DECNA complies fully with the Ethernet
specification and operates at 10 Mb/ s.
The DECNA provides Ethernet data link layer functions and a portion of the
physical channel functions. The DECNA is supported by PRO/DECnet. Digital
also provides documentation and device drivers as part of PRO/DECnet, so that
users can write their own higher-level protocols for specialized applications and
communications in multivendor environments.
The DECNA physically and electrically connects to the Ethernet coaxial cable via
Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable (BNE3x or BNE4x series) and a Baseband
Ethernet Transceiver (H4000) or a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). The
DECNA also connects to a DESTA and ThinWire cable in ThinWire Ethernet
networks. A five meter (16 foot) transceiver cable is included with the DECNA.
Cable segments up to a maximum of 45 meters (148 feet) in length can be added.

Figure 2.26
Ethernet-to-Professional
Communications Controller
(DECNA) in an Ethernet LAN

DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)
PRO/DECnet

(Phase IV)

VAX 8350
VAXBI CTRL

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
DEL NJ

PRO/DECnet

(Phase IV)
DELQA

Micro
PDP-11

PRO/DECnet

(Phase IV)
DECnet-11M

(Phase IV)

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 Professional 350 slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +s V: 2.8
DC amps drawn at +12 V: O
Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 2.23
DECNA Order Code

Option

Order Code

DECNA single-line interface connects Professional 300 series
personal computers to Ethernet LANs. Includes module,
internal cables, turn-around connector, installation manual,
PRO/DECnet license, 90-day hardware/software warranty.

DECNA-K

2.53

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Controllers

NIA20

The NIA20 is a high-performance synchronous communications controller that
connects KUO-based systems to both Ethernet v2.0 and IEEE 802.3 local area
networks. The NIA20 is microprocessor based, operates at 10 Mb/s, and has 4
Mb/s throughput capability. (Actual device speed and throughput depends on
operating system, system configuration, and applications in use.) A separate
DMA controller is used for access to host memory locations.
TheNIA20 microcode implements data encapsulation and decapsulation,
data link management, and all channel access functions to ensure maximum
throughput with minimum processor intervention. It provides significant
network maintainability features including remote loopback of data from other
stations, resident micro-diagnostics, and system identification.
The NIA20 physically and electrically connects to the coaxial cable via transceiver cable (BNE3x or BNE4x series) and either a Baseband Ethernet Transceiver
(H4000) or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI}. The DELUA also connects to a
DESTA and ThinWire cable in ThinWire Ethernet networks. Transceiver cable
can be a maximum of 40 meters (131 feet) and must be ordered separately. Refer
to Communications Cables in Section 4 for all order codes.

Table 2.24
NIA20 Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CBUS single line interface
communications controller.
Ethernet port adapter for KL10-E

NIA20-AA

Ethernet port adapter for KL10-D

NIA20-BA

Ethernet port adapter for KL10-R

NIA20-CA

2.54 Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Extended Ethernet Local Area
Network Products
Introduction

A standard Ethernet LAN has a distance limitation of 2, 800 meters between the
furthest two nodes on the network. This limitation is the sum of two SO-meter
transceiver cables, three SOO meter coaxial cable segments, four SO-meter
transceiver cables connected to repeaters, and 1000 meters of fiber optic link. An
Extended LAN allows this limitation to expand through the use of the Ethernet
LAN Bridge 100, METROWAVE Bridge, and TransLAN.

LAN Bridge 100

The LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) is a device that interconnects two or more Ethernet
LANS creating an extended local area network. The LAN Bridge 100 utilizes a
Store and Forward feature to receive, regenerate and transmit packets. This
feature allows users to build Extended LANS several times larger than the
previous Ethernet guidelines allowed. When planning an extended LAN, Digital
recommends configuring a maximum of seven bridges in a series. This figure
insures the performance of time critical protocols. No restrictions exist on the
number of bridges when time-critical protocols are not an issue. An extended
LAN can contain more than 8,000 node addresses with only minor degradation to
network performance due to an 8, 000 node address buffer. An Extended LAN
spanning distances up to 22,400 meters can be constructed by using fiber optic
or microwave bridges.

The LAN Bridge 100 can connect Broadband Ethernets, Baseband Ethernets, or
a combination of the two. It improves network performance by dynamically
managing the data traffic flow. A user can increase bandwidth efficiency by
isolating traffic on heavily loaded segments from the rest of the network. Traffic
management is done automatically while still providing full network connectivity. The locally destined traffic remains local. The remote traffic is forwarded
to the appropriate destination.

Protocol-Independent-The bridge operates at the data link level and is protocolindependent. Any protocols, such as XNS, TCP, LAT, or DECnet, which run on
Ethernet/IEEE 802. 3 can simultaneously take advantage of a bridge with no loss
of performance.
Changes in network configuration are detected by the bridge automatically
within seconds and its memory is updated. Bridges can be placed in parallel
with other bridges to provide an auto-backup capability. Bridges causing loops
in this situation automatically enter a back up state. A bridge that is in the back
up state continues to monitor traffic on both LANs and if the primary bridge
fails, it automatically takes over and forwards messages.
Variations of the LAN Bridge 100 are:
• The Standard Bridge (DEBET-A*), which interfaces with two transceiver
drop cables
• The Fiber Optic Bridge (DEBET-R*), which interfaces with one transceiver drop
cable and a fiber optic link. The Fiber Optic Bridge is required for sites that
have more than 90 meters between two LANs. A pair of standard 4S-meter
transceiver cables would be insufficient to cover the distance.
• The METROWAVE Bridge (DEMWB-A*), which interfaces with one transceiver
drop cable and a microwave link. The METROWAVE Bridge connects geographically separated LANS where cable is neither feasible nor economical.
Table 2.25 compares the LAN extension features of LAN Bridge 100 with the
Ethernet Repeater (DEREP) and DECnet Router Server.

2.55

Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Table 2.25
Comparison of
Extended LAN Devices

Features

Repeater

Bridge

Router

ISO layer

Physical

Data Link

Network

Forwarding capability

Forwards
bits

Forwards
frames

Forwards
messages

Addressing function

No address

MAC
address 1

Network
address

Network extension

Yes

Packet filtering

Yes

Traffic management

Yes

Network management

Yes

Performance
(throughput)

High

Low

Cost

Low

Medium

High

Transparent to upper
level protocols

Yes

Message segmentation

NIA

Yes

Load sharing

Yes

Common carrier

Yes

Multivendor network

Yes

Auto back-up 2

Yes

Area routing

NIA

Yes

1 Medium Access Control (requires Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 packet format)
2 Ability to activate upon failure of a parallel device.

Figure 2.27
Baseband-to-baseband
LAN Bridge 100
Configuration

H4000

Baseband
Coaxial Cable

2.56

Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Figure 2.28
Broadband-to-baseband
Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100
Configuration

H4000

Baseband
Coaxial Cable
Fiber Optic
Bridge

Broadband Cable
Broadband Tap

Features

• Store and Forward-Receives, regenerates, and transmits packets, enabling the
configuration of Extended LANs.
• Address Filtering-Reduces the total data traffic on an Extended LAN by not
forwarding those packets that have local destination addresses. Increases bandwidth efficiency.
• Operates at the Data Link Layer Level-Allows multivendor implementation.
Transparent to higher level protocols such as DECnet, TCP/IP, XNS, LAT.
• Baseband and Broadband Ethernet Compatible-Connects Ethernet LANs:
baseband to baseband, baseband to broadband, broadband to broadband.
• No Software Required-Does not require down-line loading. No requirement
to have a DEC host on the network.
• RBMS Software Available for Enhanced Management Ability-By using a VAX
running VMS and RBMS, a user can observe and control any Bridge in the
Extended LAN.
•IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Device-Can be used in networks that are IEEE 802.3,
Standard Ethernet, or ThinWire Ethernet compliant.
• Dynamic Learning-Automatically detects and adjusts to changes in network configuration.
• Auto Back-up (using redundant bridges)-Increases availability and reliability
of the network.
• Write Access Switch-Write protection: controls the access necessary to change
operating parameters.
• Non-Volatile RAM Available for Storing Settable Parameters-Protects the
settable operating parameters against loss due to power failures.
• Fiber Optic Version-Provides a Fiber Link for up to 2000 meters.
• Rack or Wall Mount-Can be used in a wiring closet or mounted in a
19-inch rack.

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Product§

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:

With Plastic Encl.

Without Plastic Encl.

16.2 cm (6.4 in)
49.4 cm (19.4 in)

13.3 cm (5.3 in)
43.6 cm (17.2 in)
29.8 cm (11. 7 in)

31.3 cm (12.3 in)
9.5 kg (21 lbs)

7.3 kg (16 lbs)

Power Requirements:
Low-range line voltage: 120-93 to 128 V
High-range line voltage: 240-207 to 253 V
Frequency Tolerance: 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum ac watts drawn: 150 W
Maximum heat dissipation: 500 BTu/hr

Required Hardware

Standard LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-A*)
Baseband communications-Two of the following in any combination: Baseband
Ethernet Transceiver (H4000), or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI).
Broadband communications-Two of the following in any combination:
Broadband Ethernet Transceiver (DECOM) or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI).
Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-R*)
Either another Fiber Optic Bridge or a Fiber Optic Repeater (DEREP-R*),
in addition to the above required hardware for baseband or broadband communications.

Optional Management Sofiware

Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is an optional software package
that allows users, at a VAX or MicroVAX host, to manage any Bridge in an
extended network. The network manager uses RBMS to control each Bridge on
the network, view error and traffic counters, operational parameters and the
Bridge's forwarding data base. The manager also uses RBMS to change various
operating parameters such as Bridge state, link state and address filtering
characteristics. For more information, refer to Remote Bridge Management
Software (RBMS) in Network and System Management Products in Section 3.

Option

U.S.
Order Codes

Standard bridge

DEB ET-AA

DEB ET-AB

Fiber optic bridge

DEBET-RC

DEB ET-RD

Table 2.26
LAN Bridge 100

Order Codes

2.58

Ethernet

Non-U.S.
Order Codes

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

LAN Bridge 100
Country Power Cords

The non-u.s. version of the LAN Bridge 100 requires a power cord specific to
individual countries.

Table 2.27
LAN Bridge 100

Country Kit Order Codes

Country

Order Code

United Kingdom
Ireland

BN02A-2E

Austria
Belgium
Finland
France
Germany

Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden

BN03A-2E

Switzerland

BN04A-2E

Australia
New Zealand

BNOSA-2E

Denmark

BN06A-2E

Italy

BN07A-2E

2.59

Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

METROWAVE Bridge

The METROWAVE Bridge connects geographically separated Ethernet LANs
within a metropolitan or campus environment in which cable is neither feasible
nor economical. The METROWAVE Bridge is a high performance Ethernet device
that connects two Ethernet LANs separated by such obstacles as streets, highways, and waterways. Transparent to the user, the bridge provides high speed
transmission via a 23 gigahertz (GHz) wideband, duplex, frequency-modulated
microwave link over line-of-sight distances up to 4.5 miles. (Path length is
determined by several factors including antenna size and signal attenuation.)
The METRO WAVE Bridge, a member of the LAN Bridge 100 product family,
provides a microwave connection that delivers the same high performance and
store-and-forward filtering capability as the LAN Bridge 100. Compliant with
Ethernet Version 2.0, the METROWAVE Bridge can simultaneously handle any
protocols that run on Version 2.0 of Ethernet, accommodating totally Digital,
multivendor, or totally non-Digital networks.
The microwave equipment for this product is manufactured by a joint marketing partner, Ml A-CoM;'M Inc. The microwave radios, modified specifically for the
METROWAVE Bridge, are based on widely proven 23 GHZ technology. Digital's
microwave adapter converts microwave signal levels to standard Ethernet
signal levels.
A complete METROWAVE Bridge system is comprised of two microwave
link stations:

Figure 2.29
METRO WAVE Bridge Configuration
Microwave Link

4.Smi

Ethernet LAN
Site A

Features

H4000

Ethernet LAN
Site B

• The microwave link, transparent to the user, allows connection when cable is
too expensive or not feasible.
•Ethernet 10 Mb/s bandwidth provides high speed transmission.
•Protocol independence and Ethernet Version 2.0 compliance accommodates
multivendor environments.
• Easily installed for quick availability.
• "T"-carrier and video system can be combined with the METROWAVE Bridge to
increase flexibility and reduce overall costs.

2.60 Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Availability

This product is available only in the United States. Limited availability
of private-use licenses for 23 GHZ microwave equipment exists in some
other countries. Please call the Digital Computer Special Systems group at
1-80(}-832-6277 for details.

Implementing the Link

The customer is responsible for such activities as path survey, site analysis, and
compliance with FCC licensing regulations. Assistance in performing these
activities is available from Digital and authorized M/A-COM dealers. Additional
information on implementing the link is listed in a separate Digital publication,
METRO WAVE Bridge Links Ethernet LANs with Microwave Technology (ED 2958449), or by calling 1-800-832-6277.

Specifications

The LAN Bridge 100 and the microwave adapter operate at 10 Mb/s using the
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (csMA/cD) technique.
The radio frequency (RF) unit generates a 23 GHZ microwave carrier. It is
co-located with the antenna and is powered by a cable from the microwave
transmitter and receiver controllers.
The following specifications are the aggregrate totals for the LAN Bridge, the
microwave adapter, the transmitter controller, and the receiver controller. For
individual specifications, refer to a separate Digital publication, METRO WAVE

Bridge Links Ethernet LANs with Microwave Technology (ED 29584-49).
Physical Dimensions:
Depth: 31.25 in
Width: 21.35 in
Height: 31.50 in
Weight: 100 lb

Power Requirements:
Voltage Tolerance: 93-128 Vac
Line Frequency: 60 Hz
Maximum Current: 4.1 A (120 Vac)
Power Consumption: 326 W (Maximum)

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Prerequisite Software

No special software is required for operation of the METROWAVE Bridge since the
bridge control functions are resident in the LAN Bridge 100 component.

Optional Software

Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is recommended for enhanced
control and monitoring of the microwave link.

2.61

Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Table 2.28
METRO WAVE Bridge

Order Codes
for Digital Components

Ordering M/A-COM Components

Option

Order Code

A METROWAVE Bridge includes two each: LAN Bridge 100,
H4000 Ethernet transceiver, microwave adapter, BNE3M-20,
BNE4D-02, and cable adapter. The METROWAVE Bridge is
available pre-mounted in 31.5 inch high cabinets, or in
non-cabinet configurations suitable for rack mounting in
Satellite Equipment Room (SER) racks.
METROWAVE Bridge in 2-cabinet configuration package

DEMWB-AA

METROWAVE Bridge in 2-SER-compatible configuration
package

DEMWB-BA

METROWAVE Bridge in 1 cabinet and 1 SER-compatible
configuration package

DEMWB-CA

The M/A-COM LAN radio components, designated MA-23 LAN, include the
following:
• two transmitter controllers
• two receiver controllers
• two 23GHZ RF units
• two 4-foot coaxial cables
• two 2- or 4-foot microwave antennas
The MA-23 LAN and its installation must be purchased separately through an
authorized Ml A-COM dealer. Contact the Digital Computer Special Systems
group at 1-800-832-6277 for the name, address, and telephone number of the
nearest authorized M/A-COM dealer.

2.62 Ethernet

Extended Ethernet Local Area Network Products

TransLAN

Digital and Vitalink Communications Corporation have entered into a third
party marketing agreement to develop a device to allow interconnections of
multiple Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 LANs into one extended network. The Vitalink
product, TransLAN;M can connect via satellite or terrestrial link and extend the
LAN from 1. 74 miles (2.8 kilometers) to thousands of miles.
TransLAN (including both hardware and software), is a bridge that provides
protocol-transparent interconnection of similar or dissimilar higher-level protocols on two or more LANs. It serves as a link-level relay, transferring data
independently of the higher-level protocols in use. In order to translate between
higher-level protocols, gateway~ are required.
TransLAN can connect Ethernet LANs to digital transmission systems, including
satellites and terrestrial private lines. On one side, TransLAN can connect to an
Ethernet LAN, while on the other side, it can provide industry-standard v.35 or
RS232 connections. This can then connect to either satellite earth stations or
other transmission schemes. LAN-to-LAN connections are supported at speeds
up to 2.048 Mbps and each bridge can support four line cards.
Using TransLAN, Digital systems networked with DECnet Ethernet can communicate. Beyond the requirement that systems connect to an Ethernet LAN, the
bridge does not restrict higher-level communications protocols.

Features

• Connecting Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 LANs via TransLAN allows long distance
broadcast communications, similar to using one Ethernet locally.
• Using muitiple bridges connecting LANs, one node can send messages to many
other local and remote nodes concurrently.
• Interconnects DECnet Phase'III and DECnet Phase IV networks. Depending on
the functions required and network configuration, you may choose a bridge or
a router. A DECnet Router Server is usually less expensive.
• TransLAN can connect Digital nodes running DECnet or other networking
software on one Ethernet LAN to Digital nodes running DECnet or other
networking software on another Ethernet LAN. The same requirement that
exists on one local LAN, that stations communicating with each other must run
on the same protocols, also applies to nodes running on separate LANs connected
by TransLAN.
• TransLAN can connect non-Digital nodes on one Ethernet LAN to similar
non-Digital nodes on a remote Ethernet LAN. TransLAN can also connect Digital
nodes on the two LANs at the same time. (Note that communication is limited to
homogeneous systems.)

Non-U.S. Orders

TransLAN is available in some non-u. s. countries via distributors. Contact a
local marketing representative for country-specific information.

LAN Bridge 100 and
TransLAN Extended LANs

Digital's Ethernet Bridge, the LAN Bridge 100, is designed to transparently
interconnect a series of up to eight Ethernet segments, creating an extended
LAN that could be 22 kilometers (22,000 meters) or 14 miles long. Using the
LAN Bridge 100, the full 10 Mb/s throughput is available across the network.
Additionally, the low error rate of the connection is maintained from one end of
the network to the other. Many of the functions and capabilities of the Digital
and Vitalink bridges are similar. One exception, however, is Digital's implementation of Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) that allows a
privileged user anywhere in the network to monitor and analyze the network.

2.63

Ethernet

Exten"ded Ethernet Local Area Network Products

LAN Bridge 100 and
TransLAN Extended LANs

(Continued)

Specifications

Vitalink's TransLAN Bridge is primarily intended for the interconnection
ofLAN's across distances greater than a few miles where coaxial, fiber optic,
or microwave links are not available or feasible. TransLAN provides industrystandard v.35 or RS232 connections and is capable of transmitting at a maximum
rate of2.048 Mbps. This can be a constraint when the average traffic load is
higher than the 2.048 Mbps capability. Additionally, depending on the communications links (satellite or terrestrial) delay may be apparent. Unlike RBMS,
bridge management is done from a bridge management console attached to
the TransLAN Bridge.
Physical Dimensions:
Height: 14.0 cm (5.5 in)
Width: 43.2 cm (17 in)
Length: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
Weight: 12.2 kg (27 lbs)

Power Requirements:
AC watts drawn at 100 V, 47 Hz: 400
AC watts drawn at 120 V, 47 Hz: 400
AC watts drawn at 230 V, 47 Hz: 400

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)
User Port Interface: Ethernet Version 2.0 or IEEE 802.3
Satellite/Terrestrial Port Interfaces: (16) v.35 I (16) RS-232
Satellite/Terrestrial Port Data Capacity: 2.048 Mbps
Frame Processing Rates:
15,000 frames per second filtering
600to1,500 frames per second forwarding, depending on the application
TransLAN is serviced and supported by Vitalink. For more information, contact
your local Digital Sales Office.
Figure 2.30
Network Configuration
Using TransLAN

Trans LAN

Trans LAN
Modem J----z_ _ _-2{ Modem

Host

2.64

Ethernet

Host

Ethernet Communications Servers

Ethernet Communications
Servers
Introduction

Ethernet Communications Servers are dedicated, special purpose subsystems
that promote resource sharing across many host systems within a local area
network (LAN).
The following communications servers may be used on an Ethernet:
• Terminal Server-Digital's terminal server products include: The DECserver 200
(DSRVB) logically connects up to eight digital terminals or serial printers to one
or more hosts on an Ethernet LAN. The DECserver 200 has a version with
modem control (Mc) and a version for use with the DEcconnect Communications System (DL). The MUXserver 100/DECmux n remote terminal server that
connects up to 16 Digital terminals, PCs, or serial printers at remote sites to one
or more host systems on the Ethernet LAN.
• DECnet Router (DECSA)-Transfers data packets from DECnet nodes on an
Ethernet to remote DECnet nodes or other Ethernet LANs.

• DECrouter 200 (DSRvc)-Transfers data packets from DECnet nodes on an
Ethernet to remote DECnet nodes or other Ethernet LANs via asynchronous lines.
• DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway (DECSA)-Connects DECnet/Ethernet LANs to x.25
packet-switched data networks (PSDNs) and to remote DECnet systems.
• DECnet/SNA Gateway (DECSA)-Connects Ethernet LANs to IBM hosts in an
SNA network.

The DECnet Router, DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway, and DECnet/SNA Gateway
share a common hardware base (DECSA)-it is the individual line cards and the
special function software that determine the type of function the communications server performs. A server, complete with line cards and software, can
perform only one function. If communications needs change, however, the
function of a DECSA server can be adapted by changing the line cards and
downline-loading new software.
Features

• Provides resource sharing across multihost systems within an Ethernet LAN.
• Performs a dedicated function whose cost can be spread over many users.
• Increases Ethernet LAN configuration flexibility.
• Offioad communications processing from host systems (except for the DECnet
Router/x.25 Gateway), reducing CPU overhead.
• Lowers cost of ownership through customer installation and maintenance of
line cards (DECSA only).
• Automatic diagnosis on startup checks communications server operation prior
to use, increasing network reliability.
• For DECSA hardware, online card testing and replacement by customer decreases
repair time and minimizes disruption of communications.

2.65

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.29
Summary ofEthernet
Communications Servers

Hardware Type

DSRVB

DSRVC

DSRZA/
DFMZA

DECSA

Server Type

Terminal Server

Router

Remote
Terminal Server

Router

Gateways
DECnet/
SNA
Gateway

DECserver
200

DECrouter
200

MlJ:X:server100/
DECmuxll

DECnet
Router

DECnet
Router/:X:.25
Gateway

Number
ofLinesl Maximum
Throughput

8@19.2K bis

16@ 19.2K bis

32@
19.2K bis
8@56K bis
2@250K bis
1 @SOOK bis

X.25-1
@19.2K bis
2@9.6K bis
DDCMP-6
@19.2K bis

2@56K bis

Server Product

MultiCPlJ Access

YES

Modem Control

MC
version-YES
DL version-NO

FULL

Protocols

Asynchronous

Asynchronous
DDCMP

Asynchronous

DDCMP

DDCMP
X.25 (LAPB)

SDLC

Downline Load
Host Support 1

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-UMDECnet-ULTRIX
PLUS, DECnetMicroRSX,
DECnet-10120,
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-VAX,
DECnetVAX,
DECnetllM-PLUS,
DECnet-UM,
DECnet-UMDECnetMicroRSX,
PLUS
DECnet-ULTRIX,

DECnet-VAX 4

DECnet-VAX3

Operational
Host Support 1

VMS,
Micro VMS,
RSX-UM-PLUS,
Micro RSX,
ULTRIX-32 2
ULTRIX-32m 2
TOPS-10120

Any Phase IV
DECnet node

VMS,
Micro VMS,
RSX-11M-PLUS,
MicroRSX,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-32m,
TOPS-20

VMS (certain
CPUs only)

VMS,
Micro VMS,
(MicroVAX II
only)

Primary
Buying Reason

Connection to
non-LAT hosts,
modem control;
DEC 423 connecti on

Cost-effective
PC-to-Ethernet
connection

Efficient remote
Connects Phase III MultiCPU access
to PSDNs; dediterminal connecnodes and wide
tion; low price per area networks to
cated function
line
Ethernet; host
CPU off-loading
of communications processing

Any Phase III or
IV DECnet node

Multivendor
network communications

1 The Terminal Server and the DECnetlSNA Gateway support only DECnet Phase IV implementations while the DECnet Router and the DECnet

Routerlx.25 Gateway support any Phase III or Phase IV implementation.
2 LAT support.
3 Not supported on MicroVAX 1.
4

Supported on VAX-111730, VAX-111750, and vAx-111780 series.

2.66 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Ordering Information

Figure 2.31
Components ofa
Communications Server

All communications servers are made up of components that must be
ordered separately.

Software

Hardware

<
Communications
Server
Country
Kit

1------~>

Line Card
Cables*

*DECSA hardware only.
To order an Ethernet Communications Server, follow these steps.

Step 1-0btain the prerequisite network hardware and software.
• All Ethernet physical channel hardware (for example, coaxial cable, terminators).
• An H4000 Transceiver (or DELNI) and a transq:iver cable for each server.
• At least one Phase IV DECnet host for downline-loading the server software and
running a supported operating system (refer to product description).

Step 2-Select the type of Ethernet Communications Server.
• Terminal Server.
• DECnet Router Server.
• DECrouter 200.
• DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway.
• DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Step 3-Specify and order the components of the desired Communications
Server. The components that must appear as line items on a customer's
order are:
• Server hardware.
• Server software (See Step 4).
• Interface cables.
• Country kit (included with some servers).
• Add-on optional line cards and line card cables (available only on some servers).

Step 4-Specify and order server software licenses and distribution kit. Consult
the appropriate Software Product Description (SPD). A software license is
required for each terminal server unit.
Terminal Server Overview

Terminal servers provide a cost-effective and flexible way to logically connect
terminals to hosts in an Ethernet LAN. Each terminal connected to a terminal
server can access services running on service nodes connected to the same
Ethernet (refer to Prerequisite Software for supported hosts). Terminal servers
connect asynchronous terminals at speeds up to 19,200 bits per second to local
Ethernet hosts that implement the Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol.

2.67

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Digital offers the following terminal server products:
• DECserver 200-an eight line server which consists ofDECserver 200 vl.O or later
software downline loaded into DSRVB hardware. The DECserver 200 has a version
with modem control (Mc) and a DEC423 version for use with the DECconnect
Communications System (DL).
• Muxserver 100/DECmux II-a 16 line remote server which consists of MUXserver
100 v2.0 software downline loaded into DSRZA hardware, and a remote multiplexer, the DFMZA.
Server software, including diagnostics, is downline-loaded into the server from
a load host. In the event of hardware or software malfunction, the unit will
attempt to upline-dump the memory image (for later analysis) and automatically reload the software.
The function performed by these terminal servers is similar to that offered by
traditional terminal data switches (for example, Gandalf™ or Micom ™).The
difference is that these terminal servers handle terminal communications from
the terminal to the host over a single Ethernet host interface, while a traditional
switch requires multiple terminal line connections. This results in a significant
reduction in cost per line when using terminal servers, especially when cabling,
host power, and packaging expenses are factored into the overall cost of
network terminal connection.
In a vAxcluster environment, terminal servers add significantly to maintaining high availability to the cluster. Features such as login load balancing, automatic login failover, and multi-session terminal connections provide greater
user productivity.
Terminal servers support VT, LN, LA and LQ series terminal devices as well
as Digital devices that run in VT100 compatibility mode (for example, the
DEcmate II and III, the Rainbow personal computer, and the Professional
300 Series computers).
Terminals connected to terminal servers can access remote DECnet nodes
through intervening DECnet Phase IV routing nodes on the same Ethernet.
They can also connect to vAx/vMs host systems on Ethernet running the
appropriate software access routines and thus access a DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway or DECnet/SNA Gateway. Note that a host does not have to be running
DECnet to communicate with the terminal servers. However, DECnet must be
running on at least one host connected to the same Ethernet in order to
downline load the terminal server.

Printer Support

A terminal server used for printer applications provides a cost-effective way to
distribute a printer or a collection of printers in an Ethernet LAN. Each printer
connected to a server can be shared between multiple VMS hosts connected to
the same Ethernet. A terminal server can connect asynchronous printers at
speeds up to 19.2 K/bs to local Ethernet hosts that implement the LAT protocol.
Refer to the appropriate terminal server SPD for a list of printers supported.

2.68 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Features

The following features are common to Digital terminal servers:
• Multiple Sessions-Users can establish and maintain multiple sessions to
several service nodes. Only one session is active at a time and users can access
the different sessions without repeating a login dialog.
• Load Balancing-When more than one node offers the same service, the server
will connect to the node with the highest rating for the service desired. This
rating is based on the current loading on the nodes that offer the service.
• Automatic Session Failover-The server provides increased reliability and
redundancy by allowing terminals logically connected to a failed host to access
other hosts on the Ethernet.
• Terminal Request Management-The server eliminates terminal "blocking" (a
limitation of data switches) by managing multiple terminal requests logically
instead of physically. The LAT software allows the terminal server to effectively
"multiplex" many terminal access requests over a single physical line.
• Terminal Connection Management-Users can establish a logical connection
(session) to any local service node that implements the LAT protocol. Users
connect to the services offered rather than the node itself. All the standard
system utilities and applications supported by the node are available to the user.
• Security-The server provides multiple levels of security for terminal access to
network hosts, preventing unauthorized users from accessing network resources.
• PC File Transfer: PFT Profile Transfer for PRO Series Computers, cx/nx File
Transfer for DECmate II and III, poly-xFR File Transfer for Rainbow and IBM
Personal Computers.

Figure 2.32
Ethernet LAN Configuration
Using Terminal Servers
Printer
DEC

DEC

MUX

Printer
Modem

ULTRIX-32

TOPS-20

VMS

VAX 8800

DECSYSTEM
-20

VAX 8700

Foreign
Host

PDP-11/84

RSX-11M-Plus

Digital
Non-LAT
Host
2.69

Ethernet

Micro
VAX II

Micro VMS

Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 200

The DECserver 200 is a network terminal switch for Ethernet local area
networks. It supports the simultaneous operation of up to 8 terminals at
speeds up to 19,200 bits per second full duplex. Two versions of the DECserver
200 are available: DECserver 200/Mc and DECserver 200/DL. Each version is described below.
The following capabilities are supported by the DECserver 200/Mc
(Modem Control):
• RS-232-c line interface.
• Modem Control-The DECserver 200 provides modem support for asynchronous modems (Digital's modems or BELL 103, 212, and 2400 baud modems).
• LED enhanced visual communication monitors.

DECserver 200/MC

• Connection to Non-LAT Hosts-The DECserver 200/MC provides transparent
logical terminal connections to hosts that do not implement the LAT protocol. In
this type of configuration, the DEcserver 200 becomes the Ethernet connection
and protocol support for these hosts. Users can access LAT and non-LAT hosts
directly via a DECserver 200. A host that supports XON/XOFF, ASCII standards,
and RS-232-c interfaces can be connected to the DECserver 200.

DECserver 200/DL

The DECserver 200/DL (Data Leads) has a single 36 pin DECconnect connector
capable of supporting 8 DECconnect ports (DEC423). A special DECconnect cable
is required to connect the DEcserver 200/DL to equipment which can interface to
DEcconnect signals. DEcserver 200/DL does not support modems or applications
with devices which require modem control signals. The DECserver 200/DL is
intended for applications utilizing the DECconnect system or any applications
using local terminals and printers. Refer to Section 5 for more information.

Features

Refer to Terminal Server Overview in this section for DECserver 200 features.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height: 11. 75 cm (4.63 in)
Width: 48. 90 cm (19.25 in)
Depth: 32.07 cm (12.63 in)
Weight: 5.44 kg (12 lbs)
Environmental Class: c (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Prerequisite Hardware

• All Ethernet physical channel hardware.
• Either an H4000 Transceiver, a DELNI, or DESTA and transceiver drop cable.
• For DECserver 200/DL, the H3104-B SER adapter kit.

Prerequisite Software

• DECserver 200 software must be downline-loaded from one of the following
Ethernet load hosts: DECnet-VAX, DECnet-HM-PLUS, DECnet-Micro/RSX, DECnet10/20, DECnet-ULTRIX.
See the Software Product Description for the version number requirements.
• For service node support, one of the following operating systems is required:
VMS, MicroVMS, RSX-HM-PLUS with DECnet-HM-PLUS, Micro/RSX with DECnetMicro/RSX, UCTRIX-32, UCTRIX-32m, TOPS-10/20.
See the Software Product Description for the version number requirements.
• For printer support, service node software is included on the DEcserver 200
software distribution media (VMS only).

2. 70 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Optional Software

The Terminal Server Manager/VMS (TSM) is a software tool that allows a user at
a VAX host to remotely observe and control Digital terminal servers anywhere
in an extended local area network. For more information, refer to Section 3,

Network and System Management Products.
Table 2.30
DECserver 200 Hardware
Order Codes

Terminal Cables

Option

Order Code

8-line DECserver 200, 12ov (supports 8 EIA RS232 physical
terminal connections). Includes country kit.

DSRVB-AA

8-line DECserver 200, 12ov (supports 8 DECconnect terminal
connections [DEC423]). Includes country kit.

DSRVB-BA

8-line DECserver 200, 240V (supports 8 EIA RS232 physical
terminal connections). Requires country kit.

DSRVB-AB

8-line DECserver 200, 240V (supports 8 DECconnectterminal
connections [DEC423]). Requires country kit.

DSRVB-BB

To connect terminals to the DECserver 200, order the following cables. When
ordering cables refer to Communications Cables in Section 4 for cable options and
be sure to specify the length, for example, BC22F-25:
DECserver 200/Mc
• BC22E-Full modem 16-wire cable for moderµ connections.
• BC22F-Full modem 25-wire cable for modem connections.
• BC22R-Recommended null modem cable for host systems and other devices,
including those which utilize CTS/RTS flow control.
• BC17D-Null modem cable for host systems and other devices which do not
utilize CTS/RTS flow control.
DECserver 200/DL: The DECserver 200/DL requires the H3104-B SER adapter kit,
which includes required cables.

DECserver 200
Country Kits

Table 2.31
DECserver 200 Country Kit
Order Codes

The u.s. DECserver 200 (DSRVB-AA and DSRVB-BA) includes a country kit. The
non-u.s. DECserver 200 (osRVB-AB and DSRVB-BB) requires a country kit. Each
country kit includes a power cord, hardware manual, and rack mounting
brackets.

Country

Order Code

Australia
Belgium, Finland, France, Holland,
Norway, Spain, Sweden
Canada (English and French)
Denmark
Germany
Italy
India
Israel
Japan
New Zealand
Switzerland (French and German)
United Kingdom
United States*

DSRVB-KZ
DSRVB-LA
DSRVB-KA
DSRVB-KD
DSRVB-KG
DSRVB-KI
DSRVB-LJ
DSRVB-KT
DSRVB-KJ
DSRVB-KZ
DSRVB-LB
DSRVB-KE
DSRVB-KA

*The U.S. versions of the DECserver 200 (DSRVB-AA and BA) include a country kit. A U.S.
country kit is also available as a separate line item.

2.71

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.32
DECserver 200 Soflware
Order Codes for VMS/Micro VMS

Option

Order Code

Load Host
Operating System

VMS/MicroVMS

License Options:
A license is required
for each DECserver 200.

VAX11/750

VAX11/780
VAX11/782 2
VAX11/785

VAX8200
VAX83003

VAXSSOO
VAX8550
VAXS7oo•

II'

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAXSSOO

Single-use license

QZZ06-UZ

QDZ06-UZ

QEZ06-UZ

Q*Z06-UZ

Q#Z06-UZ

QKZ06-UZ

QMZ06-UZ

QZZ06-H3
QZZ06-H5
QZZ06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ
QZZ06-!3
QZZ06-!5

QDZ06-HG
QDZ06-HM
QDZ06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ
QDZ06-IG
QDZ06-IM

QEZ06-HM
QEZ06-HY
QEZ06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ
QEZ06-IM
QEZ06-IY

Q*Z06-HM
Q*Z06-H3
Q*Z06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ

Q#Z06-HM

QKZ06-HM

QMZ06-HM

Q#Z06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ

QKZ06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ
QKZ06-IM

QMZ06-HZ
QMZ06-GZ

QZZ06-93
QZZ06-95
QZZ06-83
QZZ06-85
QZZ06-33
QZZ06-35

QDZ06-9G
QDZ06-9M
QDZ06-8G
QDZ06-8M
QDZ06-3G
QDZ06-3M

QEZ06-9M
QEZ06-9Y
QEZ06-8M
QEZ06-8Y

Q*Z06-9M
Q*Z06-93
Q*Z06-8M
Q*Z06-83
Q*Z06-3M
Q*Z06-3Y

Q#Z06-9M

QKZ06-9M

QMZ06-9M

Q#Z06-8M

QKZ06-8M

QMZ06-8M

Q#Z06-3M

QKZ06-3M

QMZ06-3M

Micro/RSX

RSX-11MPLUS

TOPS10/20

Micro PDP11/xx

PDP-11/xx

DECSYSTEM10/202

MicroVAX

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service
U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 5
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

QEZ06-3M
QEZ06-3Y

1 For MicroVAX I order codes, consult DECserver 200 Software Product Description.
2 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
3 = 5 for VAX 8200; 7 for VAX 8300.
4 # = 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8550 and VAX 8700.

5 For Non-u.s. service agreement codes, consult local Digital Sales Representative.

Table 2.33
DECserver 200 Soflware
Order Codes for ULTRIX, RSX, and TOPS

Option

Order Code

Load Host
Operating System

ULTRIX 32/32m

License Options: 1
A license is required
for each DECserver 200.

VAX8200
VAX8300 2

VAXSSOO

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAXSSSO
VAX8700
VAX8800 2

Single-use license

Q*Z14-UZ

Q9Z14-UZ

QKZ14-UZ

Q*Z14-UZ

QYZ06-UZ

QRZ06-UZ

Q*Z06-AM
Q*Z06-DZ

Q*Z14-HG
Q*Z14-HM
Q*Z14-HZ
QLZ14-GZ

Q9Z14-HM

QKZ14-HM

Q*Z14-HM

QKZ14-HZ
QLZ14-GZ

Q*Z14-HZ
QLZ14-GZ

QRZ06-HH
QRZ06-HM
QRZ06-HZ
QRZ06-GZ

Q*Z06-HM

Q9Z14-HZ
QLZ14-GZ

QYZ06-H3
QYZ06-HS
QYZ06-HZ
QYZ06-GZ

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution & documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only

1 Refer to SPD 27.54 for VAX-11 order codes.

* = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 2 for VAX 8550 and VAX 8700, M for VAX 8800, T for TOPS-20, and H for TOPS-10.
2. 72

Ethernet

Q*Z06-HZ
QLZ06-GZ

Ethernet Communications Servers

MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Remote Terminal Server

The Muxserver 100/DECmux II Remote Terminal Server connects up to 16
remote asynchronous terminals, personal computers, and printers through a
pair of modems and a leased phone line to a local Ethernet. The MUXserver 100
connects to the Ethernet LAN and functions as a terminal server for remote
devices. The DECmux II connects devices at the remote site and functions with
the Muxserver JOO as a statistical multiplexer to send data to the Ethernet LAN.

Features

The Muxserver 100/oEcmux n reduces monthly phone charges by concentrating
data over one leased phone line, and it offers an efficient and low-cost method
for multiplexing remote devices over one leased phone line.
Refer to Terminal Server Overview in this section for other Muxserver
100 features.

Specifications

Physical Size:

Muxserver 100:

DECmux II:

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

9.52 cm (3. 75 in)
45. 73 cm (18 in)
30.48 cm (12 in)
6.8 kg (15 lb)

11.43 cm (4.5 in)
34.29 cm (13.5 in)
22.35 cm (8.8 in)
2.95 kg (6.5 lb)

Power Requirements:

Configurations

Low-range line voltage
High-range line voltage
Frequency tolerance
Maximum AC watts drawn
Maximum heat dissipation

100 Vac-120 Vac (DSRZA-BA and DFMZA-BA)
200 Vac-240 Vac (DSRZA-BB and DFMZA-BB)
50/60 ± 3 Hz, 50/60 ± 3 Hz
50W(Muxserver100), 33 W (oEcmux n)
393 Btu/h (Muxserver 100), 210 Btu/h (DEcmux II)

Environmental Class
(See Appendix B for details.)

Each DECmux II can connect up to 8 remote devices. However, since each
MUXserver 100 can accept up to 16 channels, 2 DEcmux IIs can be linked to 1
Muxserver 100. Also, each Muxserver 100 can accept up to two composite
links. A Muxserver 100 is linked to a DECmux II through a leased phone line
and 2 external modems operating at a maximum speed of19,200 bps. Configurations include:
• 16 Users at One Site: 2 DEcmux IIs can be linked at the same remote site with an
RS232 cable (maximum distance: 50 feet) or an RS422 cable (maximum distance:
3,280 feet) to accommodate up to 16 users.
• 16 Users at Two Sites: Each site can have up to 8 users connected to a DECmux II.
Each site connects through a phone link to one Muxserver 100.
• Two Sites with a Route-Through: If there are two separate remote sites that are
located close to each other, one site can be routed through the second site by
linking 2 DECmux IIs with 2 modems and a leased phone line. Each site can have
a maximum ofs users.
• One Local Site and One Remote Site: If only 8 remote devices need Ethernet
connection, 8 local devices can also be linked to the Muxserver 100 through
a DEcmux 11. The Muxserver 100 is locally linked to a DECmux nwith an
RS422 cable.

2.73

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Printer

Figure 2.33
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Configuration

Printer
DEC
MUX

DEC
MUX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
H4000

Prerequisite Hardware

• 1 Muxserver 100 with 1 or 2 DECmux ns plus user port cables.
• 1 3002 or equivalent leased phone line and 1 pair of external modems and cables,
where needed.
• All Ethernet physical channel hardware.
• An H4000, DECOM, DESTA, or DELNI and transceiver drop cable.

Prerequisite Software

• To downline load MUXserver 100 Software, one or more load hosts on the
Ethernet must run one of the following:
DECNET-VAX
DECnet-HM-PLUS
DECnet-Micro/RSX
DECnet-ULTRIX
See the Software Product Description for the version number requirements.
• Service node support is available on the following operating systems:
VMS
Micro VMS
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
ULTRIX-32
ULTRIX-32m
TOPS-20
Remote printer support is only available for VMS and MicroVMS
operating systems.
See the Software Product Description for the software version
number requirements.

Optional Software

2.74

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.34
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Hardware Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Muxserver 100, 120 volt (supports 16 remote devices
connected to DECmux II ports). Includes u. s. country kit.

DSRZA-BA

DECmux II, 120 volt (supports 8 EIA RS232 terminal, PC, or
printer connections). Includes u.s. country kit.

DFMZA-BA

Muxserver 100, 240 volt (supports 16 remote devices
connected to DECmux II ports). Requires country kit.

DSRZA-BB

DECmux II, 240 volt (supports 8 EIA RS232 terminal, PC, or
printer connections). Requires country kit.

DFMZA-BA

Table 2.35
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Software Order Codes for VMS/Micro VMS
Option

Order Code

Load Host
Operating System

VMS/MicroVMS

License Options:
A license is required
for each MUXserver 100.
Single-use license

VAX11/780
VAXll/782 1
VAX 11/785

VAX8200
VAX8300 2

VAX8500
VAX 8550 3

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8700
VAX8800 3

QZZAW-UZ

QEZAW-UZ

Q*ZAW-UZ

Q#ZAW-UZ

QKZAW-UZ

Q#ZAW-UZ

MicroVAX

Materials and
Service Options:

------

QEZAW-HM Q*ZAW-H3
QEZAW-HY Q*ZAW-HM

Q#ZAW-HM QKZAW-HM Q#ZAW-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

QZZAW-H3
QZZAW-HS
QZZAW-HZ

QEZAW-HZ

Q*ZAW-HZ

Q#ZAW-HZ

QKZAW-HZ

Q#AW6-HZ

Documentation only

QLZAW-GZ

Micro/RSX

RSX-11MPLUS

Distribution and documentation

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11 /782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2 = 5 for VAX 8200; 7 for VAX 8300.
3 # = 2 for VAX 8550 or VAX 8700; M for VAX 8800; 9 for VAX 8500.

Table 2.36
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Software Order Codes far ULTRIX and RSX
Option

Order Code

Load Host
Operating System

ULTRIX 32/32m

License Options:
A license is required
for each MUXserver 100.

MicroVAX
II

Single-use license

QZZCK-UZ QEZCK-UZ Q*ZCK-UZ Q#ZCK-UZ QKZCK-UZ Q#ZCK-UZ QYDAW-UZ QJDAW-UZ

VAX 11/780
VAX 11/782 1 VAX 8200
VAX 11/785 VAX 8300 2

VAX 8500
VAX 8550 3

VAX 8600
VAX 8650

VAX 8700
VAX 8800 3

MicroPDP11/xx
PDP-11/xx

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution &
documentation

QZZCK-H3 QEZCK-HM Q*ZCK-H3 Q#ZCK-HM QKZCK-HM Q#ZCK-HM QYDAW-H3 QJDAW-HH
QZZCK-HS QEZCK-HY Q*ZCK-HM
QYDAW-H5 QJDAW-HM

Software revision
right-to-copy

QZZCK-HZ QEZCK-HZ Q*ZCK-HZ Q#ZCK-HZ QKZCK-HZ Q#ZCK-HZ QYDAW-HZ QJDAW-HZ

Documentation only

QLZCK-GZ QLZCK-GZ QLZCK-GZ QLZCK-GZ QLZCK-GZ QLZCK-GZ QYDAW-GZ QJDAW-GZ

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2* = 5 for VAX 8200; 7 for VAX 8300.
.
3 # = 2 for VAX 8550 or VAX 8700; M for VAX 8800; 9 for VAX 8500.

-~------------------------------~

2. 75

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Required cables

To configure the Muxserver 100/nEcmux II, order the following cables. When
ordering cables refer to Communications Cables in Section 4 for cable options and
be sure to specify the length, for example, BC22F-25.

Cable
Modem cable to connect external
modem to Muxserver 100 or
DECmuxII.
Null modem cable to connect 2
DECmux IIS together.
Null modem cable to connect terminals, personal computers, or printers
to DEcmux II user ports.

Order Code

BC22F
BC17D

BC22D

Please Note: RS422 cables are not sold as a Digital standard product. However,
documentation is provided so that customers can make their own cables or
Digital Field Service can custom-make them for an additional charge.
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Country Kits

Table 2.37
MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Country Kit Order Codes

The u.s. Muxserver 100/DECmux II (nsRZA-BA/DFMZA-,BA) includes a u.s./
Canada-English/French country kit. The non-u.s. Muxserver 100/DEcmux II
(nsRzA-BB/DFMZA-BB) requires a country kit. Each country kit includes a power
cord, hardware documentation, and country-specific items. Be sure to order the
appropriate country kit as a separate line item.

Country

Order Code

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English and French)
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
India
Israel
Japan
New Zealand
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (French and German)
United Kingdom
United States*

DSRZA-KZ
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-KA
DSRZA-KD
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-KG
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-KI
DSRZA-LJ
DSRZA-KT
DSRZA-KJ
DSRZA-KZ
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-LA
DSRZA-LB
DSRZA-KE
DSRZA-KA

*The u. s. versions of the MUXserver 100 (DSRZA-:BA) include a country kit. Au. s.
country kit is also available as a separate line item.

2.76 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

DECrouter 200

The DEcrouter 200 provides communications between systems running DECnet
software and systems on Ethernet-based DECnet networks. Systems that can
connect to the DECrouter 200 include the Digital Rainbow, the Digital Professional 300 series, the IBM PC, IBM PC AT, or any system running asynchronous
DECnet-VAX or DECnet-RSX.
The DECrouter 200 handles up to eight local and remote connections at line
speeds up to 19.2 Kbps. It has a maximum throughput rate of170 packets
per second when all eight lines are running at maximum speed. (For more
information on performance, refer to Appendix A.)
The DEcrouter 200 communications server software runs on a dedicated hardware base (the DSRvc) to provide the routing functions for up to eight DECnet
Phase IV endnodes. It performs the routing functions on the Ethernet to allow
Phase IV endnodes not directly connected to the Ethernet to communicate with
directly-connected Phase IV hosts. The DECrouter 200 can also be the designated
router on the Ethernet, allowing endnodes to communicate with nodes off the
Ethernet.
The DECrouter 200 implements Phase IV DECnet asynchronous DDCMP routine
and network management. It can be used to connect to Phase III nodes to
provide Phase III networks with connectivity to Phase IV Ethernet nodes.
The DECrouter 200 supports intra-area (Level 1) routing for transporting messages between nodes; it does not support inter-area (Level 2) routing. The
DECrouter 200 transports messages between Phase III or Phase IV routing and
endnodes in the same area. Endnodes connected directly to an Ethernet must
use the DECrouter 200 or Phase IV host-routing nodes on the same Ethernet for
message routing off that Ethernet.

Features

• Eight asynchronous lines with dial-in capability
• Supports standard RS232 connections, ThinWire connections (using the DESTA
Ethernet Station Adapter), and standard Ethernet connections
• Supports Phase IV enhancements (path-splitting, out-of-order packet caching)
• Provides full network management
• Includes a monitor that shows such useful data as line utilization and speeds,
other nodes on the network, and the designated router

Installation and Host System
Configurations

The DECrouter 200 can be downline loaded from a DECnet-VAX or DECnetULTRIX system running on any valid MicroVAX II, VAX-11/730, VAX-11/750,
VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8550,
VAX 8600, VAX 8650, VAX 8700, or VAX 8800 system configurations. (Note that
ULTRIX and DECnet-ULTRIX do not support the VAX-11/782 configuration.)

Prerequisite Hardware

A valid Ethernet configuration is required to downline load the DECrouter 200.
The load host for the DECrouter 200 must be DECnet Phase IV Ethernet host
with Ethernet controller, and must be connected to the same Ethernet segment
as the DECrouter 200.
The load host must have one of the following devices to read the distribution
medium: 1600 bpi magnetic tape, RX50 floppy diskette, or TK50 tape cartridge.

2. 77

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Prerequisite Software

The software must be downline loaded by one of the following systems:
• VAX/VMS with DECnet-VAX, V4.2 or later
• MicroVMS with DECnet-MicroVMS, v4.2 or later
• UITRIX-32, Vl.2 or later, and DECnet-UITRIX, Vl.1 or later
• UITRIX-32m, Vl.2 or later, and DECnet-UITRIX V1.1 or later
For more information, refer to the Software Product Description (SPD) for the
DECrouter 200 V1 .o (27. 72.00) and for the appropriate load host(s).

Table 2.38
DECrouter 200 Hardware
Order Codes

Cable Requirements

Description

Order Code

DEcrouter 200, RS-232 version, 120 V

DSRVC-AA

DEcrouter 200, RS-232 version, 240 V

DSRVC-AB

One of the following cables must be used to connect to the DECrouter 200
asynchronous port:
• BC22D-EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.24 null modem cable used to connect directly to
locally situated nodes that do not require modem control signals.
• BC17D-EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.24 null modem cable used to connect directly to
locally situated nodes that require modem control signals.
• BC22E-EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.24 cable used to connect to modems and modemtype devices.
The DECrouter 200 hardware (DSRVC) requires an Ethernet transceiver cable to
connect the integral Ethernet port to the transceiver. The transceivers to which
the DSRVC may be connected include:
• H4000-Ethernet transceiver (requires a BNE3(A,B,c,or n) up to 50 meters, or a
BNE4(c or 2) up to 12.5 meters).
• DELNI-Local Network Interconnect (requires a BNE3(A,B,c,or n) up to 50
meters, or a BNE4(c or 2) up to 12.5 meters).
• DESTA-ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (requires a BNE(H,K,L,or M) up to 50
meters, or a BNE4(c or 2) up to 12.5 meters).
• DECOM-Broadband Ethernet transceiver (requires a BNE3(A,B,c,or n) up to 50
meters, or a BNE4(c or 2) up to 12.5 meters).

Table 2.39
DECrouter 200 Country Kits

Description

Order Code

DECrouter 200 Country Kit

DSRVC-K*
DSRVC-L*

*Refer to the Price List for more information.

2. 78 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.40
DECrouter 200 Software Order Codes for

Option

Order Code

License Options:
A license is required
for each CPU.

MicroVAX
VAX8200
II
VAX8300
VAXVAX-11/700 VAX 8500
station II
Series
VAX 8550

Single-use license

Q*Z43-UZ Q*Z43-UZ Q#Z43-UZ QKZ43-UZ Q#Z43-UZ

VMS/Micro VMS

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8700
VAX8800

Initial license
(primary and
cluster)

Q#Z43-1P

Monthly
availability
(primary)

Q#Z43-JP

Materials and
Service Options:

Distribution and
documentation

Q*Z43-H3 Q*Z43-HM Q#Z43-HM QKZ43-HM Q#Z43-HM
Q*Z43-HS

Software revision
right-to-copy

Q*Z43-HZ Q*Z43-HZ Q#Z43-HZ QKZ43-HZ Q#Z43-HZ

Documentation
only

QLZ43-GZ QLZ43-GZ QLZ43-GZ QLZ43-GZ

QLZ43-GZ

Q*Z43-I3
Q*Z43-I5

Q*Z43-IM

Q#Z43-IM

DECsupport service

Q*Z43-93
Q*Z43-95

Q*Z43-9M Q#Z43-9M QKZ43-9M Q#Z43-9M

Basic service

Q*Z43-83
Q*Z43-85

Q*Z43-8M Q#Z43-8M QKZ43-8M Q#Z43-8M

Q*Z43-33
Q*Z43-35

Q*Z43-3M Q#Z43-3M QKZ43-3M Q#Z43-3M

Installation service

Q#Z43-IM QKZ43-IM

U.S. Software
Product Service
Agreements 1 :

Self-maintenance
service

= z for MicroVAX n; 4 for vAxstation n and vAxstation n/GPx; c for
VAX-11/730; D for VAX-11/750; E for VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, and VAX-11/785. For
software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
# = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8550 and 8700, and
M for VAX 8800.
1 For Non-u.s. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

2.79

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.41
DECrouter 200 Software Order Codes for
ULTRIX-32 and ULTRIX-32m

Option

Order Code

License Options:
A license is required
for each CPU.

MicroVAX
VAX8200
II
VAX8300
VAX-11/700 VAX 8500
VAXstation II
Series
VAX8550

Single-use license

Q*Z51-UZ Q*Z51-UZ Q#Z51-UZ QKZ51-UZ Q#Z51-UZ

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8700
VAX8800

Initial license
(primary and
cluster)

Q#Z51-1P

Monthly
availability
(primary)

Q#Z51-JP

Materials and
Service Options:

Distribution and
documentation

Q*Z51-H5

Software revision
right-to-copy

Q*Z51-HZ Q*Z51-HZ

Q#Z51-HZ QKZ51-HZ Q#Z51-HZ

Documentation
only

QLZ51-GZ QLZ51-GZ

QLZ51-GZ

Installation service

Q*Z51-I5

Q*Z51-IM

Q#Z51-IM

QKZ51-IM

Q#Z51-IM

DECsupport service

Q*Z51-95

Q*Z51-9M

Q#Z51-9M QKZ51-9M Q#Z51-9M

Basic service

Q*Z51-85

Q*Z51-8M

Q#Z51-8M QKZ51-8M Q#Z51-8M

Self-maintenance
service

Q*Z51-35

Q*Z51-3M

Q#Z51-3M QKZ51-3M

Q*ZSl-HM Q#Z51-HM QKZ51-HM Q#Z51-HM

U.S. Software
Product Service
Agreements 1 :

Q#Z51-3M

* = z for MicroVAX n; 4 for VAXstation II and vAxstation n/GPx; c for
VAX-11/730; D for VAX-11/750; E for VAX-11/780, and VAX-11/785.
# = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8550 and 8700, and
M for VAX 8800.
1 For Non-u. s. service agreements, consult a local Digital Saks Representative.

2.80

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

DECnet Router Server

The DECnet Router performs DECnet routing functions that connect DECnet
Phase III or Phase IV local or remote hosts to the Ethernet or that connect two
independent Ethernets.
DECnet Routers implement Phase IV DECnet adaptive routing algorithms and
network management. Through the use of Phase IV DECnet protocols, DECnet
computer networks can contain up to 63 areas, each containing up to 1,023
nodes with proper network planning. DECnet Routers offer a cost-effective
means of building such networks while off-loading the routing function from
network hosts.

Features

• Hierarchical routing for increased network efficiency.
• Offloads the routing function from Ethernet hosts.
• Allows Phase III nodes to connect to an Ethernet.
• Reduces cabling complexity and increases network reliability.
• Offers full network management capabilities.
• Allows large network support.
The DECnet Router Server is a dedicated communications system in a DECnet
network. It performs Phase IV adaptive routing for nodes on an Ethernet. As a
routing node, the DECnet Router can receive and forward messages to nodes in
other Ethernets and remote networks. The DECnet Router connects directly
to an Ethernet to provide adaptive routing to remote nodes connected via
its asynchronous lines. These nodes can be local or remote and Phase III or
Phase IV DECnet routing or end nodes.
The DECnet Router supports both intra-area (Level 1) and inter-area (Level 2)
routing for transporting messages between nodes. These nodes can be remote
Phase III/IV routing nodes or end nodes in the same area or a different area, or
other DECnet Router Servers connected to other Ethernet LANs in the same area
or different areas. End nodes connected directly to an Ethernet LAN must use
DECnet Router Servers or Phase IV host routing nodes on the same LAN for
message routing off that LAN. A routing node is not required on an Ethernet
LAN if the end nodes connected to that LAN communicate only with each other.
However, if the Ethernet LAN directly connects nodes with different area
addresses, an area routing node is required to transport messages between
these areas. Use of the DECnet Router Server offloads certain communications
processing on those nodes that would otherwise serve as routing nodes on the
Ethernet LAN.
The DECnet Router supports direct connection of up to 16 low-speed synchronous EIA RS-232-c/ CCITT v. 28 interfaces, 32 low-speed asynchronous BIA
RS-232-C/CCITT v.28 interfaces (up to 19,200 bits per second FDX) or up to eight
high-speed synchronous CCITT v.35 interfaces (up to 56,000 bits per second
FDX). Please note that not all DECnet host systems support asynchronous
connection to the router, consult individual DECnet SPDS for supported configurations. The unit optionally supports a single 500,000-bit-per-second
connection, or two 250,000-bit-per-second connections through a synchronous
CCITT v.35 line interface.

2.81

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

The DECnet Router is Phase III compatible. This allows Ethernet nodes to
communicate with remote Phase III and Phase IV nodes connected to the server.
Network management for the DECnet Router includes facilities to:
• Control operation of the server.
• Monitor operation of the server.
• Troubleshoot server networking problems.
These activities are performed normally by one or more system managers from
Ethernet load hosts. All network management functions are performed from a
host node on the Ethernet, rather than from the server itself.
The Ethernet Communications Server software is loaded over the Ethernet from
a DECnet load host. All software, including diagnostics, is downline loaded into
the unit. In the event of hardware or software malfunction, the unit will attempt
to upline dump the DECnet Router memory image and automatically reload the
software across the network.
The DECnet Router provides modem support for Digital's DFlOO Series
synchronous modems, and the Bell 208A, 208B, 209, 212, or equivalents.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height: 41. 9 cm (16. S in)
Width: 64.8 cm (2S.S in)
Depth: SS. 9 cm (22. o in)
Weight: 39.9 kg (88.0 lb) for 16-line Terminal Server, Router, and Gateways
without line cards; 49. 9 kg (110.0 lb) for 32-line Terminal Server without
line cards
Power Requirements:
Low-range line voltage: 120 Vac nominal
90 to 128 (rms) single-phase, three-wire
High-range line voltage: 240 Vac nominal
180 to 2S6 (rms) single-phase, three-wire
Line current @120 Vac: 7.0 A, Switch selectable (DECSA-CA and DECSA-FA: 3.SA)
Line current@ 240 Vac: 3.S A, Switch selectable (DECSA-CA and DECSA-FA: l.7SA)
Frequency tolerance: 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum ac power consumption:
16-line Router, Gateways: 411 W
Maximum heat dissipation:
16-line Router, Gateways: 1417 BTu/h
Environmental Class: B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Prerequisite Hardware

• All Ethernet physical channel hardware (for example, coaxial cable
and terminators).
• An H4000 Transceiver (or a DELNI) and transceiver cable.

Prerequisite Soflware

The DECnet Router requires a Phase IV DECnet host to downline-load server
software. One or more of the following systems can be used as Ethernet hosts:
•VAX/VMS or MicrovAx/MicroVMS operating system with DECnet-VAX Phase IV
networking software.
• RSX-llM operating system with DECnet-UM or an RSX-llM-PLUS operating
system with DECnet-UM-PLUS Phase IV networking software.

2.82 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Figure 2.34
Ethernet LAN Configuration
Using a DECnet Router Server

Terminator

Corporate
Headquarters
(New York)

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Host

Manufacturing
(Houston)

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Table 2.42
DECnet Router
Server Hardware
Order Codes

Engineering
(Los Angeles)

Option

Order Code

DECnet router server unit and one-line synchronous
EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 line card (DCSAX-LA)

DECSA-EA

16-line router server unit and eight DCSAX-LC two-line
asynchronous line cards (supports 16 EIA RS-232-c/cCITT v.2~
physical terminal connections)

DE CSA-CA

32-line router server unit and 16 DCSAX-LC two line
asynchronous line cards (supports 32 EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28
physical terminal connections)

DECSA-DA

Upgrade kit

DCSAX-UA

2.83

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.43
DECnet Router Server
Software Order Codes

Option
License Options: A license is
required for each CPU.
Single-use license
Initial license
(primary & cluster)
Monthly availability
(primary)

Order Code

MicroVAX I

VAX-11/700
MicroVAX II Series1

VAX8200
VAX8300
VAX8500
VAX8551l2

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8700
VAX88003

RSX-11M
RSX-11M
-PLUS

QN725-UZ

QZ725-UZ

Q#725-UZ

QK725-UZ

Q+725-UZ

QP725-UZ

Q*725-UZ

Q#725-1P

Q+725-1P

Q#725-JP

Q+725-JP

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QN725-H3

Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service

QN725-HZ
QL725-GZ
QN725-13

QZ725-H3
QZ725-H5
QZ725-HZ
QL725-GZ
QZ725-13
QZ725-I5

Q*725-HH
Q*725-HM
Q*725-HZ
QL725-GZ
Q*725-IH
Q*725-IM

QZ725-93
QZ725-95
QZ725-83
QZ725-85
QZ725-33
QZ725-35

Q*725-9H
Q*725-9M
Q*725-8H
Q*725-8M
Q*725-3H
Q*725-3M

Q#725-HM
Q#725-HZ
QL725-GZ
Q#725-IM

QK725-HH
QK725-HM
QK725-HZ
QL725-GZ
QK725-IH
QK725-IM

Q+725-HM

QK725-9H
QK725-9M
QK725-8H
QK725-8M
QK725-3H
QK725-3M

Q+725-9M

Q+725-HZ
QL725-GZ
Q+725-IM

QP725-HH
QP725-HM
QP725-HZ
QL725-GZ
QP725-IH
QP725-IM

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 4
DECsupport service

QN725-93

Basic service

QN725-83

Self-maintenance service

QN725-33

Q#725-9M
Q#725-8M
Q#725-3M

Q+725-8M
Q+725-3M

QP725-9H
QP725-9M
QP725-8H
QP725-8M
QP725-3H
QP725-3M

* = D for VAX-11/750; E for VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, and VAX-11/785. For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a
multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2 # = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 9 for VAX 8500, and 2 for VAX 8550.
3 + = 2 for VAX 8700 and M for VAX 8800.
4 For Non-u.s. Service Agreements, consult local Digital Sales Representative.
1

2.84 Ethernet

·Ethernet Communications Servers

Cable Requirements

For local EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 connection to the DECnet Router, order BC17D
null modem cables. For remote connections, order BC17C extension cables
for DCSAX-LA EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 line cards, BC17E extension cables for
DCSAX-LB CCITT v.35 line cards (note: BC17E cable lengths shorter than 50 feet
may not work properly with Bell DDS modems), and BC22E extension cables
for DCSAX-LC EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 line cards. When ordering cables, be sure
to specify the length, for example, BC17c-25. Refer to Communications Cables in
Section 4 for cable order codes. All line card cables are fully shielded to comply
with FCC RFI/EMI specifications.

Caution: The connectors on the Digital-supplied cables are designed to attach to
the handle on each line card. For those customers who choose to use other cables
with a server, be advised that there is a restriction on the size and construction
of the cable connector housing as follows:
1. Maximum height of the connector housing is .610 inches.

2. Connectors with housings that extend beyond the face of the connector
cannot be used.
Should customers elect to use cables which violate the restrictions above, the
BC17L cable, a 4-foot adapter cable, is available for attaching to the DCSAX-LA line
cards with EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 interfaces, and the BC17L cable (a 4-foot
adapter cable) is available for attaching to the DCSAX-LC line cards with EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 interfaces.

DECnet Router Server
Country Kits

Table 2.44
DECnet Router Server
Country Kit Order Codes

Every DECnet Router requires a country kit. Each country kit contains a power
cord, hardware manuals in English, and labels with the front panel display in
the appropriate national language.

Country

Order Code

Australia
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
England
France

DECSK-AZ
DECSK-AA
DECSK-AC
DECSK-AE
DECSK-AP

Germany
Ireland
Japan
New Zealand
Spain

DECSK-AG
DECSK-AE
DECSK-AJ
DECSK-AZ
DECSK-AS

United States

DECSK-AA

2.85 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

DECnet Router Server Options

The DECnet Router, with one Protocol Assist Module (PAM), DECSA-EA, can be
expanded by adding up to seven additional DCSAX-LA, DCSAX-LB, and DCSAX-LC
line cards (up to the aggregate throughput limit of 500,000 bits per second for
the server). The DECSA-EA can be further expanded by adding a second PAM
(Communications Server Upgrade Kit, DCSAX-uA) and up to 15 additional
DCSAX-LA and DCSAX-LC line cards (up to the aggregate throughput limit of
500,000 bits per second for the server). The maximum number ofline cards
depends on line speed. The aggregate line speed for the DECnet Router
cannot exceed 500,000 bits per second. The following represent some valid
line configurations:
• Add up to seven DCSAX-LAIDCSAX-LC cards to a one PAM configuration; add up
to 15 DCSAX-LAIDCSAX-LC cards to a two PAM configuration.
•Add up to seven DCSAX-LBIDCSAX-LC cards at 56,000 bits per second each to a
one PAM configuration.
• Add eight DCSAX-LB cards at 56,000 bits per second each and discard
the DCSAX-LA line card included with the server hardware for a one
PAM configuration.
•Add two DCSAX-LB cards at 250,000 bits per second each and discard
the DCSAX-LA line card included with the server hardware for a one
PAM configuration.
•Add one DCSAX-LB card at 500,000 bits per second each and discard the
DCSAX-LA line card included with the server hardware for a one PAM
configuration.

For totally asynchronous applications, use the 32-line asynchronous DECSA-DA
(including 16 DCSAX-LC line cards). The aggregate line speed for the DECnet
Router cannot exceed 500,000 bits per second. Asynchronous and synchronous line cards can be mixed in DECnet Router Server configurations. In this
type of configuration, a single PAM can handle somewhere between eight and
16 lines. DECSA-CA can be expanded by adding a second PAM, Communications
Server Upgrade Kit (ocsAx-uA) and either up to eight synchronous (DCSAXLA!LB line cards) or 16 asynchronous (DCSAX-LC line cards). The actual number
of line cards supported depends upon the line speed and must be calculated
separately for each configuration. The DECSA-DA is a fully configured asynchronous line card unit and cannot be expanded.

Table 2.45
DECnet Router
Server Line Card
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

One-line synchronous EIA RS232-cl CCITT v. 28 line card at
speeds up to 19.2K bis (FDX!HDx)

DCSAX-LA

One-line synchronous CCITT V.35 line card at speeds up to
SOOK bis (FDXIHDX)

DCSAX-LB

Two-line asynchronous EIA RS-232-clccnT v.28 line card at
speeds up to 19.2K bis (FDX!HDx)

DCSAX-LC

2.86 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

DECnet/SNA Gateway

The DECnet/SNA Gateway allows users to share information between suitably
configured VAX/VMS or MicrbvAx/MicroVMS systems in a DECnet environment
and IBM systems in a Systems Network Architecture (sNA) environment.
The DECnet/SNA Gateway requires
• DECSA-FA hardware, and
• software downline-loaded from a DECnet Phase IV host.
• The DECnet/SNA Gateway works in conjunction with DECnet/sNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces residing on the host system.
Refer to Digital-to-IBM Communications Software in Section 3 for more
information.

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway

The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway is a variant of the DECnet Router Server. It
supports both DECnet lines (leased, dial-up, and hardwired) and international
standard x.25 lines in the same server. The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway
requires
• DECSA-EA hardware, and
• software downline-loaded from a DECnet Phase IV host.
•The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway works with VAX P.S.I. ACCESS software
residing on the host system.
Refer to Packetnet Communications Software in Section 3 for more
information.

2.87 Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Other Ethernet Servers
PrintServer 40

The PrintServer 40 is a high speed, shared resource, monochromatic laser
printer that provides print services on an Ethernet LAN to VMS or MicroVMS
client systems. It offers high quality text, graphics and scanned images. It
handles multiple paper sizes, uses multiple fonts and point sizes, and prints
directly on overhead transparencies or labels.
The PrintServer 40 employs PostScript;M the defacto industry standard, as its
page description language. PostScript enables the PrintServer 40 to produce
highly professional, complex documents with rotated type, textures, patterns,
halftones, and images in any size and shape. Also included are three translators
to convert data syntaxes of ANSI, ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014 ™ to PostScript,
thus ensuring compatibility between the customer's application and the PrintServer 40.
The PrintServer 40 is down-line loaded and managed from a VMS or MicrovMs
system running the VAX PrintServer 40 Supporting Host software. It is accessed
by suitably configured VMS or MicrovMs systems running the VAX PrintServer
40 Client software. For more information on the VAX PrintServer 40 Supporting
Host software, refer to SPD 27.68. For more information on the VAX PrintServer
40 Client software, refer to SPD 27.67.

Features

• Laser electrographic printing of up to 40 pages per minute on plain paper and
transparencies, using dry toner, heat and pressure fusing.
• High-speed Ethernet interconnect on VAX and MicroVAX systems.
• High-duty cycle-typically up to 100,000 pages per month.
• Accommodates multiple paper sizes, cut sheet paper, transparencies, and predrilled paper.
• Three paper input trays provide capacity of up to 2500 sheets of various media
combinations.
• Employs PostScript as its standard page description language.
• Multiple fonts with 29 resident PostScript typefaces, including the symbol/
math set.
•Resolution of300 by 300 dots per inch for text, graphics, and scanned images.
• Translates ANSI/sixels, ReG1s;M and Tektronix 4010/4014 protocols.

Prerequisite Software

• VAX/VMS operating system version 4.4 or higher
• DECnet-VAX

2.88

Ethernet

Ethernet Communications Servers

Table 2.46
PrintServer 40 Hardware Order Codes

Table 2.47
Print Server 40 Cable Order Codes

Option

Order Code

u.s. model: PrintServer 40, 40 ppm Ethernet printer,
220/240 V, 60 Hz, attached power cord. Client and Support
Host licenses are included.

LPS40-AA

International model: PrintServer 40, 40 ppm Ethernet
printer, 200/2os/220/230/240 V, 50 Hz, detached power cord.
Client and Support Host licenses are included.

LPS40-A3

Option

Order Code

For H4000/DELNI connection, right angle cables must be
ordered. The last two digits of the order code specify the
length of the cable, measured in feet.

Table 2.48
PrintServer 40 Software Order Codes

Ethernet PVC-jacketed right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3B-10
BNE3B-20
BNE3B-40

Ethernet teflon-jacketed right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3D-10
BNE3D-20
BNE3D-40

IEEE 802.3 PVC-jacketed right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

IEEE 802.3 teflon-jacketed right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3M-05
BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40

Option

Order Code

Client and Support Host licenses are packaged with the
PrintServer 40 configurations. However, software media
must be ordered separately with the initial PrintServer
purchase for a particular site:
VAX/VMS Support Host media on magtape

QL798-HM

vAx/vMs Support Host media on TK50

QL798-H5

VAX/VMS Support Host media on RX50

QL798-H3

VAx/vMs Client media on magtape

QL797-HM

VAX/VMS Client media on TK50

QL797-H5

VAX/VMS Client media on RX50

QL797-H3

Support Host documentation

QL798-GZ

Client documentation

QL797-GZ

2.89 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines
Introduction

This section focuses on guidelines for connecting terminals, communications
servers, and host systems to an Ethernet Local Area Network. The guidelines
follow a brief overveiw of configuration guidelines for Phase IV networks
including a discussion of connecting Phase III to Phase IV networks.
The information in this section, together with the preceding product descriptions, should help in preparing a preliminary network plan. Digital Sales
Representatives and Digital Network Specialists can give detailed network
planning assistance.

Phase IV Network Terms

Definitions of commonly used Phase IV network terms follow:

Full-fanction node. A node that originates, terminates, and acts as a transit node
for data. It can have multiple lines.
End node. A node that originates and terminates data but cannot act as a transit
node for data destined for other nodes: a single physical line. The difference
between full-function nodes and end nodes is strictly in the DECnet software.
Router. A dedicated communications server that acts as a transmit node for data
destined for other nodes. A router server is a combination of both hardware and
software. It is not an originating or terminating node. No applications software
can run on a router server.
DNA Phase IV Network
Configuration Guidelines

There are several elements of a DNA Phase IV network that affect performance
and memory use. For this reason, the following elements must be analyzed and
potentially limited:
• Number of router servers on one Ethernet cable.
• Number of full-function nodes in the network.
• Total number of nodes in the network.
The number of full-function nodes and router servers in a network should be
kept down because of the overhead associated with routing. Your goal is to
minimize the use of router servers and maximize the use of end nodes. End
nodes are less flexible than full-function nodes because they have a single
physical link, but they require less memory and are less expensive. By using
fewer routing nodes, you reduce system overhead and obtain better system
performance. The tradeoff is less configuration flexibility.
Table 2.49 shows architectural limits, aggressive limits, and conservative
limits for DNA Phase IV networks within one area. Architectural limits cannot
be exceeded under any circumstances. (While DNA Phase IV networks have
fixed architectural limits, most configurations will not be affected by them.)
Aggressive limits are not fixed but represent the point where careful analysis
of both performance and mc;:mory requirements are necessary. Conservative
limits represent a point that is easily achievable and where communications
performance is acceptable.
The aggressive and conservative limits included in this section are guidelines to
be used for network planning. If these guidelines are exceeded in order to meet
application requirements, careful analysis by a Network Coordinator or Software Specialist is necessary.

2.90 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Table 2.49
Phase IV Network Limits

Remote Multipoint Con.figurations and
Guidelines
Figure 2.35
Conventional Remote
Con.figuration

Architectural

Aggressive

Conservative

Number of router
servers/routing nodes
on one Ethernet

Total number of router
servers/routing nodes in
the network

1023

100

Total number of nodes
(end nodes and routing
nodes) in the network

1023

300

100

The conventional method of connecting remote VAX systems is shown in
Figure 2.35.

VAX 8250

VAX 8550

~
DECnet-VAX

Z"Mo~eiy-

7..

.£Modem./

DMB321

DECnet-VAX

The following guidelines apply only to remote multipoint configurations.
Local multipoint links should use more cost-effective Ethernet connections.
• Remote multipoint configurations reduce phone line costs in leased private-line
networks. They offer a substantial amount of savings for large, geographically
dispersed transaction-processing applications over the alternative dialup lines.
• No nested multipoint configurations should be used. This is not a technical
limitation, but rather a proven rule for customer success. Figure 2.36 illustrates
a non-nested configuration.
• Consult individual Software Product Descriptions for supported remote multipoint configurations (number of tributaries per control node, etc.).

Figure 2.36
Remote Multipoint
Non-nested Con.figurations

2.91

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Ci:~ide_li_n_e_s___________

Converting Networks
from Phase III to Phase IV

Figure 2.37
Typical Phase III Network

The following discussion is for those custOmers who already have Phase III
networks and are interested in converting them to Phase IV networks. Figure
2.37 illustrates a typical Phase III network that includes local and remote links
and a mix of CPUs and operating systems. Note the number of communications
interface devices, modems, and lines required to implement this network.

DECnet-VAX
(Phase III)

DECnet-11M-PLUS
(Phase III)
DMRJ1

VAX-11/730

DMRll

PDP-11/24
DMRll

DECnet-RT
(Phase III)

DMR11

VAX-11/780

DMRll

PDP-11/23
-PLUS

DECnet-VAX
(Phase III)

DMRll

PDP-11/24

VAX-11/780

DMRll

DMR11

DECnet-11M
(Phase III)

DECnet-VAX
(Phase III)

Today, among other applications, DECnet Phase III networks are used to provide
rapid, easy file transfer. The typical network in Figure 2.37 could be doing
extensive numerical analysis on the VAX-11/780 and vAx-11/750 systems, frontend data collection on the PDP-11/44 and PDP-11/24, and data collection on the
remote VAX-11/730 and PDP-11/23-PLUS. The primary terminal 1/0 occurs at
the vAx-11/780 systems to do final review of the collected data. In essence, the
major flow of DECnet data is from the bottbm to the top of the diagram.
Additional lines in the local portion of the network increase reliability.
In Phase IV, the maximum number of nodes in a DECnet network has been
increased to 1,023 (with area routing, this number expands to 64,000 nodes).
This increase is especially important because of the number of personal
computers that will be included in networks.
Figure 2.38 illustrates a Phase IV network with the same level of connectivity
as the Phase III network in Figure 2.37. Notice that the Phase IV network uses
an Ethernet coaxial cable and Ethernet communications controllers rather than
the traditional communications controllers shown in the Phase III network. In
this example, all systems (except the DECnet-RT system) are running Phase IV
software and are directly connected to the Ethernet.

2.92

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.38
Ethernet-based
Phase IV Network

DECnet-VAX
(Phase IV)

VAX 8800

VAX 8550

VAXBI CTRL

Baseband or Broadband Cable
DECnet-11M-PLUS
(Phase IV)
PDP-11/84

PDP-11/84

DMRll

DMB32

VAX 8350

DECnet-VAX

DMV11

Micro
PDP-11

DECnet-RT
(Phase III)

A comparison between the Phase III and Phase IV networks shows that there is
a significant cost savings with the Phase IV network. For example, an H4000
Transceiver plus the Ethernet controller costs less than a synchronous DMR11. In
addition to the cost savings, the Phase IV network increases the configuration
flexibility so that transceivers can be easily relocated along the length of the
Ethernet cable. The Ethernet technology also eliminates the need for redundant lines within the local portion of the network. A node can be added or removed from the LAN for maintenance without affecting the operation of the
rest of the LAN.
Refer to Connecting Shared Resources to an Ethernet LAN for a discussion of
the use of the Terminal Server in a Phase IV LAN, and Connecting an Ethernet
LAN to Remote Networks for a discussion of the use of Router Servers in
Phase IV networks.

2. 93

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

2.94 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Ethernet-based Products

Digital's Ethernet product set allows a network configuration to be tailored to
current needs while allowing for future growth. As illustrated in Figure 2.39,
Digital's Ethernet products provide many types of communication, including:
• Digital terminal to host (Digital, x.25, and IBM hosts)
• Host to host
• Host to server
• DECnet to DECnet
• DECnet to x.25 packet-switching data network
• DECnet to IBM SNA network
DECnet Phase IV supports direct connection to Ethernet LANS for host systems
running VAX/VMS, RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS, RSX-MS, Micro/RSX, MicroVMS,
RSTS/E, ULTRIX-32, ULTRIX-32m, and p/os. DECnet Phase III systems can connect
indirectly to the Ethernet through a DECnet Phase IV host or through an
Ethernet Communications Server.

2.95

Ethernet

Etherriet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.39
DECnet Network
with Many
Ethernet Segments

VAX

Baseband or Broadband Cable

VAX

Digital
Non-LAT
Host

PDP-11

Printer
Non-Digital
Host

VMS/SNA
IBM

MicroVAX

Host

VAX

Baseband Cable

PDP-11
DHU11

DMRll

PDP-11

2. 96

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

VAX

DEL NI

Baseband or Broadband Cable

ThinWire

Micro
VAX II

.... Transceiver

Cable

Baseband Cable

VAX

PDP-11

Modem r - - - - - -

DEC
MUX
PDP-11

Printer

2.97 Ethernet

VAX

PDP-11

Ethernet Configuration Guidelihes

Planning a
Baseband Ethernet LAN

Planning an Ethernet LAN can be divided into three phases:
• Planning the physical channel layout: This is necessary for all networks,
regardless of the type of equipment to be connected to the network.
• Connecting shared resources to an Ethernet LAN: This section includes information about connecting terminals and host systems to an Ethernet LAN.
• Connecting an Ethernet LAN to remote networks: This section has information
about connecting an Ethernet LAN to other networks, such as DECnet, x.25
packet-switching data networks (PSDNs), and IBM SNA networks.

Planning the
Physical Channel Layout

A flexible Ethernet LAN begins with a carefully planned physical channel layout,
which includes the following:
• Standard Ethernet coaxial, fiber optic, and/or ThinWire Ethernet cable
• Connectors, terminators, and ground clamp
• Transceivers and transceiver cable
•Repeaters
Placement of these components must be carefully planned and marked on a
physical channel layout plan. This plan is used later for the network installation.
The physical channel layout plan starts with a building layout plan. This plan is
then marked for the placement of cables and repeaters. The plan also shows the
placement of the host computer systems and servers, including existing systems,
possible future relocations of those systems, and possible future equipment.

Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Coaxial cable is the backbone of an Ethernet LAN. A coaxial cable segment can
be a maximum of500 meters (1,640 feet) long and must be grounded at a single
point to the building's ground system. A segment can consist of smaller cable
sections joined by barrel connectors. For example, if a 257.4-meter segment is
required, it could be made up of two 117-meter sections and a 23.4-meter
section. This would require two barrel connectors as shown in Figure 2.40.
Segments up to 500 meters (1,640 feet) can be made by using barrel connectors.
Beyond 500 meters a repeater is required.
The installation of the main Ethernet coaxial cable segment and where to use
repeaters to connect branching segments should be carefully planned. Preplanning the placement of equipment at this stage can save time later when
connecting host systems and servers to the Ethernet (even while it is operating.)

Figure 2.40
Ethernet Coaxial Cable
Segment using Barrel Connectors

257.4m
BNE2A-MC

BNE2A-MC

Barrel Connector
Barrel Connector
117m
117m
•
o~~~~~~~~~~---10
Ethernet Coaxial Cable

2.98

Ethernet

BNE2A-MA

23 .4m

•
Terminator

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Fiber Optic Cable

Digital offers general purpose fiber optic cable (see Baseband Ethernet Products
in this section for further details). Plenum fiber optic cable (used where the
cable path is through air plenums) and aerial fiber optic cable (for connecting
buildings through the air or in conduit underground) are available through
other vendors. Installation requirements for all three types of fiber optic cable
are given below.
The Digital fiber optic cable certification is needed to assess proper connectivity
and determine if the installation meets acceptable attenuation limits. Certification is also required for Field Service to support an installation. Your Field
Service Network Planning Consultant or Digital-recommended installer (see
Section 7) will provide this service.
The fiber optic cable and connectors used must meet the following
requirements:
• The fiber should be a Corning 1508TM type fiber or equivalent.
• Connectors on these cables must be Amphenol 906® type SMA or equivalent.
• Bandwidth must be greater than or equal to 300MHz per kilometer at 850nm.
• Cable attenuation must be less than or equal to 6dB per kilometer at 850nm over
the operating temperature range.
• Total system loss must be less than 12.sdb, to be verified after the installation.
• Temperature and Humidity must be:

Connectors, Terminators
and Ground clamps

Operating Temperature

Humidity

General Purpose

0° C to 70° C

95 % , non condensing

Aerial

-30° C to 60° C

95 % , non condensing

Plenum

0° C to 70° C

95 % , non condensing

Barrel connector.
Connects two coaxial cable sections, creating a segment up to a maximum
length of500 meters (1,640 feet).
Terminator (50 ohm).
Electronically terminates the ends of a coaxial cable segment. Each end of the
coaxial cable section must have either a terminator or a connector.
Ground clamp.
Each Ethernet coaxial cable segment requires one ground clamp in each
building it passes through.

Thin Wire Ethernet Cable

ThinWire Ethernet Cable is recommended for offices and other local work areas
to bring Ethernet capability to personal computers, workstations and low-end
systems. Refer to Planning a ThinWire Ethernet LAN in this section for more
information.

Transceivers and
Transceiver Cable

Devices are connected to Ethernet coaxial cable via transceivers and transceiver
drop cable. The H4000 Transceiver transmits signals on the transceiver cable to
the connected devices and detects Ethernet message collisions. H4000 transceivers mount on the standard Ethernet by means of a tap and can be easily installed
using Digital's Ethernet Transceiver Installation Tool Kit.

2.99

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

There is one general purpose transceiver cable that supports both Ethernet and
IEEE 802.3 hardware. This cable is available in standard and office types. Because

office cables have a high signal loss, they are limited to a maximum distance of
12.5 meters. They are, however, thinner than standard cables and easier to run in
an office environment.
Remember these rules when planning installation of transceivers and transceiver
cable on the Ethernet:
• There is a maximum of100 transceivers per coaxial cable segment.
• Transceivers must be at least 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) apart. Digital premarks its
Ethernet coaxial cable every 2.5 meters to ensure adequate spacing.
• Each transceiver needs a corresponding transceiver cable.
• Transceiver drop cable can be a maximum of so meters (165 feet) in length.
Some devices have an internal cabling equivalency which must be subtracted
from the so meter maximum. Consult the device's technical manual for the
appropriate cable equivalency.
Figure 2.41 shows an Ethernet network with each system attached to the
Ethernet cable by means of a transceiver and transceiver cable. The systems
communicate with the network through an Ethernet communications
controller.

Figure 2.41
Ethernet LAN with
Connected Processors

Micro

VAX 8800

PDP-11

VAXBI CTRL

DELQA

Micro
VAX II
DELQA

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

H4000

Barrel

Tern1inator

Connector
VAXBI CTRt

VAX 8250

Ethernet Repeaters

The Ethernet Repeater allows network expansion beyond the 500-meter (1,640foot) limitation of one coaxial cable segment. Repeaters can connect up to three
coaxial cable segments together and make them function as if they were one
piece of cable by retiming, amplifying, and repeating all signals received from
one segment and passing the signals to the next segment.
Digital offers two Ethernet repeaters:
•Local Repeater-connects two coaxial cable segments in the same building.
The two cable segments can be a maximum of100 meters (328 feet) apart.
• Remote Repeater-connects two coaxial cable segments at greater distance,
such as between buildings. The remote repeater consists of two local repeaters
with fiber optic interface boards connected by fiber optic cable.

2.100

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Repeaters can be used effectively in a multifloor building to expand a network.
A backbone coaxial cable segment can be installed vertically from the basement
to the top floor of a building with repeaters and a branching segment installed
on each floor.
Consider these rules when planning LAN expansion using repeaters:
• A maximum of two repeaters may be placed in the path between any two
transceivers.

• One remote repeater pair may be separated by a maximum of1000 meters (3,282
feet) of fiber optic cable.
• Remote repeaters may be used to connect multiple Ethernet segments, however
the total amount of fiber optic cable used in the path between any two nodes
may not exceed 1000 meters.
• Repeaters may be placed in parallel for backup purposes-one active and the
other inactive. If one fails the other activates.
• A repeater cannot be connected to a DELNI.

• Both local and remote repeaters are connected to the Ethernet coaxial cable via
two H4000 Transceivers and two Ethernet transceiver cables.
Figure 2.42 illustrates an Ethernet LAN that has been expanded from one floor to
another floor within the same building. In this example, the distance between
the two Ethernet cables is 100 meters, so a local repeater is required.

Figure 2.42
Ethernet LAN Expansion
using a Local Repeater
(100M maximum separation
between cable segments)

Micro
PDP-11
DEQNA

VAX 8800

VAX 8550

VAXBI CTRL

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

H4-000

5to5om
VAX 8350
VAXBI CTRL

5to50m

2.101

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Ifit is necessary to expand the network to another building up to 1,000 meters
(3,280 feet) away, a remote repeater is necessary as shown in Figure 2.43. Notice
that the remote link uses a fiber optic cable.

Figure 2.43
Ethernet LAN Expansion
using a Remote Repeater
(1000M maximum separation
between cable segments)

Micro

VAX 8800

VAX 8700

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11
DEQNA

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

H4000

5 to 50 m
VAX 8350
VAX 8550
VAXBI CTRL
VAXBI CTRL

5 to 50 m

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
H4000

Standard Ethernet (Baseband)
Distance Guidelines

Standard Ethernet is a branching non-rooted tree topology with a maximum
node separation (the distance between the two furthest systems on the network)
of2.8 kilometers (t. 74 miles). Up to 1,023 transceivers can be connected to the
Ethernet coaxial cable, allowing connection of thousands of devices.
A few simple rules for configuring an Ethernet, derived from certain limits
that are imposed on the physical channel, ensure the optimal performance of
the network. The maximum configuration for an Ethernet is as follows:
• A segment of coaxial cable can be a maximum of500 meters (1,640 feet) in
length. Each segment of coaxial cable is terminated at both ends, at which point
transmitted signals stop.
• There can be a maximum of100 physical connections (transceivers) on any
segment of cable (at 2.5 meter intervals). Note that a number of devices can
be connected to one transceiver.
• Repeaters are used to continue signals from one segment of the Ethernet to
another. A maximum of two repeaters (either DEREP or DEMPR) can be placed
in the path between any two transceivers. A repeater requires a transceiver
connection (a physical connection position) on both of the segments it joins,
and counts toward the 100 transceiver maximum for each segment. Repeaters
can be placed at any or every available physical connection position on a cable
segment (up to 100) and can be used to extend the network topology from one
to three dimensions.
• The maximum length of coaxial cable between any two transceivers is 1,500
meters (4, 920 feet).
• A total ofl,000 meters (3,280 feet) of fiber optic cable is allowed for expanding
the network using remote repeaters.
• A standalone DELNI configuration supports up to eight devices (systems, not
terminals) using standard Ethernet transceiver cables between 40 and 45 meters
(131.2 and 147.6 feet) away depending on the communications controller.

2.102

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

• A hierarchical standalone DELNI configuration supports up to 64 devices using
standard Ethernet transceiver cables between 40 and 45 meters (131.2 and 147.6
feet) away depending on the communications device, and up to 50 meters
(164 feet) for another DELNI which, in turn, can support devices between 40 and
45 meters (131.2 and 147.6 feet) away depending on the communications device.
The DELNI LAN is not connected to the Ethernet coaxial cable.
• A connected DELNI configuration supports up to eight devices using standard
Ethernet transceiver cables between 35 and 40 meters (114.8and131.2 feet) away
depending on the communications device.

• The 2,800 meter (9,194 feet) maximum distance between any two nodes is the
sum of two SO-meter (164 feet) transceiver cables, three 500-meter (1,640 feet)
coaxial cable segments, four so-meter (164 feet) transceiver cables connected
to repeaters, and 1,000 meters (3,280 feet) of fiber optic cable.
• Transceiver cable length is limited to so meters (164 feet) for connection to host
systems and communications servers.
• Some devices have internal cabling that may reduce the effective length of the
transceiver cable.

Figure 2.44
Baseband Ethernet
Distance Guidelines

soom
Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Sto SOm

Sto40m
Host

Sto som

s to som

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Sto som

Sto3Sm

Host

Host
S to SOm
Terminator

2.103 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Planning a ThinWire
Ethernet LAN

While standard Ethernet is recommended for use between satellite equipment
rooms of a facility and between buildings, ThinWire is recommended for use
within the floor areas of a facility. ThinWire Ethernet is an alternative baseband
cabling system which can be configured as a standalone network or connected
to the backbone Ethernet in local work areas. ThinWire Ethernet products
include ThinWire coaxial cable, the Multiport Repeater (DEMPR), the Station
Adapter (DESTA), and connection components.
Three configurations are recommended for ThinWire installation. Each configuration is described below. Specific configuration guidelines are listed after
the descriptions.

Work Area Configuration

The Work Area configuration allows users to interconnect personal computers,
workstations, low-end systems, and Ethernet communications servers using
ThinWire cable and T-connectors. A segment of ThinWire cable is divided into
sections. Two sections of cable are joined by a T-connector and the bottom of
the "T" is inserted into a DES TA or ThinWire Ethernet controller. The DESTA has
a 15-pin D connector for attachment to standard Ethernet devices and a BNC
connector for connection to the ThinWire. Up to 30 devices can be connected to
a single 185 meter segment ofThinWire.

Figure 2.45
Thin Wire Ethernet Work Area
Configuration

Standalone Configurations

ThinWire Cable

The standalone configuration allows up to eight 185 meter ThinWire segments
to connect to the Multiport Repeater (DEMPR). The DEMPR can be used in a radial
topology to interconnect personal computers, workstations, and low-end systems in a work area or throughout the floor of a building. Each of the eight
ThinWire coaxial cable segments that connect to the DEMPR can accommodate
up to 29 stations. Therefore, one DEMPR can interconnect 232 stations. The
DEMPR will isolate faults in a segment so that the rest of the network will stay in
operation. Figure 2.46 illustrates the standalone configuration.
Eight DEMPRs can also be connected to a DELNI in a standalone configuration.
In this configuration, the Ethernet limit ofl,023 stations can be interconnected.

Figure 2.46
Thin Wire Ethernet Standalone
Configuration

ThinWire Cable (185 meters max.)

Terminator
T-Connector

Multi port
Repeater

DELQA

Micro
VAX II

2.104 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connected Configurations

In connected configurations, the two standalone configurations described above
are connected to the standard Ethernet backbone for access to more computing
resources on the larger Ethernet. The DEMPR connects to the standard Ethernet
cable using an H4000 Transceiver. The DELNI connects to the backbone Ethernet
using an H400G-BA Transceiver only.
When connected to a standard Ethernet, the DEMPR functions as a repeater
between all stations attached to it and all devices connected to the standard
Ethernet. The DEMPR must count as a full repeater when configuring an
Ethernet LAN. Since the DEMPR counts as a repeater, only one other repeater can
be configured in the path between the DEMPR and any station on the rest of the
Ethernet. For configuration simplicity, Bridges (DEBET) rather than Repeaters
(DEREP) are recommended for use between standard Ethernet segments
where DEMPRs are attached. Figure 2.47 illustrates a ThinWire Ethernet
connected configuration.

Figure 2.47
Thin Wire Ethernet Connected
Configuration

Standard Ethernet Backbone
Coaxial Cable

Transceiver
Transceiver

Cable

ThinWire Cable (185 meters max.)

T-Connector

Multi port
Repeater
Micro
VAX JI

2.105

Ethernet

Terminator
~

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Thin Wire Ethernet
Configuration Guidelines

•A segment of ThinWire coaxial cable may be a maximum of185 meters in
length. Each segment must be terminated at each end with so-ohm terminators.
• A section is a single length ofThinWire coaxial cable with male BNC connectors
at each end. ThinWire segments are composed of one or more sections of
ThinWire cable interconnected by barrel and/or T-connectors.
• A maximull} of 30 stations (28 with the DEcconnect System) may be connected
to a single ThinWire segment. The faceplate counts as one station. Each of the
BNC T-connectors or barrel connectors counts as one station. The DEMPR counts
as one station. There must be 0.5 meters (19 inches) between T-connectors.
• A DEMPR provides internal cable termination and can therefore be placed only at
the end of a segment.
• A maximum of two repeaters (DEREP or DEMPR) may be connected between two
stations in a standard Ethernet LAN.
• A DEMPR must be connected to the standard Ethernet cable using an H4000. A
DELNI/DEMPR combination must be connected to the standard Ethernet cable
using an H4000-BA only. The DELNI in this configuration cannot be connected to
another DELNI. The standard Ethernet segment to which a DELNI/DEMPR configuration is attached may not exceed 300 meters (984 feet).
• A station must be connected directly to the DESTA with transceiver cable.
The DESTA must connect directly to the BNC T-connector. No cable is allowed
between the DESTA and the BNC T-connector. The DESTA cannot be connected to
a DEREP.
• There must be one and only one ground per cable segment. Ensure that no
other connectors contact the ground. If the segment is attached to a DEMPR, the
DEMPR provides the ground and no other ground connections are allowed.
• ThinWire cable segments must never be configured in a loop.
• ThinWire cable segments must never have any branch segments. All
T-connectots must attach directly to stations, not to other segments of
ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable.

DEC connect Thin Wire
Configurations

ThinWire catl be used to supply Ethernet capability from a satellite equipment
room to a faceplate in an office or other work area, as long as the 185 meter
distance requirement is observed. Refer to Section 5, DECconnect Communications System for more information.

Planning an Extended Baseband
Ethernet LAN

The Extended LAN is an Ethernet environment that uses Bridges to connect
several Ethernet configurations into one large network of up to 8000 nodes. By
using Ethernet LAN Bridges in network configurations, it is possible to extend
network size without diminishing network performance.
The LAN Bridge forwards packets destined for other segments of the Extended
LAN, filtering out the packets destined for a node within the same segment. This
"packet filtering" allows the customer to configure a segment based on traffic
flow, thereby making the best use of network bandwidth. For example, the
Bridge can be used to isolate a particular network segment that has a heavy
traffic load from the rest of the Extended LAN.
The following configuration rules apply to standard, fiber optic, and microwave versions of the LAN Bridge 100.

2.106

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Extended LAN Configuration
and Distance Guidelines

Local Links:
• An Extended LAN may have up to 8000 stations.
• Digital recommends that an Extended LAN have no more than seven (7) Bridges
between stations. A packet should not travel through more than 7 Bridges due
to the accumulation of slight delays caused by the store and forwarding feature.
Protocols that have time sensitive parameters may suffer performance loss if
packets move through more than 7 bridges.
• Bridges can be placed in parallel with other Bridges in order to provide an
auto-backup capability. Bridges causing loops in this situation automatically
enter a backup state. A Bridge that is in the backup state continues to monitor
traffic on both LANs and, if the primary Bridge fails, it automatically activates
and forwards messages.
• The LAN Bridge 100 can be used to interconnect network segments using any
Standard Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 medium (i.e., baseband or broadband).
• Distance from the transceiver to Bridge can be a maximum of 50 meters, a
total oflOO meters between segments. Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.

Remote Fiber Optic Link
• Fiber Optic Links can be built using two Fiber Optic Bridges, two Fiber
Optic Repeaters, or one Fiber Optic Bridge and One Fiber Optic Repeater.
Two Bridges connected by a fiber optic link count as two in the seven
Bridge limitation.
• When building links with Fiber Optic Repeaters the Ethernet configuration rule
of no more than 1000 meters of fiber between stations must not be exceeded.
•Distance from the transceiver to Bridge can be a maximum of50 meters.
Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.
• The Fiber Optic Repeater must use an H4000 Transceiver to attach to the
standard Ethernet cable.
• When building Fiber Links with the Fiber Optic Bridge and Fiber Optic
Repeater combination, the length of the Fiber Link must be included as part of
the configuration of the LAN to which the Fiber Optic Repeater is attached.
(Refer to Ethernet Repeaters in this section.)
• When building a Fiber Link with two Fiber Optic Bridges, each link length
is limited by the 12. 5 DB system budget for signal loss. Therefore, using the
present DEC 100/140 micron fiber cable, a link can be 2000 meters. Many 2000
meter links can be built throughout the Extended LAN.
• The Fiber Optic Bridge and Repeater are designed to operate with 100/140
Micron Fiber to achieve the 1000 meter limitation.
• The Fiber Optic Bridge and Repeater are also designed to operate with other
size fibers including 62.5/125, 85/125, and 50/125. When using an alternative size
fiber the System DB budget is reduced.

2.107

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Remote Microwave Link

• Microwave links are implemented using the Digital METROWAVE Bridge and the
M/A-COM, Inc. MA-23 LAN microwave radio equipment.
• Line-of-sight distances up to 4.50 miles (bridge to bridge) are possible. Maximum path length is determined by Ethernet propagation delay specifications
which are designed to detect signal collisions during simultaneous two-way
transmissions. This path length is also a function of the cabling distance
between the microwave transmitter and receiver controller units and the RF
(Radio Frequency) unit. The following table displays the resulting point-topoint antenna path given various total (both sides) controller-to-antenna
distances:
TOTAL CONTROLLER-TO-ANTENNA DISTANCE (ft)

ANTENNA PATH (miles)

100
200
600
1000
2000

4.48
4.45
4.33
4.22
3.92

• The microwave transmitter and receiver controllers may be up to 1000 feet from
the antenna.
•A METROWAVE Bridge must be located at each end of the microwave link and
includes the following:
H4000 transceiver
LAN Bridge 100
BNE3M-20 cable connecting the H4000 transceiver to the LAN Bridge 100

Microwave adapter
B)'IE4D-02 cable connecting the LAN Bridge 100 and microwave adapter

The METROWAVE Bridge is available pre-mounted in 31.5 inch high cabinets, or
in non-qbinet configurations, making it suitable for rack mounting in Satellite
Equipment Room (SER) racks.
• The maximum distance between the H4000 transceiver and the LAN Bridge 100 is
20 meters.
• Two METROWAVE Bridges connected by a microwave link count as two in the
seven bridge limitation.
• Although it is packaged with an H4000 transceiver, the METROWAVE Bridge can
also be attached to standard Ethernet cable using a DELNI, to ThinWire cable
using a DESTA, or to broadband cable using a DECOM.
Figure 2.48 illustrates the Extended Baseband LAN configuration and
distance guidelines.

2.108

Etpernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.48
Extended Baseband LAN
Configuration and
Distance Guidelines
(Standard, Fiber Optic, and
METRO WAVE Bridges)

H4000

StoSOm

Fiber

H4000

Terminator

stosom

Fiber Optic
Repeater
Transceiver Cable
H4000

Baseband Coaxial Cable

H4000

*100/140 Micron Fiber Cable

METRO
WAVE

Antenna

Microwave Link

1----------:57240m--------~

H4000

2.109 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Planning a Broadband
Ethernet LAN

In Broadband Local Area Networks, a different cabling system is used than
for Baseband Ethernet networks. The network cable, coaxial drop cables,
and cable components (amplifiers, splitters, taps, etc.) necessary to construct
broadband networks are the same as those used for cable TV.
The planning and installation of a broadband cable system is most often
undertaken with the assistance of consultants, installation contractors, and
cable TV (CATV) equipment vendors. As part ofits Network Services, Digital
will serve as the customer's single point of contact for the planning, design,
installation, and maintenance ofDigital broadband networks.
In preparation for installing broadband networks, Digital certifies the Broadband Ethernet Channel in.new and existing broadband cableplants to ensure
successful operation of the Broadband Ethernet products. Digital also provides
ongoing and remedial maintenance services for these Broadband Ethernet
products and other Digital-qualified vendor products. Certification of the
Broadband Ethernet Channel in the customer's network is a prerequisite for
on-site service contracts for broadband Ethernet products.
Refer to Section 7 for more details about Digital's Network Services for
Broadband Local Area Networks and the Broadband Ethernet products.
Contact your Digital Account Manager or Local Field Service Office for
further assistance.

Broadband Ethernet Distance Guidelines
and Configuration

Broadband Ethernet is a rooted branching non-routed tree topology with a
maximum node separation (the distance between the two furthest systems on
the network) of3.8 kilometers (approximately 2.4 miles). Up to 1,023 DECOM or
Ethermodem transceivers can be connected to the broadband network cable,
allowing connection of thousands of devices.
A few simple rules for configuring Ethernet on broadband, derived from
certain limits that are imposed on the Ethernet physical channel, ensure the
optimal performance of the network. These configuration guidelines are
described below.
• Distances in Broadband Ethernet are measured from the location of the
Ethernet frequency translator in single cable networks. The frequency translator will be located at the network "headend".
The maximum distance from the frequency translator to the furthest Ethernet
broadband modem (for example, the maximum radius of the network) is 1, 900
meters, or about 1.2 miles.
• In dual cable networks, distances are measured from the point at which the
transmit (inbound) cable turns around and becomes the receive (outbound)
cable. This is considered the headend of the dual cable network.
The maximum distance from the cable turnaround to the furthest Ethernet
broadband modem is 1,900 meters, or about 1.2 miles.
• The maximum station separation of3,800 meters is achieved when the
broadband cable branches out in opposite directions from the network headend. Two of these 1, 900 meter branches add up to 3, 800 meters of maximum
station separation.

2.110 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines
t900m

Figure 2.49
Broadband Ethernet
Distance Guidelines:
Single-cable Networks

3800m

Broadband Signal Splitter ....
Broadband Coaxial Cable

Broadband Tap

5 to 35m

DELNI

Host
Transceiver

Cable

Host

Figure 2.50
Broadband Ethernet
Distance Guidelines:
Dual-cable Networks

Midcable Loop

.... Broadband Signal Splitters
Broadband Coaxial Cables

Broadband Tap

s to 35m

Host

DELNI
Transceiver

Cable

Host

t900m
3800m

2.111

Ethernet

Host

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Since the broadband cable can branch out in any direction, the network can
consist of virtually unlimited numbers of"spokes" from the headend location.
The network cable system in broadband networks is made up of broadband
coaxial cable (trunk and drop cables) as well as cable components (amplifiers,
splitters, taps, etc.). These elements are the same as those used by the cable TV
(CATV) industry. When a broadband network is configured, taps are installed in
the cable to allow connection of network devices.
The connection from the broadband tap to the broadband transceiver is made
with a broadband drop cable, usually a flexible coaxial cable of the RG-6 variety.
In single cable networks, there is one drop cable from the tap to the transceiver.
In dual cable networks, there are two drop cables from the taps to the transceiver, one from a tap on both the inbound and outbound cables.
• In both single and dual cable broadband networks, the maximum length of
drop cable from the broadband tap in the network cable to the DECOM
Transceiver is 25 meters. In some networks, the drop cable from the broadband
tap leads to a wall outlet. Customers can connect DECOM to the wall outlet using
the same flexible (RG-6) coaxial drop cable.
• The maximum length of drop cable from the broadband tap to the wall outlet
to the broadband transceiver is also 25 meters. Transceiver cable is used to
connect DECOM to an Ethernet Communications Corttroller, LAN Bridge 100,
DELNI, Communications or Terminal Server.
• Transceiver cable length is limited to 50 meters (164 feet), and is measured from
the connection at the rear of the broadband transceiver to host system,
communications or terminal server. Note that some devices have internal
cabling that may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.
• A connected DELNI configuration for broadband Ethernet supports up to eight
devices using standard transceiver cables between 35 and 40 meters (114.8 and
131.2 feet) away depending on the communications controller or device.

Figure 2.51
DELNI Connected
Configuration (Broadband)
Broadband Tap

Broadband Coaxial Cable

VAXBI CTRL

VAX 8550
MicroVAX

'The sum of two cable lengths.

2.112

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Planning an Extended
Broadband Ethernet LAN

The configuration guidelines for standard broadband Ethernet also apply for
extended broadband networks, with the following additions:
• For local links, the Bridge connects to a broadband transceiver on both sides.
Distance from the broadband transceiver to Bridge can be a maximum of so
meters, a total of100 meters between segments. Internal cabling may reduce the
effective length of the transceiver cable.
• For fiber optic links, two Bridges must be used. Each Bridge is attached to a
DECOM. Maximum distance between bridges is 2000 meters, using 100/140
micron fiber cable. Distance from the transceiver to the Bridge can be a
maximum of 50 meters. Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the
transceiver cable. Figure 2. 52 illustrates the extended broadband LAN configuration and distance guidelines.

Figure 2.52
Extended Broadband LAN
Con_fiiuration and Distance
Guidelines (Single Cable)
Broadband Signal Splitter
Broadband Cable

Fiber

Standard

Optic

Bridge

Bridge
:S2000m*

Optic
Bridge
Broadband Cable

*to0/140 Micron Fiber Cable
Broadband Tap

2.113

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Baseband to
Broadband LANs

Baseband and broadband LANs can be connected using the Ethernet LAN Bridge
100. For local links, the Bridge connects to an H4000 Transceiver on the baseband
side of the link. Transceiver cable length can be a maximum of 50 meters. On

the broadband side of the link, the Bridge connects to a broadband transceiver.
Transceiver cable length from the DECOM to the Bridge can be a maximum of so
meters. Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable
on both sides of the Bridge.
For fiber optic links, two Bridges must be used. The Bridge on the baseband
side of the link is connected to an H4000 Transceiver. The Bridge on the broadband side of the link is connected to a broadband transceiver. Maximum
distance between bridges is 2000 meters, using 100/140 micron fiber cable.
Distance from each transceiver to the Bridge can be a maximum of so meters.
Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.

Figure 2.53
Baseband to Broadband LAN
Configuration Guidelines
(Standard Bridge)

H4000

ssom

Baseband
Coaxial Cable

Broadband Cable (Single Cable)

Figure 2.54
Baseband to Broadband LAN
Configuration Guidelines
(Fiber Optic Bridge)

H4000

ssom

Baseband
Coaxial Cable

Broadband Cable (Single Cable)
*100/140 Micron Fiber Cable

2.114 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Shared Resources
to an Ethernet LAN

Connecting Nonintelligent
Terminals

When planning a Baseband or Broadband Ethernet LAN, alternatives for
connecting shared resources (including terminals, host systems, and communications servers) to the Ethernet coaxial cable should be explored. The following
sections discuss these issues.
There are two ways to connect nonintelligent terminals to the Ethernet LAN:
• Direct connection to a host system on the LAN
• Connection to a Terminal Server on the LAN
Direct connection is the conventional method of connecting terminals to a host.
Directly connected terminals can access any other host system in a network,
then operate as if they were connected to the other host system. However, this
connection scheme lacks flexibility because: terminal controllers must be added
to each host system; wiring must extend from each terminal to the directly
connected host, which may be a long distance away; and, directly connected
terminals incur the overhead of passing through their direct host to connect
to another host. Figure 2.55 illustrates a LAN configuration with directly
connected terminals.

Figure 2.55
Ethernet LAN with Many
Terminals Per Host

VAX 8250

VAX 8650

Baseband or Broadband Cable

VAX 8550
DMB32

2.115

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Terminal Servers allow a more flexible connection scheme than direct connection. A group of terminals connect to a terminal server, which then connects
directly to the Ethernet LAN, allowing the terminals to access any host on the
LAN. Printers and modems can also connect to a terminal server, allowing them
to be shared by all host systems on the LAN. Terminal servers can be placed close
to the users' workplace, thereby reducing the length of wire extending from
each terminal.
Figure 2.56 shows an Ethernet configuration using terminal servers. Compared
to the configuration shown in Figure 2. 55, the terminal server configuration
reduces the number of controllers for each host, reduces the length of wires
extending from terminals, and offers greater flexibility in accessing host
systems on the LAN.

Figure 2.56
Ethernet LAN
Con.figuration Using
a Terminal Server

VAX 8250

VAX 8650

VAX 8550

2.116

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Host Systems

Host systems can be connected to an Ethernet LAN in the following ways (as
illustrated in Figure 2.57):
• Directly to standard Ethernet cable using an H4000 Transceiver or to ThinWire.
These systems require DECnet Phase IV software and an Ethernet communications controller. If the Ethernet controller connects to standard Ethernet cable, it
can connect to ThinWire via a ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA).
•Directly as part of a group of DECnet Phase IV host systems connected to a Local
Network Interconnect (DELNI). Each host system requires DECnet Phase IV
software and an Ethernet communications controller.
• Indirectly through another DECnet Phase IV host system already connected to
the Ethernet coaxial cable. Connected host systems can have DECnet Phase III or
Phase IV software. Connections can be hardwired or through modems.
• Indirectly through a DECnet Router Server, a DECrouter 200, or DECnet Router/
x.25 Gateway. Connected host systems can have DECnet Phase III or Phase IV
software. Connections can be hardwired or through modems.

Figure 2.57
Connecting Host Systems
to an Ethernet LAN
Host

Host

Transceiver

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Terminator

Host

2.117

Ethernet

Host

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet Host System Soflware

DECnet Phase IV software allows host systems and intelligent terminals
to communicate with up to 64,000 addressable nodes in a local or wide area
network environment. An addressable node is either a host system or an
Ethernet communications server. Refer to Section 3 of this guide for detailed
information on Digital's DECnet software products.

Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI)

The Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) provides low-cost Ethernet performance for a group of Ethernet-compatible devices in a SO-meter area.
The DELNI can be configured in three ways:
• Standalone
• Hierarchical standalone
•Connected
The DELNI standalone configuration, illustrated in Figure 2.58, supports up to
eight systems or system-based devices (not terminals) using standard Ethernet
transceiver cables up to 50 meters (164 feet) away.

Figure 2.58
DELNI Standalone
Configuration

Transceiver Cable

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/84

VAX 8550

The DELNI hierarchical standalone configuration, illustrated in Figure 2.59,
supports a combination ofDELNis and devices using standard Ethernet transceiver cables up to 50 meters (164 feet) away for other DELNI and between
40 and 45 meters (131.2and147.6 feet) depending on the communications
controller. The DELNI hierarchical standalone configuration is not connected
to the Ethernet coaxial cable.

2.118 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.59
DELNI Hierarchical
Standalone
Configuration

som
Transceiver Cable

40m
VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/84

VAX 8350

Micro
VAX II

The DELNI connected baseband configuration, illustrated in Figures 2.60
(without an Etherjack) and 2.61 (with an Etherjack), or the DELNI connected
broadband configuration, illustrated in Figure 2.62, supports up to eight devices
using standard Ethernet transceiver cables. The total maximum length of
transceiver cable is 40 meters (131.2 feet). In a baseband configuration without
an Etherjack, this would be the sum of the length of the cables from the H4000
to the DELNI and from the DELNI to the host system or communications server.
However, a particular controller may restrict this length. For example, the
maximum cable length from the H4000 to the DEUNA in Figure 2.60 or the
DECOM to DEUNA in Figure 2.62 is 35 meters (115 feet).
In a broadband configuration, this would be the sum of the length of transceiver
cables from the DECOM to the DELNI and from the DELNI to the host system or
communications server. However, in both the baseband and broadband case, a
particular controller may restrict this length.

In broadband configurations, the Chipcom Ethermodem should not be used
with a DELNI as this is an unsupported configuration.

2.119

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.60
DELNI Connected
Con.figuration (Baseband)

Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

PDP-11/84

VAX 8550

MicroVAX

1 The sum of two cable lengths.

In configurations with an Etherjack (baseband only), the lengths to be considered are from the H4000 to the Etherjack, Etherjack to DELNI, and DELNI to the
host system or communications server.

Figure 2.61
DELNI Connected
Con.figuration (Baseband)
Using an Ethetjack

Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAXBI CTRL

VAX 8250
MicroVAX

1 Sum of three cable lengths.

Figure 2.62
DELNI Connected
Con.figuration (Broadband)
Broadband Tap

Broadband Coaxial Cable

1 The sum of two cable lengths.

2.120

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Servers

Servers are specialized network nodes that act as shared resources. There are
three types of servers that can be used on an Ethernet LAN:
• Digital's Ethernet communications server hardware/software packages
including the DECnet Router Server, the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway, and
the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
• Digital's general purpose software that provides server functions in the network, such as file transfer, remote job entry, and remote printing.
• Non-Digital applications servers written by users, for example, a computer
node that provides typesetting services using software written by a customer or
another vendor.
All three types of servers connect to an H4000 Transceiver or to a Local
Network Interconnect.

Connecting an Ethernet LAN
to Remote Networks

Digital offers the following Ethernet communications servers to connect
Ethernet LANs to remote networks:
• DECnet-to-DECnet routing: The DECnet Router, the DEcrouter 200, or a fullfunction DECnet node allows host Ethernet systems to communicate with
remote DECnet systems or with DECnet systems on other Ethernets by means
of point-to-point links.
.
• DECnet-to-x.25 communications: The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway allows host
Ethernet systems to communicate with other DECnet systems as well as
non-Digital systems over an x.25 packet-switching data network.
• DECnet-to-IBM SNA communications: The DECnet/SNA Gateway allows host
Ethernet systems to communicate with IBM systems in SNA networks.

DECnet-to-DECnet Routing

DECnet-to-DECnet routers provide communications between local and remote
DECnet networks. There are four types of DECnet-to-DECnet routers: fullfunction host system routers, DECnet Router Servers, DECrouter 200, and
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateways.

Host System Routers

A DECnet Phase IV full-function node can manage Ethernet routing functions
using asynchronous or synchronous lines connected to a communications
controller, such as a DMF32 or a DMR11. This may be adequate if there are only
one or two connections to remote nodes and if the routing load on the host
system is fairly light.
The resources of the host system that functions as a routing node should be
carefully analyzed. If the host system has more than two communications
controllers, or if it uses a significant amount of CPU processing time for routing,
a DECnet Router Server or DECrouter 200 should be considered. These servers
are dedicated to routing functions, while full-function nodes must also run
applications. In addition, the physical line interfaces for the DECnet Router
Server or DECrouter 200 arc much less expensive than those provided by
communications controllers.

2.121

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet Router Server

Figure 2.63
Ethernet LAN Con.figuration
Using a DECnet Router Server

DECnet Router Servers perform DECnet routing functions between Phase IV
nodes on an Ethernet and remote DECnet nodes, and provide connections
between independent Ethernets. A DECnet Router Server can also be used to
connect a Phase III node to an Ethernet LAN.

DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)

VAX 8800

VAX 8550

VAXBI CTRL

Baseband or Broadband Cable

PRO/DECnet

(Phase IV)

Baseband or
Broadband Cable

Modem

DMR11

VAXBI CTRL

PDP-11/24

VAX 8350

PRO/DECnet

(Phase IV)
DECnet-RT

DECnet-VAX

(Phase III)

(Phase IV)

The DECnet Router Server allows the Phase III node to communicate, transparently to the user, with systems on the Ethernet and to any other remote Phase
IV node. A Phase III node can also be connected to an Ethernet via a Phase IV
host node. In addition, the DECnet Router offloads routing functions from
locally connected host processors and Level I routing nodes. This allows the
host systems to function as end nodes or Level I routers in the network with
more CPU time for applications processing.

2.122

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The DECnet Router Server can manage routing to nodes in up to 62 areas, each
containing up to 1,023 nodes. These nodes can be:
• Other DECnet Router Servers on another Ethernet network.
•Ethernet or non-Ethernet DECnet Phase III or IV routing nodes.
• Ethernet or non-Ethernet DECnet Phase III or IV end nodes.
A DECnet Phase IV host system on the Ethernet is required to support the
DECnet Router Server. The Ethernet host downline loads routing software into
the DECnet Router Server, configures Router resources, sets parameters, and
initiates operation. The performance of the DECnet Router depends on the
following four factors:
• Amount of network traffic and processing needed to route traffic through
the network.
• Message segment size (number ofbytes).
• Communications line characteristics.
• Size ofbuffers.
The total throughput for all lines on one DECnet Router cannot exceed 500,000
bits per second. If there is heavy network traffic between the Ethernet nodes and
remote nodes, two or more DECnet Routers could split the load. There is an
architectural maximum of 32 DECnet Router Servers and/or host routing nodes
on a single Ethernet LAN. Digital recommends careful traffic and topology
planning if this number exceeds 10 routers.
In area-based networks, data travels within and between areas. Regardless of
the number of areas between source and destination nodes, routing nodes
forward a packet of data to its intended location. Router is a general term for
any node in a network that can receive and forward messages or packets
addressed to other nodes in the network. There are two types of routers in
area-based networks: Level 1 routers, which are responsible for communication
within an area, and Level 2 routers, which are responsible for communication
between areas.
A Level 1 router operates in the same way as traditional Phase III and Phase IV
DECnet routing nodes. It handles routing within an area and keeps itself
informed of the state of all nodes in that area, but it does not concern itself about
nodes outside its area. When a node in one area (area 5, for example) wishes to
communicate with a node in another area (area 7, for example), a Level 1 router
in area 5 forwards the request to the nearest Level 2 router in the same area.
All interarea Communication takes place through Level 2 routers. Each Level 2
router keeps track of the least-cost path to each area in the network, as well as
the state of the nodes within its area.
In an area-based network, the Level 1 routers maintain routing databases that
are similar to the routing databases in traditional Phase III and Phase IV DECnet
nodes. The routing database of a Level 1 router includes information on path
length and path cost to every node and the nearest Level 2 router in its area.
A Level 2 router makes use of a second database-an area routing table-to
determine the least-cost path to the other areas in the network.

2.123 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet-to-X.25
Communications

As networks grow and users require more network functions, nodes, and
communications alternatives, the complexity of the network increases. Digital's
communications over packet-switched data networks (PSDNs) can be a costeffective alternative for those customers who want to transmit a low volume
of data remotely. PSDNs charge primarily on the amount of data transmitted;
they are distance-independent.
Therefore, if a customer requires only short, low-speed data transmissions,
a dial-up line might be more cost-effective since it avoids the PSDN connection
charge. On the other hand, ifhigh-volume continuous data transmission is
required, the customer will want to avoid the PSDNs "data-sent" charge, and
a leased line would be more appropriate.
Somewhere in the middle (medium data rates and volume), x.25 PSDNs are
a cost-effective alternative. If an Ethernet-based network already exists, one
approach could be for the customer to add P. s. I. software and the appropriate
synchronous devices to a DECnet-VAX or DECnet-RSX host. If only one or two
x.25 lines are required for one local network or if high throughput is required,
this approach is the most cost-effective. With Phase IV, the DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway alternative provides both DECnet-to-DECnet and Digital to non-Digital
communication over a PSDN.
Both the DECnet Router Server and the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway reduce the
number of communications devices, potentially reduce the number of remote
lines, and offload the host from burdensome routing. It is conceivable that all
remote communications from a local Ethernet could occur via a DECnet Router
or Gateway (or multiple DECnet Routers or Gateways). These servers therefore
offload a portion of the processor overhead traditionally used to handle the
routing of DECnet messages.
The DECnet Router Server is an excellent alternative for customers running
DECnet throughout their local and remote network. It can accommodate a
number of remote lines running Digital Data Communications Message
Protocol (DDCMP). In fact, the DECnet Router will translate from the Ethernet
protocol (CSMA/CD) to DDCMP.
The CCITT x.25 specification defines the network protocols for communications
among multivendor systems over x.25 packet-switching data networks
(PSDNs). There are two ways of connecting Ethernet nodes to an x.25 network:
host-based system connections or the DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway.

Host-Based System Connections
to X.25 Networks

Individual VAX or RSX host systems can be connected to an x.25 network using
the VAX P.S.I. or RSX-11 P.S.I. products. There are two VAX P.S.I. options, the
full-function VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access. Both enable process-to-process
and terminal communications between a VAX and Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) in a PSDN supporting the x.25 protocol. Note that only full-function
VAX P.S.I. supports direct physical connection to the PSDN. Full-function VAX P.S.I.
can be configured for either multihost or native-mode operation. The addition
of the multihost mode allows the VAX P.S.I. system to act as a gateway to a PSDN,
supporting access to the network by other local or remote DECnet-VAX hosts.
Only one VAX host in the customer's DECnet network need purchase access to
the PSDN. With VAX P.S.I. on that host, configured in multihost mode, other VAX
systems in the DECnet network need only install VAX P.S.I. Access to take
advantage of the facilities available through or from the x.25 PSDN. For more
detailed information, refer to the Packetnet subsection of Section 3.

2.124

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway

The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway allows many users on an Ethernet LAN to
share access to an x.25 network for either Digital-to-Digital communications
or Digital-to-non-Digital communications. The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway
is an addressable node on the network and is available for access by any host
system on the network.
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway connects host Ethernet nodes to other DECnet
nodes in an x.25 network using the Data Link Mapping (mM) capability of the
Gateway software.
In addition to performing all the functions of the DECnet Router, the DECnet
Router/x.25 Gateway also gives VAX Ethernet host systems with the VAX P.s.r.
Access Software access to all of the facilities offered by the x. 25 network to
which the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway is connected. These facilities include
support for both x.29 terminals dialing into a network Packet Assembler/
Disassembler (PAD) or x.29 terminals connected to a VAX host PAD, and support
for process-to-process communications between Digital and other vendors'
systems.
Most often the design of geographically dispersed networks is influenced
by the expense of transferring data over telecommunications facilities owned
by common carriers. Network implementations use either leased lines for
high volume, continuous data transfer, or PSDN communications for lowto-medium volume data transfer. For customers with one or both of these
requirements, the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway offers a unique solution.
For information on the PSDNs currently supported by the DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway, refer to the Packetnet subsection of Section 3.

Digital-to-Digital
Communications Over
X.25 Networks

The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway basic software (without the VAX P.S.I.
Access Software) provides only DECnet-to-DECnet communications. With it,
users can make traditional wide-area network DECnet connection using DDCMP
to DECnet nodes on an Ethernet, and to DECnet nodes connected to an x.25
network (as illustrated in Figure 2.64). Since most x.25 networks charge by the
amount of data sent, customers may want to mix capabilities (leased line,
dialup, and packet-switched), depending on the traffic patterns and line costs.
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway product supports Level 1 routing, but does
not support Level 2 (Area) routing.

2.125

Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.64
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Configuration
(DECnet-to-DECnet Only)

Modem

Host

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Corporate
Headquarters
(New York)

DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)
Host
VAX 8550

DMV11

Host

Micro
PDP-11

DECnet-RT

DECnet-11M

(Phase III)

(Phase IV)
RSX P.S.l.

Host

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Engineering
(Los Angeles)

At least one VAX/VMS host system on the Ethernet LAN must have a copy of the
basic DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway software. This host system downline loads
the software into the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway. Then the DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway is started up and DECnet-to-DECnet communications are available to all
other host systems on the Ethernet LAN.
Digital-to-non-Digital
Communications Over
X.25 Networks

Since many networks contain non-Digital systems, Digital fully supports
the concept of cooperative computing via the VAX P.s.r. Access Software. The
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway basic software plus the VAX P.s.r. Access Software
provide extended x.25 capabilities including communications with non-Digital
hosts and asynchronous terminals connected to the x.25 network (as illustrated
in Figure 2.65). Note that when x.25 is used as the data link protocol between
Digital systems and non-Digital systems, all upper-level software (such as file
transfer protocols) must be written by the user, or purchased separately (for
example, the VOTS product from Digital for OSI multivendor communications).

2.126 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Figure 2.65
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Configuration
(Digital-to-non-Digital Included)

Printer

Modem

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

VAX

Corporate
Headquarters
(New York)

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Host

NonDigital
Host

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

Host

VAX

Manufacturing
(Houston)

Engineering
(Los Angeles)
Baseband or Broadband Cable

The VAX P.S.J. Access Software provides the following capabilities to VAX hosts
on an Ethernet LAN:
• Remote terminals, including both dial-up terminals and terminals directly
connected to a host VAX system with x.29 terminal support, can access the
facilities of the x.25 network either by dialing into a network PAD or by using
the host VAX system as a PAD.
• Software routines allow access to the protocol level ofx.25 traffic. This means
that the host VAX system user can write utility software to support processto-process data transfer between unlike systems on the x.25 network.
For example, a message service/file transfer utility such as MAIL could be
written, assuming complementary software on the other systems.

2.127 Ethernet

Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet IBM/SNA
Communications

The DECnet/SNA Gateway links Digital VAX/VMS and MicrovMs host systems
within a DECnet network to an IBM SNA network.
The gateway (illustrated in Figure 2.66) connects directly to the Ethernet coaxial
cable. A VAX/VMS Ethernet host running Phase IV software is required to
downline load software to the DECnet/sNA Gateway. The DECnet/SNA Gateway
is accessible directly by any Phase IV vAx/vMs host system connected directly
to the Ethernet network or any Phase III VAX host connected logically via a
DECnet Router or DECnet system with host routing capabilities that has the
DECnet/sNA Gateway access routine software.

Figure 2.66
DECnet/SNA
Gateway Configuration

Baseband or Broadband Cable

VAX

RSX

IBM

Host

Each DECnet/SNA Gateway can handle up to two lines to remote SNA networks.
In network applications with extremely heavy traffic between the DECnet and
SNA environments, more than one DECnet/SN A Gateway may be necessary.
DECnet/SNA Access Routines
and Programming Interfaces

Each vAx/vMs or MicrovMs host system that accesses the IBM systems in the SNA
network needs the appropriate DECnet/SNA Access Routine or Programming
Interface software. For more information about DECnet/SNA Access Routines
and Programming Interfaces, refer to Digital-to-IBM Communications Software in Section 3.

2.128

Ethernet

•

Section 3
Networks and Communications
Software
Introduction

This section of the Guide describes the various communications software
products available from Digital. The following categories of software are
described in this section:
• DECnet Communications Software
• Internet Communications Software including:
Digital-to-IBM
Digital-to-UNIVAC
Digital-to-CDC
Digital-to-Unix, and
Digital-to-Wang Communications Software
• Packetnet Communications Software
• Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products
• File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products
• Network and System Management Products
• Additional Software Products

Networks and Communications
Software Ordering Information

When ordering the networks and communications software products described
in this section, refer to Table 3.1 to determine the appropriate license, service,
and medium code. Each software option has a seven-digit code. The first two
digits designate the software type and processor, the third through fifth digits
designate the product number, and the last two digits designate the license or
service, and medium. For example, QC425-uz can be broken into the following
three parts: QC425 (the DECnet/SNA Gateway Management Access Routines for
the vAx-11/725 and vAx-11/730), u (single-use license, warranty), z (no hardware
dependency). Note: DDS refers to Digital Distributed Software (not tested by
Digital) and DCS refers to Digital Classified Software.

3.1

Software

Software Ordering Information
Unique Product Number

Table 3.1
Software Option Codes Chart

A-Software Type
Description

System

Code

Description

Code

Diagnostic

Code

Description

Code

B-Processor
Description

VAX 8550 and VAX 8700
MicroVAX 2000
VAXstation II
VAX 8200 and VAX 8250
VAXmate
VAX 8300 and VAX 8350
VAXstation 2000
VAX 8500 and VAX 8530
DCS, U.S.
Professional
VAX-11/725, VAX-11/730 Series
VAX-11/750 Series
VAX-11/780 series
PDP-8, WPS, DECmate I
DEC-developed, Europe
DECsystem-10
DCS, GIA

2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
A
B

c
D
E
F
G
H

PDP-11
VAX 8600 series
VAX Cross Product. Generic
VAX8800
MicroVAX!
PDP-11
Workstation/VAXstation I
PDP-11
Software Services
DECSYSTEM-20
DCS, Europe
Rainbow
DEC mate
Discount Scheme
Micro-11
MicroVAX II

J
K
L

M
N
p
Q
R

s
T

v
w

x
y

C-Language Identifier*
Description

English, Canada
French, Canada
English, U.S.
Finnish
Italian
Danish
English, U.K.
French
German

Code

Description

Code

Dutch/Flemish
Japanese
Hebrew
Norwegian
Portuguese
Arabic
Spanish
Swedish
DDS Products

4
A
B

c
D
E
F
G

J
M
N
p
R

*The following software options use the third character language identifier: QA, QB, QG, QI,
QU, QV, QW, ZN, ZY. The third character in all other options is part of the unique product
number.

3.2

Software

s
T

Software Ordering Information

Table 3.1
Software Option Codes Chart
(Continued)

D-License and Service
Description

Additional Dispatch Subscription
or initial license
Dispatch Subscription Service (PDP-8)
Self-Maintenance Service for Software
Source Update Service
System Start-up Service Package
Levell
Additional Telephone
Support Center Contact
System Start-up Service Package
Levell!
Basic Service for Software
DECsupport Service for Software
Single-use license, binaries,
documentation, warranty
System Start-up Service Package
Level III
Single-use license, binaries,
documentation/or Single-use
license, warranty, key
(for Micro VMS products)
Single-use license
Location-use sources license, sources
Location-use sources license,
microfiche listings
Documentation-only
Binaries and documentation,
license required

Code

1*
2*
3*
4*
5
6*
7
8*
9*
A
B

C
D
E
F
G

Description

Installation Service for Software
Monthly Rental Support Service/or
Monthly Periodic Payment License
Fee (for software)
Additional Update Service
Sources Update
Location-use sources license, sources
and Microfiche listings
Sources or sources and binaries,
documentation, license required
Binaries (unlicensed diagnostics)
Single-use license for VAXcluster node
Binaries and/or documentation
(unlicensed diagnostics)
Professional Software Sctvices
(consulting)
Single-use license, supplementary
software/or User Upgrade License,
key (for Micro VMS products)
Single-use license, warranty
Single-use sources license,
sources or sources and binaries,
documentation, warranty
Single-use sources license, sources or
sources and binaries, documentation
Maintenance Service

Code

J
K*
L
M
N
P

Q
R
S

T
U

X
Y
Z

*Dispatch subscription not available in Europe

E-Media
Description

RX18 Floppy Diskette
RXSO Floppy Diskette
RC25 Disk Cartridge
TKSO Streaming Tape Cartridge
TK25 Cartridge
RX33 Floppy Diskette
RRDSO/Optical Disk
6250 BPI 9-Track Magtape
Papertape
DECtape
9-track 800 BPI Magtape (NRZI)
RKOS Disk Cartridge
7-track Magtage
TU58 DECtape II Cartridge
RL02 Disk Cartridge
RX31 floppy diskette

3.3

Software

Code

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B

c
D
E
F
G
H

Description

RA60 Disk Cartridge
RP04 Disk Pack
RP06 Disk Pack
9-track 1600 BPI Magtape (PE)
TU60 Cassette
Option for Periodic Payment License
RLOl Disk Cartridge
Microfiche
ROM Chip
RK06 Disk Cartridge
RK07 Disk Cartridge
Multi Media Distribution
RX02 Double Density Diskette
RX01 Floppy Diskette
No hardware dependency/or
Option for Period Payment License

Code

J
K
L
M
N

p
Q
R

s
T

v
w

x
y

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet Communications
Software
Overview

Digital Network Architecture (DNA) is being implemented in phases. The
current phases are III and IV
Four network capabilities were introduced in DNA Phase III:
•Adaptive routing (255 nodes)
• Network management
•Network command terminal software
• Multipoint line support
The maximum number of nodes in a Phase III network is 255. Network
management was enhanced to provide the software tools for identifying and
isolating problems and for remotely testing network integrity.
Phase IV DECnet products give network owners significantly more flexibility in
developing larger and more cost-effective computer networks and extending
their current networks as their needs evolve. Phase IV capabilities include:
•Routing (1,023 nodes)-(Area routing with 63 areas, 1,023 nodes per area
available on DECnet-VAX v4.0, Router Server v1.1, DEcnet-11M/s v4.2, and
DECnet-UM-PLUS V3.0)
• Communications server support
• Network virtual terminals
• Ethernet support
Digital offers two packages, full-function and end-node, for Phase IV DECnet
products.
The full-function package includes routing capability. For customers who have
never used DECnet, it is strongly recommended that they purchase DECnet with
the full service offerings including installation service.
The end-node only package offers full DECnet support with the exception of the
routing function; that is, this DECnet package offers only single-line access to a
network. Data can originate and terminate at this node, but data destined for
other nodes cannot transit this node. The real benefit of this package is the
ability to access DECnet Routers, DECnet Router/x.25 Gateways, or host routing
nodes, and not incur routing message and database management processor
overhead. An end node reduces overhead needed for routing, thus increasing
application performance.
Table 3.2 shows which DECnet products support full-function and end-node
Phase IV packages and which continue to support Phase III.

3.4

Software

DECnet Communications Software

Table 3.2
DECnet Packaging Support

Phase III
Packaging
Support

Phase IV
Packaging Support
Full-Function
Package
DECnet-VAX
DECnet-HM
DECnet-HM-PLUS

•
•
•

DECnet-Micro/RSX

DECnet-20

•
•

DECnet-10

•

DECnet-HS

End-Node
Package

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

DECnet-RT
DECnet/E

DECnet Product Capabilities

(end-node only)

•

PRO/DECnet

•

DECnet-ULTRIX
DECnet-DOS

•
•

DECnet-Rainbow

•

DECnet-VAXmate

•

Each ofDigital's current DECnet software products gives the customers
a particular set of capabilities. They are summarized for all products in
Table 3.3. Definitions of the capabilities are as follows.

• Program-to-program communication means that cooperating programs running
under different operating systems and written in different languages can
exchange data.
• Network virtual terminal capability allows a terminal user to establish a logical
connection to other Phase IV systems in the network.
• File transfer is the capability to exchange files among systems in a network.
• Remote command/batch file submission and execution means that a user at a source
node can request that a destination node execute a command file. The command
file can already be at the destination node, or the source node can send it along
with the request.
• Remote resource access allows the sharing of such resources as expensive peripheral
devices and massive database files for reasons of economy and convenience.
This capability is sometimes refe~red to as "remote file access" when programs
access file-structured devices remotely. DECnet offers both remote file and record
access.
(continued next page)

3.5

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet Product Capabilities
(continued)

• Downline system loading is the capability of developing software on a node
with adequate peripheral, compiler, and memory support and then sending it
to a target RSX-11S system or communications server where it will ultimately
be used.
• Downline task loading is the capability of developing a task or program on a node
with adequate peripheral, compiler, and memory support and then sending it to
a target DECnet-Us system where it will ultimately be used.
• Upline dumping is the capability of an RSX-US system or communications server
to automatically send a system-image dump to an adjacent node ifthe RSX-Us
system or communications server fails.

Table 3.3
DECnet Product Capabilities
Capability

DECnet Products
-11M-

-RT

Programto-Program
Communications

-11M

PLUS

-VAX

-10/-20

PRO/

-ULTRIX

-DOS
-Rainbow
-VAXmate

i--- i--- i--- i--- i--- i--- i--- i--- i---

•

Network
Virtual Terminal 1

•

File Transfer

•

Command/Batch
File Submission
and Execution
Remote Resource
Access

-11S 4

Micro/
RSX
/E

•

.2,4

•

Down-Line
Task Loading

•

Upline Dumping

•

•
•

•

1 Terminals on these systems can log onto like systems in the network. DECnet-lls does not support connection from remote command terminals.

2 Requester-only function.
3 Command file must reside on remote node.
4

Local system supports unit record equipment only.

3.6 Software

•

Down-Line
System Loading

•

DECnet Communications Software

Table 3.4
DECnet Product Support
DECnet
CPU
VAX CPUS
PDP-II CPUS

-RT

-RSX

-Micro/
RSX

-VAX -20

-10

,----- ,----- ,----- ,----- ,-------- ,----- ,-----

PRO/
DECnet -ULTRIX -DOS

•

-Rainbow

-VAXmate

•

•
•

DECSYSTEM-2040/2060

•

DECsystem-]()

----

•

Professional 350/380

•

IBM PC, pc/xT, PC AT

•

Rainbow JOO

•

vAxmate

Ethernet Controllers 7

•

DECNA

•

DELUA

•

-----

DEPCA

•

DELQA

•

DES VA

•
•
•

NIA20

•

----

•

VAXBI

•
•

----

•

Communications
Controllers 7

•
•

DHQJl
DHUJl
DLVJI

•

•
•

•

DMB32

DMF32

•

DMRll
DMVll

•
•

•

DMZ32
DN20/DN20F
DN21
DPVll
DUPJJ

•
•

•
•
•
•

DZQll
PCLll-B

•

•
•

•
•
•

------

•

Function
CCITT X.25 1
Phase Ill

•

File transfer

•

•"

•

•
•
•
•

Network virtual term.

•'

Multipoint

•

•
•

•

•
•

Phase IV routing

•

Phase IV end node

•

SNA access 1

Remote resource access

•
•
•

•
•

•

-----

•

.3,4

•

4 Supports outgoing requests only.

1 Requires additional software beyond DECnet.

5 Except area routine.

2 Supports homogeneous network virtual terminal.

6 Except DECnet-lls.
7 Refer to the appropriate SPD for support of retired products.

8 Also supported by third-party products.

3.7 Software

•

•DECnet services available for current products.

3 Supports CTERM, heterogeneous network virtual terminal.

•

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-RSX

DECnet-RSX allows a suitably configured PDP-11 computer system to participate
as a node in a DECnet network. DECnet-RSX Phase IV supports all Phase IV
capabilities. The functions available to a user partially depend upon the configuration of the rest of the network.
For prerequisite hardware and software, consult the following SPDs: DECnet-UM
10. 75, DECnet-US 10. 74, DECnet-UM-PLUS 10.66, and DECnet-Micro/RSX 18.27.

Table 3.5
DECnet-11M
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.}

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ765-UZ

QJ764-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJ765-H*

QJ764-H*

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ765-HZ

QJ764-HZ

Documentation only

QJ765-GZ

QJ764-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

*D, H, M, V, 5

Table 3.6
DECnet-11S
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ763-UZ

QJ762-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJ763-H*

QJ762-H*

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ763-HZ

QJ762-HZ

Documentation only

QJ763-GZ

QJ762-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

*D, H, M, V, 5

Table 3. 7
DECnet-11M-PLUS
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ767-UZ

QJ766-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJ767-H*

QJ766-H*

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ767-HZ

QJ766-HZ

Documentation only

QJ767-GZ

QJ766-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

*D, H, M, V, 5

3.8

Software

DECnet Communications Software

Table 3.8
DECnet-Micro/RSX
Order Codes
(End Node Only)

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required.for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QY766-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QY766-H*

Software revision right-to-copy

QY766-HZ

Documentation only

QY766-GZ

-----·----- - - - · - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

*3, 5

3.9

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-VAX

DECnet-VAX allows a suitably configured VAX/VMS or MicroVMS system to
participate as a node in a DECnet network. There are two types oflicensing
options available to users. One option is software for a routing or full-function
node. The other option is for an end node, which offers cost benefits.
DECnet-VAX Phase IV supports all Phase IV capabilities. The functions available
to a user partially depend upon the configuration of the rest of the network.
DECnet products and functions available to users on a mixed network can be
determined by comparison of the SPDs for the common products.
DECnet-VAX allows multiple Ethernet controllers per host within the limitations
listed in the Load Unit Table in SPD 25.03. Each controller must be connected to
a separate Ethernet that is not joined to other Ethernets by a bridge or repeater,
though it may be joined by a DECnet Router.
For prerequisite hardware and software, consult SPD 25.03.

Table 3.9
DECnet- VAX End Node
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX cluster license
Initial license, primary
Monthly availability, primary

Q*D04-UZ 1
Q*D04-QZ 2
Q*D04-1P 3
Q*D04-JP 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Installation Service

Q*D04-H#
Q*D04-HZ
Q*D04-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*D04-9#
Q*D04-8#
Q*D04-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation I:*= Q; # = 3
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/725: * = C; # = G
VAX-11/730: * '=" C; # = G
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = Y
VAX-11/782: * = E; # = Y
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = Y

VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8250: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX8300: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX 8350: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX8600: * = K; # = M
VAX8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.·
2 Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/78x, VAX 8600, and VAX 8650.
3 Available on VAX 82x0, VAX 83x0, VAX 85x0, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
1

3.10 Software

DECnet Communications Software

Table 3.10
DECnet- VAX Full:fUnction
Order Codes
Option
Upgrade from End Node to
Full Function: 5
Single-use license ·
VAXcluster license
Monthly availability
License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
VAxcluster license
Initial license, primary
Monthly availability, primary

Order Code

Q*D09-UZ 1
Q*D09-QZ 2
Q*D09-JP 3

Q*D05-UZ 1
Q*D05-QZ 2
Q*D05-1P 3
Q*D05-JP 3

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Installation Service

Q*D05-H#
Q*D05-HZ
Q*D05-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 4
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*D05-9#
Q*D05-8#
Q*D05-3#

MirroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II: * = 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/725: * = C; # = G
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = Y
VAX-11/782: * = E; # = Y
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = Y

VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8250: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8350: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX8600: * = K; # = M
VAX8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single

CPU.
2 Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/78x, VAX 8600, and VAX 8650.
3 Available on VAX 82XO, VAX 83XO, VAX 85XO, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.

4 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
5 Not available on VAXstation I.

3.11 Software

DECnet Communications Software

PRO/DECnet

PRO/DECnet allows a suitably configured Professional 300 Series computer to
participate as a non-routing (end) node in DECnet computer networks. The
Professional node can communicate with other DECnet nodes using either the
Professional's integral Communications Port (coMMl) for asynchronous or
synchronous DDCMP wide area network communications, or the NETl port and
optional DECNA Ethernet interface for Ethernet Local Area Network communications (but not both at the same time).
PRO/DECnet is an end-node-only implementation of the Phase IV Digital
Network Architecture (DNA), and is warranted for use only with supported
Phase IV products supplied by Digital. The Professional system with
PRO/DECnet can perform remote file access, remote file transfer, network
management, network fau~t isolation, and network virtual terminal using the
DNA protocols. The optional PRO/Tool Kit contains libraries which allow
developers to write applications for communication in a DECnet network.
PRO/DECnet is also prerequisite software to the use of the PRO in a shared
resource environment. A Professional 300 Series system can act as a server to a
group of Professional 300 Series systems which are logically connected to the
server via Ethernet hardware. These systems become workstations which can
share files, applications, and peripherals. This configuration requires that the
workstation registration software (provided with P/os Hard Disk) be installed.

Required Hardware

Any Winchester-based or Shared Resource configuration Professional Series 300
System with
•Minimum ofs12 KB of main memory
•A network connection with.one of the categories below
For DECnet Ethernet/Shared Resource Local Area Support:
A DECNA-K, the Ethernet Controller for the Professional which comes in a kit
including the Transceiver Cable (BCC06-15), the loopback connector (Pc3xx-BA),
a hardware diagnostic diskette and documentation.
For Asynchronous/Synchronous Wide Area Network Support:
EIA RS232C/CCITT V.28 cable; BC22D-XX (null modem), BCC04-xx (modem cable)
or demonstrated equivalents.

Prerequisite So.ftware

Workstation registration software provided with P/os Hard Disk

Table 3.11
PRO/DECnet Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Materials and Services Option:
PRO/DECnet single-use license, binary
distribution kit on RXSO diskette,
PRO/DECnet user's guide

QBA44-A3

PRO/DECnet binary distribution
kit on RXSO diskette, PRO/DECnet
user's guide

QBA44-H3

Option to allow increments of 4
CPUs, each connected to the same
server, to run PRO/DECnet

QB014-UZ

3.12

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet/E

DECnet/E software allows a suitably configured RSTS/E system to participate
as a routing or nonrouting node in DECnet computer networks. DECnet/E
can connect to an Ethernet and supports all Phase IV capabilities except
area routing.
DECnet/Eis a Phase IV network product and is warranted for use with
supported Phase III and Phase IV DECnet products.
For prerequisite hardware and software, consult SPD 10. 73.

Table 3.12
DECnet/E Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU).

PDP-11

MicroPDP-11

Single-use license

QP692-UZ

QY692-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QP692-HD
QP692-HH
QP692-HM
QP692-HV

QY692-HH
QY692-H5
QY692-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

QP692-HZ

Documentation only

QP692-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

DECnet-RT

QY692-GZ

DECnet-RT software allows a suitably configured RT-11 Foreground/Background
(FB) system to participate as an end node in DECnet computer networks. The
backward compatibility of Phase IV allows DECnet-RT to connect to Ethernet
through any Phase IV routing node.
DECnet-RT is a phase III network product and is warranted for use with
supported Phase III and Phase IV DECnet products supplied by Digital.
For prerequisite hardware and software, consult SPD 10. 72.

Table 3.13
DECnet-RT Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QJ687-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QJ687-H3
QJ687-HH
QJ687-HM
QJ687-HX

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ687-HZ

Documentation only

QJ687-GZ

3.13

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-10 and
DECnet-20

DECnet-10 software allows a suitably configured DEcsystem-10 to participate
as a routing or nonrouting node in a DECnet network. DEcnet-10 is a Phase IV
network product and is warranted for use with supported Phase III and Phase
IV DECnet products. For prerequisite hardware and software, consult SPD 8.60.
DECnet-20 software allows a suitably configured DECSYSTEM-2040/2060/2065 to
participate as a routing or nonrouting node in DECnet computer networks.
DECnet-20 is a Phase IV network product and is warranted for use with
supported Phase III and Phase IV DECnet products. For prerequisite hardware
and software, consult SPD 23.02 and SPD 23.20.

Table 3.14
DECnet-10 and DECnet-20
Order Codes

Option

Order Code
DECSYSTEM

DECSYSTEM

License Options:
(A license is
required for each CPU.)

-1090/1091/
1095

-2020

DECsystem

-2020/
2060/2065

(TOPS-10)

-1090/1091

(TOPS-20)

Single-use license,
binaries, documentation, support services

QH683-AM

QH684-AM

QTD04-AM

QTD20-AM

Single-use license only,
no binaries, no documentation, no support
services

QH683-DZ

QH684-DZ

QTD04-DZ

QTD20-DZ

Binaries,
documentation

QH683-HM

QH684-HM

QTD04-HM

QTD20-HM

Right-to-copy for
single-use license
only

QH683-HZ

QH684-HZ

QTD04-HZ

QTD20-HZ

QH683-EM

QH684-EM

QTD04-EM

DECsystem

Update/Unsupported
Options:

Source Option:
Source license, sources,
no support services,
no documentation

Additional Services:*
The following post-warranty software product services for this software product are available to licensed customers: Self-maintenance, Basic service, and
DECsupport service, the prerequisite being the purchase of the equivalent level
TOPS-10 software product service.
*Customers should contact their local Digital office for additional information on
the availability of these services.

3.14

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-ULTRIX is a Phase IV end-node implementation of the Digital Network
Architecture (DNA) for the ULTRIX-32 operating system. It allows Digital ULTRIX
systems to communicate with other Digital operating systems that use the DNA
Phase III or Phase IV protocols, as well as with non-Digital operating systems
that support the Internet (TCP/IP-based) protocols.
DEcnet-Ul'.rRIX includes a semi-transparent, bi-directional gateway that acts as a
bridge between DECnet networks and Internet (TCP/IP-based) networks. This
software gateway allows DECnet and Internet users to communicate through file
transfers, remote logins, and mail correspondence. The gateway docs not
require special software on systems that use its service, nor does it require
accounts for remote users on the gateway system.

Features

DECnet-ULTRIX offers these networking capabilities:
• Semi-transparent, bi-directional software gateway between DECnet networks
and Internet (TCP/IP-based) networks
•Task-to-task communications
• Network virtual terminal
• Remote file transfer
• Electronic mail

Prerequisite Hardware

One of the following:
• Any valid VAX system configuration running ULTRIX-32 with the following
communication devices: DEUNA, DELVA, or VAXBI Ethernet controller, or
DMR11 synchronous controller interface. (Refer to the Order Code Table for a
list of supported VAX processors.)
•Any valid MicroVAX II or VAXstation 11/GPX system configuration running
ULTRIX-32 with the following communication devices: DELQA Ethernet controller interface, or DMV11 synchronous controller.
• Any valid VAXstation 2000 or MicroVAX 2000 configuration running ULTRIX-32
with a DESVA Ethernet controller.

Prerequisite Software

ULTRIX-32 operating system.

3.15

Software

DECnet Communications Software

Table 3.15
DECnet- ULTRIX Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
Initial license (primary & cluster)
Monthly availability

Q*716-UZ
Q*716-1P 1
Q*716-JP 1

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*716-H#
Q*716-HZ
QL716-GZ
Q*716-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 2

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*716-9#
Q*716-8#
Q*716-3#

MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 5
VAX.station 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station 11/GPX: * = 4; # = 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = J or M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = J or M
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = J or M

VAX82x0: * = 5; # = Jor M
VAX83x0: * = 7; # =JorM
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = J or M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = J or M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = J or M
VAX.8600: * = K; # = M
VAX.8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = J or M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = J or M

1 Available on VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800 only.
2 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.16

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-DOS

DECnet-DOS allows the IBM PC, Pc!XT, and Personal Computer AT systems
to participate as non-routing (end) nodes in DECnet local area and wide area
computer networks.

Features

• Allows IBM personal computers to access the network through the asynchronous communications port or through the following Ethernet communications controllers:
Digital: DEPCA multibuffered Ethernet controller
MICOM Systems: NI5010-1 and NI5010-2 IBM PC Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 controllers
3Com Corporation: IE2 and IE4 Etherlink/IBM PC Ethernet Network Interfaces
• Supports task-to-task communications, remote file access, utilities for network
file operations, network command terminals, and network resource sharing
using DNA protocols
• Allows access to full DECnet-DOS functions for MS-DOS user programs written in
MACR0-86 Assembler (MASM) or the C language
• Provides SETHOST 132-column support for Digital national character sets and
Digital multinational character sets
• Supports IBM enhanced keyboards for IBM PC/XT and IBM Personal
Computer AT.

Figure 3.1
DECnet-DOS Configuration

DECnet-DOS

PDP-11

DECnet-11M-PLUS
(full fanction)

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DECnet-DOS

3.17

Software

DECnet Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware

The following minimum configurations are valid.
• IBM PC Model 5150 System Unit with 256 KB memory.
• IBM Pc/xT Model 5160 System Unit with 256 KB memory.
• IBM Personal Computer AT Model 5170 System Unit with 256 KB memory.

Note: Operation of any Ethernet controllers with broadband modems is
not supported. Refer to SPD 50.15 for configuration details.

Prerequisite Software

IBM PC Disk Operating System v3.1 or v3.2

Table 3.16
DECnet-DOS Order Code

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license 1

QVAOS-UZ

64-pack license

QVA05-U6

96-pack license

QVA05-U7

128-pack license

QVAOS~US

192-pack license

QVA05-U9

500-pack license

QVAOS-UB

1000-pack license

QVAOS-UC

Distribution and documentation

QVAOS-HI

Software revision right-to-copy

QVAOS-HZ

1 A DECnet-DOS license is included in the DEPCA Network Integration Packages.

For more information, refer to Section 3, Network Integration Packages.

3.18

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-Rainbow

DECnet-Rainbow allows Rainbow 100 personal computer systems to participate
as non-routing (end) nodes in DECnet computer networks. DECnet-Rainbow
offers task-to-task communications, remote file access, utilities for network file
operations, network command terminal support, and network resource-sharing
capabilities using the Digital Network Architecture (DNA) protocols. Access to
the network is through the asynchronous communication port. Access to full
DECnet-Rainbow functions is supported for MS-DOS user programs written in
MACR0-86 Assembler (MASM) and the C language.
DECnet-Rainbow

Figure 3.2
DECnet-Rainbow Configuration

PDP-11

VAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DECnet-Rainbow

Prerequisite Hardware

Refer to SPD 50.14 for configuration details.
Any valid Rainbow 100 (Rainbow lOOA, lOOB, 100+) MS-DOS v2.11
configuration with
• 256 KB system memory, of which 80 KB are allocated to the network driver
• 650 KB available disk for DECnet-Rainbow software, and
• EIA RS232c/v.24 cable (null modem, or for use with modem).

Prerequisite Software

Rainbow MS-DOS Operating System, Version 2.11

Table 3.17
DECnet-Rainbow Order Code

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QVA03-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QVA03-H3

3.19

Software

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-VAXmate

DECnet-vAxmate allows Digital's vAxmate personal computer/workstations
to participate as non-routing (end) nodes in DECnet computer networks. This
software is one of the DECnet-DOS family of products for personal computer
systems running Microsoft Corporation's Ms™-Dos operating system, and
specific variants of that product. DECnet-vAxmate is a DECnet Phase IV network product and is warranted for use only with supported Phase IV products
supplied by Digital.

Features

• Allows vAxmates to connect either to baseband Ethernet through the integral
Ethernet adapter, or to an adjacent routing node through the integral serial
communications port
• Supports task-to-task communications, remote file access, utilities for network
file operations, network command terminals, and network resource sharing
using DNA protocols
•Allows access to full DECnet-DOS functions for MS-DOS user programs written in
MACR0-86 Assembler (MASM) or the C language
• Provides SETHOST 180-column support for DEC national character sets and DEC
multinational character sets
Refer to Software Product Description 50.05.xx for more information about
DECnet-VAXmate.

Figure 3.3
DECnet- VAXmate
Con.figuration

PDP-11

VAX

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DECnet-VAXmate

Minimum Hardware Required

Any valid vAxmate MS-DOS v3.1 configuration with:
• Memory allocated to the network driver and buffers:
105 KB for Ethernet connection
75 KB for asynchronous serial line connection
• 800 KB available disk space for DECnet-vAxmate drivers and all utilities.
Note: Operation of the Ethernet interface with broadband modems is not
supported.

Prerequisite Software

VAxmate Microsoft Disk Operating System v3.1.

Table 3.18
DECmate-VAXmate
Order Code

Option

Order Code

License, Materials, and
Service Options:
Single-use license

Q6000-UZ

Distribution and documentation

Q6000-H7

3.20

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS TM and PC ALL-IN-1 are applications built on DECnetDOS. All three products allow personal computers to participate in a DECnet
network, and to share network resources such as printers and disks. They also
allow PC users to share data with other DECnet users, and to connect their PCs as
terminals on DECnet nodes. Network management features are provided in all
products. Each product suits a particular environment.
DECnet-DOS allows PCS to participate in DECnet networks as Phase IV end nodes.
It provides standard DECnet utilities to the PC user, and allows communication
with Phase III or Phase IV DECnet nodes, regardless of the operating system
they are running.
DECnet-DOS is well suited to the experienced DECnet user, technical users, and
distributed applications developers. It provides a documented application programming interface that allows programmers to develop distributed applications using program-to-program communications. VMS Services for MS-DOS
and PC ALL-IN-1 are examples of sophisticated applications built with these tools.
While DECnet-DOS provides the DECnet facilities in a standard DECnet environment, VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and PC ALL-IN-1 use the DECnet facilities in a
client/server relationship, giving the PC user the operating environment needed
for general networking applications.
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS allows VMS network nodes to provide MS-DOS
style services to the PC user. MS-NET™ protocols are layered on top of DECnet,
allowing multiple users to read and write the same file simultaneously.
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS acts like an extension of the local MS-DOS system,
making facilities such as VMS files, VMS directories, or VAX printers appear as
MS-DOS equivalents. The primary advantage ofvAx/vMS Services for MS-DOS is
that services are transparent and can be utilized by MS-DOS applications without
software modification. Also, MS-DOS users can use these facilities without
substantial retraining.
In contrast to the MS-DOS orientation of VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS, PC
ALL-IN-1 provides a user environment that is similar in style to ALL-IN-1 on VMS:
the user interface is menu driven, and data files are stored in a "file cabinet,"
from which users remove files for use with PC or VMS applications. Users share
files by allowing other users on that PC ALL-IN-1 system to access folders in the
file cabinet, or by mailing copies of files and documents to other users. The
result is that PC ALL-IN-1 hides from the PC users both the MS-DOS characteristics
of the PC and the VMS characteristics of the VAX systems.

3.21

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS

VAX/VMS Services for MS-Dos™ allows the VAXmate, IBM PC, IBM PC/XT, and IBM
Personal Computer AT to act as clients to VAX, MicroVAX, or vAxmate servers
in a local area network. The vAxmate and IBM PC clients utilize selected facilities
and services of the server system, and can access information and services on
other types of systems in DECnet networks.
vAx/vMs Services for MS-DOS consists of networking software and VAX,
MicroVAX, or VAXmate server software. A user interface, terminal emulators,
on-line user information, network management, utility software, and
MS-DOS for vAxmates is included. PC-DOS and PCSA/Pc software are prerequisite
for IBM PCS.
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS is part ofDigital's Personal Computing Systems
Architecture (PCSA), which integrates industry-standard personal computing
into larger-scale multiuser computing environments. The operating system and
user interface are adaptations of MS-DOS and Ms-Windows:'" The network
software is based on an adaptation of MS-NET;" which allows it to be used in
a DECnet-based network. The networking software features the following
services: File Services, Print Services, File Transfer, Network Management
and Control, VT200 Series Terminal Emulation, and Command Terminal
Emulation. (Full IBM PC support of VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS requires
the DEPCA-Kx Network Integration package. For more information, refer to
Section 3, Network Integration Packages.)
VAXmate and IBM PC systems function as clients in the VAX/VMS Services for
MS-DOS environment, utilizing the services provided by a VAX, MicroVAX, or
VAXmate configured as a server. For additional information, refer to SPD 30.50
for VAXmates, and SPD 55.07 for IBM PCS.

Features

• Ethernet-based communications for high speed data exchange.
• Access to VAX-based or VAXmate server systems to provide centralized application and data storage, file and record sharing, centralized system management,
and the ability to share resources such as laser printers and disk storage.
• Full compatibility with Digital's DECnet family of networking products.
• Industry-standard compatibility for running off-the-shelf applications software.

Prerequisite Hardware

• Server systems: Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXmate system connected to the
same local area network as the vAxmate or IBM PC clients. A vAxmate server
system must have an RCD31-EA vAxmate Expansion Box. (Refer to Table 3.20
for a list of supported processors.)
• Client systems: Any valid vAxmate, IBM PC Model 5150, IBM Pc/xT Model 5160,
or IBM Personal Computer AT Model 5170 connected to the same DECnet network as the VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXmate server system.
A local area network that includes IBM PC clients must include either an IBM PC
with DEPCA-K* package or a vAxmate for creation of the client key diskettes.
(Refer to SPD 55.07 for more information on IBM PC configurations, SPD 30.50 for
more information on VAXmate configurations, and Section 3, Network Integration Packages for more information on the DEPCA-K* package.)

3.22

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

• VAX or MicroVAX server systems: VAX/VMS or MicroVMS operating system and
DECnet-VAX.

Prerequisite Software

• VAXmate server systems: no prerequisites .
• IBM PC client systems: PC-DOS V3.10
• VAXmate client systems: no prerequisites.

Table 3.19
VAX/VMS Services far MS-DOS
Client Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required far each CPU.)

VAXmate

IBM PC

Single-use license

Q6A04-UZ

QBZF7-UZ 1

Distribution and documentation 2

QBZF7-HI

Software revision right-to-copy 2

QBZF7-HZ

1 A PCSA/PC client license and a DECnet-DOS license for the IBM PC are included in

the DEPCA-K* and DEPCA-BA Network Integration packages.
2 The VAXmate Client Distribution and Documentation option and Software

Revision Right-to-copy option are included with the respective server options.

Table 3.20
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS™
Server Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

MicroVAX II VAXmate

VAX-11/780
Series'

VAX8200
VAX83002

VAX8500
VAX 8550 3

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8700
VAX88004

Single-use license

QZA93-UZ

QEA93-UZ

Q*A93-UZ

Q#A93-UZ

QKA93-UZ

Q+A93-UZ

QEA93-QZ

Q*A93-QZ

Q#A93-QZ

QKA93-QZ

Q+A93-QZ

Initial license
(primary and cluster)

Q*A93-1P

Q#A93-1P

Q+A93-1P

Monthly availability:
• pnmary
• cluster

Q*A93-JP
Q*A93-JZ

Q#A93-JP
Q#A93-JZ

Q+A93-JP
Q+A93-JZ

Q6A93-UZ

VAXcluster license

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution and
documentation
Software revision
right-to-copy

QZA93-H3
QZA93-HS

Q6A93-H7

QEA93-HM

Q*A93-HM

Q#A93-HM

QKA93-HM

Q + A93-HM

QZA93-HZ

Q6A93-HZ

QEA93-HZ

Q*A93-HZ

Q#A93-HZ

QKA93-HZ

Q + A93-HZ

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is considered a single CPU.

2* =

5 for VAX 8200 and 7 for VAX 8300.

3 # = 9 for VAX 8500 and 2 for VAX 8550.
4

+ = 2 for VAX 8700 and M for VAX 8800.

3.23

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

Network Integration Packages

The Network Integration Packages allow the IBM PC, PC/XT, and Personal
Computer AT to participate in Ethernet local area networks using VAX/VMS
Services for MS-DOSni software. The packages include the DEPCA-AA Ethernet
controller, a license to use all the components of DECnet-DOS, and a PCSA/Pc
Client license, which allows an IBM PC to act as a client to the server that
provides VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS. (For more information on the PCSA/Pc
Client capabilities, refer to Section 3, VAX/VMS Services.for MS-DOS.)
There are two Network Integration Packages available. The first package, the
DEPCA-K*, includes a Digital keyboard and mouse, and provides full Personal
Computing Systems Architecture (PCSA) capability, including Ms-Windows;"
On-line User Information system, and terminal emulators. The second package, the DEPCA-BA, does not include the Digital keyboard and mouse, and
provides a subset of the DEPCA-K* functions, including file and print services.
In addition to the Network Integration Packages, the DEPCA-AA Ethernet
Controller is available as a module-only option. For more information, refer
to Section 2, Ethernet Communications Controllers.

Table 3.21
Network Integration Package
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Network Integration Package includes DEPCA-AA ThinWire
Ethernet communications controller, ThinWire assembly
kit, DIGITAL VSXXX-AA mouse, LK250 keyboard, LK250/IBM
keyboard cable, PCSA/PC Client single-use software license
(QBZF7-uz), DECnet-DOS single-use software license
(QVAOS-uz), and Personal Workstation Handbook.

DEPCA-K*

Network Services Package includes DEPCA-AA ThinWire
Ethernet communications controller, ThinWire assembly
kit, PCSA/Pc Client single-use software license (QBZF7-uz),
DECnet-nos single-use software license (QVAOS-uz).

DEPCA-BA

*Variations for local language keyboards are: A (English), C (Canadian French),
D (Danish), E (Canadian Bilingual), F (Finnish), G (German), I (Italian),
K (Swiss French), L (Swiss German), M (Swedish), N (Norwegian),
P (French), S (Spanish), T (Hebrew)

3.24

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

PCALL-IN-1

PC ALL-IN-1 creates a workgroup environment for standalone personal computers by networking personal computers to a PC ALL-IN-1 MicroVAX II Server. The
PC ALL-IN-1 MicroVAX II Server is the vehicle which provides resource sharing,
personal computer and host interconnectivity, and information sharing to personal computer users. Capabilities include the ability to share printers, backup
data, exchange data/documents and messages, and access corporate data bases
for local decision support applications. The system also provides common desktop applications to the personal computer users such as document processing
and electronic mail.
The personal computers that the PC ALL-IN-1 Server supports are the hard
disk variations ofDigital's Rainbow 100+ or lOOB (the lOOA is not supported),
Digital VAXmate, IBM Pc/xT"' (Model 278), and IBM Personal Computer AT"'
(Models 68, 99, and 239).
PC ALL-IN-1 is packaged as a "ready-to-run" system. All the necessary hardware (except for the personal computers and connection cables), software, and
services are bundled as standard configurations under a single part number.
This packaging facilitates system installation, operations, maintenance and
expansion. PC ALL-IN-1 requires no system generation, no full-time system
manager, no VMS or command-level interface knowledge, and no system
backup/restore expertise.
There are two PC ALL-IN-1 standard configurations available. Refer to the order
code table for details.

Figure 3.4
PC ALL-IN-1
IBM

Configuration

Host

H4000-BA
H4000

PC ALL-IN-1

VAX 8800

Micro
VAX II

The PC ALL-IN-1 standard configurations are licensed for 30 users in total (in any
combination of Ethernet or asynchronous connections). Sixteen asynchronous
connections are standard for the configuration. This can be increased to 30
asynchronous connections by adding two additional asynchronous controllers.
PC ALL-IN-1 can support both ThinWire or Standard Ethernet.

3.25

Software

DECnet Applications for PCs

PC ALL-IN-1 standard configurations can support a maximum of four LN03
printers and up to three modems (with the restriction that the total number of
modems and printers not exceed four). The standard configurations include an
LN03. The console terminal has its own dedicated line.
Refer to Software Product Description 28.39 for more information about
PC ALL-IN-1.

Prerequisite Hardware

For personal computers connected via asynchronous lines:
• 640 KB Memory
• 10 MB Winchester Disk
• Asynchronous RS232 communications port
For personal computers connected via Ethernet:
• 640 KB Memory
• 10 MB Winchester Disk
• Ethernet card/connector (supported cards are Digital DEPCA, 3Com TM Etherlink
Models IE2 or IE4, and MICOM Systems"' Models NI5010-1 or NI5010-2).

Prerequisite Sofiware

For VAXmate: MS-DOS, V3.1 standalone.
For IBM PC/XT (Model 278) and Personal Computer AT (Models 68, 99, and 239):
PC-DOS, V3.1
For Rainbow 100: MS-DOS, Version 2.11
Note: There is no prerequisite software for the server.

Soflware Only Option

Table 3.22
PC ALL-IN-1
Order Codes

PC ALL-IN-1 server software can be purchased separately (without the MicroVAX II
server hardware). The software checks the server to determine on which of the
two configurations it is running. Refer to the Order Code table for components
of the software-only option.

Option

Order Code

Standard PC ALL-IN-1 configurations include a MicroVAX II,
Ethernet controller, 16 RS423 asynchronous ports, 4 lines for
printers and /or modems, one 95 MB Streaming tape, one
LN03 laser printer with printer stand and supplies, and one
VT220 console terminal with dedicated line. Also included are
the PC ALL-IN-1 single-use license, software media, documentation, and one year of hardware and software support.
Standard PC ALL-IN-1 configuration described above with
5 MB memory and three 71 MB disk drives

DJ-630B1-AA

Standard PC ALL-IN-1 configuration described above with
9 MB memory, one 71 BM disk drive, and two 159 MB
disk drives

DJ-630B2-AA

Software-only option includes license for server, license for
30 PCs, media, documentation, 3 days of DECstart Service,
and a choice of Startup Package II or 111.
Software-only option with Startup Package II

QZZH3-B5

Software-only option with Startup Package III

QZZH3-75

Software license for the PC

QZZH1-UZ

Documentation only

QZAOO-GZ

User documentation kit

QZCOO-GZ

3.26

Software

Mail Interchange

Mail Interchange
Message Router

Message Router is a VMS layered application that performs a store and forward
transfer service. Messages can consist of any information, including text, data
and arbitrary files, that need to be transferred within a DECnet Phase IV network.
Message Router supports messages constructed with fields defined by the
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Specification for the Message Format for
Computer Based Message Systems. The structure of the messages follows the
format specified in the CCITT X.400 standard for Message Handling Services.
Message Router must be installed on any network node that sends and receives
messages via Message Router. It requires application programs, called User
Agents or Gateways, that perform the following functions:
• Format and display messages
• Interact with Message Router to send or receive messages
• Convert a received message from Message Router format to the application
format
• Convert a sending application format into the Message Router format.
The Message Router is a standard component of ALL-IN-1 and PC ALL-IN-1
configurations. In addition, it is available in the following packages:
• Message Router Base for installing the Message Router on nodes running
user-written applications
• Message Router VMSmail Gateway for transferring VMS mail via the
Message Router
• Message Router x.400 Gateway for exchanging mail with x.400
mail systems
• Message Router Programmer's Kit for developing message transfer applications

Figure 3.5
Message Router Environment

VMS
MAIL

ALL-IN-ONE
MAIL

MAIL

MGT.

USER

FUNCTION S:

TRANSPORT:

VMS MAIL
GATEWAY

MESSAGE ROUTER

)

X.400

GATEWAY

BASE

NETWORK:
DECnet/

OSI

3.27

Software

OTHER
VENDORS

Mail Interchange

Features

• Used by Mail Agents and Gateways to exchange messages in a Digital-only or
multivendor environment.
• Logs the progress of messages and informs the sending application if undeliverable. Messages that cannot be immediately delivered are retained in a Message
Router node until they can be forwarded. (The system manager controls the
number and frequency of retries before the Message Router returns a message
to the sender as undeliverable.)
• May be installed in selected VMS nodes along a routing path to store messages
that may, for example, be retained for transmission at off-peak hours, or logged
into a central, record-keeping node for accounting or statistical analysis.
• May be used by any application adhering to Message Router or x.400 protocols
that needs to transfer data in a multivendor environment.

3.28

Software

Mail Interchange

Message Router Base

The Message Router Base is supplied as a separate package for installation on
nodes running customer-written Message Router applications. It may also be
installed on selected VMS nodes along a routing path, wherever there is a need to
store and log messages in transit. This allows for a centrally managed message
transfer service.
The Message Router Base provides management tools to configure and operate
the messaging service.
For more information about the Message Router Base, refer to the Message
Router topic in this section.

Required Hardware

Prerequisite Software

Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or vAxstation system configuration that supports
the DECnet Phase IV network. (Refer to the Order Code Table for a list of supported processors.)
• VAX/VMS or MicrovMs operating system v4.4 or later
• DECnet-VAX

Table 3.23
Message Router Base
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster
Materials and Service Options:

Q*732-UZ 1
Q*732-QZ 2
Q*732-1P 3
Q*732-JP 3
Q*732-JZ 3

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service
U.S. Software Product Services: 4

Q*732-H#
Q*732-HZ
QL732-GZ
Q*732-I#

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*732-9#
Q*732-8#
Q*732-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0:* = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 serit>s, or on

VAX 8600 series.
For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.29

Software

Mail Interchange

Message Router
VMSmail Gateway

Message Router VMSmail Gateway is a layered VMS application that allows
VMsmail users to send and receive mail in a network from other systems that use
Message Router. The VMSmail Gateway package contains the Message Router
Base and the Gateway to the VMS Personal Mail Utility.

Features

• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages using Message Router store and
forward management, thus ensuring guaranteed delivery.
• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages with users of other Digitalsupplied mail systems, for example, ALL-IN-1 and PC ALL-IN-1.
• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages with the users of non-Digital
supplied mail systems via the X.400 Gateway.
• Includes management tools to configure and operate the Gateway.

Required Hardware

Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system configuration that supports
the DECnet Phase IV network. (Refer to the Order Code Table for a list of supported processors.)

Prerequisite Software

• VAX/VMS or MicrovMS operating system V4.4 or later
• DECnet-VAX

Table 3.24
Message Router VMSmail Gateway
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX.cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*730-UZ 1
Q*730-QZ 2
Q*730-1P 3
Q*730-JP 3
Q*730-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*730-H#
Q*730-HZ
QL730-GZ
Q*730-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*730-9#
Q*730-8#
Q*730-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; # =Mor Y
VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on
VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
2

3.30 Software

Mail Interchange

Message Router X.400 Gateway

Message Router x. 400 Gateway is a layered VMS application that provides a
communication path between a Message Router-based network and any other
message transfer service that conforms to the CCITT 1984 x.400 Recommendations for Message Handling Systems. The Message Router x.400 Gateway
allows users of mail agents running on Message Router, such as ALL-IN-1, to
communicate with X.400 mail systems either in other networks or within the
same network.
Message Router supports messages constructed using the encoding defined
by the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Specification for the Message Format for Computer-based Message Systems. The structure of the messages follows the format specified in the CCITT X.400 Recommendations. The Message
Router X.400 Gateway converts the messaging protocols between NBS and
x.409 encoding.
The Message Router X.400 Gateway (together with Digital's OSI products)
provides interconnection between Digital's mail systems and other
X.400 systems.

Features

• Conforms to the CCITT x. 400 Recommendations as defined in the profiles
produced by CEPT (A311), CEN/CENELEC (A3211), and the NBS/X.400 profile.
• Includes Message Router Base and VAX OSI Applications Kernal (osAK). The
Message Router X.400 Gateway can run on any node in the mail network,
provided that it is connected to the mail system by Message Router and has
access on the same node to Message Router, VAX OSI Transport Service (voTs),
and either VAX P.S.I. or VAX P.S.I. ACCESS.
• Complements the ALL-IN-1 Integrated Office and Information System, VMS
mail, and other mail systems that can access the Message Router.
• Allows electronic mail to be exchanged with other electronic mail systems or
public service providers that support the x.400 Recommendations.
• Provides for electronic mail interchange between two independent
DECnet networks.
• Provides a directory service to translate between Digital addressing and CCITT
x.400 Originator/Recipient name forms.
• Includes management tools to configure and operate the Gateway.

Required Hardware

• Any valid VAX, MicroVAX II, VAXstation II system configuration that supports
the DECnet Phase IV network.
•A communications device that supports VAX P.S.I. v4.0.

Prerequisite Software

• vAx/vMs or MicrovMs operating system v4.4 .
• DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I. or VAX P.S.I. ACCESS V4.0, and VOTS Vl.1.
•Any mail system running on Message Router (requires VMSmail Gateway v2.1
for VMSmail connection).

3.31

Software

Mail Interchange

Table 3.25
Message Router X. 400 Gateway
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*Z66-UZ 1
Q*Z66-QZ 2
Q*Z66-1P 3
Q*Z66-JP3
Q*Z66-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*Z66-H#
Q*Z66-HZ
QLZ66-GZ
Q*Z66-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*Z66-9#
Q*Z66-8#
Q*Z66-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M

VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on
VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
1

3.32 Software

Mail Interchange

Message Router
Programmer's Kit

The Message Router Programmer's Kit allows customers to write applications
that exchange messages over the network. The Message Router provides guaranteed delivery, thus relieving the application program from the need to consider the network state. User-written applications may exchange messages with
the Digital-supplied mail systems and gateways, or may run independently.
The Message Router Programmer's Kit contains the Message Router Base and
a run-time library of high-level interface routines that can be invoked from a
user application. The kit includes documentation to guide the programmer in
writing User Agents and Gateways.

Required Hardware

Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system configuration that supports
the DECnet Phase IV network. (Refer to the Order Code Table for a list of supported processors.)

Prerequisite So_ftware

• VAX/VMS or MicrovMs operating system V4.4 or later
• DECnet-VAX

Table 3.26
Messa,1;e Router Pro,r;rammer's Kit
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*733-UZ 1
Q*733-QZ 2
Q*733-1P 3
Q*733-JP 3
Q*733-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*733-H#
Q*733-HZ
QL733-GZ
Q*733-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*733-9#
Q*733-8#
Q*733-3#

VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on
VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
1

3.33

Software

Internet Communications Software

Internet Communications
Software

Digital's Internet family of products supports the interconnection ofDigital's
computers and Digital's networks to systems built by other manufacturers.
Internet products are tools for distributed data processing in a multivendor
environment. As parts of the powerful DNA, the internet products allow
transparent, bidirectional communication with the equipment of other vendors
and, at the same time, provide the flexibility required by local networks and
office systems. Many different programming languages and the wide range of
computing power provided by Digital's family of computers are supported.
Internet Communications Software includes:
• Digital-to-IBM
• Digital-to-UNIVAC
• Digital-to-CDC
• Digital-to-Unix
• Digital-to-Wang
• Packetnet
• Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)

3.34

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Digital-to-IBM
Communications Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software products offer services that range
from interconnection of the Digital Network Architecture (DNA) and IBM
System Network Architecture (SNA) to single-function, system-to-system
protocol emulation.
The DECnet/SNA Gateway provides interconnection of Digital and IBM environments on a network-to-network level. It allows VMS or MicrovMs systems
in a DECnet network to access resources, programs, and information within an
SNA network. It also allows 3270 display users within the SNA network to access
DECnet-based VMS or MicrovMs system resources within the DNA environment.
The DECnet/sNA Gateway provides the advantage of Ethernet capability and
access to the SNA environment, without incurring additional processor overhead
within the LAN.
VMS/SNA provides many of the same functions as the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
However, VMS/SN A is more suitable for installations that require a single direct
link to the SNA environment.

Both the DECnet/SNA Gateway and VMS/SNA require installation of the appropriate DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces. These products
provide Gateway Management and allow Digital or IBM users to interact using
the following services: 3270 Terminal Emulator (3270 TE), Remote Job Entry
(RJE), DECnet/sNA Data Transfer Facility, msoss Document Exchange Facility
(DDXF), EDE with IBM msoss, Distributed Host Command Facility (DHCF),
Printer Emulator (PrE), Advanced Program-to-Program Communication/Lu6.2
Programming Interface (APPC), 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270
ns), and Application Programming Interface (API).
Digital's Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) Protocol Emulator products provide point-to-point communications emulation between Digital and
IBM systems and are designed to satisfy single-function Digital-to-IBM communication requirements. If the amount of communication between Digital
systems and IBM mainframes is relatively low, BSC may be the appropriate
interconnection method. Digital offers two types of IBM Internet products
using the BSC technology-3271 protocol emulation software and 2780/3780
protocol emulation.
DECnet-DOS allows the IBM PC, PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT systems
to participate as non-routing (end) nodes in DECnet and Ethernet computer
networks. Refer to DECnet Communications Software in this section for
more information.

Several other products are available for Digital-to-IBM communications: VIDA
allows integration of data from IDMS on IBM mainframes with VAX databases,
DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Access Products allow access to the IBM environment for
DECSYSTEM 20-series users, and WPS-PLUS/PC provides Digital-style word
processing for IBM PC users.

3.35

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Gateway

The DECnet/SNA Gateway allows users to share information between suitably
configured VAX/VMS or MicrovAx/MicrovMs systems in a DECnet environment
and IBM systems in a Systems Network Architecture (SNA) environment.
The DECnet/SNA Gateway links the two vendors' network environments, rather
than merely providing single-function communications emulation between
two computers. Architecturally, the DECnet/SNA Gateway is a DECnet Phase IV
node to DECnet and a Physical Unit Type 2 node to SNA. The DECnet/SNA
Gateway implements SNA protocols and supports two local or remote connections at 56 Kb/s. When ordering the DECnet/SNA Gateway, specify hardware,
software and appropriate DECnet/SN A Access Routine/Programming Interface
order codes.

Features

• Links the DECnet environment to the IBM SNA environment.
•Provides these SNA functions: 3270 Terminal Emulator, Remote Job Entry,
DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility, Application Programming Interface, msoss
Document Exchange, EDE with IBM msoss, Distributed Host Command
Facility, Printer Emulator, Advanced-Program-to-Program Communication
LU6.2 Programming Interface, and 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface.
• Has Gateway Management software for control and troubleshooting.

Figure 3.6
DECnet/SNA
Gateway Configuration

Access Routines/Programming Interfaces

Host

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Terminator

IBM

Host

Prerequisite Hardware

• DECnet/SNA Gateway hardware (DECSA-FA).
• All Ethernet physical channel hardware (for example, coaxial cable
and terminators).
• An H4000 transceiver (or a DELNI) and appropriate transceiver cable.

Prerequisite Software

The DECnet/SNA Gateway requires a Phase IV DECnet host to support downline
software loading. One or more of the following systems may be used as
Ethernet hosts:
• vAx/vMs operating system with DECnet-VAX Phase IV networking software.
• MicroVAX n operating system with DECnet-VAX Phase IV networking software.

Table 3.27
DECnet!SNA
Gateway Hardware Order Code

Option

Order Code

DECnet/SNA Gateway unit and one-line synchronous EIA
RS-232-c/cCITT V.28 line card (DCSAX-LA)

DE CSA-FA

3.36

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.28
DECnet/SNA
Gateway Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*452-UZ 1
Q*452-QZ 2
Q*452-1P 3
Q*452-JP 3
Q*452-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*452-H#
Q*452-HZ
QL452-GZ
Q*452-I#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # ~ 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/78x, VAX 8000 Series.
3 Available on VAX 82x0, VAX 83x0, VAX 85x0, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.

DECnet/SNA Gateway
Country Kits

Every DEcnet/SNA Gateway requires a country kit. Each country kit contains
a power cord, hardware manuals in English, and labels with the front panel
display in the appropriate national language.

Table 3.29
DECnet/SNA Gateway
Country Kit Order Codes

DECnet/SNA
Gateway Options

Country

Order Code

Australia, New Zealand
Canada (French)
England, Ireland
France
Germany
Japan
Spain
United States, Canada (English)

DECSK-AZ
DEC SK-AC
DECSK-AE
DECSK-AP
DECSK-AG
DECSK-AJ
DECSK-AS
DECSK-AA

These guidelines for add-on line cards reflect performance constraints. The
performance of the line cards is described in the appropriate Software Product
Description. There are four variations of the total number of allowed add-on
cards. One and only one variation may be used:
• One DCSAX-LA card at 9.6 Kb/s.
• Two DCSAX-LA cards at 9.6 Kb/s each.
• One ocsAX-LA card at 9.6 Kb/sand one DCSAX-LB at 56.0 Kb/s.
• Two DCSAX-LB cards at up to 56.0 Kb/s. Discard the DCSAX-LA line card
included with the server hardware.

3.37 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

VMS/SNA

VMS/SNA is a VMS-layered software product that allows suitably configured
VAX systems to directly participate in an IBM Systems Network Architecture
(SNA) networking environment. Architecturally, a VAX system running
VMS/SNA appears to the SNA network as a remote Physical Unit Type 2 node,
and is attached to the SNA network through a DPV11 to an IBM 37XS Communications Controller.
VMS/SN A provides the high-level capabilities of a system-to-network link,
performing such functions as accessing IBM application programs or other
system resources, acting as a 3270 display station, exchanging documents and
electronic mail messages between the VMS operating system and IBM's msoss,
and implementing distributed application programs that run between the VMS
and IBM systems.
Systems requiring access to the SNA environment must be configured with the
appropriate Access Routines or Programming Interfaces. For more information, refer to DECnet/SNA VMS Access Routines and Programming Interfaces in
this section.

Features

• VMS/SNA serves as a transport base for other IBM related capabilities including
3270 Terminal Emulation, msoss document exchange, Printer Emulation,
Remote Job Entry, DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility, Application Programming Interface (Luo, 1, 2, 3), APPchu6.2 Programming Interface, and 3270 Data
Stream Programming Interface (LU 2). Note: Distributed Host Command
Facility (DHCF) is not supported for VMS/SNA.
• SNA Node Management (SNANM) provides a node management facility to
control, monitor, and troubleshoot VMS/SNA and the IBM/SNA environment. The
SNANM system image SET and SHOW commands display information about the
circuit status, circuit counters, access names, and circuit state.
•The SNA Protocol Trace Utility (sNATRACE) performs smc frame level, physical
unit, and session level tracing of a circuit to aid in problem isolation, determination, and resolution.

Figure 3.7
VMS/SNA Configuration
for MicroVAX

Figure 3.8
VMS/SNA Configuration
for BI-bus VAX

3.38

Software

Internet Communications Software

Comparison of VMS/SNA and
DECnet/SNA Gateway

The following applications are best suited for VMS/SNA:
• Remote offices requiring both independent computing resources for office
applications and access to the corporate database on the IBM mainframe.
• Government command and control systems requiring a link to the IBM mainframe for transfer of military information from mobil units.
The following applications are best suited for DECnet/SN A Gateway:
• Installations with Digital department-level systems and IBM corporate systems.
The department-level systems are linked via DECnet to the corporate SNA
network with a DECnet/SN A Gateway.
• Remote sites with more than one Digital computer that require access to the
SNA network.
• IBM 3270 users requiring access to a corporate mail system implemented on VAX
systems. The DECnet/SN A VMS DHCF access routine provides this capability.
• Sites requiring SNA access from VAXstation II systems.
The following environments are best suited for VMS/SNA:
•A large SNA network with a small number ofvAx systems.

• A large SNA network and geographically-dispersed single VAX systems, each
requiring a separate link to the SNA network.
The following environments are best suited for DECnet/SN A Gateway:

• A large DECnet network and medium-to-heavy interface to SNA network.
• Multiple DECnet networks and medium interface to SNA network.
• Need for multiple lines to SNA network.
• Heavy VAX usage that requires offloading network capabilities to a communications server.
Table 3.30
Comparison of VMS/SN A and
DECnet/SNA Gateway
Capabilities

VMS/SNA Vt.1

DECnet/SNA Gateway

Local and Communication
Processing

Communication Processing only

Q-Bus support via DPV11
VAXBI bus support via DMB32
No UNIBUS support

Ethernet based
Supports all VAX systems

Single line to 64 Kb/s

Two lines to 56 Kb/s

No DHCF

DHCF support

Node management internal

Gateway management uses
DECnet tools

No VAXstation II support

VAXstation II support

3.39

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware

One of the following:
• A MicroVAX 1 or MicroVAX II with at least two megabytes additional memory,
a DPV11 communications controller, and a modem or modem eliminator.
• A VAXBI-based system, a DMB32 communications controller, and a modem
or modem eliminator. Refer to the VMS/SNA Order Code table for a list of
supported processors.

Prerequisite Software

• Either MicrovMs, V4.4 or later, or VAX/VMS, v.4 or later. For MicroVMS, only
the Base System component is required .
• DECnet-VAX
•One of the DEcnet/SNA Access Routines listed under Optional Software.
• For VAXBI systems with DMB32, the DMB32 device driver.

Optional Software

• 3270 Terminal Emulator (sPD 26.84.xx)
•Remote Job Entry (sPD 26.85.xx)
• Data Transfer Facility (sPD 27.85.xx)
• Printer Emulator (sPD 26. 70.xx)
• msoss Document Exchange Facility (SPD 26. 72.xx)
•Application Programming Interface (sPD 26.86.xx}
• 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (sPD 26.87.xx)
• APPc/Lu6.2 Programming Interface (sPD 26.88.xx)
• EDE with IBM DISOSS (SPD 26.92.xx)

Table 3.31
VMS/SNA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Licenses: (A license is required
for each CPU.)

Single-use license

Q*362-UZ

Materials and Services

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation

Q*362-H#
Q*362-HZ
QL362-GZ
Q*362-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 1

DECsupport Service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*362-9#
Q*362-8#
Q*362-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M

VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

1 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.40

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Access Routines
and Programming Interfaces

Access Routine software packages are required for both the DEcnet/SNA
Gateway and a VMs/sNA host for communication with the SNA network.
DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces allow users to
perform specific functions on IBM host systems connected to the SNA network.
The following products, which are ordered separately, are available:
• DEcnet/SNA Gateway Management
• 3270 Terminal Emulator (3270 TE)
•Remote Job Entry (RJE)
• DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility
• msoss Document Exchange Facility (DDXF)
• EDE with IBM DISOSS
• Distributed Host Command Facility (DHCF)
• Printer Emulator (PrE)
•Advanced Program-to-Program Communication/Lu6.2 Programming Interface (APPC)
• 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270 ns)
• Application Programming Interface (API)

3.41

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS
Gateway Management

The DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management access routine controls, monitors,
and troubleshoots the Gateway. All management functions are performed from
a node on the Digital network, rather than from the Gateway. The Gateway
Management routines provide configuration and initialization facilities and
allow a VAX/VMS operator to bootstrap or restart a Gateway. This routine also
provides event logging and error counters. Fault isolation tools, such as SDLC
frame level loopback, verify communication facilities and connection to the IBM
line adapter.
The Gateway Man~gement access routine is required for use with VAX/VMS
systems executing the other access routines using the DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Table 3.32
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway
Management Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*452-UZ 1
Q*452-QZ 2
Q*452-1P 3
Q*452-:JP 3
Q*452-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*452-H#
Q*452-HZ
QL452-GZ
Q*452-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*452-9#
Q*452-8#
Q*452-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = Gor M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX82x0: * = 5; # = 3orM
VAX83x0: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX8500: *= 9; # = M
VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX8550:* = 2;# = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700:*= 2;# =M
VAX8800:*= M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.42 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

The DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator (3270 TE) access routine allows
a VT200 terminal (or other device operating in VT100 emulation mode) on a
suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX system to interact with programs on an
IBM system written for 3270 display stations. Specifically, this gives the 3270 TE
user the emulated features of a 3278 Model 2, 3, 4, or 5 display. Note that the
access routines are not required for routing nodes between the VAX/VMS system
and the gateway. 3270 TE is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway.

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270
Terminal Emulator (3270 TE)

Table 3.33
DECnet/SNA VMS

Option

3270 Terminal Emulator
Order Codes

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Order Code

Q*454-UZ 1
Q*454-QZ 2
Q*454-1P 3
Q*454-JP 3
Q*454-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*454-H#
Q*454-HZ
QL454-GZ
Q*454-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*454-9#
Q*454-8#
Q*454-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX82x0: * = 5; # = 3or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2 Not available ·on MicroVAX and VAx.station systems; or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on
VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
1

3.43 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS
Remote Job Entry (RJE)

Table 3.34
DECnet/SNA VMS
Remote job Entry
Order Codes

The DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry (RJE) access routine allows suitably
configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to function as SNA/RJE workstations that
can submit batchjobs to an IBM host and receive job output. The RJE access
routine must reside on each VAX or MicroVAX system supporting RJE transmission. Note that access routines are not required for DECnet nodes that transmit
files to a DECnet system for subsequent RJE processing, nor are they required for
any routing nodes between the requesting VAX or MicroVAX system and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway. The RJE access routine is available for use with both
VMS/SNA and the DECnet/sNA Gateway.

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*453-UZ 1
Q*453-QZ 2
Q*453-1P3
Q*453-JP 3
Q*453-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*453-H#
Q*453-HZ
QL453-GZ
Q*453-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*453-9#
Q*453-8#
Q*453-3#

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
For non-U. S. service agreements, copsult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.44

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Data
Transfer Facility (DTF)

The DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility (DTF) provides bidirectional data transfer
between an IBM MVS system in a Systems Network Architecture (SNA) environment and one or more VAX/VMS systems in a DECnet network. The VAX/VMS
user accesses the DECnet/SN A DTF product through standard DCL file manipulation commands (such as COPY or DIR), a Record Management System (RMS)
programming interface, an interface to the File Transfer Checkpoint and
Recovery Utility, or the DTF Management Utility interface. The IBM user
accesses the DECnet/SN A DTF product through ISPF panels or a TSO command
processor. A TSO command processor can also be invoked in a JES batch job.
For IBM MVS systems, DECnet/SNA DTF supports files with the physical sequential
data set organization, with fixed, variable and variable spanned records, and
resident on disk or tape. For VAX/VMS systems, DECnet/SN A DTF supports RMS
sequential, relative or indexed files using sequential record access, with fixed,
variable length, and variable-length with fixed-length control (vFc) record
formats. (Only print file format is supported with VFC.) DECnet/SN A DTF allows
data translation from the Digital Multinational Character Set to EBCDIC on a
record-by-record basis and vice versa. To translate binary, integer, floating
point, packed decimal, and numeric strings, the VAX Common Data Dictionary
is required on the VMS/DTF Server node. The information content of the file is
maintained across a file transfer.
The DTF software contains these components: DECnet/SN A VMS DTF Client
software that runs on any DECnet-VAX system that needs to use DTF; DECnet/SN A
VMS DTF Server software that runs on a DECnet-VAX system to communicate
between the VMS/DTF client systems and the MVS/DTF systems (includes client
support); and, DECnet/SNA MVS DTF software that runs on the IBM MVS system.
(Mvs/oTF includes a VTAM application program to control the communications
with the VMS/DTF Server nodes, a TSO command processor, and an ISPF dialog to
initiate transfers from the IBM system.)
DECnet/SN A DTF is available for use with both VMS/SN A and the DECnet/SNA
Gateway. Refer to SPD 27.85 for prerequisite hardware and software for both the
IBM MVS and VAX/VMS systems.

3.45

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.35
DECnet/SNA VMS DTF
Server and Client Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Server

Client

Single-use license

Q*ZDI-UZ

Q*ZGS-UZ

vAxcluster License 1

Q*ZDI-QZ

Q*ZGS-QZ

Initial license (primary & cluster) 2

Q*ZDI-1P

Q*ZGS-1P

Monthly availability:
primary 2

Q*ZDI-JP

Q*ZGS-JP

Monthly availability:
cluster 2

Q*ZDI-JZ

Q*ZGS-JZ

Distribution and documentation

Q*ZDI-H#

Q*ZGS-H#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = M
VAX-11/7823 : * = E; # = M
VAX 11/785: * = E; # = M
VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX 8250: * = 5; # = 31 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8350: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: *= 9; # = M
VAX8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8600: * = K; # = M
VAX8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/78x, VAX 82XO, VAX 83XO, VAX 85x0, VAX 86x0,

VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
2 Available on VAX 82x0, VAX 83XO, VAX 85x0, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.

3 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is

considered a single CPU.

Table 3.36
DECnet/SNA MVS DTF
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QXI01-UZ

Initial license

QXI01-1P

Monthly availability

QXIOl-JP

Distribution and documentation

QXI01-HA

3.46

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS
Document Exchange Facility
(DDXF)

The DECnet/SNA VMS msoss Document Exchange Facility (ooxF) access
routine allows suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to access both
document distribution and library services provided by the IBM host supported
Distributed Office Support System/370 (msoss/370). DDXF communicates
with the msoss host system using the SNA Advanced Program-to-Program
Communication (APPc/Lu6.2) facility and the Document Interchange Architecture/Document Content Architecture (mA/ocA) protocols.
DDXF accepts both final-form-text and revisable-form-text documents for
transmission or reception. However, transform routines are provided for
final-form-text documents only. Final-form-text documents are translated by
DDXF to/from ASCII text after reception or prior to transmission of a document.
This allows a VAX or MicroVAX user to perform minor revisions to a received
document via a text editor such as EDT. DDXF is available for use with both
VMS/SNA and the DECnet/SN A Gateway.

Table 3.37
DECnet/SNA VMS DDXF
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*042-UZ 1
Q*042-QZ 2
Q*042-1P 3
Q*042-JP 3
Q*042-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*042-H#
Q*042-HZ
QL042-GZ
Q*042-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*042-9#
Q*042-8#
Q*042-3#

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.47

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

EDE with IBM DISOSS

The EDE with IBM DISOSS product provides VAX or MicroVAX users of ALL-IN-1
Office Menu software or DEcdx/VMS access to the Document Library Services
and Distribution Services of the IBM msoss/370 product running in an SNA
environment. Both final-form-text and revisable-form-text are supported/
transformed. Operation of EDE with IBM msoss is initiated through a simple
menu interface, which can be added to the ALL-IN-1 Office Menu or invoked from the DCL system prompt when used with DEcdx/VMS. Note: The
msoss Document Exchange facility (DDXF) access routine is a prerequisite
product. EDE with IBM msoss is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Table 3.38
EDE with IBM DISOSS

Option

Order Codes

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Order Code

Q*761-uz 1
Q*761-QZ 2
Q*761-1P 3
Q*761-JP3
Q*761-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*761-H#
Q*761-HZ
QL761-GZ
Q*761-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*761-9#
Q*761-8#
Q*761-3#

MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX82x0: * = 5; # = 3or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M

VAX8500: * = 9; # =M
VAX8530:* = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, cons,ult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.48 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed
Host Command Facility (DHCF)

The DEcnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility (oHCF) access routine allows IBM 3270-class displays connected to an IBM host running the HCF
(Host Command Facility) program product in an SNA network to access
VAX/VMS systems. The IBM system gains access to VAX/VMS systems through
the DECnet/SN A Gateway. This allows the IBM network manager to control both
the IBM and Digital networks from an IBM display terminal. It allows IBM users
to access Digital computers and perform VAX functions such as executing
VAX/VMS commands, reading VAX mail, editing files, and monitoring and
controlling VAX/VMS processors. DHCF is available for use with the DECnet/sNA
Gateway only.

Table 3.36
DECnet/SNA VMS DHCF
Option

Order Codes

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX.cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

0*043-UZ 1
0*043-0Z 2
0*043-1P 3
0*043-JP 3
0*043-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

0*043-H#
0*043-HZ
OL043-GZ
0*043-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

0*043-9#
0*043-8#
0*043-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station II: * = 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX83x0: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX.8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX.8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX.8800:* = M; # = M

3.49 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS
Printer Emulator (PrE)

The DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator (PrE) access routine allows suitably
configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to receive printable data from IBM
host-based applications. These applications were originally developed to produce output for an IBM 3287 printer in system mode that is connected to an IBM
3274 cluster controller. Using PrE, either an IBM or Digital terminal user (in 3270
terminal emulation mode) can have a document printed at a Digital printer
attached to a local VAX or MicroVAX system. PrE is available for use with both
VMS/SNA and the DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Table 3.40
DECnet!SNA VMS PrE

Option

Order Codes

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*044-UZ 1
Q*044-QZ 2
Q*044-1P3
Q*044-JP 3
Q*044-:JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*044-H#
Q*044-HZ
QL044-GZ
Q*044-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*044-9#
Q*044-8#
Q*044-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II: * = 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on
VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
1

3.50 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Application
Programming Interface (API)

The DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface (API) supports many
different types of sessions between VMS or MicrovMs applications and applications running in an IBM host through its support of Logical Unit Type o (1uo)
sessions. This product can implement the path control, transmission control,
and the data flow control layers of SNA for the VMS or MicrovMs user. The API
also provides extensive parameter checking, state machine management, and
other high level services.
The DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface can be used in
either basic or extended mode. Two sets of subroutines are provided with
the product-the set for the basic mode supports VMS or MicroVMS application programs written with the V1.x product and the set for the extended
mode provides users with an easier-to-use interface than the earlier versions of the product. API is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Table 3.41
DECnet/SNA
VMS Application
Programming Interface
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license7 primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*4Ss-uz 1
Q'A-455-QZ 2
Q*455-1P 3
Q*455-JP 3
Q*455-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*455-H#
Q*455-HZ
QL455-GZ
Q*455-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*455-9#
Q*455-8#
Q*455-3#

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.

3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
4 For non-U. S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.51 Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Advanced
Program-to-Program
Communication/LU6.2
Programming Interface (APPC)

The DECnet/sNA VMS Advanced Program-to-Program Communication/Lu6.2
Programming Interface (APPC) allows program-to-program communications
between transaction programs on an IBM host and those on a suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX system. The APPC product is a set of subroutines that is
called by VMS or Micro VMS programs acting as Logical Unit 6.2 (Lu6.2) transaction application programs. Any of the VMS or Micro VMS programming languages conforming to the VAX/VMS Calling Standard can be used to write VMS
or MicroVMS programs that communicate with IBM applications running under
IBM's CICS transaction subsystem. APPC implements both the basic and mapped
conversation verb set ofLu6.2, using additional parameters to implement the
mapped verbs. APPC is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the DECnet/
SNA Gateway.

Table 3.42
DECnet/SNA VMS
APPC/LU6.2 Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*022-UZ 1
Q*022-QZ 2
Q*022-1P 3
Q*022-JP 3
Q*022-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*022-H#
Q*022-HZ
QL022-GZ
Q*022-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*022-9#
Q*022-8#
Q*022-3#

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 83x0: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800:* = M; # = M

3.52

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data
Stream Programming Interface
(3270 DS)

The DECnet/sNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270 os)
allows users to develop programs that use Logical Unit Type 2 (Lu2) sessions
to communicate with IBM application programs. This product can be used in
either of two modes- Data Stream Mode or Field Mode. Data Stream Mode
programs send and receive uninterpreted 3270 data streams, as defined by IBM.
The VMS or MicrovMs program interprets the incoming 3270 data stream and
builds the data stream that returns to IBM applications. Field Mode programs
interpret the incoming 3270 data stream to build a screen image, and produce
the 3270 data screen to return to the IBM application from the updated image
provided by the VMS MicrovMs application. 3270 os is available for use with
both VMS/SNA and the DECnet/SNA Gateway.

Table 3.43
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 DS

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX.cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*363-UZ 1
Q*363-QZ 2
Q*363-1P 3
Q*363-JP 3
Q*363-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*363-H#
Q*363-HZ
QL363-GZ
Q*363-I#

U.S. Software Product Services: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*363-9#
Q*363-8#
Q*363-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX82x0: * = 5; # = 3or M
VAX83x0: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX.8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX.8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.53

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

VIDA (VAX/IBM Data Access)

VIDA is a VAX software component in a VAX/IBM interconnect system which
allows integration of data from IBM mainframe databases with VAX databases.
VIDA conforms to a read-only subset of the Digital Standard Relational Interface
(nsm) architecture. VIDA users can access IBM data through products such as
Datatrieve, the Rdb/vMs utilities and embedded Data Manipulation Language
(DML), and other layered products which access data through DSRI.
VIDA uses DIGITAL's SNA Gateway products to communicate with software from
Cullinet Software, Inc., running on the IBM mainframe. The Cullinet software
accesses the data from the IBM mainframe database, and sends it across the SNA
Gateway to the VAX user's application software. The accessed data can also be
stored in a VAX database or file. Refer to SPD 27.25.xx for detailed information
about VIDA.

Required Hardware

Digital Hardware: Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system configuration and
Ethernet-based DECnet/SNA Gateway. Refer to SPD 27.25.xx for individual
system requirements.
IBM Hardware: Any valid IBM system which supports the required Cullinet
Software and Digital's DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (Refer to SPD 26.87.xx).

Prerequisite Software

Digital Software: VMS or MicroVMS Operating Systems and DECnet/SNA VMS
3270 Data Stream Programming Interface v1 .1 or later.
IBM Software: Any valid IBM system which supports the required Cullinet
Software and Digital's DEcnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (Refer to SPD 26.87.xx).
cuLLINET Software: IDMS-DC/UCF, ICMS Version 10.0 and IDMS/R Version 10.0
with Information Database (IDB)

Table 3.44
VIDA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAX.cluster license
Initial license, primary & cluster
Monthly availability, primary
Monthly availability, cluster

Q*B12-uz 1
Q*B12-QZ 2
Q*B12-1P 3
Q*B12-JP3
Q*B12-JZ 3

Materials and Service Options:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation Service

Q*B12-H#
Q*B12-HZ
QLB12-GZ
Q*B12-I#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 0r 5
VAX.station II: * = 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; #=Mor Y

VAX 82x0: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX83x0: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX.8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX.8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX.8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX.8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, or on the VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX and VAXstation systyems, on the VAX-11/700 series, or on

VAX 8600 series.

3.54

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20
Access Products

The DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Access Products allow users on one or more TOPS-20
systems to transfer data between a TOPS-20 system acting as an RJE (Remote Job
Entry) workstation and IBM batch subsystems. These products also implement
distributed application programs that run between TOPS-20 and IBM systems.
The TOPS-20 Access Products provide full support for the DX24 Gateway. This
support includes accepting an upline dump from the Gateway when it is
directly connected to the TOPS-20 system (via the DN20). The TOPS-20 Access
Products provide limited support for the DECnet/sNA Gateway. The TOPS-20
system cannot configure the software image for the DECnet/SNA Gateway nor
downline load the DECnet/SNA Gateway over the Ethernet. However, TOPS-20
Access Products can use the DECnet/sNA Gateway as long as there is another
node (VMS, RSX) in the network with the respective Gateway Management
software. This node must be capable of configuring the image and loading/
dumping the DECnet/SNA Gateway over the Ethernet.

Gateway Management

Network Management for the DEcnet/SNA Gateway includes normal DECnet
network management activities, as well as the following tasks specific to the
DECnet/SNA Gateway:
•Control of the DECnet/SNA Gateway
•Monitoring of the DEcnet/SNA Gateway
• Troubleshooting
• Monitoring the SNA/SDLC lines
These activities are usually performed by the TOPS-20 system manager of one of
the nodes attached to the Gateway or shared by several DECnet system managers. All network management functions are performed from a TOPS-20 node
rather than from the Gateway itself.
The Gateway Management access product is REQUIRED on every TOPS-20
node that uses the DECnet/SNA Gateway. At least one RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS,
vAx/vMs or TOPS-20 system must be adjacent to each Gateway and include
this product.

Remote Job Entry

The Remote Job Entry (RJE) facility allows a DECnet/TOPS-20 node to function as
an SNA/RJE workstation, or as a group of workstations, that can transmit batch
jobs to an IBM host and receive job output. The TOPS-20 user can prepare batch
jobs in files, submit the jobs, and obtain the job output from the IBM system.
By using batch interaction with the IBM host, this product provides the capability for periodic updating of databases and other applications.

Application Interface

The Application Interface enables a user-written application on a TOPS-20 node
to exchange messages with a cooperating application on an IBM host. The
Application Interface exists on the TOPS-20 system as a subroutine library of
functions that is linked with the user-written program.
Functionally, the interface is similar to the DECnet task-to-task capability. The
interface provides TOPS-20 users with mechanisms for accessing IBM systems
from application programs.

3.55

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware

Prerequisite Software

Any valid DECSYSTEM 2040, 2060, or 2065 System with valid DECnet connection
to a Non Ethernet-based DECnet/SNA Gateway.
• TOPS-20 vs.1 (or later) Operating System.
• DECnet-20 V3.0 or later.

Table 3.45
DECnet/SNA TOPS-20

Gateway Management
Access Routine Order Codes

Option

Order Code

DEcnet/SNA TOPS-20 Gateway
Management, Single-Use License,
Binaries, Documentation, Support
Services

QT104-AM

DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Gateway
Management, Single-Use
License-Only Option, No
Documentation, No Support
Services

QT104-DZ

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Gateway
Management, Binaries,
Documentation, No Support
Services

QT104-HM

DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Gateway
Management, Right-to-Copy for
Single-Use, No Binaries, No
Documentation

QT104-HZ

Documentation Only

QL104-GZ

3.56

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.46
DECnet/SNA TOPS-20
R]E Access Routine
Order Codes

Table 3.47
DECnet/SNA TOPS-20
Application lnteiface
Access Routine Order Codes

Option

Order Code

DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Remote Job
Entry, Single-Use License, Binaries,
Documentation, Support Services

QT105-AM

DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Remote Job
Entry, Single-Use License-Only
Option, No Documentation, No
Support Services

QT105-DZ

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Remote Job
Entry, Binaries, Documentation, No
Support Services

QT105-HM

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Remote Job
Entry, Right-to-Copy for
Single-Use, No Binaries, No
Documentation

QT105-HZ

Documentation Only

QL105-GZ

Option

Order Code

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Application
Interface, Single-Use License,
Binaries, Documentation, Support
Services

QT106-AM

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Application
Interface, Single-Use License-Only
Option, No Documentation, No
Support Services

QT106-DZ

DECnet/SN A TOPS-20 Application
Interface,· Binaries, Documentation,
No Support Services

QT106-HM

DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Application
Interface, Right-to-Copy for
Single-Use, No Binaries, No
Documentation

QT106-HZ

Documentation Only

QL106-GZ

3.57

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Binary Synchronous
Communications
Protocol Emulators

The communications used in this group of products is a subset of IBM's Binary
Synchronous Communications (Bsc) protocol. Access to an IBM host system can
be either via batch or interactive methods. Horizontal format control records
can be received and processed. A subset of vertical format control escape
sequences is supported, specifically single, double, and triple space,
form feed, and space suppress. In most cases, any block-addressable storage
device supported by the Digital system can be used as a source of transmission
files with fixed length (so-character card image), variable length transmitted
as either EBCDIC (automatically translated from ASCII), or binary data (no
translation). BSC control characters are automatically added to the data
before transmission and stripped upon reception.

VAX 2780/3780
Protocol Emulator

The VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator supports the synchronous line protocol
used by an IBM 2780 or 3780 Remote Batch Terminal. The emulator provides the
VAX/VMS user with a mechanism for transferring data between the VAX/VMS or
MicrovMs operating system and another system equipped to handle 2780 or 3780
communications protocols.
The following IBM remote batch terminal features are supported:
• 2780 Extended and Multiple Record Option

• Variable Horizontal Forms Control
• BSC Transparency
• 3780 Space Compression

The VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator can run up to four physical lines
concurrently, each with a different set of attributes. For example, some lines
may connect to 2780 terminals, others to 3780 terminals, at speeds up to 9,600
bps per line (4800 bps for MicroVAX II).

Features

• Can be invoked interactively or by a VAX/VMS command procedure.
• Command set designed to facilitate sharing a communication line among
several users to reduce network costs.
• With the appropriate modem options, the emulator is capable of automatically
answering incoming calls.
• Using a combination of command procedures, the emulator can operate
unattended and is capable of:
- detecting an incoming call
- establishing the connection
- transmitting and receiving files
- recovering from transmission failures.

3.58

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware

One of the following:

• A MicroVAX 1, MicroVAX II, or vAxstation II system with DPV11 communications interface.
• A VAX-11/7xx system (except VAX-11/725) with a DUPll or DMF32 communications interface; or a vAx-11/725 with a DMF32 communications interface. The
VAX-11/730 requires an R80/RL02 configuration.
• A VAX 8000 series system with a DUPll, DMF32, or DMB32 communications interface. Refer to the VAX 2780/3780 Order Code table for a list of
supported processors.

Optional Hardware

• For MicroVAX nor VAxstation II, up to two additional DPVll communications interfaces
• For VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8600, or VAX 8650, up to three
additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interfaces
• For VAX-11/750, one additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interface
• For VAX 8200 or VAX 8300, one additional DMF32 or DMB32 communications interface
• For VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8700, or VAX 8800, up to three additional DUPll,
DMF32, or DMB32 communications interfaces

Prerequisite Software

• For MicroVAX 1, MicroVAX II, and vAxstation II systems, MicrovMs with
Extended Base component and Program Development component.
• For VAX systems, VAX/VMS and, if using the DMB32, the DMB32 Synchronous
Device Driver.

3.59

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.48
VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

·~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Licenses: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
VAX.cluster license 1
Initial license (primary & cluster) 2
Monthly availability: primary2
Monthly availability: cluster2

Q*111-UZ
Q*111-QZ
Q*111-1P
Q*111-JP
Q*111-JZ

Materials and Services:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation

Q*111-H#
Q*111-HZ
QL111-GZ
Q*111-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 3
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*111-9#
Q*lll-8#
Q*111-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
VAX.station II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/725: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = Y or M
VAX-11/782: 4 * = E; # = Yor M
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = Y or M

VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8600: * = K; # = M
VAX8650: * = K;# =M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8200, VAX 8300,
VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8600, VAX 8650, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
2 Available on VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
3 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
4 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
1

3.60

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator enables v1100 users (or users with Digital terminals
or personal computers that emulate the VT100) on a VAX/VMS or MicrovMs
system to communicate interactively with application programs running on an
IBM System 370 class host. The 3271 Protocol Emulator can run with IMS/vs,
cics/vs, or TSO, and allows users to implement applications performing
remote, on-line access to IBM databases for data entry, retrieval and update. This
capability is an especially efficient migration tool in the transition phase for
users who are implementing distributed processing by moving applications
from centralized mainframes to VAX distributed processors. The application
program interface provides a base for distributed applications where one
component of the application runs on an IBM system and the other on a VAX.
This type of application is useful in situations such as on-line access and update
of a mainframe database in response to an event in the VAX. Refer to SPD
25.21.xx for detailed information.

Features

• Manages the modems and line protocols and provides an easy-to-use interface.
• The application program support interface provides on-line access to a mainframe database .
• Executes the WRITE, GENERAL POLL, and SPECIFIC POLL command sequences.
• Allows the system manager to control and monitor the activity of the emulator.
• The 3270 Terminal Emulation utility causes a screen display transmitted from
the IBM system to be displayed on the Digital terminal in a fashion similar to
the display on a 3270, and maps the Digital terminal keyboard to simulate the
3270 keyboard.

Prerequisite Hardware

One of the following:
•A MicroVAX I, MicroVAX II, or vAxstation II system with DPV11 communications interface.
• A vAx-11/7xx system (except vAx-11/725) with a DUP11 or DMF32 communications interface, or a VAX-11/725 with a DMF32 communications interface. The
VAX-11/730 requires an R80/RL02 configuration.
•A VAX 8000 series system with a DUP11 or DMF32 communications interface.
Refer to the VAX 3271 Order Code table for a list of supported processors.

Optional Hardware

• For MicroVAX II or vAxstation II, up to two additional DPV11 communications interfaces
• For VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8600, or VAX 8650, up to three
additional DUP11 or DMF32 communications interfaces
• For VAX-11/750, one additional DUP11 or DMF32 communications interface
• For VAX 8200 or VAX 8300, one additional DMF32 communications interface
• For VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8700, or VAX 8800, up to three additional DUP11 or
DMF32 communications interfaces

Prerequisite Software

• For MicroVAX I, MicroVAX II, and VAXstation II systems, MicrovMs with
Extended Base component and Program Development component.
• For VAX systems, VAX/VMS operating system

3.61

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.49
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Licenses: (A license is
required far each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license 1
Initial license (primary & cluster) 2
Monthly availability: primary 2

Q*112-UZ
Q*112-QZ
Q*112-1P
Q*112-JP

Materials and Services:

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation oniy
Installation

Q*112-H#
Q*112-HZ
QL112-GZ
Q*112-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 3

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

Q*112-9#
Q*112-8#
Q*112-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II: * = 4; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/725: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/730: * = C; # = G or M
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = Y or M
VAX-11/782: 4 * = E; # = Y or M
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = Y or M

VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = 3 or M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = 3 or M
VAX 8600: * = K; # = M
VAX 8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = 3 or M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8500, VAX 8550,
VAX 8600, VAX 8650, and VAX 8700.
2 Available on VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
3 For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.
4 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
1

3.62

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

RSX-112780/3780 Emulator

The RSX-11 2780/3780 software emulates the communications protocol of an
IBM 2780 or 3780 data communications terminal while running as a user task on
a suitably configured RSX-11M or RSX-11M-PLUS system. This product is not
designed to run on RSX-11S systems.
The RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator appears as an IBM 2780 or 3780 data transmission
terminal on point-to-point switched or nonswitched communications line
operating with standard 2780/3780 protocol.
This product can transmit and receive data and job control files with an IBM
System/370 class host system running batch subsystems such as POWER, HASP,
RES, JES2, or JES3. RSX-11 2780/3780 software will transmit files from or store
received files on any file-structured device accessible through the RSX-UM or
RSX-UM-PLUS File Control Services (Fcs) except DECtape or TU58.
On a mapped system the RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator also supports a spooling
feature that allows users to queue one or more files for subsequent transmission
or printing.
Users running the RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator on an unmapped system are
limited to one-line support, 2780 emulation, and attended mode.

Features

• Transmission from disk storage devices.
• Capable of queuing transmission request in unattended operation.
• Maximum transmit and receive block size of 400 characters in 2780 mode,
512 characters in 3780 mode.
• Maximum transmit and receive record size of144 characters.
• Handles up to seven records per block in 2780 mode and up to 256 records per
block in 3780 mode.
• Supports vertical and horizontal print format control.
• Supports binary or EBCDIC transmission.
• Selectable EBCDIC-to-ASCII conversion on Receive.
• Space Compression/Expansion in 3780 mode.
• Concurrent operation with application programs.
• Automatic retry of unattended mode transmissions.
• Error log recording and loop back facilities.
• Supports up to four lines concurrently.
• Supports line speeds up to 9,600 bits per second half duplex, although CPU
utilization on small RSX-UM systems will make support of more than two lines
running at 9,600 bits per second impractical.

Prerequisite Hardware

RSX-11M or RSX-11M-PLUS system configuration with:
• At least an additional 16 Kwords of memory available for this product
(10 Kwords for unmapped systems). Requirements vary with option and
configuration; see product documentation for exact requirements.
• One nuu, DUPU, nuv11, or DPV11 synchronous line interface per line.

Prerequisite Software

One of the following operating systems:
• RSX-UM operating system.
• RSX-UM-PLUS operating system.

3.63

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.50
RSX-11 2780/3780
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required.for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QJD82-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QJD82-HD
QJD82-HH
QJD82-HM
QJD82-HQ
QJD82-HT
QJD82-HV

Software revision right-to-copy

QJD82-HZ

Source Code and
Materials Options:
Source license and
sources distribution

Micro/RSX
2780/3780 Emulator

QJD82-ED
QJD82-EM

Source license and sources listings

QJD82-FR

Sources distribution option

QJD82-ND
QJD82-NM

The Micro/RSX 2780/3780 Emulator is a layered software product that extends
the ability to communicate with IBM systems using Binary Synchronous
Communication (Bsc) protocols in both a batch and interactive manner.
Micro/RSX 2780/3780 emulates the communications protocol of an IBM 2780 or
3780 remote batch terminal. Data may be transferred between the Micro/RSX

system and the IBM system that supports the IBM 2780 or 3780 protocol.

Prerequisite Hardware

• Any system with 512 Kbytes of memory, and
• One DPVll synchronous communications device. Note: Maximum line speed is
between 2400 and 4800 bis.

Prerequisite Soflware

Micro/RSX v3.0
Follow the guidelines described in the Software Product Description regarding prerequisite support and the customer's responsibility for installation of
this product.

Table 3.51
Micro/RSX 2780/3780
Emulator Order Code

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license with limited
warranty, documentation, binaries
onRXSO

3.64

Software

QYD82-UZ

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

RSX-11/3271
Protocol Emulator

RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator (PE) enables VT100 or VT200 users on an RSX-11M
or RSX-11M-PLUS system to communicate interactively with application programs running on an IBM System 370 class host. The 3271 PE can run with
IMS/vs, Cics/vs, or TSO. The protocol emulator makes it possible to implement
applications performing remote, on-line access to IBM databases for data entry,
retrieval and update.
This capability is an especially efficient migration tool in the transition phase
for users who are implementing distributed processing by moving applications
from centralized mainframes to PDP-11 distributed processors. The RSX-11/3271
PE allows users to access the applications that remain on mainframes through
their local PDP-11 systems.
The application program interface provides a base for distributed applications
where one component of the application runs an IBM system and the other a
PDP-11. This type of application is useful in situations such as on-line access and
update of a mainframe database in response to an event in the PDP-11, or where
it is inappropriate to present a 3270-style formatted screen to a user who is
accustomed to RSX-11 style screens.

Prerequisite Hardware

RSX-llM or RSX-11M-PLUS system configuration with:
• A synchronous interface: either a DV11, a DUP11, or a nuv11.
• Additional memory available for the RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator
Application Interface:
16 Kbytes for the first or only 3270 controller emulated by the application
interface (i.e., for the first or only synchronous line).
2 Kbytes for each synchronous line after the first.
1,200 bytes of pool for the protocol emulator and approximately 60 bytes of pool
for each application task supported.
• Installation requires approximately 4,800 blocks of disk space; approximately
2,800 are required for generation.

Prerequisite Software

RSX-UM or an RSX-11M-PLUS operating system.

Features

• Manages the modems and line protocols and provides an easy-to-use interface so that the application programmer does not have to be knowledgeable
about communications.
• The application program support interface provides on-line access to a
mainframe database .
• Executes the WRITE, GENERAL POLL, and SPECIFIC POLL command sequences.
• Allows the system manager to control and monitor the activity of the emulator.
• The 3270 Terminal Emulation utility causes a screen display transmitted from
the IBM system to be displayed on the VT100 in a fashion similar to the display on
a 3270, and maps the VT100 keyboard to simulate the 3270 keyboard.

3.65

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Features
(Continued)

• The hardware is microprocessor driven providing Direct Memory Access
(DMA) for the DUP11 synchronous line adapter on PDP-11 UNIBUS configurations.
The DMA ability reduces the CPU overhead associated with the transmission and
reception of messages compared to a character interrupt method which interrupts the CPU for each character as it is received.
The terminal emulator portion of the RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator supports
the following features of the 3277 Model 2 terminal:
• 1, 920-character screen.
• Upper/lowercase, numeric, and special symbol characters.
• Field attribute characters, protected and unprotected fields.
•Tab stop.
• Overstrike and insert mode.
• Reverse video and intensified display (both requiring the VT100 Advanced Video
Option), display or nondisplay characters.

Table 3.52
RSX-11I3271 Protocol Emulator
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

RSX-UM
Systems

RSX-HM-PLUS
Systems

Single-use license

QJD76-UZ

QJD84-UZ

QJD76-HD
QJD76-HH

QJD84-HD
QJD84-HH
QJD84-HM

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QJD76-HM
QJD76-HQ
QJD76-HT
QJD76-HV

QJD84-HV

Software revision right-to-copy

QJD76-HZ

QJD84-HZ

Documentation only

QJD76-GZ

QJD84-GZ

QJD76-ED
QJD76-EM

QJD84-ED
QJD84-EM

Source license and sources listings

QJD76-FR

QJD84-FR

Sources distribution

QJD76-ND
QJD76-NM

QJD84-ND
QJD84-NM

Source Code and
Materials Options:
Source license and
sources distribution

3.66

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Micro/RSX 3271
Protocol Emulator

The Micro/RSX 3271 PE is a layered software product that enables supported
Digital terminals and application programs to interact with IBM system application programs and system services that use the Binary Synchronous Communications (Bsc) line discipline. Digital terminal users access the 3270 Terminal
Emulator which is part of the Micro/RSX 3271 PE distribution; application
programmers use an application program interface (API) provided as part of
the Micro/RSX 3271 PE product.

Prerequisite Hardware

• Any system with 512 Kbytes of memory, and
• one DPV11 synchronous communications device. Note: Maximum line speed
supported is between 2400 and 4800 bis.

Prerequisite Software

Micro/RSX v3.0
Follow the guidelines described in the Software Product Description regarding prerequisite support and the customer's responsibility for installation of
this product.

Table 3.53
Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator
Order Code

Option
License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license with limited
warranty, documentation, binaries
on RXSO

RSX-HM-PLUS
RJE/HASP Emulator

Order Code

QYD84-UZ

The RSX-UM-PLUS RJE/HASP Emulator is a software package that performs the
standard functions of an IBM HASP Remote Job Entry Workstation. It operates as
a set of tasks under the RSX-UM-PLUS operating system.
The emulator provides multileaved (pseudosimultaneous, bidirectional) communication of up to seven input and seven output data streams. The number of
input and output streams accommodated by the emulator is fixed at assembly
time. The operator can assign operating supported devices to data streams on a
per-file or temporarily dedicated basis.

3.67

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Features

• Data compression of repeated sequential characters including blanks.
• Full EBCDIC transparency.
• Multileaving.
•Printer vertical forms control skip to channel 1 (top of form) is supported.
(No other vertical forms control is supported.)

Prerequisite Hardware

• PDP-11/44 or PDP-11/70 with at least 128 Kwords of memory configured to

support RSX-llM-PLUS.
• A KG11-A communications arithmetic unit.
• A tape drive capable of reading the distribution media.
• At least 14 Kwords of memory allocated for RSX-11M-PLUS RJE/HASP operation
with one input and two output streams.
• 600 words of memory required for each additional stream with File Control

Services (Fcs).
• One of the following synchronous communications line controllers:
DP11, null, or DUPll for line speeds up to 4,800 bits per second.

• One of the following Bell System modems or a modem that is
exactly equivalent:
201A 2,000 bis dial-up
201B 2,400 bis private line
201c 2,400 bis dial-up
208A 4,800 bis private line
208B 4,800 bis dial-up
209A 9,600 bis private line
19,200 bis current Bell

For host system compatibility, consult SPD 10.48.

Prerequisite Software

RSX-11-PLUS operating system.

Table 3.54
RSX-11M-PLUS RJE/HASP

Option

Order Codes

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license only

QJS62;-DZ

Sources, services

QJS62-XD
QJS62-XM

Sources, NINS services

QJS62-YD
QJS62-YM

Sources, no services, update

QJS63-YD
QJS63-YM

Documentation only

QJS62-GZ

3.68

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

RSX-11M/IAS
RJE/HASP Emulator

The RSX-11 M!rAs RJEIHASP emulator is a software package that performs the
standard functions of an IllM HASP Remote Job Entry Workstation. It operates
as a set of tasks under the RSX-11M or IAS operating system.
The emulator provides multileaved (pseudosimultaneous, bidirectional) communication of up to seven input and seven output data streams. The number of
input and output streams accommodated by RSX-11M/rAs RJE/HASP is fixed at
assembly time. The operator can assign operating system-supported devices to
data streams on a per-file or temporarily dedicated basis.

Features

• Data compression of repeated sequential characters including blanks.
• Full EBCDIC transparency.
• Multileaving.
• Printer vertical forms control skip to channel 1 (top of form) is supported.
(No other vertical forms control is supported.)

Prerequisite Hardware

UNIBUS PDP-11 with memory management and at least 32 Kwords of memory
that is configured to support RSX-11M or IAS.

Without File Control Services (FCs) for RSX-11M only:
• At least 9 Kwords of memory allocated for RSX-11M!rAs RJE/HASP operation with one input and two output data streams (card reader, card punch,
and lineprinter).
• 300 words of memory required for each additional stream without FCS.

With File Control Services (FCs):
• At least 14 Kwords of memory allocated for RSX-11M!rAs RJE/HASP operation
with one input and two output streams.
• 600 words of memory required for each additional stream with FCS.

• One of the following synchronous communications line controllers:
DP11, ou11, or DUP11 for line speeds up to 4, 800 bits per second.

• One of the following Bell System modems or a modem that is exactly
equivalent:
201A 2,000 bis dial-up
201B 2,400 bis private line
201 c 2,400 bis dial-up
208A 4,800 b/s private line
208B 4,800 bis dial-up
209A 9,600 bis private line
19,200 baud current Bell option (PDP-11/34 processors or slower should run
19,200 bis standalone.)

Required Hardware

A KG11-A communications arithmetic unit
For host system compatibility, refer to SPD 10.51.

Prerequisite Software

Either the RSX-11M or IAS operating system

3.69

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.55
RSX-11M!IAS RJE/HASP

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license

QJS60-DZ

Materials and Service Options:
Software revision right-to-copy

QJS60-NZ

Source Code and
Materials Options:
Sources distribution and services

QJS60-XD
QJS60-XH
QJS60-XM
QJS60-XQ
QJS60-XT
QJS60-XV

Sources distribution and no services

QJS60-YL
QJS60-YH
QJS60-YM
QJS60-YQ
QJS60-YT
QJS60-YV

Sources distribution and update

QJS60-ND
QJS60-NH
QJS60-NM
QJS60-NQ
QJS60-NT
QJS60-NV

TOPS-10 and TOPS-20
2780/3780
Emulator-Terminator

The TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 2780/3780 Emulator-Terminator (EIT) software products
perform both emulation to IBM hosts and termination to remote job entry
stations that communicate via 2780 and 3780 protocols. In performing emulation, the TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system appears to a host computer as a remote job
entry station employing 2780 or 3780 protocol. In performing termination, the
TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system functions as a Digital TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 host to a
remote job entry station employing 2780 or 3780 protocol.

Features

•In termination mode, allows TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 batch jobs to be transferred
from a remote station to a TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system where they are executed
under the control of Galaxy; the output is returned to the remote station printer.
In emulation mode, IBM batch jobs are transferred from TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
system to an IBM-type host; log files and output are transferred back to the
TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system.

3.70

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

• Provides simultaneous support of both emulation and termination of2780 and
3780 protocols in any combination of up to six lines. The TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
system can support a mix of remote station types and can concurrently transfer
batch jobs to several IBM-type host systems.
• Interfaces to the TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 operating system and is unified into an
integrated system along with other batch and spooling functions. In addition,
a standardized operator interface enables TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 2780/3780 E/T
and its remote connections to be controlled as an integral part of the TOPS-10
or TOPS-20 environment.

Prerequisite Hardware

For TOPS-10 systems:
• Single or dual KLlO-based DEcsystem-10.
• DN20-MC/MD, DN20F-MC, DN87, or DN87s communication front-end with at
least one synchronous line interface (DN20-BA or DN20F-BA for DN20).
For TOPS-20 systems:
• KL10-E/R-based DECSYSTEM-20.
• DN20-MA/MB or DN20F-MA communication front-end with at least one synchronous line interface (DN20-BA or DN20F-BA).

Prerequisite Software

TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 operating system (with Galaxy, Version 4.2).

Table 3.56
TOPS-10/TOPS-20

Option

Order Code

~~~~~~~~~~~-

2780/3780

Order Codes

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

TOPS-10

TOPS-20

Single-use sources license, sources,
documentation, support services
on 9-track 1,600 b/in magnetic tape

QH603-XM

QT042-XM

Single-use license only,
no sources, no documentation,
no support services on 9-track
1,600 b/in magnetic tape

QH603-DZ

QT042-DZ

Sources, documentation

QH603-NM

QT042-NM

Right-to-copy for single-use, no
sources, no documentation

QH603-NZ

QT042-NZ

Update/Unsupported Options:

Additional Services:*
The following post-warranty software product services for this software
product are available to licensed customers: Self-maintenance, Basic service and
DECsupport service.*
The prerequisite being the purchase of the equivalent level TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
software product service.
*Customers should contact their local Digital office for additional information on
the availability of these services.

3. 71

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Digital TOPS 2780/3780/HASP
Products

Features

The Digital TOPS 2780/3780/HASP software products performs both emulation to
IBM hosts and termination to remote job entry stations that communicate via
2780, 3780, and HASP Multileaving protocols. In performing emulation, the TOPS
system appears to a host computer as a remote job entry station employing
2780, 3780, or HASP Multileaving protocol. In performing termination, the TOPS
system functions as a Digital TOPS host to a remote job entry station employing
2780, 3780, or HASP Multileaving protocol. Digital offers three TOPS 2780/3780/
HASP products: TOPS-10 2780/3780/HASP, TOPS-20 2780/3780/HASP, and TOPS-20
2780/3780/HASP for 2020.
• In termination mode, allows TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 batch jobs to be transferred
from a remote station to a TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system where they are executed
under the control of Galaxy; the output is returned to the remote station printer.
In emulation mode, IBM batchjobs are transferred from the TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
system to an IBM-type host; log files and output are transferred back to the
TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system.
• Provides simultaneous support of both emulation and termination of2780, 3780,
and HASP Multileaving protocols in any combination limited by configuration
guidelines. The TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system can support a mix of remote station
types and can concurrently transfer batch jobs to several IBM-type host systems.
• Interfaces to the TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 operating system and is unified into an
integrated system along with other batch and spooling functions. In addition, a
standardized operator interface enables TOPS 2780/3780/HASP products and their
remote connections to be controlled as an integral part of the TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
environment.

Prerequisite Hardware

For TOPS-10 2780/3780/HASP, TOPS-10 system configuration with:
• Single or dual KLlO-based DEcsystem-10.
• DN20-MC/MD, DN20F-MC, DN87, or DN87s communication front-end with at
least one synchronous line interface (DN20-BA or DN20F-BA for DN20).
For TOPS-20 2780/3780/HASP, TOPS-20 system configuration with:
• KLlO-E/R-based DECSYSTEM-20.
• DN20-MA/MB or DN20-MA, communication front-end with at least one synchronous line interface (DN20-BA or DN20F-BA).
For TOPS-20 2780/3780/HASP for 2020, TOPS-20 system configuration with:
• KSlO-based system.
• DN20-BA or DN20F-BA (one synchronous line interface).
• Synchronous null modem (modem eliminator).
• DN22-AA/AB.

Prerequisite Sofiware

TOPS-10 operating system (with Galaxy, Version 4.1), or TOPS-20 operating
system (DECSYSTEM 2020, 2040, or 2060) with Galaxy, Version 4.2.

3.72

Software

Digital-to-IBM Communications Software

Table 3.57
DiRital TOPS 278013780/HASP
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.}

TOPS-10

TOPS-20

Single-use sources license, sources,
documentation, support services
on 9-track 1,600 b/in magnetic tape

QH062-XM

QT052-XM

Single-use license only,
no sources, no documentation,
no support services

QH062-DZ

QT052-DZ

Single-use sources license, sources,
documentation, support services

QH065-XM

QT054-XM

Single-use license on! y,
sources, no documentation,
no support services

QH065-DZ

QT054-DZ

Sources, documentation

QH062-NM

QT052-NM

QT053-NM

Right-to-copy for single-use,
no sources, no documentation

QH062-NZ

QT052-NZ

QT053-NZ

TOPS-20
for 2020

Upgrade Options:

Update Options:

Additional Services:*
The following post-warranty software product services for this software
product are available to licensed customers: Self-maintenance, Basic service and
DECsupport service.
The prerequisite being the purchase of the equivalent level TOPS-10 or TOPS-20
software product service.
*Customers should contact their local Digital office for additional information on
the availability of these services.

3. 73

Software

Digital-to-Univac Communications Software

Digital-to-Univac
Communications Software
VAXNTR
Protocol Emulator

VAX NTR is a software package that allows a VAX/VMS system to communicate
with a UNIVAC 1100 series or other computer systems using UNIVAC NTR
protocol. The software operates under the VAX/VMS operating system to permit
batch input/out. Start-up, Shut-down and host queue interrogation by the
emulator can be controlled from any one terminal; i.e., the control terminal,
connected to the vAx/vMs operating system.

Features

• Batch input can be from any input device supported by the VAX/VMS
operating system and can be submitted for transmission whether or not the
connection to the host is active.
• Batch output can be sent to any output device supported by the host
operatiqg system; batch output to line printers can be spooled using the
VAX/VMS system spooling mechanism.
• Batch input can be stored on disk by the emulator for later transmission to the
host enabling improved line usage; batch input from punched cards can be in
DEC-026, DEC-029, FIELDATA or EBCDIC code.
The emulator control terminal can be used to:
• Start and stop the emulator.
• List the host queues.
• Select and change the output device for data received from the host.
• Start and stop transmission of individual input streams to the host.

Prerequisite Hardware

VAX/VMS system configuration with:
• DUP11 synchronous communications interface.
• 100 Kbytes of memory to accommodate the emulator.
• 100 Kbytes of memory (minimum user job space).
•Number of disk blocks used: 1,000.

VAX-11/730 Systems
An R80/RL02 configuration is required for VAX-11/730 systems.

Prerequisite Software

VAX/VMS operating system.

Table 3.58
VAX NTR Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

VAX-111750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782*
VAX-11/785

Single-use license

QD710-UZ

QE710-UZ

VAxcluster license

QD710-QZ

QE710-QZ

Distribution and documentation

QD710-HG

QE710-HY

Software revision right-to-copy

QD710-HZ

QE710-HZ

Documentation only

QD710-GZ

QE710-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

*For software licensing purposes, a vAx-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is
considered a single CPU.

3.74 Software

Digital-to-CDC Communications Software

Digital-to-CDC
Communications Software

MUX200/VAX
Protocol Emulator

The MUX200/vAx Protocol Emulator is a VAX-based software package that
provides communication with a CDC 6000, CYBER series, or other computer
systems using 200 UT Mode 4A communications protocol.
Any VAX interactive terminal can be used to control remote job entry or to
communicate at command level with the host system. Input files can be sent
from and output files received onto any VAX supported mass storage, unit
record, or terminal device.
MUX200/vAx communicates with the host using the Mode 4A communications
protocol as defined in CDC publication No. 82128000. The software package
can be configured to support either the ASCII or the external BCD versions of
the protocol.
MUX200/VAX provides for one synchronous communication circuit to a host
computer system. The product supports a single switched or dedicated leased
line two- or four-wire common carrier facility.
MUX200/vAx enables several users to communicate simultaneously with a
host system over a single line. The VAX/VMS system, while using a single physical drop, appears to the host as a number of multidrops and terminals on
the circuit. The maximum number of simultaneous users supported by the
MUX200/VAX system is 16. However, this may be limited to a lower figure
by host hardware or software.

Features

• Output received from the host system can be spooled to the line printer upon
detection of a text string predefined by the user.
• Up to eight VAX/VMS files can be specified for transmission to the host in a
single command.
• VAX/VMS terminals can be detached for other use while the software package
is operating. Data received from the host directed to a terminal is saved from
printout until the terminal is reattached.

Prerequisite Hardware

VAX-11/750 or VAX-11/780 system configuration with a DUP11 synchronous
communications interface.

Prerequisite Software

VAX/VMS operating system.

Table 3.59
MUX200/VAX

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required.for each CPU.)

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780

Single-use license

QD070-UZ

QE070-UZ

VAxcluster license

QD070-QZ

QE070-QZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QD070-HG

QE070-HY

Software revision right-to-copy

QD070-HZ

QE070-HZ

3.75

Software

Digital-to-UNIX™ Communications Software

Digital-to-UNIX
Communications Software
TM

IP/TCP

This product is currently not available in Europe.
IP/TCP is a software communications product developed by The Wollongong
Group and available through Digital's Distributed Software (DDS) program.
IP/TCP software under VMS or MicroVMS contains the network protocols required in exchanging messages between various systems connected to an TCP/IP
network. The package supports various hardware interfaces to the following
networks: ARPANET, Ethernet, MILNET, Defense Data Network (DDN), Point-toPoint Networks, custom-designed networks. The DEUNA and DEQNA Ethernet
controllers are supported and may be shared by the IP/TCP package, DECnet, and
LAT (terminal server protocols). The DMC/DMR-11 is also supported.

DECnet-ULTRIX
as an alternative solution

Features

IP/TCP is a suitable solution for a single VAX/VMS node in a large UNIX™
environment. However, DECnet-ULTRIX also solves the problem of communications between the VMS and ULTRIX environments using DECnet instead of the
TCP/IP protocols. DECnet-ULTRIX bridges both environments by supporting the
co-existence of the DECnet and TCP/IP protocols. Co-existence means that
DECnet and TCP/IP can run together simultaneously (DECnet-ULTRIX systems use
DECnet to communicate with other Phase III/IV systems in DECnet networks
and TCP/IP is used to communicate with non-Digital systems in Internet
networks). DECnet and TCP/IP can also share the same system resources such as
the DEUNA and DEQNA Ethernet interfaces, and programs can be written in such
a way that either of the lower-level protocols, NSP or TCP, can be used. In
general, existing programs running over TCP/IP can be easily modified to run
with DECnet. DECnet programs can run over TCP/IP, but only if they do not
make use of operations that are specific to DECnet. This feature of co-existence
allows a DECnet-ULTRIX system to act as a gateway between DECnet networks
and Internet networks. Refer to DECnet Communications Software in this
section for a description of DECnet-ULTRIX.
The following application level protocols are included in the IP/TCP package:
• SMTP-Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, which allows users to send and receive
electronic mail.
• FTP-File Transfer Protocol, which allows a user to transfer files between hosts.
• TELNET-A protocol which allows a user to log on to a remote system over the
network (virtual terminal).
• UDP-User Datagram Protocol, which allows an application program to send
messages to other programs via the network (task-to-task communications).
• ICMP-Internet Control Message Protocol, which provides a method of sending
messages concerning unusual network events.

Table 3.60
IP!TCP
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

IP/TCP (commercial)

QAX74-CM

IP/TCP (educational installations)

QAX75-CM

IP/TCP MicrovMs (commercial)

QAXX1-C3

IP/TCP MicroVMS (educational)

QAXX2-C3

3.76

Software

Digital-to-WANG TM Communications Software

Digital-to-WANG™
Communications Software
EDE-W Document Exchange

EDE-W Document Exchange is a software application that utilizes the VAX
2780/3780 Protocol Emulator to give VAX users of ALL-IN-1 or DEcdx/vMs the
ability to send documents to a suitably equipped WANG OIS system. WANG OIS
users can transfer documents to VAX system using WANG's telecommunications
software, which includes WANG's equivalent 2780/3780 protocol emulator. WANG
OIS systems can be connected to a VAX system either by dedicated lines or
through dial-up connections.
WANG documents being transferred are first converted from WANG Word
Processing System Code to EBCDIC code by the WANG software and then
transferred to the VAX system. The VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator receives
the document from the WANG system and EDE-W transforms the document from
the WANG format to DEcdx format, then stores the converted documents in the
user's DEcdx or ALL-IN-1 filing cabinet. For transfers from the VAX system to the
WANG ms system, the process is reversed.
Operation of the EDE-W Document Exchange is initiated through an easy-touse menu interface, which can be added to the ALL-IN-1 Office Menu, or, when
used with DECdx/vMs, invoked from the DCL system prompt. The user interface
for operating the document transfer functions are compatible with Digital
standard user interface requirements for office products. On-line help capability
is included with the product.
Refer to Software Product Description 26.37 for more information.

Prerequisite Hardware

Any valid VAX system.

Prerequisite Software

• ALL-IN-1 V2.0 or DECdx Vl.1
• VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator vl.5
• VMS V4.0 or 4.1

3. 77

Software

Digital-to-WANG™ Communications Software

Table 3.61
EDE- W Document Exchange

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782 1
VAX-11/785 VAX 8600

Single-use license

QD760-UZ

QE760-UZ

QK760-UZ

VAxcluster license

QD760-QZ

QE760-QZ

QK760-QZ

QD760-HG
QD760-HM

QE760-HM
QE760-HY

QK760-HM

QD760-IG
QD760-IM

QE760-IM
QE760-IY

QK760-IM

DECsupport service

QD760-9G
QD760-9M

QE760-9M
QE760-9Y

QK760-9M

Basic service

QD760-8G
QC760-SM

QE760-SM
QD760-SM

QK760-SM
QE760-SY

QD760-3G
QD760-3M

QE760-3M
QE760-3Y

QK760-3M

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution and
documentation
Installation service

U.S. Software Product
Service Agreements: 2

Self-maintenance
service

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is

considered a single CPU.
2 For Non-u.s. service agreements, consult local Digital Sales Representative.

3.78

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Packetnet Communications
Software

A fundamental technology used in data networks is called packet switching.
With it, user data and the accompanying control information needed to ensure
delivery are formed in discrete entities-packets. The network dynamically
interweaves the packets of many users over shared transmission facilities and
routes the packets to their destinations.
For an introduction to Packet Switching networks, and the user benefits
associated with their use, refer to Introduction to VAX P.S. I. (AA-L067D-TE) or
Introduction to RSX PS.I. (AA-M369B-Tc) in the products' manual sets.
Digital's Packetnct System Interface (P.s.1.) products extend the high-level
DECnet functions ofDigital's Network Architecture to computer systems
communicating across Packet-Switched Data Networks (PSDNs). The currently
available products arc VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access, RSX-11 P.S.J./M, RSX-11
r.s.1./M-PLUS, the TOPS-20 r.s.r. Gateway, and the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway.
These interfaces allow certain suitably configured Digital systems to connect to
packet-switched data networks that conform to the CCITT Recommendation
x.25. CCITT is the Consultive Committee International Telegraph and Telephone
which is an advisory committee established under the United Nations to
recommend worldwide standards. For VAX P.S.I., International Standards 7776
and 8208, which standardize the protocols described in the CCITT recommendations, are also supported.
For connections to private networks other than those conforming to the ISO
7776/8208 standards, Digital requires that its P. s. r. software be specially configured. Consult the local Digital sales representative for details.

3.79

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Table 3.62
Currently Supported Public
PSDNs by Country and Product
Country
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
Denmark
Finland
France
WGermany
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland (Eire)
Italy
Malaysia
Norway
Portugal
S. Korea
Singapore
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
United Kingdom
United States

Public
PSDN

Austpac
Datex-P
DCS
Renpac
Datapac 1
DATAPAK
DATAPAK
Transpac
Datex-P
Datanet-1
INTEL PAK
DATAPAK
Eirpac
ITAPAC
Maypac
DATAPAK
Telepac
DA COM-NET
Telepac
IBERPAK
DATAPAK
Telepac 2 •3
Pacnet
PSS
ACCUNET
AUTONET
INFONET
Mark*net
Extended
Telenet
Tymnet

TOPS-10
P.S.I.

TOPS-20
P.S.I.

no
no

no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no

no
yes
yes

VAXP.S.I.

RSXP.S.I.

X.25 Gateway

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes

no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no

no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
yes

yes
yes
yes

no
yes
yes

1 CCITT1976
2 CCITT 1978
3 CCITT 1980

3.80 Software

l,10

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I.
ACCESS

The VAX P.s.1. products allow suitably configured VMS systems to connect to,
and/or access, Packet Switching Data Networks (PSDNs). The product set
consists of two options: full-function VAX P.S.I. and a subset of that product,
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS. VAX P.S.I. allows connection to PSDNS conforming to CCITT
recommendation x.25 (1978, 1980or1984) or to Full or Draft International
Standards (ISO or ms) 7776 and 8208.
Both options enable process-to-process and terminal communications between
a VAX and remote Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) in a PSDN supporting the
x.25 interface protocol. VAX P.S.I. also enables direct connection to equipment
acting as either Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE) or DTE using the
x.25 protocols.

VAXP.S.I.

VAX P.s.1. allows a standard VMS system configuration to function as one of
the following:
• Packet-mode DTE connected to a PSDN
• Packet-mode DTE connected to a DCE conforming to the ISO standards DIS7776
and IS08208
• Packet-mode DCE connected to a DTE conforming to the ISO standards DIS7776
and IS08208
•Combination of the above modes, chosen on a per-line basis (except in the case
of the KMS11-B multiline device, where all lines must use the same mode of
operation and connect to the same PSDN).
VAX P.S.I. can be configured for either multihost or native mode operations.
When installed in native mode, VAX P.s.1. supports access to the PSDN or DTE
only from processes in the VAX processor on which it is installed. When
installed in multihost mode in a DECnet-VAX node, VAX P.S.I. acts as a gateway
to the PSDN or DTE, supporting access to the network by other properly
configured local or remote VAX hosts. These additional hosts must be DEcnetVAX systems on which the VAX P.s.1. ACCESS software has been installed.
VAX P.S.I. is a layered product on vAx/vMs and MicroVMS, and may be used in
the following ways:
• Process-to-process (x.25) communication
•Process-to-terminal communication (remote terminal)
• Terminal-to-process communication (remote CPU)
• Full DECnet communication (Digital remote hosts only)
• As part of an OSI multivendor communications environment (when used with
Digitals voTs product and OSI applications).
For all the above uses, VAX P.s.1. provides accounting, security, and P.S.I. Mail.

Figure 3.9
VAX P.S.I. Native
Mode ofOperation

Using VAX/MicroVAX

Remote
DTE

3.81

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

VAX P.s.1. ACCESS allows a properly configured DECnet-VAX system in a DECnet
environment, to make logical connections to PSDNS by way of one or more
other P.S.I. connector nodes. VAX P.S.I. ACCESS, with the connector node
providing physical connections to a PSDN, enables process-to-process and
terminal communications between the accessing VAX and remote DTE. The
P.s.1. connector node may be one of the following:
•VAX P.S.I. installed in multihost mode. The corresponding version of VAX P.S.I.
and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS is required for full functionality, though basic communication will take place with earlier versions ofvAx P.s.r..
• A DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway product (see SPD 30.41); in this case several
features and options will not be available.
DECnet logical links are established by VMS to connect the VAX P.S.I. ACCESS host
to the connector node. These links may use any supported DECnet communications path between the VAX P.S.I. ACCESS node and the connector node, provided
they do not themselves use an x.25 connection. VAX P.S.I. ACCESS uses these
links to transmit x.25/x.29 messages between the multihost ~onnector and the
VAX P. S.I. ACCESS host.
A single VAX P.s.r. ACCESS host can logically connect to one or more connector
nodes concurrently, and hence access all PSDN(s) accessible from those connector
nodes. During installation of VAX P.S.r. ACCESS, one of these several connector
nodes/PSDN combinations is established as the default DTE/DCE connection
which outgoing calls will normally use.
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS provides all of the user interfaces of the full function VAX P.s.r.
product, with the ability to utilize these interfaces from a DECnet-VAX node not
directly connected to the PSDN. If such connection to a packet switching data
network is necessary, the full function VAX P. s.1. product is required. Applications that work correctly on VAX P.S.I. may be used with VAX P.s.r. ACCESS, and
vice-versa, if the application is not sensitive to the differences in timing or
throughput involved in the transfer.

Figure 3.10
VAX P.S.I. Multihost
Mode ofOperation

Printer

Modem

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

VAX 8350

MicroVAX

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

Local DTE
Remote
DTE

VAX P.S.I.

3.82

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Features
(VAX P.S.I. and
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS}

• Support for Multiple Networks-A VAX P.S.I. node (native or multihost mode)
may be connected to more than one network. This is useful for connection to
both a public and private network, or (in those countries where applicable) to
several public ones.
• Support for DCE Mode of Operation-The VAX P. s. 1. product may be used
to configure individual lines as either a DTE or DCE. Two VAX P.S.I. nodes may
be connected "back-to-back," with one as a DTE and the other as a DCE. Pointto-point configurations are valid only where both ends fully conform to ISO
standards 7776/8208.
• Support for CCITT 1984 Networks-VAX P.S.I. has the capability to connect to
networks conforming to the CCITT 1984 revision of the x.25 family of protocol
recommendations. These last two features provide an interface to third-party
CPUs that have x.25 connection capability, and require high performance .
• Co-residency of P.S.I. and P.S.I. ACCESS-Both VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS
can be installed in the same node, granting local users/processes the ability to
access a network or networks connected to another P.S.I. multihost node.
• Process-to-Process Communication-VAX P.S.L and VAX P.s.1. ACCESS allow
application programs to access the packet level of the protocol as defined by the
x.25 recommendation. This interface enables an application program using VMS
System Services to communicate with complementary software on other
systems (DIGITAL or non-DIGITAL DTEs) accessible via the x.25 connection.
•Terminal Communications-VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS support terminal
communications according to CCITT recommendations x.3, x.28, and x.29.
Remote terminals may access the VAX, and local terminals on the VAX may
access remote CPUs.
0

• PSimail-Users of the VAX/VMS vMsmail utility may exchange electronic mail
directly between VAX P.s.1. (or VAX P.S.I. ACCESS) nodes over a PSDN, without
the need for a DECnet circuit connection between the nodes.
• Virtual Circuits-VAX P.S.I. (in native mode, or configured for multihost
access) and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS offer communication over both Permanent and
Switched Virtual Circuits (Pvc and svc), and support up to .512 virtual circuits
in total per CPU.
• Line Discipline-For VAX P.s.1. in native mode, or configured for multihost
access, the line discipline used for PSDN communications complies with CCITT
recommendation x.25 (1978, 1980or1984) and/or with DIS7776 and IS08208.

3.83

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Features
(Continued)

• Accounting-The Accounting utility, PSIACCOUNTING, enables the system
manager to obtain information on P.s.r. and network usage. The Accounting
utility can extract the information collected and display the information directly
on a terminal or to a file.
• Security-A security mechanism (PSIAUTHORIZE), which is consistent with the
VMS access and security mechanisms, offers the means of controlling both
remote DTE access to P.s.r. and access to the network by the P.s.r. user
community.
• Network Management-VMS provides a Network Control Program (NcP) for
management of DECnet-VAX, the P.S.I. products, and other DIGITAL communications software. In addition, extensive event-logging and tracing capabilities
are available. Trace data may be stored on a file, or displayed "live" on a local
terminal.
• Communications-For the best performance, Digital recommends using a
DMA device, such as DMF32 (UNIBUS), DMB32 (BI-BUS), KMS1P-A, KMS1P-B,
KMS11-B (UNIBUS), and KMV1A (Q-BUS). VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS also
support DUP11 (uNIBus) and DPVll (Q-Bus). Refer to the SPD to clarify the devices
that VAX P. s. r. can use on the various CPUs, and for any restrictions in line speed
or function.

3.84

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware and Software

DECnet-VAX for VAX P.S.I. multihost operation, VAX P.S.I. ACCESS, or DECnet
(DLM) communications across the PSDN.
The KMS/KMV link-level software and drivers are not required when these
devices arc to be used only with VAX P.S.I. The DMB32 synchronous driver is
required for use with VAX P.S.I.
For additional prerequisite hardware and software, refer to Software Product
Description 25.40.

Table 3.63
VAX P:S.I. and VAX PS.I. ACCESS
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

VAXP.S.I.

VAXP.S.I.
ACCESS

Single-use license

Q*071-UZ

Q*061-UZ

vAxcluster license 1

Q*071-QZ

Q*061-QZ

Distribution and documentation

Q*071-H#

Q*061-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*071-HZ

Q*061-HZ

Documentation only

QL071-GZ

QL061-GZ

Installation

Q*071-I#

Q*061-I#

DEcsupport Service

Q*071-9#

Q*061-9#

Basic Service

Q*071-8#

Q*061-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*071-3#

Q*061-3#

MicroVAX I:*= N; # = 3
MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: 3 * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: 3 * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = G or M
VAX-11/780: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX-11/782:4 * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX-11/785: * = E; #=Mor Y
VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX 8250: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8350: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8530: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8600: * = K; # = M
VAX8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M; # = M

Materials and Service Options:

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 2

1 Not available on MicrovAxs and vAxstations

2 For non-u. s. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.
3 Available on VAX P.S.I. ACCESS only.

4 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is

considered a single CPU.

3.85

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

RSX-11 P.S.l./M and
RSX-11 P.S.l./M-PLUS

RSX-11 P.S.I./M and RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS allow suitably configured RSX-llM and
RSX-UM-PLUS systems to connect to a single Packet Switching Data Network
(PSDN) conforming to the CCITT recommendation x.25(June1980). Access to the
RSX-11 P.S.I. products is supported for user programs written in MACR0-11,
FORTRAN IV, and FORTRAN-77. RSX-11 P.S.I. products support task-to-task and
incoming remote terminal communications via the network.
The RSX-11 P.S.I. products can coexist with or operate as a layered product under
DECnet-UM or DECnet-11M-PLUS to allow use of DECnet facilities over PSDNs, as
well as private leased lines or switched telephone networks. For details, refer to
SPD 10. 75 and 10. 66.
The communications discipline used is the CCITT Recommendation x.25.
Specifically, the product supports EIA-RS232-c/ccITT v.28 at the hardware level,
the symmetric LAPB variant of the x.25 frame level protocol, and the x.25 packet
level protocol over point-to-point, four-wire, synchronous, full-duplex lines.

Features

• For intertask communication, application programs use Rsx-hM or RSX-llMPLUS executive calls to set up and break connections with the network, to send
and receive data, and to issue control and synchronization requests.
• Offers communications over both Permanent and Switched Virtual Circuits
(Pvcs and svcs).
• Supports access from remote terminals according to the CCITT recommendations x.3, x.28, and x.29 (1978 and 1980). Terminals are supported in "Remote
x.29 Terminal" mode in which code conversions between ASCII and the actual
code used by the terminal are performed by the network.
• A Network Control Program and Configuration File Editor are provided
for the control of the operation of the x.25 software. This includes loading
and unloading.

Prerequisite Hardware

• PDP-11/24 through PDP-11/70, or PDP-11/84 UNIBUS processor with one of the
following communications devices supporting one line:
DUP11 low-speed synchronous interface.
DPV11 low-speed synchronous interface.
KMS11-BD/BE medium-speed synchronous interface.
KMS11-PX and PY (KMS1P) medium-speed 1-line synchronous interfaces.
• PDP-11/23-PLUS, or PDP-11/73 processor with one DPV11 low-speed
synchronous interface.

Prerequisite Software

• RSX-11 operating system for RSX-11 P.s.r./M.
• RSX-11M-PLUS operating system for RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS.

3.86

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Table 3.64
RSX-11 P.S.I.

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

RSX-HM

RSX-UM-PLUS

Single-use license

QJD91-UZ

QJD92-UZ

QJD91-HD
QJD91-HH
QJD91-HM
QJD91-HQ
QJD91-HT
QJD91-HV

QJD92-HD
QJD92-HH
QJD92-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

QJD91-HZ

QJD92-HZ

Documentation only

QJD91-GZ

QJD92-GZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

3.87

Software

QJD92-HV

Packetnet Communications Software

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway

The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway is a variant of the DECnet Router Server. It
supports both DECnet lines (leased, dial-up, and hardwired) and international
standard x.25 lines in the same server. Digital systems can connect through the
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway to the remote Digital systems or to other-vendor
systems. In addition, remote terminals can dial up a PAD (Packet Assembler/
Disassembler) on a single PSDN (Packet-Switched Data Network) and connect
to VAX hosts on an Ethernet through the Router/x.25 Gateway.
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway provides its services network-wide, handling
x.25 protocol conversion. (Note that the x.25 function can also be provided by
P.s.1. software, a potentially more cost-effective solution when connecting only
one system.)
Two software packages are available for the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway:

1. The base software that resi.des in the gateway, which provides:
• All the features of the DECnet Router, excluding Level 2 (Area) Routing, up to
6 lines (using DDCMP). v.35 line cards are not supported.
• DECnet-to-DECnet communication over the PSDN to another remote node
running DECnet and with x.25 capability. This communication becomes
available to all DECnet nodes on the Ethernet network. Functions supported
by DECnet, such as file transfer and task-to-task communication, can
take place across the PSDN. This feature requires that the PSDN support
sub-addressing.
• The ability to support x.25/X.29 traffic from the PSDN to any DECnet node
running P.s.1. Access.
At least one Phase IV DECnet-VAX host system on the network must have
a copy of this software. The host system down-line loads the software into
the gateway.

2. VAX P.s.1. Access software, which resides on VAX nodes on the Ethernet,
allows for non-DECnet (x.25/x.29) communication via the gateway and over the
PSDN, to remote Digital or non-Digital nodes or x.29 asynchronous terminals.
Hosts which make use of these capabilities must have this VAX P.S.I. Access
software and must provide applications programs or other utility software to
make use of the data transferred across the PSDN.
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway supports the following public data networks:
Datapac (Canada)
Transpac (France)
Datex-P (Germany)
PSS (United Kingdom)
Telenet (United States)
Tymnet (United States)
Telepac (Switzerland)

3.88

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Features

• Allows communication between applications running on Digital VAX systems
and those running on non-Digital systems.
• Allows an X.25-compatible PSDN to be used as the communications medium for
both DECnet, non-DECnet, and Digital-to-non-Digital data traffic.
• Permits remote terminal connection to VAX hosts on the Ethernet using the
x.3/x.28/X.29 protocols via a PAD.
• Shares the PSDN access among all systems on the Ethernet. (In a homogeneous
DECnet environment, the VAX P. s. r. Access Software is not required, therefore all
systems use the PSDN to access the other DECnet nodes to which connection is
configured.) For process-to-process communication between non-DECnet systems, and support for x.29 terminal access, the VAX P.s.r. Access Software is
required for each VAX system accessing the Gateway from the Ethernet.

Figure 3.11
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Configuration
(Digital-to-non-Digital Host)

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS
MicroVAX

Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAX

PDP-11

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

DECnet-RSX
RSX P.S.I.

VAX

NonDigital
Host

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I.

Figure 3.12
X.25/X.29 Terminal
Access Configuration

Terminator

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

VAX

PDP-11

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

DECnet-RSX
RSX P.S.I.

3.89

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Figure 3.13
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Con.figuration
(DECnet-to-DECnet)

Modem

Host

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Corporate
Headquarters
(New York)

Host

Micro

Host

PDP-11

DECnet-RT

DECnet-11M

(Phase III)

(Phase IV)
RSX P.S.J.

Host

Baseband or Broadband Cable

Engineering
(Los Angeles)

Two lines on each DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway are reserved for configuration
as x.25 lines. These lines are the first two in each server box.

Prerequisite Hardware

•DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway hardware (DECSA-EA).
• All Ethernet physical channel hardware (for example, coaxial cable
and terminators).
•An H4000 Transceiver (or a DELNI) and a transceiver cable.

Prerequisite Software

Table 3.65
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Hardware
Order Code

The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway requires a Phase IV DECnet-VAX host to
support downline software loading.

Option

Order Code

DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway unit and one-line synchronous
EIA RS-232-c!CCITT V.28 line card (DCSAX-LA)

DECSA-EA

3.90

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Table 3.66
DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway
Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782*
VAX-11/785

Single-use license

QD727-UZ

QE727-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QD727-HH
QC727-HM

QE727-HM
QD727-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

QD727-HZ

QE727-HZ

Documentation only

QD727-GZ

QE727-GZ

Materials and Service Options:

*For software licensing purposes, a vAx-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is
considered a single CPU.

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS
Software Order Codes

Refer to VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. ACCESS in this i;ection for VAX P.S.I. ACCESS
order codes.

Cable Selection

For local EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 connections to the DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway, order BC17D null modem cables. For remote connection, order BC17C
extension cables for DCSAX-LA EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 line cards. When ordering cables, be sure to specify the length, for example, BC17C-25. Refer to
Communications Cable Order Codes in Section 4 for all cable order codes. All
line card cables are fully shielded to comply with FCC RFI/EMI specifications.

Caution: The connectors on·the Digital-supplied cables are designed to attach to
the handle on each line card. For those customers who choose to use other cables
with a server, be advised that there is a restriction on the size and construction
of the cable connector housing as follows:
• Maximum height of the connector housing is . 610 inches.
• Connectors with housings that extend beyond the face of the connector cannot
be used.
Should customers elect to use cables which violate the restrictions above, the
BC17L cable, a 4-foot adapter cable, is available for attaching to the bCSAX-LA
line cards with EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 interfaces.

3.91

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Country Kits

Every DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway requires a country kit. Each country kit
contains a power cord, hardware manuals in English, and labels with the front
panel display in the appropriate national language.

Table 3.67
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Country Kit
Order Codes

DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Options

Country

Order Code

Canada (English)
Canada (French)
England
France

DEC SK-AA
DEC SK-AC
DECSK-AE
DE CSK-AP

Germany

DECSK-AG

United States

DEC SK-AA

There are four variations of maximum number of add-on cards. Only one
variation may be used at a time.
• Add seven DCSAX-LA cards (for point-to-point or x.25 PSDN connections).
The following variations apply only to point-to-point DECnet Router connections. They cannot be used for packet-switched data network connection, nor
can they be used concurrently with x.25 operation.
• Add 6 DCSAX-LB cards at 56,000 bits per second each if the DCSAX-LA line card
included with the server hardware is discarded.
• Add two DCSAX-LB cards at 250,000 bits per second each if the DCSAX-LA line
card included with the server hardware is discarded.
• Add one DCSAX-LB card at 500,000 bits per second each ifthe DCSAX-LA line card
included with the server hardware is discarded.

Table 3.68
DECnet Router/X.25
Gateway Line Card
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

One-line synchronous EIA RS232-c/cCITT v.28 line card at
speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (FDX)

DCSAX-LA

One-line synchronous CCITT v.35 line card at speeds up to
500 Kb/s (FDx)

DCSAX-LB

3.92

Software

Packetnet Communications Software

TOPS-10 and TOPS-20
P.S.I. Gateways

TOPS-10 and TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateways enable suitably configured TOPS-10 and
TOPS-20 systems in DECnet networks to connect to Packet Switching Data
Networks (PSDNs) which conform to CCITT Recommendation x.25 (June 1980).
The TOPS-1{) or TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateway consists ofTOPS-10 or TOPS-20 and
front-end components. It resides partly in the central processor and partly in a
dedicated communications front-end, the DN20/DN20F .

Features and Benefits

• Includes MACR0-10 or MACR0-20 and FORTRAN-10 or FORTRAN-20 interfaces that
enable application programs to use the CCITT x.25 Packet Level Functions.
• Allows remote asynchronous terminals connected to a Packet Assembly/
Disassembly (PAD) facility to connect to a TOPS-10 or TOPS-20 system.
• Provides the same network management interface that is provided by DECnet-10
or DECnet-20.
• Supports EIA-RS-232-c/ccITT v.24 (TOPS-10 P.s.1. Gateway) or v.28 (TOPS-20 P.s.r.
Gateway) over point-to-point, four-wire, synchronous, full duplex lines at
transmission rates up to 9,600 bits per second.

Prerequisite Hardware

For TOPS-10 P. s.1. Gateway, a DEcsystem-1090/1091/1095 configuration with
• One DN-20-Mx or DN-20F-Mx communications front-end processor.
• One DN20-BA or DN20F-BA low-speed synchronous interface (KMC11/DuP11).
Note: KSlO systems are not supported by this product.
For TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateway, a DECSYSTEM-2040/2060 configuration with:
• One DN20-Mx or DN20F-Mx communications front-end processor.
• One DN20-BA or DN20F-BA low-speed synchronous interface (KMC11/DUP11).

Prerequisite Software

TOPS-10 P.S.l. Gateway: TOPS-10 Operating System and DECnet-10.
TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateway: TOPS-20 operating system, v5.1 and DECnet-20, V3.0.

Table 3.69
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 P. S. I.

Option

Order Code

License Options:
(A license is required
for each CPU.)

TOPS-10
P.S.l.
(users with
DECnet-10)

DECnet-10/
TOPS-10
TOPS-20
P.S.I. (users P.S.I.
requiring
(users with
DECnet-10) DECnet-20)

DECnet-20/
TOPS-20
P.S.I. (users
requiring
DECnet-20)

Single-use license,
binaries, documentation, support services

QH228-AM

QH229-AM

QT228-AM

QT229-AM

Single-use license
only, no binaries, no
documentation, no
support services

QH228-DZ

QH229-DZ

QT228-DZ

QT229-DZ

Binaries,
documentation

QH228-HM

QH229-HM

QT228-HM

QT229-HM

Right-to-copy for
single-use, no binaries,
no documentation

QH228-HZ

QH229-HZ

QT228-HZ

QT229-HZ

Gateway Order Codes

Update/Unsupported
Options:
(refer to SPD 8.63)

3. 93

Software

Open Systems Interconnection Products

Open Systems Interconnection
(OSI) Products

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a set of developing standards produced
by the International Organization for Standardization (Iso). OSI has been
developed by ISO to allow computers made by various manufacturers to
communicate with each other using internationally accepted protocols. Users
are thus enabled to explore networking in an open environment. OSI is based on
an architectural reference model that defines a layered protocol structure for
systems comunications. The Digital Network Architecture (DNA) is based on
the OSI Reference Model. Refer to Section 1 for a brief overview of OSI and DNA.
The OSI model has seven layers with well-defined functions. Each layer builds
upon the functionality offered by lower layers. Used with other Digital
products, six of the seven layers can be provided. VAX P.s.r. and Ethernet IEEE
802.3 products provide services at the Physical, Data Link, and Network Layers
of the OSI model. VAX DEC/MAP provides network services for the manufacturing environment at the network, transport, session, and application layers. VOTS
provides services at the Transport Layer and OSAK provides services at the
Session Layer. Message Router x.400 Gateway provides mail, messaging, and
document interchange services at the Application Layer.

Table 3. 70
Digital's OSI Products
Layer
Number

ISO Layers

Application

Digital OSI Products

DNA Layers
User
Network management

(Customer written
application)

Message
Router/

VAX
DEc/MAP

X.400

Presentation

Network application

Session

Session control

Transport

End-to-end communications

Network

Routing

Data Link

VAX P. S.I. or

IEEE 802.3

IEEE 802.4

Physical link

VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

Products

Products*

Gateway
OSAK

VOTS

Physical link

*Available from Concord Communication Inc.
The following five Open Systems Interconnection Products are presently
available:
• VAX DEC/MAP

• Message Router X.400 Gateway Vl.O
•VAX OSI Applications Kernel (osAK) v1.0
• VAX OSI Transport Service (voTS) vl.1
•VAX P.s.r. (Refer to Packetnet Communications Software in this section.)

3.94

Software

Open Systems Interconnection Products

VAX DEC/MAP

VAX DEC/MAP is a multivendor, broadband, local area network for the manufacturing environment, which adheres to the Manufacturing Automation Protocol
(MAP) specification Version 2.1. The MAP Version 2.1 specification is based on the
seven layer, International Standards Organization/ Open Systems Interconnect
(rso/osr) network reference model.
VAX DEC/MAP Vl.0 consists of both software and hardware. The hardware
consists of the KMSlP, firmware, and appropriate cables. The software is a
layered product on the VMS operating system.
The MAP network architecture specifies the protocols and services for the
Physical, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session, Presentation and Application Layers, layers 1 thru 7 respectively. VAX DEC/MAP Vl.O software implements
the Network Layer through the Application Layer (Layers 3 through 7). The
Presentation Layer, Layer 6, is null as specified by MAP v2.1. The Physical and
Data Link Layers, Layers 1 and 2, are implemented in hardware from Concord
Communication Inc. (ccr), and are not included in the VAX DEc!MAP Vl.0
product. The network media is 75 OHM Broadb;md CATV cable.
The VAX DEC/MAP software provides the user interface to the communication
services that consist of File Transfer, Access, and Management (FTAM), Common Application Service Elements (CASE), Manufacturing Messaging Format
Standard (MMFS), and a software interface at Transport Layer 4.
VAX DEC/MAP Network Management includes the MAP Control Program
(MAPCP). MAPCP enables a network manager to read and modify local and
remote parameters, isolate faults through event logging and loop back testing,
perform system verification, and maintain the local directory cache. MAPCP
commands are similar to DECnet NCP commands. Also included is the
Directory Service/Client Services Agent (csA) which provides name-toaddress resolution.

3.95

Software

Open Systems Interconnection Products

Table 3. 71
Specifications and Standards
used.for VAX DEC/MAP

DEC/MAP Component

Specifications and Standards

Network Management

Network Management Agent (NMA) only defined in the
MAP V2.1 Spec. Network Manager

Application

OSI Layer

Application

• NBS Phase I FTAM

Based on ISO FTAM DP2

• MAP CASE V2. l

ISO based and defined in Service
Definition and Protocol Spec. (7/85)

• MAP V2. l MMFS

Conformance class O

• Directory Service/ CSA

MAP V2.l

Presentation

Undefined in MAP v2.1, therefore NULL layer

Presentation

Session

ISO Session Standard (Iso/rs 8326, 8327)
Only Kernal and full-duplex is implemented
as required in MAP v2.1

Session

Transport

ISO Transport, Class 4
Service as specified in Iso/rs 8072, Iso/rs 8073.

Transport

Network

ISO Internet (Iso/rs 8473)

Internet

Data Link

IEEE 802.2Class1, Logic Link Control
IEEE 802.4 Token Bus, Media Access Control

Data Link

Physical

IEEE 802.4 Broadband

Physical

Interoperability

Interoperability and conformance testing are issues being addressed by the
MAP/TOP Users Group. Various independent testing facilities, such as Industrial
Technological Institute, are in the process of implementing a testbed to resolve
some of these issues.
Digital guarantees the operation of the VAX DEC/MAP product between Digital
nodes only, with the prerequisite hardware supplied by Concord Communication Inc. The conformance and interoperability test tools needed to test all
vendors products against the MAP v2.1 specification are not complete.

Required Hardware

VAX DEC/MAP software is a layered product, supported on VMS. This product
requires 6,500 blocks (3.3 Mbytes) of system disk space for installation and 5,500
blocks (2.8 Mbytes) of system disk space for permanent use.
This product is a packaged system. The customer can not purchase software
1
separate from hardware.
Minimum Hardware Specification
• Any valid VAX and UNIBUS compatible configuration, including the BI-bus
machines, which require a UNIBUS adapter.
• Broadband cable plant
• CCI headend remodulator, 10 Mbps (part number L5-R051-2100)
• CCI MapServer/Plus, (TIM), 10 Mbps (part number LOT051-0820)
Note: The CCI MapServer/Plus must be purchased through Concord
Communication Inc. (ccI).

Prerequisite Software

VAX/VMS Operating System.

3.96

Software

Open Systems Interconnection Products

Table 3. 72
VAX DEC/MAP
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options:
(A license is required

.for each CPU.)
Single-use license
(with hardware) 2
VAXclustcr license
(with hardware)2

VAX8300

VAX8500
VAX87003

DTUND-AA DTUNE-AA DTUNK-AA DTUNS-AA
DTUND-AC DTUNE-AC DTUNK-AC DTUNS-AC

DTUN7-AA
DTUN7-AC

DTUN*-AA DTUNM-AA
DTUN*-AC DTUNM-AC

DTUND-AA DTUNE-AA DTUNK-AA DTUNS-AA
DTUND-AC DTUNE-AC DTUNK-AC DTUNS-AC

DTUN7-AA
DTUN7-AC

DTUN*-AA
DTUN*-AC

VAX-11/750

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782
VAX-11/785 1 VAX8600

VAX8200

VAX8800

DTUNM-AA
D.TUNM-AC

----QDZAU-HM QEZAU-HM QKZAU-HM QSZAU-HM
QSZAU-H3
QDZAU-HZ QEZAU-HZ QKZAU-HZ QSZAU-HZ
QLZAU-GZ QLZAU-GZ QLZAU-GZ QLZAU-GZ
QDZAU-IM QEZAU-IM QKZAU-IM QSZAU-IM
QSZAU-13
QDZAU-IM QEZAU-IM QKZAU-IM Q5ZAU-9M
QSZAU-93
QDZAU-8M QEZAU-8M QKZAU-8M QSZAU-8M
QSZAU-83
QDZAU-3M QEZAU-3M QKZAU-3M Q5ZAU-3M
QSZAU-33

Q7ZAU-HM Q*ZAU-HM QMZAU-HM
Q7ZAU-H3
Q7ZAU-HZ Q*ZAU-HZ QMZAU-HZ
QLZAU-GZ QLZAU-GZ QLZAU-GZ
Q7ZAU-IM Q*ZAU-IM QMZAU-IM
Q7ZAU-13
Q7ZAU-9M Q*ZAU-9M QMZAU-9M
Q7ZAU-93
Q7ZAU-8M Q*ZAU-8M QMZAU-8M
Q7ZAU-83
Q7ZAU-3M Q*ZAU-3M QMZAU-3M
Q7ZAU-33

1 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2 The suffix added to the ordering information in this section is defined as such: -AA refers to a FCC compliant cabinet; -AC

refers to a non-FCC compliant cabinet.
* = 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8700.

3.97

Software

Open ~stems Interconnection Products

VAX OSI Transport Service
(VOTS)

The VAX OSI Transport Service vl.1 is an implementation of the Open System
Interconnection (OSI) Transport and Internet Network Services, as defined
by the International Standards Organization (ISO) in International Standards
ISO 8072, ISO 8073 and ISO 8473.
Transport Service-VAX OSI Transport Service, in conjunction with Ethernet IEEE
802.3 LAN or VAX P.s.1., provides the lower four layers of the seven layer OSI
model. The Transport Layer is Layer 4 in the OSI seven-layer model. It provides
reliable end-to-end transfer of data between cooperating user programs residing
in separate systems. The OSI Transport Service is dependent on the services
provided by the three lower OSI Layers.

VAX OSI Transport Service provides and supports many of the options stated in
the Transport Protocol Specification, International Standard ISO 8073.
Network Service-The VAX OSI Transport Service includes the Internet Protocol
specified in the International Standard ISO 8473. The Internet protocol allows for
communication between Transport Service Providers residing bn the same
network, even though they may be in different subnetworks, as defined in the
ISO documents. However, in VAX OSI Transport Service, the Internet Protocol is
implemented as an End System only, and does not provide Internet Routing
capabilities, that is, the ability to forward data from one subnetwork to another.
Packet Switching Network Support-VAX OSI Transport Service, in conjunction
with Digital Ethernet IEEE 802.3 LAN products and Digital Packet Switching
products, can be connected into a network through an IEEE 802. 3 local area
subnetwork, or through multiple x.25 based Packet Switching Data subnetworks. In addition, VAX OSI Transport Service allows access to both these
network services concurrently.

VOTS is an End System, implemented in accordance with the International
Standard ISO 8473 for the Internet Protocol, and supports many of the options
provided for in the specification. Specifically, VOTS supports the following
Internet services: Header Format Analysis, PDU Lifetime Control, Route PDU
Function, Error Reporting, and PDU Header Error Detection.
Required Hardware

VAX OSI Transport Service requires any valid VAX/VMS or MicroVAX/VMS system
configuration with:
• At least 60K bytes of non-paged dynamic pool for the VAX OSI Transport Service
software and data storage;
• At least 1.SK bytes of non-paged dynamic pool for each concurrent Transport
Connection;
•An R80/RL02 configuration is required for VAX-11/730 Systems.
• Block Space requirements (Block Cluster Size = 1):
2000 Blocks of disk space (lM bytes) required for installation.
2000 Blocks of disk space (lM bytes) required permanent use.
• When used in a Local Area Network environment, VAX OSI Transport Service
requires a DEUNA or DELUA for operation on a UNIBUS based VAX, or DELQA for
operation on a Q-bus based VAX, and sufficient Ethernet Transceiver cable to
connect the controller to a tap on the Local Area Network.

3.98

Software

Open Systems Interconnection Products

Prerequisite Software

• VAX/VMS operating system for VAX systems
• MicrovMs operating system for MicroVAX and vAxstation systems. Both the
MicrovMs Extended Base and the MicroVMS Program Development components are required.
• MicrovMs Workstation Software for VAXstation systems.
•For Packetnet (x.25) communications, VAX P.s.1. or VAX P.S.I. ACCESS, v4.0.

Table 3. 73
VAX OSI Transport Service
Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License Options:
(A license is required
for each CPU.)

MicroVAX

VAXstation

QZ129-UZ

Q4129-UZ

Single-use license
VAX.cluster license

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782 2 VAX8200
VAX-11/785 VAX83003

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8800

QD129-UZ
QD129-QZ

QE129-UZ
QE129-QZ

Q*129-UZ
Q*129-QZ

QK129-UZ
QK129-QZ

QM129-QZ

QD129-HG
QD129-HM
QD129-HZ
QL129-GZ
QD129-IG
QD129-IM

QE129-HM
QE129-HY
QE129-HZ
QL129-GZ
QE129-IM
QE129-IY

Q*l29-H3
Q*129-HM
Q*l29-HZ
QL129-GZ

QK129-HM
QK129-HM
QK129-HZ
QL129-GZ
QK129-IM

QM129-HM

QL129-GZ
QZ129-13
QZ129-IS

Q4129-H3
Q4129-HS
Q4129-HZ
QL129-GZ
Q4129-13
Q4129-IS

QZ129-93
QZ129-95
QZ129-83
QZ129-85
QZ129-33
QZ129-35

Q4129-93
Q4129-95
Q4129-83
Q4129-85
Q4129-33
Q4129-35

QD129-9M
QD129-9G
QD129-8M
QD129-8G
QD129-3M
QD129-3G

QE129-9M
QE129-9Y
QE129-8M
QE129-8Y
QE129-3M
QE129-3Y

Q*129-9M
Q*129-93
Q*129-8M
Q*129-83
Q*129-3M
Q*129-33

QK129-9M

QM129-9M

QK129-8M

QM129-8M

QK129-3M

QM129-3M

QM129-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service

QZ129-H3
QZ129-HS
QZ129-HZ

Q*129-13
Q*129-IM

QM129-HZ
QL129-GZ
QM129-IM

Software
Product Service Agreements: 1
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance

1 For Non-u.s. service options, consult local Digital Sales Representative.
2 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
3

* = 5 for VAX 8200; 7 for VAX 8300.

3.99

Software

Open Systems lnterconnecti9n Products

VAX OSI Applications Kernel
(OSAK)

The VAX OSI Applications Kernel Vl.O (osAK) is an implementation of the Open
System Interconnection (OSI) Session Layer, as defined by the International
Standards Organization (Iso) in International Standards ISO 8326 and ISO 8327.
VAX OSI Applications Kernel operates at the Session Layer (Layers) of the
seven-layer ISO Reference Model. It provides a reliable connection for end-toend communication between cooperating user programs residing in separate
systems. The OSI Session Service is dependent upon the services provided by
the OSI Transport Service (voTs).
The VAX OSI Applications Kernel software is a privileged sharable image, which
can be linked with VMS users' programs. OSAK provides the higher-level services
that allow inter-process communication over an OSI network to one or more
remote systems. The remote systems may or may not be another VAX/VMS system, but must also support corresponding OSI protocols. The VAX OSI Applications Kernel is layered on top of VAX OSI Transport Service (voTS).

Prerequisite Hardware

• Any valid VAX/VMS system configuration.
• Block Space requirements (Block Cluster Size = 1):
700 Blocks disk space required for installation and for permanent use.

Prerequisite Software

•VAX OSI Transport Service (voTS) vl.1
• VAX/VMS operating system for VAX systems
• MicrovMs operating system for MicroVAX and VAXstation systems. Both the
MicrovMs Extended Base and the MicrovMs Program Development components are required.
• MicroVMS Workstation Software for VAXstation systems.

Table 3. 74
VAX OSI Application Kernel
Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License Options:
(A license is required
for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782 2 VAX8200
VAX-11/785 VAX83003

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8800

Q4Z02-UZ

QDZ02-UZ
QDZ02-QZ

QEZ02-UZ
QEZ02-QZ

Q*Z02-UZ
Q*Z02-QZ

QKZ02-UZ
QKZ02-QZ

QMZ02-UZ
QMZ02-QZ

QZZ02-H3
QZZ02-H5
QZZ02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ
QZZ02-I3
QZZ02-15

Q4Z02-H3
Q4Z02-H5
Q4Z02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ
Q4Z02-I3
Q4Z02-15

QDZ02-HG QEZ02-HY
QDZ02-HM QEZ02-HM
QDZ02-HZ QEZ02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ QLZ02-GZ
QDZ02-IG
QEZ02-IY
QDZ02-IM QEZ02-IM

Q*Z02-H3
Q*Z02-HM
Q*Z02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ
Q*Z02-I3

QKZ02-HM

QMZ02-HM

QKZ02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ
QKZ02-IM

QMZ02-HZ
QLZ02-GZ
QMZ02-IM

QZZ02-93
QZZ02-95
QZZ02-83
QZZ02-85
QZZ02-33
QZZ02-35

Q4Z02-93
Q4Z02-95
Q4Z02-83
Q4Z02-85
Q4Z02-33
Q4Z02-35

QDZ02-9M
QDZ02-9G
QDZ02-8M
QDZ02-8G
QDZ02-3M
QDZ02-3G

Q*ZOZ-9M
Q*Z02-93
Q*Z02-8M
Q*Z02-83
Q*Z02-3M
Q*Z02-33

QKZ02-9M

QMZ02-9M

QKZ02-8M

QMZ02-8M

QKZ02-3M

QMZ02-3M

MicroVAX

VAXstation

QZZ02-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service
Software
Product Service Agreements: 1
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance

QEZ02-9M
QEZ02-9Y
QEZ02-8M
QEZ02-8Y
QEZ02-3M
QEZ02-3Y

1 For Non-u.s. service options, consult local Digital Sales Representative.

2 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
3

* = 5 for VAX 8200; 7 for VAX 8300.

3.100 Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

File Transfer and Terminal
Emulation Products
Professional Host
Communications Software

The Professional Host Communications Software is an integral part of the
software environment of Micro/RSX, RSX-HM, RSX-HM-PLUS operating systems,
and the VAX/VMS operating system running vAx-u RSX. It is the means of
transferring files between a Professional 300 Series computer and a Micro/RSX,
RSX-UM, RSX-llM-PLUS, or a VAX/VMS host system. The software is initiated by a
Professional running PRO/Communications in terminal emulation mode. After
the Professional Host Communications facility is started, the Professional
switches from terminal emulation to file transfer mode. The files can then be
transferred between the Professional and the host system.

Prerequisite Hardware

Host System-one of the following:

• PDP-11 configuration with at least 256 Kbytes of memory.
• VAX system configuration with at least 512 Kbytes of memory (R80/RL02
configuration is required for VAX-11/730 systems.).
Target System-one of the following:

• p/os Hard Disk system configuration with an RCD50 hard disk.
• p/os Diskette system configuration with an RXSO diskette unit. Supports
any mass storage, unit record, or terminal device supported by the prerequisite software.
Prerequisite Software

Host System-one of the following:

• RSX-UM, RSX-UM-PLUS, or VAX/VMS operating system running VAX-U RSX.
Target System-one of the following:

•for Hard Disk Systems: P/os Hard Disk, or PRO/Communications for
Hard Disk.
• for diskette systems: P/os Diskette, or PRO/Communications for Diskette.

3.101

Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

CX/DX/AX
(WPS-8 To Host Utility)

The ex/DX/Ax (wPs-8 To Host Utility) is a software package that executes on
the RSTS/E, RSX-llM, and VAX/VMS systems enabling them to act as host systems
to a current WPS-8 Word Processing System. The systems communicate over
an asynchronous terminal interface. The WPS-8 system appears to the host applications software to be a normal terminal. Communications between the WPS-8
system and the host system uses the DX error-correcting message protocol.
The utility links distributed, standalone WPS-8 systems and the host system for
better system use and data sharing. The package includes utility programs that
convert host files stored in word processing format to host files stored in Asen
format and vice versa.
The utility is available in the following configurations:
• DX/RSTS for RSTS/E operating systems.
• DX/VMS for VAX/VMS operating systems.
• DX!llM for RSX-llM operating systems.

Features and Benefits

• Stores word processing-format files on a host system and later retrieves them.
This reduces storage and storage media costs.
• Uses the host system's high-speed printer to print rough drafts of documents
not requiring letter-quality printing while maintaining the formatting of the
word processor.
• Creates host system source language and data files on the WPS-8 system using
the WPS-8 editor and then transmits the files to the host system for processing.

Prerequisite Hardware
and Soflware

For DX/RS TS, refer to Software Product Description 10. 95.xx.
For DX/VAX, refer to Software Product Description 26.36.xx.
For DX/11M, refer to Software Product Description 10. 96.xx.

Table 3. 75
DX/RS TS and DX-11M
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: A license is
required for each CPU.

DX/RS TS

DX-11M

Single-use license

QJ703-DZ

QJ704-DZ

QJ703-HD
QJ703-HM
QJ703-HQ
QJ703-HT
QJ703-HV

QJ704-HD
QJ704-HM
QJ704-HQ
QJ704-HT

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

Software revision right-to-copy

3.102

Software

QJ704-HV
QJ704-HZ

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

Table 3. 76
DECdx!VMS Order Codes

Option

Order Code

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782*
VAX-11/785

Single-use license, binaries
documentation, support services

QD708-AG

QE708-AY

Single-use license-only option,
no binaries, no documentation,
no support services

QD708-DZ

QE708-DZ

Users ofmcdx/VMS whose specified
support category warranty has
expired may order under license the
following software option as an
update to an earlier version. The
option may also be purchased for
use on a second or subsequent CPU,
in conjunction with a single-use
license-only option. Options are
distributed in binary form on the
appropriate medium and include no
installation or other services unless
specifically stated.

QD708-HG

QE708-HY

Right-to-copy for single-use,
no binaries, no documentation

QD708-HZ

QE708-HZ

Customers who are currently licensed
users ofox/vMs may obtain this new
product by purchasing a license to an
upgrade kit for use on the same CPU
as their previous license.

QD712-AG

QE712-AY

Single-use license-only option,
no binaries, no documentation

QD712-DZ

QE712-DZ

QD708-GZ

QE708-GZ

Update/Unsupported Options:

Upgrade Options:

Miscellaneous Options:
Documentation-only kits

*The VAx-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU for binary
licensing purposes.

3.103

Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

poly-COM
for the Rainbow Family

The poly-COM TM software has vrtoo terminal emulation capabilities and provides
flexible and easy-to-use file transfer between the Rainbow personal computer
and a variety ofhosts and operating systems. With this software, users can share
data, programs, and peripherals.

Features

• Transmits to and from the Rainbow personal computer's video screen and
floppy disks, and to the Rainbow's optional printer.
• Communications characteristics can be changed by simply loading a terminal
settings file.
•Files containing binary (nonprintable) ASCII characters can be transmitted
between systems running poly-coM or poly-XFR.
• Checks the integrity of each block of data to ensure secure transfer, and counts
data blocks to make sure that none are lost.
• The SWITCH component of the software allows the user to run applications on
the Rainbow personal computer from another system or terminal.
poly-COM software allows the Rainbow personal computer to communicate
with the following systems:
• Rainbow 100 cP/M-86/80 or MS-DOS
• DECmate CP/M-80
• RT-11
• RSTS/E
• RSX-11M
• RSX-11M-Plus
•VAX/VMS
These systems must run the poly-XFR CP/M communications package in order
to communicate with poly-coM on the Rainbow 100.
Refer to SPD A3.23 for additional systems supported.

Prerequisite Hardware and Software
Table 3. 77
poly-COM (Polygon
Asynchronous Sofiware)
Order Codes

• CP/M-86/80, V2.0 and MS-DOS V2.05.

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is required for each CPU.)
poly-COM Local and Host Systems:
vl.2 for Rainbow

QA193-C3

poly-XFR Local and Host Systems:
vl. o for DECmate II systems

QA202-C3

poly-XFR Host System Only:
v2.0 for RT-11 host systems

QA140-CD
QA140-CH
QA140-CY

V2.0 for VAX/VMS systems

QA142-CG
QA142-CM
QA142-CY

3.104

Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

VTERM II, poly-COM 220,
and poly-COM 240 for the
IBM PC/XT I AT

This product set is not currently available in Europe.

The Digital Distributed Software Program offers three products that run on the
IHM Pc/xr/ AT to emulate Digital terminals. These products perform ASCII and
binary file transfers between an IBM PC and a Digital host system. VTERM II
allows the Pc/xr/ AT to emulate a VT52 or VT100 terminal, poly-COM 220 allows
the PC/xr/ AT to emulate a VT52, VT102, and VT220 terminal, and poly-COM 240
allows the PC/xr/ AT to emulate a VT240 terminal.
VTERM II

VTERM 11 is an asynchronous communication package for the IBM PC developed
by Coefficient Systems Corporation. VTERM II allows direct connection to a host
computer at speeds up to %00 baud. With a Digital mini or mainframe computer, users can run full screen, keypad oriented software like EDT, TECT, WORD11,
and EMACS transfering text and binary files between the PC and the host.

Features

• Plus compatible with DEC VTlOO
• Full VT100 keyboard and video emulation
• 20 user definable keys
• Full VTlOO and VT52 escape sequence recognition
• Status display line on screen
• 80 column display-132 with adapter board available from Coefficient
Systems Corporation
• DOS-VTERM toggle key allows switching between the DOS screen and the
host screen without losing the communications link
• Set up mode key
• Printer support for VTlxx-AC and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer

poly-COM 220 and 240

poly-coM 220 is the successor to poly-COM and allows the use of an IBM
Pc/xr I AT eomputer as any one of the Digital VT52, VT102, and VT220 terminals
for file transfer. The program supports all Digital full screen editors, including
EDT, and all programs that use advanced terminal features such as Digital's
ALL-IN-1. poly-COM 220 provides an instant horizontal shift key which allows
the user to view and work on text up to 132 columns wide. poly-COM 240 adds
Digital VT240 emulation to poly-COM 220 and provides full Digital color
graphics terminal emulation.

poly-COM 220 Features

• Plus compatible with DEC VT100 series and VT220
• Full VT100 and VT200 keyboard and video emulation
• 8 bit international character support with compose key
• 21 soft function keys "user definable"
• VT100 escape sequence recognition and VT200 8 bit terminal control
• Status display line on screen
• Instantaneous horizontal shift for 132 character display

3.105

Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

• DOS-VTERM toggle key allows switching between the DOS screen and the
host screen without losing the communication link
• Set up mode key
• Printer support for VT1xx-Ac and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer
• Host control functions allows the host to control the IBM PC through
poly-COM 220
• Screen Saver function which blanks the PC screen after an inactive time
period that is user definable.

poly-COM 240 Features

• VT100 escape sequence recognition and VT200 8 bit terminal control
• Status display line on screen
• Instantaneous horizontal shift for 132 character display
• Set up mode key
• Printer support for VT1xx-Ac and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer
• VT240 and VT125 device ID
• Regis graphics supported
• Full support for IBM PC and Epson graphics printers.

Required Hardware

For the Digital host, the same hardware used for asynchronous terminal ports
accommodates the IBM PC.
For the PC, a serial communications port is required for direct cable connection
to the Digital host or to a modem.

Table 3. 78
VT ERM II, poly-COM 220, and
poly-COM 240 Order Codes

Option

Order Code

VTERM for IBM PC with 96K

QAX97-C3*

poly-COM 220 for IBM PC with 192K

QAX98-C3

poly-COM 240 for IBM PC with 256K

QAX99-C3

*Host source included

Table 3. 79
Host Software for poly-COM
Package Order Codes

Option

Order Code

poly-'XFR, RSX

QA139-CD (H)*

poly-XFR, RT-11

QA140-CY (H, D)*

poly-xFR, RSTS

QA141-CD

poly-XFR, VMS

QA142-CY (G, M)*

*Optional media

3.106

Software

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

Rainbow Office Workstation

The Rainbow Office Workstation is a software product that provides a simple
menu interface to access both VAX and Rainbow applications and resources.
With this software, the hard-disk based Rainbow performs easy data exchange
between Rainbow and host: files, VAX DATATRIEVE extracts, Electronic Mail,
hard disk backups and terminal sessions. It also provides a high-speed user
interface to Rainbow's local applications and utility functions.
The software links the Rainbow personal computer applications to the applications, data and resources of the VAX. This frees the user from routine computing tasks. The Rainbow Office Workstation menus are compatible with those
provided by the ALL-IN-1 Office Information System for maximum transparency and consistency within an ALL-IN-1 environment. ALL-IN-1, however, is not
prerequisite software on the host VAX.
Note: The current version of Rainbow Office Workstation is only available in
English (menus, screen messages, etc.)

Features

• Menu-driven user shell has familiar menus for reduced learning time, extremely fast response, and free movement between all menus for painless
growth from novice to expert usage.
• Transparent communications to the VAX:
- User can automatically connect to host and log in.
- Invokes ALL-IN-1 Office Information Systems as a terminal.
- Invokes DATATRIEVE as a terminal for access to shared information stored on
the VAX system or across a network.
- Transfers text files, documents, and other binary files.
- Extracts DATATRIEVE collections and transfers them to the Rainbow in a
number of formats by Rainbow applications.
- Protects security of host accounts by encrypting passwords stored in
Rainbow.
• Electronic Mail System routinely and automatically transfers incoming and
outgoing mail between Rainbow and VAX.
• Routinely and automatically backs-up MS-DOS files created or modified since
last back-up.
• Instantly loads user choice of MS-DOS industry standard business applications and includes simple commands for organizing and accessing files
and directories.
• Allows up to five individuals to share one Rainbow (one at a time) and organize
their files; separate profiles contain each user's encrypted VAX password, choice
of user applications, electronic mail header, etc.

3.107

Software

File 'fransfer and Terminal Emulation Products

Prerequisite Hardware

PC100 Personal Computer configured with:
• A 5 MB or 10 MB hard disk.
• At least 256 KB of memory with additional memory requirements depending on
choice oflocal application. Users must configure their system to satisfy the
condition requiring the greatest amount of memory.
.

Prerequisite Software

Condition

Memory required

ROW using mail without a text editor

256KB

ROW using mail with text editor
word processing package

160 KB and database memory
requirement

ROW with spreadsheet

160 KB and spreadsheet memory
requirement

ROW with word processing

160 KB and WP memory
requirement

ROW with business application

160 KB and business
application memory
requirement

Minimum software required on the Rainbow:
•MS-DOS v2.11 Operating System.
Minimum software required on the VAX:
•VAX Rainbow Office Workstation Vl.O
• vAx/vMs Operating System 4.1
• Poly-XFR. Communications for VAX/VMS host.

Table 3.80
Rainbow Office Workstation
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Rainbow Office Workstation

QVA28-A3

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780

Single-use license

QD935-UZ

QE935-UZ

QD935-HG
QC935-HM

QE935-HY
QC935-HM

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

3.108

Software

Network and System Management Products

Network and System
Management Products
NMCC/DECnet Monitor

The NMCC/DECnct Monitor is a software tool for the observation and control
of complex, corporate backbone networks. NMcc/nEcnet Monitor responds to
English-like commands and graphically presents network conditions within a
color network map (if the user has an optional color monitor). This tool also
works with a database of configuration information and network parameters
that can be readily accessed and analyzed.
The NMCCDEcnet Monitor is designed to assist in three key areas of network
management: availability, performance, and planning.
The NMcc/nEcnet Monitor availability may differ outside the United States.
Contact the local Digital representative for availability.

Features

• Facilitates the management of complex networks by collecting, analyzing, and
displaying information about the network.
• Graphically depicts the state of the network.
• Supplies a database of available information.
• Looks at a large sample over a long period of time to discover trends.
•Provides standard and customized reports.
• Reduces management costs by allowing managers to frequently evaluate,
redesign, and tune the network.
• Enables a manager to detect problems early thus avoiding poor service and
lengthy downtime.
• Allows the user to define thresholds. When they are approached or exceeded,
the problem area is highlighted by a c;hange of color on the network map (ifthe
user has an optional color monitor).

Prerequisite Hardware

•VAX 11/730 to 8600 processor or MicroVAX 11 (Note: R80/RL02 configuration
is required for VAX-11/730 system.)
• VT240, VT241, VT330, VT340 terminal, or VT100 or VT220 (for
tabular representation)
• Storage device of 30 Megabytes

Prerequisite Software

• VMS operating system v4.4 or later
• DECnet/VMS V4.4 or later

• Full or runtime license for VAX GKS
• Development license for VAX RDB/VMS

3.109

Software

Network and System Management Products

Table 3.81
NMCC!DECnet Monitor
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
MicroVAX II, VAX-11/750, VAX-11/780,
VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8500,
VAX 8550, VAX 8600, VAX 8650

QSP41-UZ

Migration option from
OBSERVER V1.X

QSP42-UZ

Software revision right-to-copy
MicroVAX II, VAX-11/750, VAX-11/780,
VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8600

QSP41-HZ

Materials and Service Options:
NMCC startup service

QSP41-SZ

Distribution and documentation
TU-58: VAX-11/750

QSP41-HG

RX01: VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782,
VAX-11/785

QSP41-HY

RX50: MicroVAX II

QSP41-H3

1600 BPI magtape: VAX-11/750,
VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785,
VAX 8500, VAX 8550, VAX 8600,
VAX8650

QSP41-HM

Documentation only

QSP41-GZ

Installation service

QSP41-IG
QSP41-IY
QSP41-IM

U.S. Software Product
Service Agreements:*
DECsupport service

QSP41-9G
QSP41-9M
QSP41-9Y
QSP41-93

Basic service

QSP41-8G
QSP41-8Y
QSP41-8M
QSP41-83

Self-maintenance service

QSP41-3G
QSP41-3Y
QSP41-3M
QSP41-33

*For Non-u. s. service agreements, consult local Digital Sales Representative.

3.110

Software

Network and System Management Products

NMCC/VAX ETHERnim
(Ethernet Network Integrity
Monitor)

NMCc/vAx ETHERnim is a network management tool that aids in fault isolation
and topology management of extended local area networks. NMCC/VAX
ETHERnim utilizes Phase IV DECnet software on a system configured as either
a full-function DECnet node or a DECnet end node. It runs as a layered product
on the VAX/VMS Operating System. Full functionality ofNMcc/vAx ETHERnim
is achieved by having DECnet software and remote test command files in
target nodes.
NMCC/vAx ETHERnim is designed to test the communications path through
Ethernet protocol and DECnet. It also has the ability to gather system information for its database from remote VMS and RSX nodes by invoking test probes
(remote command files).
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim recognizes non-DECnet Ethernet addresses, and gives the
network manager the capability of maintaining a large amount of information
about each node via an editable database. It can be operated from local terminals
(vT125, VT240, VT241) using ReGIS graphics for graphic representations of the
network under test. Refer to SPD 26.96.xx for more information.

Features

• Builds a permanent database containing basic information about each node that
it detects directly connected to the Ethernet cable.
• Provides a means of path testing to 1so levels I and II to all nodes on the Ethernet
(with the exception of the MicroVAX 1 and vAxstation 1), and to DNA network
application and user layers for any node runU:ing DECnet Phase IV
on the Ethernet.
• Provides a means of determining the VAX processor type for VMS DECnet nodes
on the Ethernet.

Prerequisite Hardware

• Any valid VAX configuration with Ethernet controller. (Note: VAX-11/730 systems require an R80/RL02.) Refer to SPD 26. 96 for more information.
• VT125, VT240, or VT241 graphics terminal.

Prerequisite Soflware

VAX/VMS Operating System v4.6 or later and DECnet-VAX.

3.111

Software

Network and System Management Products

Table 3.82
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required far each CPU.)
Single-use license

Q*514-UZ

vAxcluster license

Q*514-QZ 1

Initial license
(primary & cluster)

Q*514-1P 2

Monthly availability:
pnmary

Q*514-JP 2

Monthly availability:
cluster

Q*514-JZ 2

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

Q*514-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*514-HZ

Documentation Only

QL514-GZ

Installation

Q*514-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 3
DECsupport service

Q*514-9#

Basic service

Q*514-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*514-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = M
VAX-11/785: * = E; # = M
VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M

VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX8600: *= K; # = M
VAX 8650: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX 8800: * = M; # = M

1 Not available on MicroVAX II or MicroVAX 2000
2 Not available on MicroVAX, VAX-11, or VAX 86xx processors.
3 For non-u. s. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.112

Software

Network and System Management Products

LAN Traffic Monitor

The LAN Traffic Monitor (LTM) is a tool used in multivendor environments to
analyze the utilization of an extended LAN. A LAN Bridge 100, downline loaded
with the unique monitoring software, is attached to the Ethernet cable and
transmits information to the LAN Traffic Monitor Host software program
located on any VAX in the extended LAN. LAN Traffic Monitor permits multiple
users from anywhere on the extended Ethernet to access the traffic data.
The LTM collects statistics on all Ethernet traffic regardless of higher level
protocol. For example, users of DECnet, TCP/IP, LAT, and XNS can study
performance on the network by higher level protocol. LTM gives the network
manager the flexibility to monitor different segments of an extended Ethernet
network and have this information collected at a central location. LTM provides
network utilization graphs that show the network manager the performance of
the various Ethernet segments.

Features

• Provides timely, accurate information needed to maximize network performance and plan network growth.
• Guarantees the integrity of the traffic statistics by capturing every frame and
continuously updating the application software.
• Displays data from multiple monitors on any host running the LTM software in
the extended LAN.
• Gathers traffic statistics from any device connected to the Ethernet and provides
data based on nodes, addresses and/or protocol types.
• Provides performance measurements allowing for the optimum configuration
and operation of the Ethernet LAN.
• Simplifies analysis of Ethernet traffic data through the use of both graphic and
tabular displays.
• Easy-to-use menu structure shortens the learning curve of the first time user.

Required Hardware

LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) with minimum revision level E

Prerequisite Software

VMS v4.4 or subsequent version
DECnet-VAX v4.4 or subsequent version on the host processor

Optional Software

RBMS Vl.1 for remote management of downline load feature in LAN Bridge 100.

3.113

Software

Network and System Management Products

Table 3.83
LAN Traffic Monitor
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required far each CPU.}
Single-use license

Q*ZF3-UZ

vAxcluster license

Q*ZF3-QZ 1

Initial license
(primary & cluster)

Q*ZF3-1P 2

Monthly availability:
pnmary

Q*ZF3-JP 2

Monthly availability:
cluster

Q*ZF3-JZ 2

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

Q*ZF3-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*ZF3-HZ

Documentation only

QLZF3-GZ

Installation

Q*ZF3-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 3
DECsupport service

Q*ZF3-9#

Basic service

Q*ZF3-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*ZF3-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
MicroVAX 2000: * = 3; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation II:*= 4; # = 3 or 5
VAXstation 2000: * = 8; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = M
VAX-11/780: * = E; # = M
VAX-11/782: 4 * = E; # = M

VAX-11/785: * = E; # = M
VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX8300: * = 7; # = 3or M
VAX 8500: * = 9; # = M
VAX 8600: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800: * = M;# = M

1 Available on VAX-11/700 series, VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8600, VAX

8700, and VAX 8800.
2 Available on VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 8500, VAX 8600, VAX 8700, and VAX 8800.
3 For non-u.s. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

4 For software licensing purposes, a vAx-11/782 is considered a single CPU.

· 3.114

Software

Network and System Management Products

Remote System Manager

Remote System Manager (RSM) is a VMS-layered software product which allows
a single system manager to perform software installation, backup, and update
tasks typically performed at individual VAXstation II, VAxstation II/GPX, and
MicroVAX II systems. The Remote System Manager environment consists of a
number of VMS or MicrovMs systems configured with DECnet on an Ethernet
Local Area Network. One system is the server (and may run VMS or MicrovMs)
and the others are clients (which run MicrovMs). The server provides services to
suitably configured clients which have been defined in the server's registration
and network databases, and which are connected to the same Ethernet. The
Remote System Manager provides services over a single Ethernet but does not
restrict communications with other nodes in the network. Client files may be
spooled (transferred transparently) to the server for printing on a shared printer.
The Remote System Manager Server software is comprised of a menu interface
and a set of management tools. The User Interface consists of two main menus:
an installation menu and a management menu. The installation menu is used to
perform the initial registration and software installation of clients. The management menu is used to perform ongoing, repetitive management tasks. The
Management Tools perform such functions as initial software installation,
application management, file backup, file restoration, print queue management, distribution of RSM logical names, RSM symbols and the DECnet database,
and remote execution of single DCL commands.
Remote System Manager Client software is required for each client in the
network. Refer to Software Product Descriptions 27.32.xx and 27.33.xx for
supported configurations and additional information.

Features

• Centralized software installation and updating relieves users of system management responsibilities and ensures access to current versions of applications
and tools.
• Centralized file backup relieves users of file backup at the workstation.
• Centralized queueing and print services allow client systems to share printers.
•Central distribution and updating of RSM logical names and symbols, and of the
DECnet database, ensure accurate access to network resources.

Figure 3.14
Remote System Manager Configuration

Printer
Centralized
Data
Backup

Centralized
Print
Queuing
Centralized
Software
Installation/
Update
Baseband Coaxial Cable

Micro

VAX

Station

3.115

Software

Network and System Management Products

Required Hardware

The Server System may be one of the following:
• MicroVAX II with the following minimum mass storage combination: TKSO,
RD52 and RD53 .
• VAX-11/78x, VAX 8200, VAX 8300, VAX 86xx, or VAX 8800.
The Client Systems may include the following:
• vAxstation II .
• VAXStation II/GPX.
• MicroVAX u with RDSx system disk.

Prerequisite Software

VAX/VMS or MicrovMs v4.2 operating system or later and DECnet-VAX.

Table 3.84
Remote System Manager Server
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license

Q*Bl3-UZ

VAxcluster license

Q*Bl3-QZ 1

Initial license (primary & cluster)

Q*Bl3-1P2

Monthly availability: primary

Q*Bl3-JP2

Monthly availability: cluster

Q*Bl3-JZ 2

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

Q*B13-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*Bl3-HZ

Documentation only

QLB13-GZ

Installation

Q*B13-I#

U.S. Software Product Service
Agreements: 3
DEcsupport service

Q*Bl3-9#

Basic service

Q*Bl3-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*B13-3#

MicroVAX II:*= Z; # = 3 or 5
VAX-11/750: * = D; # = M
VAX-11/78x: * = E; # = M
VAX 8200: * = 5; # = 3 or M
VAX 8300: * = 7; # = 3 or M

VAX8500:* = 9;# = M
VAX 8550: * = 2; # = M
VAX86x0: * = K; # = M
VAX 8700: * = 2; # = M
VAX8800:* = M;# = M

1 Not available on MicroVAX II.
2 Not available on MicroVAX II, VAX-11, or VAX 86XX.
3 For non-u.s. service agreements, consult a local Digital Sales Representative.

3.116

Software

Network and System Management Products

Table 3.85
Remote System ManaJ?er Client
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each client system.)

MicroVAX
II

Single-use license

QZB14-UZ

Q4B14-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QZB14-H3
QZB14-H5

Q4B14-H3
Q4B14-H5

Installation service

QZB14-13
QZB14-15

Q4B14-13
Q4B14-15

DECsupport service

QZB14-93
QZB14-95

Q4B14-93
Q4B14-95

Basic service

AZB14-83
QZB14-85

Q4B14-83
Q4B14-85

Self-maintenance service

QZB14-33
QZB14-35

Q4B14-33
Q4B14-35

VAXstation

Materials and Service Options:

U.S. Software Product
Service Agreements:

Remote Bridge Management
Software (RBMS)

Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is an optional product used with
the LAN Bridge 100. RBMS significantly enhances the Bridge's operation by allowing the user, at a VAX or MicroVAX host, to observe and control any LAN Bridge
100 in the network. With RBMS, users can disable selected Bridges or block
traffic at selected Bridges to isolate traffic on a segment of an extended network.
RBMS resides on a VAX or MicroVAX host and works in conjunction with the LAN
Bridge 10o's management firmware. A subset of the IEEE 802.1 Management
Protocol is used to communicate between the VAX host and the targeted Bridge.
RBMS provides the functionality needed to support the actual control and
observation of the LAN Bridge 100.

Features

• Displays counters, statistics, characteristics and the forwarding data base.
• Allows the user to change the operational state, characteristics and forwarding
data base.
• Enables the user to remotely downline load LAN Bridge with LAN Traffic
Monitor software, changing the device from its default state as a bridge.
• Uses the IEEE 802.1 management protocol for both DECnet and nonDECnet environments.
• Allows the user to name and refer to each bridge in ASCII format by mapping
ASCII names to physical addresses.
• Enables the user to use one command to address a group of Bridges through the
use of global commands.
• Supports simultan_eous access by multiple users on the same or different hosts.
• Provides extensive on-line help.
• Allows remote troubleshooting of hardware through the Bridge Self
Test feature.

3.117

Software

Network and System Management Products

Prerequisite Hardware

• A valid VAX or MicroVAX system configuration with a Digital Ethernet
Controller connected to an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 network which contains at least
one LAN Bridge 100.
• One of the following Digital terminals: V1100 or VT200 series, LA12, LA34, LA35,
LA36, or LA38.

Prerequisite Software

• VAX/VMS version 4.4 or later; or
• MicrovMs version 4.4 or later.
• DECnet-VAX version 4.0 or later.

Table 3.86
Remote Bridge Management
Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options:
(A license is required
for each Bridge.)

Micro
VAXII 1

VAX
station 11 1

VAX 11/750

QZ036-UZ

Q4036-UZ

QD036-UZ

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license
(primary and cluster)
Monthly availability
··primary
• cluster

VAX 11/780
VAX 11/7822
VAX11/785

VAX8200
VAX8300
VAX85003

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8800

QE036-UZ
QE036-QZ

Q*036-UZ
Q*036-QZ

QK036-UZ
QK036-QZ

QM036-UZ
QM036-QZ

Q*036-1P

QM036-1P

Q*036-JP
Q*036-JZ

QM036-JP
QM036-JZ

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
Installation service

----

QZ036-H3
QZ036-HS
QZ036-HZ
QL036-GZ
QZ036-!3
QZ036-IS

Q4036-H3
Q4036-HS
Q4036-HZ
QL036-GZ
Q4036-13
Q4036-IS

QD036-HG
QD036-HM
QD036-HZ
QL036-GZ
QD036-IG
QD036-IM

QE036-HM
QE036-HY
QE036-HZ
QL036-GZ
QE036-IM
QE036-IY

Q*036-H3
Q*036-HM
Q*036-HZ
QL036-GZ

QZ036-93
QZ036-95
QZ036-83
QZ036-85
QZ036-33
QZ036-35

Q4036-93
Q4036-95
Q4036-83
Q4036-85
Q4036-33
Q4036-35

QD036-9G
QD036-9M
QD036-8G
QD036-8M
QD036-3G
QD036-3M

QE036-9M
QE036-9Y
QE036-8M
QE036-8Y
QE036-3M
QE036-3Y

Q*036-93
Q*036-9M
Q*036-83
Q*036-8M
Q*036-33
Q*036-3M

Q*036-13
Q*036-IM

QK036-HM

QM036-HM

QK036-HZ
QL036-GZ
QK036-IM

QM036-HZ
QL036-GZ
QM036-IM

QK036-9M

QM036-9M

QK036-HM

QM036-8M

QK036-3M

QM036-3M

U.S. Software Product
Service Agreements: 4
DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance service

1 For Micro VAX 1 and vAxstation 1 order codes, refer to SPD 26. 71. xx

2 For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
3

* = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 9 for VAX 8500.

4 For Non-u. s. service agreements, consult local Digital Sales Representative.

3.118

Software

Network and System Management Products

Terminal Server Manager

The Terminal Server Manager/VMS (TsM) is a software tool which allows a user
at a VAX host to remotely observe and control terminal servers anywhere in the
extended local area network. With TSM the user can monitor the availability and
modify the characteristics of all Digital terminal servers on the network
including the DEcserver 100, DECserver 200, Ethernet Terminal Server and
Muxserver 100.
TSM simplifies management of terminal server networks through improved
operating procedures and reduced demand for trained personnel. Operating
procedures are improved with the ability to centrally show and set terminal
server parameters through the use of command files. The need for trained
personnel at remote sites is reduced with the ability to centrally manage
Digital's entire family of terminal servers.

Features

• Provides a directory database containing basic information about each terminal
server on the network allowing easy access to all servers by name rather than
their Ethernet address.
• Automatically detects and adds all new terminal servers to the directory
through the use of a simple command.
• Expedites troubleshooting by allowing centralized testing of all terminal servers
in the directory through the use of a single command.
• Improves productivity by enabling a single user to manipulate all terminal
server parameters and characteristics from a central location.
• Allows terminal server characteristics to be maintained on the central host
simplifying the addition and replacement of any server.
• Improves fault management capabilities by providing centralized access to all
status indicators and error counters in the terminal servers.
• Increases efficiency by allowing the creation of command files of commonly
used TSM commands.

Prerequisite Hardware

For VAX systems, an Ethernet Controller (DELUA or DEQNA)
Block space requirements (Block Cluster Size= 1):
2000 blocks of disk space required for installation
800 blocks of disk space required for permanent use.

Prerequisite Software

DECnet VAX Version 4.4 (or subsequent version) is required on the
host processor.
Depending upon configuration of terminal servers to be managed by TSM, the
following versions of terminal server software are required:
• DECserver 100 (DSRVA) vl.2 or later.
• Ethernet Terminal Server (oEcsA) v2.1 or later.
• DECserver 200 (osRvB) vl.O or later.
• MUXserver 100 vl.O or later.

3.119

Software

Network and System Management Products

Table 3.87
Terminal Server Manager
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

MicroVAX

VAXstation

VAX-11/750
VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782 VAX8200
VAX-11/730 VAX-11/785 1 VAX 8300 2

QZZ42-UZ

Q4Z42-UZ

QCZ42-UZ

License Options:
(A license is required
for each CPU.)

Single-use license
VAXcluster license
Initial license
(primary and cluster)
Monthly availability:
•primary
• cluster

Q*Z42-UZ
Q*Z42-QZ

VAX8500
VAX8700 3

VAX8600

VAX8800

Q#Z42-UZ
Q#Z42-QZ

Q+Z42-UZ QKZ42-UZ
Q+Z42-QZ QKZ42-QZ

QMZ42-UZ
QMZ42-QZ

Q#Z42-1P

Q+Z42-1P

QMZ42-1P

Q#Z42-JP
Q#Z42-JZ

Q+Z42-JP
Q+Z42-:JZ

QMZ42-JP
QMZ42-JZ

Materials and
Service Options:
---·~·-

Distribution and
documentation
Software revision
right-to-copy
Installation service

QZZ42-H3
QZZ42-H5

Q4Z42-H3
Q4Z42-H5

QCZ42-HM Q*Z42-HM

Q#Z42-H3 Q+Z42-HM QKZ42-HM QMZ42-HM
Q#Z42-HM

QZZ42-HZ
QZZ42-13
QZZ42-I5

Q4Z42-HZ
Q4Z42-I3
Q4Z42-I5

QCZ42-HZ
QCZ42-IM

Q*Z42-HZ
Q*Z42-IM

Q#Z42-HZ
Q#Z42-I3
Q#Z42-IM

Q+Z42-HZ QKZ42-HZ
Q+Z42-IM QKZ42-IM

QMZ42-HZ
QMZ42-IM

QZZ42-93
QZZ42-95
QZZ42-83
QZZ42-85

Q4Z42-93
Q4Z42-95
Q4Z42-83
Q4Z42-85

QCZ42-9M

Q*Z42-9M

Q+Z42-9M

QKZ42-9M

QMZ42-9M

QCZ42-9M

Q*Z42-8M

Q#Z42-93
Q#Z42-9M
Q#Z42-83
Q#Z42-8M

Q+Z42-8M

QKZ42-8M

QMZ42-8M

QZZ42-33
QZZ42-35

Q4Z42-33
Q4Z42-35

QCZ42-3M

Q*Z42-3M

Q#Z42-33
Q#Z42-3M

Q+Z42-3M

QKZ42-3M

QMZ42-3M

U.S. Software
Product
Service
Agreements: 4

DECsupport service
Basic service
Self-maintenance
service

1
2

* = D for VAX-11/750, E for VAX-11/780, 782, 785
# = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300
+ = 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8700

4 For Non-u.s. service agreement codes consult local Digital Sales Representative.

3.120

Software

Network and System Management Products

PBX/Facilities Management
System (P/FM)

PBX/Facilities Management System (P/FM) v2.2 is a software application package
that tracks and helps control telecommunications costs and produces billing for
second party users. The system gives owners of telecommunications switches
(PBxs) the ability to price telecommunications services in a customized fashion
using industry standard rate tables which may be ordered as a separate option
with P!FM. Invoices may also include charges for non-telecommunications
items and transactions such as building services or equipment rentals.
P!FM can be used with multiple PBXs (Private Branch Exchanges) of mixed
types. The P/FM software considers each PBX to be a separate entity, keeping the
data in separate nodes (data bases) and controlling which users can access them.
P!FM can support up to eighty-nine nodes from a single-licensed system. Refer
to Software Product Description A4.38.02 for detailed information about P/FM.
The PBX/Facilities Management System is not available in Europe.

Required Hardware

• Any valid VAX or MicroVAX II based system configuration with VT100 series
with AVO or VT200 series terminals.
•A minimum of3MB of memory for a single PBX node system.
• Each additional PBX node supported requires an additional lMB of memory and
an appropriate amount of disk space to store the data.

Prerequisite Software

• VAX/VMS Operating System, v4.2 or MicrovMS Operating System, V4.2,
or later
• VAX DATATRIEVE, Version 3.1, or later
•VAX Common Data Dictionary, Version 3.1, or later
• FMS Forms Driver, Version 2.2, or later

Table 3.88
PIFM

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: A license is
required for each CPU.

Micro
VAXII

VAX-11/7xx
Systems

VAX8600
VAX8650

Single-use license

QAFU5-UZ

QA870-UZ

QAAF6-UZ

Materials and Service Options:
Distribution and documentation

QAFU5-H5

QA870-HH
QA870-HM

QAAF6-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

QAFUS-HZ

QA870-HZ

QAAF6-HZ

Installation/orientation service

QAFUS-15

QA870-IH
QA870-IM

QAAF6-IM

Basic service

QAFUS-85

QA870-8H
QA870-8M

QAAF6-8M

Self-maintenance service

QAFUS-35

QA870-3H
QA870-3M

QAAF6-3M

P /FM Rate Table Option:
Single-use license, binaries,
documentation, no warranty

QAAT9-C5

QAAT9-CH
QAAT9-CM

QAAT9-CM

Self-maintenance service

QAAT9-35

QAAT9-3H
QAAT9-3M

QAAT9-3M

3.121

Software

Network and System Management Products

Cable/Facilities Management
System (C/FM)

Cable/Facilities Management System (c/FM) is a VAX/VMS layered software
application product which manages the twisted pair cabling of voice and data
communications sytems. c/FM automates cable management, Private Branch
Exchange (PBX) cable database administration, switch capacity planning, and
work order functions.
The functional components of c/FM include: Cable Management, Station
Software Features, PBX Common Equipment, Inventory, and Work Order
Entry. The c/FM cable management function tracks the connections of cables
and cable pairs so that a cable path can be traced from the PBX to a telephone
jack. Features of a user's telephone may be entered into the c/FM database and
displayed. The c/FM database may also be used for keeping track of a switch's
installed PBX common equipment. The inventory function helps to keep track
of available equipment within various stock rooms. With the c/FM work order
entry function, a telecommunications staff may generate work order requests
for telephone service installation, deinstallation, repairs and moves.
r

The Cable/Facilities Management System is not available in Europe.
Refer to Software Product Description 27.48.xx for detailed information
about c/FM.

Required Hardware

• Any valid VAX or MicroVAX n based system configuration.
• A minimum of 3MB of memory for a single PBX node system.

Prerequisite Software

• P/FM (PBX/Facilities Management) v2.2
•VAX/VMS Operating System, v4.2 or MicrovMs Operating System, v4.2,
or later
• VAX DATATRIEVE, Version 3.1, or later
•VAX Common Data Dictionary, Version 3.1, or later
• FMS Forms Driver, Version 2.2, or later

Table 3.89
C/FM Order Codes

Option
License Options:
(A license is required
for each CPU.)

Order Code
VAX8200
VAX8300
VAX8500
VAX87002

VAX8600
VAX8650

VAX8800

VAX-11/750

VAX-11/780
VAX-11/782 1
VAX-11/785

QZZ41-UZ

QDZ41-UZ
QDZ41-QZ

QEZ41-UZ
QEZ41-QZ

Q*Z41-UZ
Q*Z41-QZ

QKZ41-UZ
QKZ41-QZ

QMZ41-UZ
QMZ41-QZ

Distribution and documentation

QZZ41-H5

QKZ41-HM

QMZ41-HM

QZZ41-HZ
QZZ41-l5

Q*Z41-HZ
Q*Z41-IM

QKZ41-HZ
QKZ41-IM

QMZ41-HZ
QMZ41-IM

Basic service

QZZ41-85

Q*Z41-8M

QKZ41-8M

QMZ41-8M

Self-maintenance service

QZZ41-35

QEZ41-HH
QEZ41-HM
QEZ41-HZ
QEZ41-IH
QEZ41-IM
QEZ41-8H
QEZ41-8M
QEZ41-3H
QEZ41-3M

Q*Z41-HM

Software revision right-to-copy
Installation service

QDZ41-HH
QDZ41-HM
QDZ41-HZ
QDZ41-IH
QDZ41-IM
QDZ41-8H
QDZ41-8M
QDZ41-3H
QDZ41-3M

Q*Z41-3M

QKZ41-3M

QMZ41-3M

Single-use license
Cluster license

MicroVAX

Materials and Service O(!tions:

1 For software licensing purposes, a vAx-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.

* = 5 for VAX 8200, 7 for VAX 8300, 9 for VAX 8500, 2 for VAX 8700.
3.122

Software

Additional Software Products

Additional Software Products
VAX Public Access
Communications (VAXPAC)

VAX Public Access Communications (vAXPAC) lets VAX/VMS or MicrovMs users
connect to a remote system using asynchronous lines. VAXPAC allows users to
access database services that provide information such as investment reports,
credit verification, or international news.
VAXPAC runs on MicroVAX n, MicroVAX 2000, and VAXstation 2000 systems. The
remote system may be any system that accepts and displays data using an
asynchronous interface compatible with RS-232C, RS-422, or RS-423.
VAXPAC users can operate as if the terminal were directly connected to the
remote system, can capture data from the remote system in a file for later
printing or editing, or transfer a file (with error checking) to or from a system
with cooperating software.

Features

• Provides access to all facilities through menu selections and extensive online help
• Includes KERMIT© error-correction file-transfer software; provides an interface
that allows other file-transfer software to be invoked instead of KERMIT
• Offers predefined connections that can be specified for either general use or
designated individuals
• Supports direct or telephone connections with autodial, dial from keyboard, or
dial from handset for applicable modems
• Includes maintenance facilities that let users customize VAXPAC operation

Prerequisite Hardware

One of the following:
• Any valid MicroVAX II with 3 Mbyte internal memory, TKSO or dual RXSO drive,
one DZQ11 or DHV11, one RD52, and a VT100- or VT200-series terminal
• Any MicroVAX 2000 or VAXstation 2000
Plus one or more modems if using telephone connections: DF224 (Scholar),
DF03-compatible, or Hayes Instruction Set compatible.

Prerequisite Software

One of the following:
• All components of Micro VMS, V4.4 or later
• VAX/VMS, V4.4 or later

©Copyright 1985, Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York.
Permission is granted to any individual or institution to use, copy, or redistribute this software so long as it is not sold for profit, provided this copyright
notice is retained.
3.123

Software

Additional Software Products

Table 3.90
VAXPAC
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

License Options: (A license is
required for each CPU.)

MicroVAX
2000

VAXstation
2000

Single-use license

QZZBl-UZ

Q3ZB1-UZ

Q8ZB1-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QZZB1-H3
QZZB1-H5

Q3ZB1-H3
Q3ZB1-H5

Q8ZB1-H3
Q8ZB1-H5

MicroVAX

Materials and Service Options:

Software revision right-to-copy

QZZBl-HZ

Q3ZB1-HZ

Q8ZB1-HZ

Documentation only

QLZBl-GZ

Installation service

QZZBl-13
QZZBl-!5

Q3ZB1-!3
Q3ZB1-!5

Q8ZB1-!3
Q8ZB1-!5

DECsupport service

QZZBl-93
QZZBl-95

Q3ZB1-93
Q3ZB1-95

Q8ZB1-93
Q8ZB1-95

Basic service

QZZBl-83
QZZBl-85

Q3ZB1-83
Q3ZB1-85

Q8ZB1-83
Q8ZB1-85

Self-maintenance service

QZZBl-33
QZZBl-35

Q3ZB1-33
Q3ZB1-35

Q8ZB1-33
Q8ZB1-35

U.S. Software Product
Service Agreements:

3.124

Software

Additional Software Products

WPS-PLUS/PC

WPS-PLUS/Pc is a document processing software system that provides Gold key
style word processing for users of IBM PCs and IBM Pc/xTs running IBM's PC-DOS
Version 2.10, 3.0 or 3.10.

Features

WPS-PLUS/PC allows PC-DOS users to:
• Create, edit, and print documents, as well as retrieve documents by document
name, number, or keyword
• Produce form letters and maintain mailing lists
• Convert a WPS-PLUS document to and from a DX file format and ASCII
file format
• Communicate through user developed scripts
• Create and modify printer attribute and character print tables
• Transfer documents with Digital hosts running WPS-PLUS/VMS or
WPS-PLUS/ALL-IN-1
• Include technical characters and scientific equations in a document
• Run WPS-PLUS/VMS on the VAX in VTlOO emulation mode which also supports
the Digital Multinational and Technical Character Sets
• Include diagrams, matrixes and VT100 character set equations, and composite
and multinational characters in a document
• Transfer documents between the IBM PC and IBM PC/XT and any Digital host
running the poly-XFR"' for PC-Dos/IBM Personal Computers Communications
package, where the host does not have WPS-PLUS/VMS or WPS-PLUS/ALL-IN-1.

Required Hardware

Any valid IBM PC or IBM Pc/xT personal computer configuration with:
• At least 384 KB of memory
•A minimum of two 51/4 inch, 362 KB floppy drives; or one 51/4 inch, 362 KB
floppy drive and a hard disk .
• IBM PC/XT keyboard

Prerequisite Software

PC-DOS Operating System, Versions 2.10, 3.0 or 3.10

Table 3.91
WPS-PLUS/PC Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-use license, binaries,
documentation, warranty
Quantities 1-9

QBA72-AI

Quantities 10-24

QBA73-AI

Quantities 25-99

QBA74-AI

Quantities 100 plus

QBA75-AI

Installation Service Option

QBA72-II

Basic Service Option

QBA72-8I

Single Product Update Service
Option

QBA72-3I

3.125

Software

Additional Software Products

Software Development Tools

Digital's Software Development Tools facilitate the development oflayered
telecommunications protocols for Digital's family of direct memory access
(DMA) intelligent communications processors.
The development tools are especially useful to OEMS and end users who write
their own communications packages. Well-defined programming standards and
methodology help reduce project development costs.
Digital-supplied firmware routines build an executive that acts as the communication processor's operating system. With the development tools, system
programmers can easily implement private protocols for custom networking
applications.
Digital offers Development Tools for the following intelligent communications processors:
• KMVlA-M Direct Memory Access Intelligent Communications Processor
• KCT32 Direct Memory Access Intelligent Communications Processor

Features

• Facilitates custom network applications.
• Extensive documentation.
• Reduced development costs.
• Linker and loader.
• Single-step, start, stop, and breakpoint program debugger.

Table 3.92
Software Development Tools
Order Codes

Option

Order Code
~~~~~~~~~~~~

VMS
KCT32 development tools*

Q*128

RSX-11S, RSX-11M,
RSX-11M PLUS
KMVlA-M development tools

QJS98

MicroVMS
KMV1A-M development tools*

QZZ36-xx

KMV1A-M Micro VMS driver

QZZ35-xx

*vAx-11 RSX (Q*382) is required for VMS and MicroVMS development .

. 3.126

Software

Additional Software Products

HDLC Framing Software

Digital offers HDLC framing software for the KMSll-BD/BE and the KMV1A-M.
These software packages provide a basic HDLC frame. They do not provide
the addressing and sequencing that must be supplied by the user for some
applications. The framing software packages are particularly useful in multivendor environments and in applications requiring proprietary protocols.
The KMS11-BD/BE Framing Software can also be configured for Bisync
(Bsc) Framing.

Table 3. 93
HDLC/BSC Framing

Option

SoJiware Order Codes

VMS
KMS11-BD HDLC/BSC framing software

Order Code

Q*920

RSX-HS, RSX-HM
KMV1A-M HDLC framing software

QJS32

RSX-HM PLUS
KMVlA-M HDLC framing software

X.25 Link Level Software

Table 3.94
X.25 Link Level
Software Order Codes

QJS39

Digital offers x.25 Link Level software for the KMS11-BD/BE, KMS1P-M, and the
KMVl A-M. These packages provide point-to-point communication between
host processors, making them particularly useful in a multi-vendor environment. These packages operate in full-duplex mode, and implement the CCITT
1980 recommendations for x.25 LAPB Link Level Protocol.

Option

Order Code

VMS
KMSll-BD/BE

Q*757

MicroVMS
KMV1A-M MicroVMS driver

QZZ35

KMV1 A-M Micro VMS X. 25 link level

QZZ37

RSX-HS, RSX-HM
KMSll-BD/BE, KMS1P-M

QJ757

KMVlA-M

QJS97

RSX-HM-PLUS
KMSll-BD/BE, KMSlP-M

QJ770

KMVlA-M

QJS97

3.127

Software

Section 4
Communications Hardware
Products
Overview

Communications hardware is used in both Digital-to-Digital and Digital-tonon-Digital environments to transmit data between computers or from terminals to computers. Different transmission methods, or protocols, are used for
asynchronous connections than for synchronous connections.
Asynchronous transmission, a character-oriented protocol, is primarily used in
terminal-to-host communications. Asynchronous transmission is uniquely
suited to the low-speed, intermittent data transmission from terminals to hosts.
Synchronous transmission, on the other hand, is a more efficient block-oriented
protocol that transmits an entire block of characters at one time. Synchronous
transmission is used primarily for high-speed communications between computers. Note that although Digital's terminal-to-computer connections are
asynchronous, IBM and many other vendors use synchronous terminal-tocomputer interconnects.
When data is sent across most telephone lines, the digital signals of computers
must be translated into the analog signals used with telephone equipment. This
is accomplished through modems. Computer devices are connected to modems
through standard interfaces. EIA RS-232-c/ CC ITT v. 28, EIA RS-422/ CC ITT V.11,
EIA RS-423/CCITT v.10, and CCITT v.35 are examples of such interface standards.
All Digital communications interfaces that include an industry standard interface can be used to connect Digital systems to a Private Branch Exchange
(PBX) via a modem.
A network is a flexible configuration of interconnected terminals, computers,
and other intelligent devices (nodes). Nodes can be either close together (local)
or far apart (remote). Some devices, because of their high speed, operate only
in a local area. Since low-speed devices can be connected across phone lines,
they can be used in remote applications as well as locally.
This section includes product descriptions, configuring and ordering
information for Digital's asynchronous, synchronous, and asynchronous/
synchronous hardware communications products, modems, statistical multiplexers, and matrix switches. For information on Digital's Ethernet hardware
and software products, refer to Section 2.

4.1

Hardware

Communications Option Ordering Information

Communications Option
Ordering Information

Options are available for use with both the old style unshielded cabinets and
with the new style shielded cabinets designed to reduce potential EMI/RFI
emissions. The following subsection explains how to order communications
options.

Options and Cabinet Kits

To order a communications device, order both the base option module and the
specific cabinet kit required to install the module on your system. A cabinet kit
includes the appropriate cabling, filter assembly, and any bracket hardware
required to install the option in a specific cabinet or enclosure. Several cabinet
kits are available for each option because various length internal cables and
various mounting brackets are required for different system cabinets.
UNIBUS communications options can be mounted in Digital's older, nonshielded cabinets by ordering a cabinet kit that includes an adapter bracket.
To determine whether a cabinet is shielded or not, examine the back of it. A
shielded cabinet will have metal panels with 1/0 connection panel inserts or
blank metal plates mounted in the spaces between the panels. An unshielded
cabinet may have other devices mounted in the back. However, the CPU box and
disk enclosures will be visible from the back of an unshielded cabinet.
Example: If a 16-line multiplexer option for a VAX 11/780 system is needed, order
the following option and cabinet kit-DHUll-M (base option) and a CK-DHUllAD (cabinet kit to install a DHUll on a VAX 11/780 system). Figure 4.1, Table 4.1,
and Table 4.2 explain the hardware order code designations.

Figure 4.1
Parts ofa Cabinet Kit
Order Code

DHUll

Cab K i t - - - - - - - - - - - - Device Name----------------~
Interface Type---------------------~
Cabinet Field-----------------------~

Table 4.1
Interface Type Designations
for Cabinet Kits

Char

Electrical Mechanical Interface

RS232 (with full modem control)

V.35

Integral modem

RS232 (with limited modem control)

RS422/449

RS423/449

20Ma.

Fiber optic

Ethernet

Multifunction device
(see Device User's Guide for detailed description)

M,N

Base options designations

CCITT V.11

CCITT X.21

50 pin multi-interface support,
(see Device User's Guide for detailed description)

1->9

Multiple interface types in a single option, for example;
half synchronous and half asynchronous

4.2

Hardware

Communications Option Ordering Information

Table 4.2
Cabinet Field Designations
for Cabinet Kits

Char

Shielded Cabinets

Cable

BA123 box

21 inches

BA23 box

12 inches

11 /23 + system

30 inches

PDP-11, DEC-20, vAx-11/750 expanded cabinet,
vAx-11/780 systems

10 feet

PDP-11/84, VAX-11/730 systems, VAX-11/750 kernal

7 feet

VAX-11/725, 5 panel, PDP-11/84 box, MicroPDP-11/83
cab, MicroVAX n cab
3 feet
DMB32 (8500, 8800)

5 feet

VAX-11/725, 2 panel,

4 feet

DEUNA and DMB32 (VAX 8200/8300 systems)

8 feet
15 feet

DMB32 (8800 expansion cabinet)

All VAX system expanded cabinets for DMZ32 only 10 feet

Char

Non-Shielded Cabinets
10 1 Cable/Mount in H9544-SJ or 74-27292-01 (Depends on option)

10 1 Cable

25 1 Cable

Options for Europe

u.s. and European options are now ordered using the same order codes.

Cables for U.S. and Europe

Table 4.42 contains all the order codes for external cables required by the
communications devices in this section. When ordering cables, be sure to
specify the length (-xx), for example, BC22D-25.

4.3

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.3 summarizes the features ofDigital's currently available asynchronous
communications hardware products.

Asynchronous
Communications Controllers
Table 4.3
Asynchronous Communications
Controllers
DLVJ1

DZQ11

DHQ11

KCT32

KMV1A

CXA16

Q-bus

UNIBUS

Q-bus

See footnotes

,Bus

YES

38.4 Kb/s

2 lines@64
Kb/s, ! line@
160 Kb/s

64 Kb/s

38.4 Kb/s

DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-VAX,
DECnetMicro/RSX,
ULTRIX-32m

DECnet-VAX
DECnet-RSX
DECnetMicro/RSX
Micro Power/
Pascal

VAX-11 KCT 32 RSX-11MPLUS Software
Tools,
Micro VMS
Software Tools,
Micro/RSX
Software Tools

DECnet11M-PLUS,
DECnetMicro/RSX,
DECnet-VAX

RSXllM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX,
Micro VMS,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-32m
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

Micro VMS,
RSXllM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX,
ULTRIX-32m,
RSTS/E
VAXELN

VMS

RSX-11M,
RSXUM-PLUS,
RSX-llS, Micro
VMS,
Micro/RSX

RSXllM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX,
VMS

Number
of lines

DMA'

Maximum
speed5
(consult SPD)

1 line@38.4
Kb/s 4 , 2 lines@
19.2 Kb/s, 4
lines@ 9.6
Kb/s 4

9.6 Kb/s

Software
support

DECnet-RT,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnetMicro/RSX

Operating
RSXsystem support llM-PLUS

CXB16

------

Multi CPU
access 2

Modem
control'

LIMITED

FULL

Primary
buying
reason

Lowest Price;
FDX

Dual height
module with
limited modem
control; FDX

High performancc;low
power consumption; dual
height module
with full modem c011trol

Low cost for
custom applica-

High performance for bit
stuff protocols

DEC 423 asynchronous communications
(data only)

RS422 asynchronous communications
(data only)

-------

4.4

Hardware

tions; user

programmable
(sync or async)
interface on
VAX systems

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.3
Asynchronous Communications
Controllers (Continued)
CXYOS

DMZ32

DHU11

DMB32

DMF32

DN25

DC20F

Bus

See footnote 8

UNIBUS"

UNIBUS

VAX BI

UNIBUS"

UNIBUS

Number
oflines

DMA'

YES

Maximum
speed 5
(consult SPD)

38.4 Kb/s

19.2 Kb/s 7

38.4 Kb/s 4

38.4 Kb/s

19.2 Kb/s

9.6 Kb/s

Software
support

DECnetHM-PLUS,
DECnetMicro/RSX
DECnet-VAX

DECnet-VAX

Tops-10/
Tops-20

Operating
RSXsystem support HM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX,
VMS

VMS,
ULTRIX-32

VMS,
RSX-HM,
RSXHM-PLUS,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-32m,
RSTS/E

VMS

Tops-10

Multi CPU
access 2

YES

Modem
control 3

FULL

FULL
(Optional)

FULL

FULL (2 lines)
NONE (6 lines)

LIMITED
(Depends on the
version.)

FULL

Primary
buying
reason

RS232 asynchronous com-

OMA Performance with full
modem control;
remote distribution panel

DMA Performance with full
modem control;
lowest price per
line

Interface to
VAXBI systems;
1 synchronous
line; 1 printer
port

OMA Performance;
1 synchronous
line; 1 lineprinter port

Interface to
DECsystem-10s
and DECSYSTEM-20s

Interface to
DECsystem-lOs
and DECSYSTEM-20s

munications;

full modem
control

DMA (Direct Memory Access) is the ability to move multi-character messages between a communication line and CPU memory without interrupting
the CPU. This capability yields higher performance.

2 MulticPu Access refers to the ability to send a message directly to two or more CPU without routing the message through another CPU.
3 Modem Control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functionality on u. s. and European modems. Full modem control

includes nine to eleven signals. Limited modem control is five signals and no modem control means only send and receive signals are present
for each line.
4 Supports connectivity @ 38.4 Kbits. Actual line speed is dependent on current DEC operating system limitations and system configuration.
5 Actual device speed and throughput is dependent on current DEC operating system limitations, system configurations, and applications in use.
6

VAX systems only.

7 Limited to 4.8 Kbs when connected to non-Digital switches.
8 For use on IPDP and IVAX computers only.

4.5

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

UNIBUS Asynchronous Devices
The DHU11 is a 16-line asynchronous communications controller with direct
memory access (DMA) that provides local and remote interconnection between
UNIBUS PDP-11 and VAX systems and EIA-RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA-RS-423-A/
CCITT v.10 terminals, modems, serial printers, and data switches. The DHU11
supports operating speeds up to 38.4 Kbps. Actual communications speed and
throughput is dependent on current DEC operating systems and system configuration. Full modem control is available on all 16 lines.

Features

• Sixteen asynchronous communications lines from a hex size board
• Line speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s (application dependent)
• DMA output optimizes communications throughput compared to character
interrupt devices
• Full modem control on all lines supports full and half duplex, point-to-point
modems
• Automatic xoN/XOFF flow control allows the management of data flow in either
direction on a per line basis without program intervention
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per line basis
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics provides testing of
DHU11 circuitry at each power-on or reset
• RS232-C and RS423-A compatibility

Software Support

The DHU11 is supported by VMS, UITRIX-32, RSX-11M, RSX-11M PLUS, RSTS/E, and
ULTRIX-11.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at + 5V: 6.0
DC atnps drawn at + 15V: 0.4
DC amps.drawn at -15V: 0.4
Bus Loads: AC 2.2, DC 1.0
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts: 8 panel units

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.4
DHU11
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

EIA RS-232-c/CCITT V.28 and EIA RS-423-A/CCITT v.10
interface witli full modem control and DMA. Includes base
module only.

DHU11-M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits:
EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 and EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10
cabinet kit.
For general purpose expander cab utilized with the
vAx-11/780, PDP-11/24, PDP-11/44, plus the expander cab for
the VAX-11/750.

CK-DHU11-AD

For kernel cab ofvAx-11/750, and PDP-11/84.

CK-DHU11-AE

For use with PDP-11/84 rackmount variations.

CK-DHU11-AF

For use with unshielded cabinet models.
Adapter bracket included.

CK-DHU11-A1

4.6

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

DMZ32

The DMZ32 is a 24-line asynchronous terminal interface for UNIBUS VAX computers running VMS or ULTRIX-32 operating system. It provides RS232-c compatibility and offers Direct Memory Access (DMA) output on all lines to optimize
terminal to CPU 1/0 performance. The DMZ32 operates at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s
and features a distribution panel that can be located locally or remotely.
The DMZ32 distribution panel can be located locally or remotely up to 5000 feet
from the VAX computer system. Terminals can be located where needed, up to
5000 feet from the VAX computer, without affecting the RS232-c specified
speed/ chstance limitations.
In the local configuration, the DMZ32 can be mounted in the H9642-Fc/Fo and
H9652-MF/MH UNIBUS expander cabinets or any existing 19-inch cabinet. The
H9642-Fc!Fo can support one DMZ32 panel. The H9652-MF/MH can support one
DMZ32 panel with two BA11-K boxes installed, and two panels with one BA11-K
box installed.
In remote configurations, the distribution panel can be mounted in any standard
19-inch cabinet or the H9646 communications cabinet. This reduces the requirements for costly UNIBUS expander cabinets because the DMZ32 distribution panel
has a self-contained power supply and fan assembly. (The distribution panel
plugs into a standard 12ov electrical outlet.)
A single high performance twisted pair Tl cable connects the DMZ32 interface
module to the remote distribution panel. The remote distribution panel then
connects separate RS232 data cables to the individual VTl00/200 or compatible
terminals.

Cabinet Kits

The DMZ32 can be purchased with or without modem control by selecting the
appropriate cabinet kit. The cabinet kit includes 15 feet of Tl cable with optional
1000 foot lengths available. Refer to the DMZ32 Ordering Code Table for
information.

Features

• Twenty-four asynchronous communication lines from a hex size board.
• Line Speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (application dependent).
• Automatic xoN/XOFF flow control allows the management of data flow in either
direction on a per line basis without program interruption.
• Full modem control with full and half-duplex communications available on all
lines with the CK-DMZ32-AY cabinet kit.
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per line basis optimizes CPU performance by
reducing software demand on input.
• Software programmable line parameters such as speed and character length.
• Remote distribution panel lets you locate terminals up to 5000 feet from the
computer system.
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics provides complete
checkout of the DMZ32 circuits on each power-on or reset.

4. 7 Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

The following diagram illustrates a DMZ32 configuration where terminals,
personal computers, modems, and serial printers are connected to a local
UNIBUS VAX computer system:

Figure 4.2
DMZ32

Typical Configuration

Office Area

Office Area
Computer Room
Modern

RS232 Data Cable~sA.l!i!il!lliil~

Tl Cable Link

,,---..,.----.

1-------,<!lll DMZ32 DMZ32 r - - - - - - <

24
Remote
Distribution
Panel

Unibus VAX

Up to 5000 Feet

Specifications

.
24

Remote

Distribution
Panel

Printer

Up to 5000 Feet

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
Module
oc amps drawn at + 5V: 9.0 A
DC amps drawn at + 15V: 0.1 A
Distribution Panel
1. lA at 120 VAC
0.6A at 220-240 VAC
Bus Loads: AC 6.0, DC 1.5
r/o Distribution Panel Insert:
8 panel units (when mounted in the cabinet mentioned above)
1 additional panel unit for bulkhead cable connector
1 panel unit (if remote, for bulkhead cable connector)

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.5
DMZ32

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

24-line DMA terminal interface

DMZ32-M

Cabinet Kits: Include 15 feet ofn cable and the remote
distribution panel containing 24 DB25-pin connectors.
Cabinet Kit with modem control

CK-DMZ32-AY

Cabinet Kit without modem control

CK-DMZ32-DY

Modem control upgrade for CK-DMZ32-DY cabinet kit

DMZ32-N

1000 ft PVC Tl cable

BC18L-LO

1000 ft Teflon Tl cable

BC18M-LO

4.8

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

Q-bus Asynchronous
Communications Controllers
DLVJ1

The DLVJ1 is a four-line asynchronous communications controller that provides
local or remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and EIA RS-232'-C/ CCITT
V.28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V.11, and EIA RS-423/CCITT V.10 terminals and modems.
The DLVJ1 acts as four separate devices, making program operations more
convenient than with a multiplexer. The DLVJ1 operates at program or jumperselectable speeds from 150 to 38,400 bits per second at full-duplex (1 line at 38.4
Kb/s, 2 lines at 19.2 Kb/s, or 4 lines at 9.6 Kb/s). Limited modem control is
included. Split-speed transmit and receive rates are supported on each line
making more efficient use of communications facilities by reducing the software
demand for the receive line.
The DLVJ1 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 100 and
200 series modems and their equivalents.

Features

• Four asynchronous communications lines from a dual size board.
• Single line speed up to 38.4 Kb/s, two lines at 19.2 Kb/s each, or four lines at 9.6
Kb/s each.
• Limited modem control on all lines supports full duplex, point-to-point
modems.
• Character interrupt input/output.
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per line basis .
• RS232-C, RS422-A and RS423-A compatible.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 double slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 1.25
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.25
Bus Loads: AC 1, DC 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: Size B

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.6
DLVJ1

Order Codes

Options

Order Code

EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 interface. Includes base module only.

DLVJ1-M

For system installation select external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits:
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX 11) and BA11-MA(MB)
(PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DLVJ1-LA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11, MicroVAX).

CK-DLVJ1-LB

For use with Dual cab (PDP-11/83, MicroVAX 11)

CK-DLVJ1-LF

EIA RS-442/CCITT v.11 interface. Includes base module only.

DLVJ1-M

For system installation select external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits:
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX 11) and BA11-MA(MB)
(PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DLVJ1-EA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11)

CK-DLVJ1-EB

For use with Dual cab (PDP-11/83, MicroVAX 11)

CK-DLVJ1-EF

4.9 Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

DHQ11

The DHQll is a Q-bus communications controller that supplies eight asynchronous communications lines on a dual size module. The DHQll operates in either
Direct Memory Access (DMA) or programmed-output mode.
The DHQll provides RS232-c or DEC423 (Rs232/RS423) signalling to externally
connected terminal devices through a choice of distribution panels, referred
to as cabinet kits. RS232 cabinet kits supply eight 25-pin connectors to support
full modem control; DEC423 (a superset ofRS423) cabinet kits supply eight
DECconnect modular plug connectors, without modem control for local
terminal connections.
The DHQll is the logical choice for connecting local terminals, modems, and
serial printers to MicroVAX II and MicroPDP-11 computer systems.

Features

• High throughput on all eight asynchronous communications lines allows
transmission at selectable speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s per line, full duplex, (operating
system and user application dependent) for a total throughput of 60,000 char/
second (10 bit characters: 8 data, 1 stop, no parity). This throughput is ideal for
graphics and videotext applications.
• Compact, dual-size module leaves more backplane space available for additional
communications devices.
• Low power consumption with RS232 cabinet kit requires only 1.4 Amps from
the CPU +5V power supply; DEC423 cabinet kit requires only 2.0 Amps. This
leaves more power available for connecting additional peripheral devices to
the backplane.
• Receive FIFO buffer of256 characters is shared by the eight lines. This ensures
top system performance during periods of data intensive input.
• DMA or programmed-output 64-character FIFO transmit buffer optimizes 1/0
performance by transmitting data from memory to communications channel
with minimum CPU interruptions.
• Automatic XON/XOFF flow control manages data flow in either direction on a
per line basis without program intervention.
• Modem control with RS232 cabinet kit provides full modem control for full and
half duplex, point-to-point communications.
• DEC423 cabinet kit with Electrical Overstress/Electrostatic Discharge (Eos/EsD)
supports local RS232-compatible terminals at 9.6 Kb/s. The terminals may be
placed up to 200 feet from the CPU with the H8571-A passive adapter, and up to
1000 feet from the CPU with the H3105-A active and H8571-A passive adapters.
(Refer to Figure 4.3 and to Section 5, DEC423/RS423 Signalling with EOS/ESD
Protection for more information.)
• On-board self-test executes an extensive test ofDHQll circuitry at each powerup or device reset. Also, a background monitor program continually tests the
DHQll when it is not engaged in other tasks.

Figure 4.3
DHQ11 Configuration with
DEC423 Cabinet Kit

BC16E

6 Conductor
Office Cable
Bulkhead
BC16C-25
36 Conductor Cable* Converter*
DHQ11

Compact Remote
Cable Concentrator*

Micro
VAX II

*Items contained in DHQ11 DEC423 cabinet kit

4.10

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

CPU and Software Support

The DHQ11 is supported by the MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11/23, MicroPDP-11/53,
MicroPDP-11/73, and MicroPDP-11/83.
The DHQ11 is supported by the following operating systems: RSX, MicroRSX,
RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS, MicroVMS, ULTRIX-32m, and VAXELN. It is also supported
by MicroPower/Pascal.

Specifications

Mounting code: One dual slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at + 5V: 1.4 with RS232 cabinet kit
2.0 with DEC423 cabinet kit
DC amps drawn at + 12V: 0.23
Bus Loads: AC 3.2, DC 0.5
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts: 2 Size B (Rs232)

1 Size B (DEC423)
Environmental Class: Class c (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4. 7
DHQ11

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Asynchronous Q-bus communications controller. Includes
base module only.

DHQ11-M

Cabinet Kits for RS232 Connection: contain two B-size slot
bulkhead distribution panels with 25-pin male connectors
and associated cabling to connect the module to the distribution panels. Data cables are not included.
21" cable for BA123 box

CK-DHQ11-AA

12 cable for BA23 box

CK-DHQ11-AB

36 cable for H9642 cab

CK-DHQ11-AF

Cabinet Kits for DEC423 Connection: contain one B-size slot
bulkhead distribution panel with a 36-conductor cable,
compact remote terminal concentrator and associated cabling
to connect the control module to the distribution panel. Data
cables are not included.
21 11 cable for BA123 box

CK-DHQ11-WA

12" cable for BA23 box

CK-DHQ11-WB

36 cable for H9642 cab

CK-DHQ11-WF

4.11

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

DZQ11

The DZQ11 is a four-line asynchronous communications controller that provides
local or remote interconnection between PDP-11 and VAX Q-bus systems and EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 and EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10 terminals, modems, or other
systems. The DZQ11 operates at program-selectable speeds up to 9,600 bits per
second at full-duplex with limited modem control on each line.
Note: DZQ11 is the replacement product for DZV11.
The DZQ11 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 100 and
200 series modems and their equivalents.

Features

• Four asynchronous communication lines from a dual size module
• Line speeds up to 9.6 Kb/s
• Limited modem control on all lines supports full duplex, point-to-point,
modems
• Character interrupt input/output
• RS232-c and RS423-A compatible

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 dual slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5V: 1.0
DC amps drawn at +12V: 0.36
Bus Loads: AC 1.4, DC 0.5
1/0 Conneetion Panel Insert: Size B

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.8
DZQ11

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DZQ11-M

For system installation select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DZQ11-DA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11, MicroVAX).

CK-DZQ11-DB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DZQ11-DF

For use with CPUs that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 ft. cable that connects the DZQ11-M module
to eight RS232 or RS423 devices.

CK-DZQ11-D3

4.12 Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

CX Communications Controllers

The ex communications controllers provide asynchronous communications for
the Industrial VAX (1vAx) and Industrial PDP (IPDP) computers that utilize the
BA200 series system enclosures. The controllers operate at speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s
per line, and transmit data using either Direct Memory Access (DMA) or
programmed output.
Three ex communications controllers are available: the exY08, exA16,
and exB16.

CXY08

The exY08 provides eight RS232-e communications lines to terminals, modems,
or serial printers. All lines support full modem control, which permits pointto-point dial-up or leased-line operation.

CXA16

The exA16 provides 16 DEe423 lines for data-only connections (no modem
control) using the DEeconnect modular plug connectors.
DEe423, a superset ofRS423, supports local RS232 terminal-to-host communications at 9.6 Kb/sup to distances of200 feet with the H8571-A passive adapter.
RS232 terminals that utilize the H8571-A and H3105-A active adapters can take
advantage ofnEe423 Electrical Overstress and Electrostatic Discharge (Eos/Esn)
protection, as well as increased distances of up to 1000 feet at 9.6 Kb/s.
VT300 series terminals provide integral DEe423 compatibility, which allows
connection to the exA16 at operating distances of1000 feet at 9.6 Kb/s, without
the need of a passive or active adapter.

CXB16

The exB16 provides 16 RS422 communications lines for data-only connections
(no modem control).
The RS422 standard offers a high immunity to line noise, important in harsh
factory, industrial, and military applications. It allows for line lengths of up to
4,000 feet at all supported line speeds. (The exB16 is used only with RS422compatible terminal equipment; connection to standard VTl00/200/300 series
terminals is not supported.)

Features

•High throughput allows transmissions at selectable speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s per
line (operating system and user application dependent). exY08 total throughput
is 50,000 char/sec; exA16 and exB16 total throughput is 100,000 char/sec (10-bit
characters: 8 data, 1 stop, no parity).
• Automatic xoN/xoFF flow control manages receive and transmit data flow on a
per-line basis without program intervention.
• 256-Character receive FIFO buffer ensures top system performance during
periods of data intensive input.
• Comprehensive self-test using on-board sequencer performs an extensive test at
each system or device reset.
• No cabinet kit is necessary because the bulkhead distribution panel is integral to
the ex module handle. Physical connections from the module to the external
equipment are supplied by a 25-foot extension cable that connects to a compact
remote cable concentrator, which provides eight DEeconnect modular jack
connectors. The exA16 and exB16 include two extension cables and two
concentrators; the exY08 includes one extension cable and one concentrator.

4.13

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

Features
(Continued)

• EOS/ESD protection with on-board EOS/ESD circuitry significantly reduces the
chance that computer equipment will be damaged by static discharge, lightning, or AC power impulses.
• DMA or programmed output with CXA16 or CXB16 allows the software device
driver to dynamically select appropriate transmit mode, either DMA or 64character FIFO output, depending on user application. This helps to optimize I/o
system performance.
• Full modem control with CXY08 permits point-to-point dial-up or leased line
modem operation on all eight lines.

Software Support

The ex options are supported by the following operating systems: RSX-llMPLUS V3.0, Micro/RSX V3.1 and VMS V4.6.

Specifications

Specification

CXY08

CXA16

CXB16

Number of lines
Electrical Interface Standards
Direct Memory Access
Modem control
Mounting space
Asynchronous Formats

RS232-C

DEC423

RS422

Yes
Full
Quad slot

Yes
Yes
No
No
Quad slot
Quad slot
5-, 6-, 7- or 8-bit characters
Odd, even, or no parity
1, 1. 5, or 2 stop bits

Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +sV
DC amps drawn at +12V
DC loads

1.5

1.4

1.6

0.22

0.0

0.5

AC loads

3.0

Table 4.9

ex Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Order the following with the purchase of an IVAX or !PDP
system:
8-line RS232-c asynchronous controller with modem control
for IVAX and IPDP systems

CXY08-AA

16-line DEC423 asynchronous controller (data only) for IVAX
and IPDP systems

CXA16-AA

16-line RS422 asynchronous controller (data only) for IVAX
and IPDP systems

CXB16-AA

Order the following as add-ons to previously shipped IVAX
or IPDP systems:
Add-on 8-line RS232-c asynchronous controller with m:odem
control for IVAX and IPDP systems

CXY08-AF

Add-on 16-line DEC423 asynchronous controller (data only)
for IVAX and IPDP systems

CXA16-AF

Add-on 16-line RS422 asynchronous controller (data only) for
IVAX and IPDP systems

CXB16-AF

4.14

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

TOPS-10/TOPS-20
Asynchronous
Communications Controllers
DC20/DC20F

The DC20/DC20F is an 8- to 16-line asynchronous communications controller
(DH11) that provides interconnection between DECSYSTEM-20s (2040, 2060),
mcsystem-10s (1090, 1091, 1095), and other computer systems with EIA RS-232-c/
CCITT v.28 interfaces. The vc20/oc2of operates at speeds up to 9,600 bits per
second in DMA mode with full modem control.
For more detailed u.s. information, please refer to the LSM Product Summary.

Table 4.10
DC20/DC20F
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Basic 8-line asynchronous interface (DH11-AD) expandable to
16 lines with the addition of the DC20-DA.

DC20-AA

8-line asynchronous expansion interface (a maximum of one
DC20-DA per DC20-AA).
Prerequisite: DC20-AA.

DC20-DA

Distribution cabinet (required for configuration between
32 and 128 lines).
Prerequisite: DC20-AA, DECSYSTEM-20.

DC20-CC

Distribution cabinet (required for configuration between
32 and 128 lines.)
Prerequisite: DC20-AA, DEcsystem-10.

DC20-CD

Communications expansion cabinet for over 32 lines
which includes one DC20-AA (can accommodate up to
three additional DC20-AAs).
Prerequisite: DC20-CD, DEcsystem-1091.

DC20-EB

Communications expansion cabinet for over 32 lines
which includes one DC20-AA (can accommodate up to
three additional DC20-AAs).
Prerequisite: DC20-CC, DECSYSTEM-20.

DC20-ED

FCC compliant basic 16-line asynchronous interface.

DC20F-AD

FCC compliant communications expansion cabinet for over
32 lines which includes one DC20F-AD. Expandable with
up to five additional DC20F-ADs.
Prerequisite: DEcsystem-1091.

DC20F-EA

FCC compliant communications expansion cabinet for over
32 lines which includes one DC20F-AD (can accommodate
up to five additional DC20F-ADS).
Prerequisite: DECSYSTEM-20.

DC20F-EC

4.15

Hardware

Asynchronous Communications Controllers

DN25

The DN25 is ans-line asynchronous communications controller (nz11) that
provides interconnection between DEcsystem-10s and EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28.
The DN25 operates at speeds up to 9,600 bits per second in DMA mode with
limited modem control (depends on the version).
For more detailed u.s. information, please refer to the LSM Product Summary.

Table 4.11
DN25
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

8-line asynchronous line multiplexer and controller
(expandable to 16 lines with the addition of a DN25-BA)
for DECsystem-10s.
Prerequisite: DN25-AB, DN200.

DN25-AA

8-line asynchronous multiplexer with distribution panel
(expandable to 16 lines with the addition of a DN25,.-BA)
for DECsystem-10s.
Prerequisite: DN25-A/D/E.

DN25-AB

s".'line asynchronous expansion multiplexer for DECsystem-lOs.

Prerequisite: DN25-A/D/E.

DN25-BA

Asynchronous expansion drawer including one 8-line
multiplexer (expandable to 16 lines with the addition of
a DN25-BA) for DEcsystem-10s.
Prerequisite: DN25-E.

DN25-DA
DN25-DB

Asynchro~ous expansion cabinet and first drawer including
one 8-line multiplexer for DECsystem-10s.
Prerequisite: DN20-Mc(MD).

DN25-EC
DN25-ED

4.16 Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Synchronous
Communications Controllers

The following table summarizes the features ofDigital's currently available synchronous communications hardware products. For information about Ethernet
Communications Controllers, refer to Section 2.
NOTE: These products do not support the use of internal clocking.

4.17

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.12
Synchronous Communications
Controllers

Bus

DPV11

DMV11

KMV1A

DMB32

DMF32

KCT32

Q-bus

VAXBI

UNIBUS

DMA 1

Number of lines
NO

YES

Maximum
speed
(consult SPD)

56 Kb/s
9.6 Kb/s
forIBM
Interconnect

56or19.2 Kb/s
(Depends on
the version.)

64 Kb/s
(19.2 Kb/s
with
VAX P.S.I.)

64 Kb/s
(HDLC, SDLC)
19.2 Kb/s
(DDCMP)
9.6 Kb/s (other)

19.2 Kb/s

2 lines@ 64
Kb/s, 1 line
@160 Kb/s

Software
support

DECnet-RT;
DECnet-RSX;
RSX P.S.l.;4
DECnetMicro/RSX
VAX P.S.l. 4
VMS/SN A

DECnet-RT;
DECnet-RSX;
DECnet/E;
DECnetMicro/RSX;
DECnet-VAX

HDLC
DECnet-VAX,
framing; X.25
DMB32
Link Level ProdSynchronous
ucts; Software
Device Driver
Tools; VAX P.S.1. 4 (prerequisite)
VAXP.S.1. 4

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.1. 4

VAXll
KCT32

Operating
system
support

Micro VMS;
RSX-11S;
RSX-11M;
RSX-llM-PLUS;
Micro/
RSX-11S;
Micro/
RSX-11M;
Micro/RSX11M-PLUS

RSX-11M;
Micro VMS

RSX-11S;
RSX-llM;
RSX-HM-PLUS;
Micro VMS;
Micro RSX

VMS

Multi CPU
access 2

YES

Modem
control 3

FULL

YES

FULL

Primary buying
reason

Low cost

DECnet
point-to-point
configurations
across phone lines

High performance for bit stuff
protocols

Interface to
VAXBI
systems;
8 asynchronous lines;
1 synchronous
line; 1 printer port

Low cost

Low cost for
custom appli-

2
--------

cations; user

programmable
(sync or async)
interface on
VAX systems

1 DMA (Direct Memory Access) is the ability to move multi-character messages between a communication line and CPU memory without interrupting

the CPU. This capability yields higher performance.
2 Multi-CPU Access refers to the ability to send a message directly to two or more CPUS without routing the message through another CPU.
3 Modem Control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functionality on u. s. and European modems. Full modem control

includes nine to eleven signals. Limited modem control is five signals and no modem control means only send and receive signals are present for
each line.

4.18

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.12
Synchronous Communications
Controllers (Continued)

Bus

DMR11

PCL11

KMS11

DUP11

KMS1P

DN20/DN21

UNIBUS

Number oflines

Parallel Bus

DMA'

YES

Maximum
speed
(consult SPD)

1 Mb/s

4lincs@
56 Kb/s;
8 lines at
19.2 Kb/s

9.6 Kb/s

64or19.2 Kb/s
(Depends on
the version.)

19.2 Kb/s/
1 Mb/s

Software
support

DECnet-RT;
DECnet-20;
DECnet-10;
DECnet/E;
DECnet-VAX;
DECnet-RSX;
DECnet-10;
DECnet-20

DECnet-RSX

VAXX.25
Link Level;
RSX X.25 Link
Level; VAX
HDLC/
BSC Framing;
VAX P.S.l. 4
RSX P.S.l. 4

IBM

VAX P.S.l.;4
RSXX.25
Link Level;
RSXP.S.l. 4

DECnet-20;
DECnet-10;
TOPS-20 P.S.I.
Gateway/
DECnet-20
DECnet-10

Operating
system support

VMS;
RSX-11M;
RSX-HM-PLUS;
RSX-HS;
RSTS/E
TOPS-10
TOPS-20

RSX-HM-PLUS

VMS;
RSX-HM;
RSX-HM-PLUS;
RSX-HS

RSX-HM;
RSX-11M-PLUS;
RSX-HS;
VMS (for
VAXP.S.I.)

VMS;
RSX-HM;
RSX-HM-PLUS

TOPS-10;
TOPS-20

MultiCPU
access 2

YES

Modem control 3

FULL

N/A

FULL

Primary buying
reason

DECnet interface
across phone lines

High performance; local interCPU bus

Multiple line
X.25 support;
high performance

Low cost; host
programmable
protocols

Single line X. 25
support; high
performance

Interface to
DECsystem-10s
and DECsystem-20s

1-4/1

lnternets~

RSX P.S.I.;
VAX P.S.l.;4
DECnet-RT;
DECnet-RSX

Can be integrated with DECnet. P.s.1. must be present.

5 rnM Internets include the following protocol emulators: VAX 2780/3780, VAX 3271, RSX-11 2780/3780, RSX-11 3271.

4.19 Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

UNIBUS Synchronous
Communications Controllers

DMR11

The DMR11 is a high performance microprocessor-controlled single-line
synchronous communications controller that provides local or remote
interconnection between PDP-11 and VAX UNIBUS systems and other computer
systems with EIA RS-232-c/CCITT V.28, CCITT V.35, EIA RS-423/RS-449, or EIA
RS-422/Rs-449 interfaces. The DMR11 implements DDCMP in hardware and
supports direct memory access data transfers, DECnet point-to-point configurations, and full modem control. It operates at speeds up to 1 Mb/sat half- or
full-duplex. The DMR11 can communicate with another DMR11, DMV11, or any
other synchronous interface that implements DDCMP Versions 3.1or4.0.
The DMRll is compatible, depending on the version selected, with Digital's
family of modems and with Bell 200 series and Bell sooa 11/s modems and
their equivalents.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 2 hex slots (all versions)
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +s V: 12.0 (all versions)
DC amps drawn at +ts V: 0.08 (DMR11-A, -c), 0.11 (DMR11-B, -E, -F)
DC amps drawn at -15 V: 0.19 (DMRll-A, -c), 0.20 (DMR11-B, -E, -F)
Bus Loads: AC 1 (all versions), DC 1 (all versions)
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts:
1 panel unit (DMR11-A, -B, -c, -E)
2 panel units (DMR11-F)

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

4.20

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.13
DMR11
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DMRll-M

For installation, select the appropriate external cable and one
of the following cabinet kits:
RS232-c cabinet kit.

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-AD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-AL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-A1

v.35 cabinet kit.

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-BD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-BL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMRll-Bl

Includes integral modem for local interconnection. This
option must be ordered with the system in which it is to be
installed. Supports switch-selectable speeds over the
following distances:
Frequency Distance (Max)

Cable

1 MB's
500 KB's
250 KB's
56 KB's

BC55S
BC55S
BC55S
BC55T

6,000 ft (1,830 m)
7,000 ft (2,135 m)
8,000 ft (2,440 m)
16,000 ft (4,800 m)

Integral modem cabinet kit.
For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-CD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-CL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMRll-Cl

RS422/RS449 cabinet kit.

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-ED

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-EL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMRll-El

RS423/Rs449 cabinet kit.

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-FD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-FL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-Fl

4.21

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

DUP11

The DUPll is a high performance single-line synchronous programmable
communications controller that provides remote interconnection between PDP11 and VAX UNIBUS systems and other computer systems with RS-232-c/ CCITT
v.28 interface. It operates at speeds up to 9,600 bits per second at half- or
full-duplex with full modem control. The DUP11 is programmable for either
byte-oriented protocols (DDCMP or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (SDLC or
HDLC). The DUP11 is suited for interfacing to a medium-speed synchronous line
for remote batch and remote job entry applications.
The DUP11 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with the Bell 200
series and their equivalents.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 3.6
DC amps drawn at +15 V: 0.08
DC amps drawn at -15 V: 0.08
Bus Loads: AC 1, oc 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.14
DUP11
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Includes only base module.

DUP11-M

For system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
For use with (PDP-11/24 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DUP11-AD

For use with (PDP-11/84) shielded cabinets.

CK-DUP11-AF

For use with unshielded cabinet models.
Adapter bracket included.

CK-DUP11-A1

4.22

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

KMS11

The KMS11 is an eight-line synchronous intelligent front-end that provides up to
eight lines ofinterconnection between UNIBUS PDP-11 and VAX systems and other
devices with EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 or CCITT v.35 (with optional hardware
module) interfaces. The KMS11 operates at speeds up to 56,000 bits per second
in half- or full-duplex with full modem control (v.35 is required for 56 Kbps).
The KMS11 supports direct memory access data transfers, x.25 Link Level, and
HDLC/nsc Framing Software.
Maximum line speed is dependent on the software application. The x.25 link
level software is currently warranted for four lines at 56,000 bits per second
(using v.35) or eight lines at 19,200 bits per second.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 2 sus (KMS11-BD), 3 hex slots (KMS11-BE)
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 12.5
DC amps drawn at +15V:1.5
DC amps drawn at -15 V: 0.5
Bus Loads: AC 7, DC 2
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts: 8 panel units

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.15
KMS11 Optional
Software Order Codes

Table 4.16
KMS11
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

VAX x.25 link level

Q*757

RSX-11M x.25 link level

QJ757

RSX-HM-PLUS X.25 link level

QJ770

VAX HDLC/BSC framing

Q*920

Option

Order Code

Eight-line communications multiplexer including a KMC11-B
auxiliary processor unit, line terminator, modem control unit,
1/0 connection panel, double system unit, and internal cables

KMSll-BD

Same as KMS11-BD without the double system unit

KMSll-BE

4.23 Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

KMS1P

The KMSlP is a one-line intelligent synchronous communications controller
that provides interconnection between PDP-11 and VAX UNIBUS systems with EIA
RS-232-c/ccITT V.28, EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10, CCITT V.35, or RS-422-A/CCITT V.11
interfaces. The microprocessor-based device operates at speeds up to 19.2K bis
(v.28 option) or 64K bis (v.35 option) in half- or full-duplex with full modem
control. The KMSlP supports direct memory access data transfers, the VAX P.S.I.
and RSX P.S.I. software packages, and RSX x.25 Link Level software.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 2 hex slots
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 10.5
DC amps drawn at +15 V: .15
DC amps drawn at -15 V: .20
Bus Loads: AC 5, DC 1
r/o Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit

Environmental Class: Class B (refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.17
KMS1P Optional

Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

VAX P.S.I.

Q*071-xx

RSX-11 P.S.I./M

QJD91-xx

RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS

QJD92-xx

RSX-UM X.25 link level

QJ757-xx

RSX-llM-PLUS X.25 link level

QJ770-xx

Table 4.18
KMS1P

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-line programmable synchronous intelligent
communications controller. Includes microprocessor and
line unit modules.

KMSIP-M

For system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits.
Cabinet kit.
X.25, EIA RS-232-c/CCITT V.28 interface

CK-KM SIP-AD

Unshielded cabinet kit.
X.25, EIA RS-232-c/CCITT V.28 interface

CK-KM SIP-Al

Cabinet kit.
X.25, CCITT V.35 interface

CK-KMSIP-BD

Unshielded cabinet kit.
X.25, CCITT V.35 interface

CK-KMSIP-Bl

Cabinet kit.
x. 25, EIA RS-422/ CCITT V.11 interface

CK-KMS1P-ED

Unshielded cabinet kit.
X.25, EJA RS-422/CCITT V.11 interface

CK-KMS1P-E1

Cabinet kit.
X.25, EIA RS-423/CCITT V.10 interface

CK-KMS1P-FD

Unshielded cabinet kit.
x.25, EIA RS-423/CCITT V.10 interface

CK-KMS1P-Fl

4.24 Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

PCL11

The PCL11 is a parallel communications link that provides multipoint interconnection of up to 16 processors in a local distributed network. The PCL11 operates
at speeds up to one mbyte per second using direct memory access at full duplex.
The speed depends on the bus length. Maximum bus length is 91 meters (300
feet). BC17U and BC17T cables are included. Refer to Communications Cables at the
end of this section for all cable order codes.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 2 sus
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +s V: 14.0
DC amps drawn at +is V: o.o
DC amps drawn at -15 V: 0.5

Bus Loads: DC 1.5
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts: 4 panel units

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.19
PCL11

Order Code

Option

Order Code

PCL11 multiple link

PCL11-B

4.25

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Q-bus Synchronous Devices

DMV11

The DMV11 is a microprocessor-controlled single-line synchronous communications controller that provides local or remote interconnection between Q-bus
systems and other computer systems with EIA-RS-232-c/ccITT v.28, CCITT v.35,
or RS-423/Rs-449 interfaces. The DMV11 implements DDCMP in hardware and
supports direct memory access data transfers, DECnet point-to-point configurations, and full modem control. It operates at speeds from 2.4 Kb/s to 56 Kb/s
(depending on the version selected) at half- or full-duplex. Note: 19.2 Kb/sis the
maximum speed for RS232 connection.
Depending on the operating system and layered software, the DMV11 can
support up to 12 tributaries. In point-to-point configurations, the DMV11 can
communicate with other DMV11s, DMC11s, DUP11s, DPV11s, DMR11s, or DMP11s.
The DMV11 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 200
series modems and their equivalents.

Features

• Single line synchronous communications from a dual size board
• Line speeds up to 56 Kb/s (application dependent)
• DMA input/output optimizes communication throughput
• Full modem control supports full or half-duplex communications
• RS232-c, RS423/Rs449, or v.35 compatible depending on version selected

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 quad slot (all versions)
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 4. 7 (DMV11-A, -B, -F), 4.4 (DMV11-c)
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.4 (DMV11-A, -B, -F), 0.26 (DMV11-c)
Bus Loads: AC 2, DC 1 (all versions)
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts:

Size B (DMV11-A, -F),
Size A (DMV11-B, -c)
Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

4.26 Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.20
DMV11
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

EIA RS-232-c/ CCI'fT V.28 or EIA RS-423/RS-449 interfaces.
Includes base module only.

DMVll-M

For system installation select the appropriate external cable
and one of the following cabinet kits:
EIA RS-232-c/ CC ITT v. 28 cabinet kit.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BA11-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DMVll-AA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DMVll-AB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DMVll-AF

For use with CPUS that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 10 ft cable that connects the DMV11-M module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-A2

EIA RS-423/RS-449 cabinet kit.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BA11-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DMVll-FA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DMVll-FB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DMVll-FF

For use with CPUS that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 10 ft cable that connects the DMV11-M module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-F3

CCITT v.35 and integral modem interfaces.
Select the appropriate external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits:

DMV11-M

CCITT V.35 cabinet kit.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BA11-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes. Includes a BC17E cable
for connection to modem.

CK-DMV11-BA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11). Includes a BC17E cable
for connection to modem.

CK-DMV11-BB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DMVll-BF

For use with CPUs that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 ft cable that connects the DMV11-M module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-B3

Integral modem cabinet kit.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BA11-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DMVll-CA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DMV11-CB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP~ll).

CK-DMVll-CF

For use with CPUS that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 ft cable that connects the DMVll-N module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-C3

Base module only.

DMVll-N

4.27

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

DPV11

The DPV11 is a low-cost single-line synchronous programmable interface that
provides local or remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and other
computer systems with EIA RS232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS232-c/CCITT V.11
interfaces. It operates at speeds up to 56 Kb/sat half- or full-duplex with full
modem control (DDCMP/Bisync at 56 Kb/s, HDLC/SDLC at 9.6 Kb/s). The DPV11
is programmable for either byte-oriented protocols (DDCMP
or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (sDLC or HDLC). The DPV11 is suited for
interfacing to medium-speed synchronous lines for remote batch and remote
job-entry applications.
The DPV11 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with the Bell 200
series modems and their equivalents.

Features

• Single line synchronous communications from a dual size board
• Line speeds up to 56 Kb/s (application dependent)
• Full modem control supports full and half-duplex communications
• Character interrupt input/output
• RS232-c compatible

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 double slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 0.9
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.3
Bus Loads: AC 1, DC 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: Size A

Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.21
DPV11

Option

Order Code

Order Codes

Includes base module only.

DPV11-M

For system installation select one of the following
cabinet kits:
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BA11-MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-s) boxes.

CK-DPV11-AA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DPV11-AB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX u, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DPV11-AF

For use with CPUS that do not have an r/o connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 ft cable that connects the DPV11-M module to
an external device.

CK-DPV11-A3

4.28

Hardware

Synchronous Communications Controllers

TOPS-10/TOPS-20
Synchronous Devices
DN20/DN20F

The DN20/DN20F is a one-to-four-line synchronous line controller (KMCll/
DUP11) that provides interconnection between DECSYSTEM-20s (2040, 2060) and
DEcsystem-lOs and other computer systems with EIA-RS-232-c/ccnr v.28
interfaces. The DN20/DN20F operates at speeds up to 19,200 bits per second in
direct memory access mode with full modem control.
For more detailed information, please refer to the LSM Product Summary.

Table 4.22
DN20/DN20F
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

One-to-four line synchronous line controller.
Data communications universal front end with 128K
words of Mos memory. Requires the addition ofDN20-xx
or DMRll-xx options for synchronous operations. Prerequisite:
DECSYSTEM-20.

DN20-MB

Data communications universal front end with 128K words
of MOS memory which requires the addition of DN20-xx,
DMRll-xx, or DN25-xx options for synchronous and
asynchronous operations. Prerequisite: DEcsystem-10.

DN20-MD

DN20-MB and QTD04-AM Prerequisite: DECSYSTEM-20.

DN20-MF

DN20-MD and QH683-AM Prerequisite: DEcsystem-10.

DN20-MJ

Upgrade kit which can expand memory from 32K words
core to 128K words MOS. Prerequisite: DN20-cx.

DN20-MU

FCC compliant data communications universal front end with
128K words of MOS memory. Requires the addition of
DN20F-Bx or DMRll-xx options for synchronous operations.
Prerequisite: DECSYSTEM-20.

DN20-MA

FCC compliant data communications universal front
end with 128K words of MOS memory which requires
the addition ofDN20F-Bx, or DMRll-xx options for
synchronous operations. Prerequisite: DEcsystem-10.

DN20F-MC

DN20F-MA and QTD04-AM Prerequisite: DECSYSTEM-20.

DN20F-ME

DN20F-MC and QH683-AM Prerequisite: DEcsystem-10.

DN20F-MH

Synchronous expansion drawer including one low-speed line
interface (KMC11/DUP11) expandable to four lines with the
addition of the DN20F-BA. Prerequisite: DN20F-BA.

DN20-DA
DN20-DB

FCC compliant low-speed synchronous line controller
including one low-speed line interface (KMC11/DUP11)
expandable to four lines with the addition of DN20F-BBs.
Prerequisite: DN20-M or DN20F-M.

DN20F-BA

FCC compliant low-speed synchronous line interface
(DUP11) for speeds between 2.4 Kb and 19.2 Kb baud
(EIA RS-232-c/ccrTT v.28 modem interface). Prerequisite:
DN20F-BA or DN20-DA or DN20-BA.

DN20F-BB

4.29

Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

Asynchronous/Synchronous
Communications Controllers
DMB32

The OMB32 is a high performance OMA intelligent communications controller
for the VAXBI family of computer systems. It provides 10 communication
lines-8 asynchronous terminal or modem lines, one synchronous line, and one
parallel printer line, all supported from a single VAXBI backplane slot.
The eight asynchronous lines can transmit at speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s per line
under specified conditions. (Actual line speed and throughput depends on the
operating system and user applications.) All lines provide OMA output, full
modem control and split receive/transmit speed capability.
The one synchronous line supports message framing, and CRC generation and
verification with full modem control for the HOLC, SOLC, BISYNC, OOCMP, and
GEN BYTE protocols. It is capable of operating at speeds up to 64 Kb/s for HOLC
and SOLC protocols, and 19.2 Kb/s for DDCMP. Other protocols are supported
at 9.6 Kb/s speeds. (The actual throughput depends on the operating system
and application.)
The one parallel printer line supports LP32 generic printer specifications,
including the LNOl, LP25, LP26, LP27, LXY12, LXY22, and LGOl parallel printers.

Features

• Asynchronous communications:
- Eight communication lines, RS232 compatibility.
- Line speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s (application dependent).
- OMA output optimizes terminal 1/0 performance.
- Split receive/transmit speeds on a per line basis.
- Full modem control supports full and half duplex point-to-point modems.
• Synchronous communications:
- One communication line with RS232-c, RS422-A, RS423-A, and
v.35 compatability.
- Line speeds up to 64.0 Kb/s (application dependent).
- OMA input and output.
- Full modem control supports full and half duplex point-to-point modems.
• Parallel printer line supports a wide range of Digital parallel printers, including
LNOl, LP25, LP26, LP27, LP32, LXY12, LXY22 and LGOl.
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics performs extensive
functional tests of the OMB32 circuitry at each power on or reset.

4.30

Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

Figure 4.4
DMB32 Typical Configuration

Local Terminals

WAN

environment

Synchronous Device Driver

A device driver for the synchronous line, which supports point-to-point
communications, must be ordered separately. Refer to the DMB32 Software
Order Code Table for ordering information.

Adapter Cables

The appropriate two foot adapter cable must be ordered to connect the DMB32
so pin D-subminature connector to the selected communication device. Refer to
the DMB32 Hardware Order Code Table for ordering information. The adapter
cable can be ordered through the DEcdirect Plus catalog.

Distribution Panel

The distribution.panel is four panels wide, does not require power, and attaches
to the back of the computer system cabinet containing the module. The panel
contains eight 2S pin D..:subminiature connectors for asynchronous lines, one
SO pin D-subminiature connector for the synchronous line, and one 37 pin
D-subminiature connector for the printer port.

Specifications

Mounting Code: One VAXBI module (T1012)-9.18 in X 8.00 in
One Distribution panel (83033)-4 panel width
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at + s V: 6. 7S A
DC amps drawn at + 12 V: 300 mA
DC amps drawn at -12 V: 42S mA

Environmental Class: C

Required Software

• VAX/VMS Operating System v4.4 or later.
• DMB32 Synchronous Device Driver vl.O.

4.31 llard"'3re

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

Required Hardware

• A VAXBI system configuration. (Refer to the bMB32 Software Order Code Table
for a list of supported processors.)
•A minimum of17 KB ofnonpaged pool memory for the driver and additional
non-paged pool for application dependent buffer requirements
• 100 blocks of system disc space for installation and permanent use
• Adapter cable for synchronous line.

Table 4.23
DMB32 Software Order Codes
(DMB32 Synchronous Device Driver)

Option
License Options: A license
is required for each CPU.

Order Code
VAX8200
VAX8250

VAX8300
VAX8350

VAX8500
VAX8530
VAX8550

VAX8700
VAX8800

Single-use license

Q5Z03-UZ

Q7Z03-UZ

Q*Z03-UZ

VAxcluster license

Q5Z03-QZ

Q7Z03-QZ

Q*Z03-QZ

Q5Z03-HM
QSZ03-H3

Q7Z03-HM
Q7Z03-H3

Q*Z03-HM

Software revision
right-to-copy

Q5Z03-HZ

Q7Z03-HZ

Q*Z03-HZ

Documentation only

QLZ03-GZ

DEcsupport service

Q5Z03-9M
Q5Z03-93

Q7Z03-9M
Q7Z03-93

Q*Z03-9M

Basic service

Q5Z03-8M
Q5Z03-83

Q7Z03-8M
Q7Z03-83

Q*Z03-8M

Q5Z03-3M
Q5Z03-33

Q7Z03-3M
Q7Z03-33

Q*Z03-3M

Materials and
Service Options:
Distribution and
documentation

U.S. Packaged
Service Options:

Self-maintenance
service

* = 9 for VAX 8500 and 8530, 2 for 8550 and 8700, M for 8800.
Table 4.24
DMB32 Hardware Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DMB32-M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits:
For use with shielded cabinets (VAX 8500, VAX 8800).

CK-DMB32-LJ

For use with_shielded cabinets (VAX 8200, VAX 8300).

CK-DMB32-LM

For use with expansion cabinets (vAx 8800).

CK-DMB32-LN

Synchronous line adapter cable:
For use with CCITT V.35

BC19F-02

For use with CCITT V.24/RS-232

BC19D-02

For use with RS-422

BC19B-02

For use with RS-423-A

BC19E-02

4.32 Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

DMF32

The DMF32, a multifunction communications controller, provides interconnection between modems and terminals and UNIBUS VAX systems. The DMF32
consists of an eight-line asynchronous multiplexer, a single-line synchronous
interface, and a general purpose parallel interface. It is supported by the
VAX/VMS operating system, DECnet-VAX networking software, and VAX PSI
communications software.
The eight-line asynchronous multiplexer operates at speeds up to 19,200 bits per
second at full-duplex in either DMA mode or SILO (first-in, first-out) mode. Two
lines have full modem control and split-speed capability; the other six lines have
no modem control and are for connecting local terminals only. The single-line
synchronous interface operates at speeds up to 19,200 bits per second in DMA
mode with full modem control and supports both bit- and byte-oriented
protocols. The general purpose parallel interface operates with either a lineprinter (in DMA mode) or a user-specific device (DMA mode or SILO mode).
The DMF32 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 200
series modems and their equivalents.

Features

• Asynchronous communications:
- Eight asynchronous communications lines
- DMA output optimizes communications throughput compared to character
interrupt devices
- Line speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (application dependent)
- Full modem control on two lines supports full and half duplex, point-topoint modems
- RS232-c compatible
• Synchronous communications:
- One synchronous communications line with line speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s
- DMA input/output optimizes communications throughput
- Full modem control point-to-point
- RS232-c compatible
• Parallel printer line supports LP27 generic specifications
• Comprehensive self-test
• Software support for VMS and ULTRIX-32

4.33

Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronou~ Communications Controllers

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 8.0
DC amps drawn at +15 V: 0.5
DC amps drawn at -15 V: 0.5

Bus Loads: AC 6, DC 1
1/0 Connection Panel Inserts: 4 panel units

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.25
DMF32

Option

Order Code

Order Codes

Includes base module only.

DMF32-M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits.
For use with shielded cabinets (vAX-11/780).

CK-DMF32-LD

For use with shielded cabinets (vAx-11/750).

CK-DMF32-LE

For use with cabinets without 1/0 connection panels.
Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMF32-LI

4.34

Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

KCT32

The KCT32 is a programmable communications interface based on the Digital
DCT11 chip. Its two lines provide low-cost asynchronous or synchronous
communication between VAX systems and other devices with EIA RS-232-c/
CCITT V.28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V.11, or RS-423/CCITT V.10 and V.35 interfaces for
networking or custom communications applications. The KCT32 operates at
speeds up to 64,000 bits per second for two lines, and 160,000 bits per second for
one line in bit synchronous mode. The KCT32 supports direct memory access
with full modem control on each line. It has 56 Kbytes of user-programmable
memory for implementation of custom communications functions.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 6.0
Bus Loads: AC 4.5, DC 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.26
KCT32 Optional
Software Order Code

Option

Order Code

VAX KCT32 software tools

Q*128-xx

Table 4.27
KCT32
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Two-lines provide asynchronous or synchronous
communications between VAX systems and other devices
with CCITT V.35. Includes M7099 CCITT V.35 interface
quad board, H3004 CCITT v. 35 interface panel and
H3250-00 test connector

KCT32-AB

EIA RS-422/CCITT v.11 version with basic system unit,
H3002, EIA RS-422/ CCITT V.11 interface panel and H3251-00
test connector

KCT32-AE

EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 version with basic system unit,
H3001, EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface panel, and H3251-00
connector modem test

KCT32-FA

EIA RS-423/RS-449 version with basic system unit,
H3003 EIA RS-423/RS-449 interface panel and H3251-00,
EIA RS-423/RS-449 test connector

KCT32-FF

4.35 Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

KMV1A

The KMV1A is a high performance direct memory access single-line programmable communications controller that provides interconnection between Q-bus
systems with EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V.11, and EIA RS-423/
CCITT v.10 interfaces. It is capable of communications speeds up to 64,000
bits per second. Used on the PDP-11/23, PDP-11/23-PLUS, MicroVAX 11, and
MicroPDP-11 systems, it utilizes the Micro/TU Processor to perform userdefined communications functions, thereby freeing the host to do more
application computations.
The KMV1A can be programmed in synchronous or asynchronous modes.
It also provides full modem support for Digital's family of modems, the Bell
200 Series or equivalent, and European PTT-approved modems.
Software Development Tools, x.25 Link Level, and HDLC Framing package
are available for use under RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS, and Micro/RSX systems.
Software support is available for VAX PSI, x.25 Link Level, and Development
Tools on a MicroVAX II.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 quad slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 2.6
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.2
Bus Loads: AC 3, DC 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: PDP-11/23, MicroPDP-11, MicroVAX II= Size B

PDP-11/23-PLUS =Size c
Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.28
KMVJA Optional
Software Order Codes

Option

Order Code

RSX KMV software tools

QJS98-xx

RSX x.25 link level

QJS97-xx

RSX-11M HDLC framing

QJS32-xx

RSX-11M-PLUS HDLC framing

QJS39-xx

VAX PSI

QZ071-xx

KMV1A MicrovMs driver

QZZ35-xx

KMV1A MicrovMs software tools

QZZ36-xx

KMV1A MicroVMS x.25 link level

QZZ37-xx

4.36 Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

Table 4.29
KMV1A

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-line, direct memory access, programmable
communications controller. Controller module only.

KMVlA-M

For system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits.

KXT11-AB

R5-232 for PDP-11/235 and BA123

CK-KMVlA-AA

R5-232 for BA23

CK-KMVlA-AB

R5-232 for PDP-11/23-PLU5

CK-KMVlA-AC

R5-232 for MicroVAX II System 5

CK-KMVlA-AF

RS-422 for PDP-11/235 and BA123

CK-KMVlA-EA

R5-422 for BA23

CK-KMVlA-EB

RS-422 for PDP-11/23-PLU5

CK-KMVlA-EC

R5-422 for MicroVAX II System 5

CK-KMVlA-EF

RS-423 for PDP-11/235 and BA123

CK-KMVlA-FA

R5-423 for BA23

CK-KMVlA-FB

RS-423 for PDP-11/23-PLU5

CK-KMVlA-FC

R5-423 for MicroVAX II System 5

CK-KMVlA-FF

The KXT11-AB is a PDP-11 (Tll) 16-bit, single-board computer suitable for
communications applications running in ROM or RAM. The processor can
support up to 32 Kbytes of RAM, 32 Kbytes of ROM, two asynchronous serial line
units, 24 parallel lines, a realtime clock, and Q-bus expansion.
The KXTll-AB is supported by RT-11, vs.1 or later, MicroPower/Pascal, and
MACR0-11.

Spec~fications

Mounting Code: one double slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +s V: 2.8 A maximum
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 1.1 mA maximum
Bus Loads: AC 2. 7 unit loads; DC . 5 unit load
Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.30
KXT11-AB

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

SBC-11/21 single-board, 16-bit processor with 16 Kbytes of
static RAM

KXTll-AB

4.37

Hardware

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

KXT11-CA

The KX111-CA is a PDP-11 (111) 16-bit, single-board processor that can operate as
a standalone processor or a peripheral processor.
Applications for the KX111-CA may be written in either MicroPower/Pascal or
MACR0-11. Peripheral Processor Tool Kits are used by the host to communicate
with the application on the KX111-CA. The tool kits support use of the KX111-CA
as a slave processor in PDP-11 Q-bus systems that run RT-11, RSX-11M, or
Micro/RSX, and in MicroVAX II systems that run MicrovMs. For more information on the Peripheral Processor Tool Kits, refer to the applicable Software
Product Descriptions: SPD 12. 70.xx for RT-11, SPD 13.25.xx for RSX, SPD 18.48.xx
for Micro/RSX, and SPD 28.29.xx for MicrovMs.

Features

• PDP-11 (111) processor with Q-bus compatibility
• 32 Kbytes RAM with battery-backup support
• expansion of basic ROM up to 32 Kbytes
• two channels for direct memory access
• two fully programmable synchronous/asynchronous lines
• one asynchronous console port
• three 16-bit programmable timers
•twenty-bit programmable parallel port (4 control lines and 16 data lines)

Specifications

Mounting Code: one quad slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +s V: 4.0 A maximum
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 0.4 A maximum
Battery backup at +s V: 20 mA maximum
Bus Loads: AC 2.0 unitloads; DC 1.0 unitload
Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.31
KXT11-CA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-board PDP-11 (111) 16-bit processor

KXT11-CA

4.38 flard"'1'are

Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

KXJ11-CA

The KXJ11-CA is a PDP-11 (J11) 16-bit, single-board processor that can act as a
realtime processor, co-processor, or communications processor. As a communications processor, the KXJ11-CA can offioad the main processor by handling
low and intermediate levels of communications protocol.
Applications for the KXJ11-CA may be written in either MicroPower/Pascal
(v2.3 or later) or MACR0-11. Peripheral Processor Tool Kits are used by the host
to communicate with the application on the KXJ11-CA. The tool kits support
use of the KXJll-CA as a slave processor in PDP-11 Q-bus systems that run RT-11,
RSX-11M, or Micro/RSX, and in MicroVAX n systems that run MicrovMs. For
more information on the Peripheral Processor Tool Kits, refer to the applicable
Software Product Descriptions: SPD 12. 70.xx for RT-11, SPD 13.25.xx for RSX, SPD
18.48.xx for Micro/RSX, and SPD 28.29.xx for MicroVMS.

Features

• PDP-11 (J11) processor with Q-bus compatibility
• 512 Kbytes RAM that can be programmed as shared memory on the Q-bus
• expansion ofbasic ROM up to 64 Kbytes
• two channels for direct memory access
• two fully programmable synchronous/asynchronous lines
• one asynchronous serial console port
• three 16-bit programmable timers
• twenty-bit programmable parallel port (4 control lines and 16 data lines)

Specifications

Mounting Code: one quad slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 V: 6.0 A maximum
DC amps drawn at +12 V: 2.0 A maximum
Bus Loads: AC 3.0 unit loads; DC 0.5 unit load
Environmental Class: Class C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.32
KX]11-CA Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-board PDP-11 (J11) 16-bit processor

KXJ11-CA

KXJll-CA User's Guide

EK-KXJCA-UG

4.39 Hardware

Moderns

Modems

This product set is currently not available in all countries. Refer to Tables 4.35
and 4.36 for availability.

Ordering Information

To order modems, refer to the selection charts in Tables 4.33 and 4.34, then turn
to the specific product description for the appropriate order codes.
100 Series modems are available in desktop and rackmount options. The DF224
"Scholar" is available only in the desktop option.

Table 4.33
Dial-up Line Modem Chart

Asynchronous Communications
Full Duplex

Half Duplex

Data Rate

2400bps
(1200bps)
(300bps)

2400bps
(1200bps)

Functional
Compatibility

CCITT
V.22bis
BELL
212A

BELL
212A

DF224*

DF124

DF112

DEC Modem

1200bps
(300bps)

2400bps
(1200bps)

DEC
DF126

DF126

Synchronous Communications
Full Duplex

DataRate

2400bps
(1200bps)

BELL
212A

CCI TT
V.22bis
BELL
212A

CCITT
V.22bis
BELL
212A

BELL
201-C

DF112

DF124

DF224*

DF126

1200bps

Functional
Compatibility

DEC Modem

Half Duplex

*Desktop only

If more information is required, customers may call the Add-on Consulting
Center: 800-343-4040 Ext. 535 (in New Hampshire, 1-884-7990).

4.40

Hardware

Modems

Table 4.34
Private/Leased Line
Modem Chart

Synchronous Communications
Full Duplex

Half Duplex

Data Rate

9600bps
4800bps
2400bps
(7200bps) (2400bps) (1200bps)
(4800bps)

2400bps
(1200bps)

1200bps

4800bps
(2400bps)

Functional
Compatibility

CC ITT
V.29

DEC
DF112
Only

CCITT
V.27

BELL
201B

CCITT
V.22bis
BELL
212A

DF126

DF124

DF112

DF127

DEC Modem

DF129

CCITT
V.27

DF127

Asynchronous Communications
Full Duplex

Half Duplex

Data Rate

2400bps
(1200bps)

1200bps

2400bps
(1200bps)

Functional
Compatibility

CC ITT
V.22bis
BELL
212A

DEC
DF112

DEC
DF126

DEC Modem

DF124

DF112

DF126

All DF100 Series modems are available in desktop and rack mount options.

4.41

Hardware

Modems

D F100 Series

The DF100 series of modems provides remote interconnection between Digital
systems. DF100 series modems operate in either asynchronous or synchronous
mode at half- or full-duplex at speeds ranging from 300/1,200 bits per second to
9,600 bits per second, depending on the version selected. They support standard
EIA RS-232-c and EIA RS-423-A interfaces and are compatible with Bell 103/212A,
201 B/c, and CCITT v.22 bis/v.27/V.29 modems. DF100 series modems are
FCC-approved for direct connection to telephone lines on all Public Switched
Telephone Networks (PSTN) and Private/Lease Telephone Networks (P!I:IN)
in the u.s. and Canada.
The DF100 series of modems was designed to utilize three different standard
enclosures: one for standalone desktop modem applications (DF100-DT), one
for multiple modem (rack mount) applications (DF100-RM), and one for the DFM
series of statistical multiplexers.
The DF112 is a 300or1,200 bit-per-second dual speed full-duplex dial-up
PSTN asynchronous/synchronous modem with integral autodialer. It replaces
the existing DF03 series of modems. The DF112 was designed for use in both
standalone modem and multiple (RACK) modem environments. The DF112 is
compatible in operation to Bell 103/212A modems. Note: The DF112 replaces the
DF01, DF02, and DF03 modems.
The DF124 is a 2400 or 1200 bit-per-second full duplex asynchronous and
synchronous modem for dial-up and leased line telephone networks. It has an
integral auto-dialer and is designed to support desktop, multiple (rack) modem,
and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations. The DF124 is compatible in
operation to CCITT v.22bis, CCITT v.22 and Bell 212A modems.
The DF126 is a 2400 bps synchronous/asynchronous half-duplex dial-up line and
full duplex leased line modem. It can also be used in leased line multi-point
communication environments. It includes an asynchronous integral auto-dialer
that can also be used for synchronous communications when a BC22Y-01 adapter
cable and customer written software are used. The modem is designed for use
in desktop, multiple modem (rack), and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations. The DF126 is compatible in operation to Bell 201 B/ c modems.
The DF127 is a 4800 bps synchronous, half-duplex, full duplex, leased line
modem that is CCITT v.27 compatible. It is designed for use in desktop, multiple
modem (rack), and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations. It is compliant
with worldwide PTT requirements.
The DF129 is a 9600 bit per second synchronous, full duplex, leased line modem
that is CCITT v. 29 compatible. It is capable of fall back speeds of7200 and 4800
bits per second. The DF129 is designed for use in desktop, multiple modem
(rack), and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations. It is compliant with
worldwide PTT requirements.

4.42

Hardware

Modems

Specifications

Physical Size for DF112-AA, DF124-AA, DF126-AA, DF127-AA, DF129-AA:
Height: 74 mm (2. 91 in)
Width: 217 mm (8.56 in)
Depth: 292 mm (11.5 in)
Weight: 2.62 kg (5 lbs, 13 oz)
Physical Size for DF112-AM, DF124-AM, DF126-AM, DF127-AM, DF129-AM:
Height: 25.4 mm (1 in)
Width: 203 mm (8 in)
Depth: 264 mm (10.4 in)
Weight: .55 kg (1 lb, 4 oz)
Power Requirements:
Product

DC amps drawn at:
+5V
+12V

-12V

DF112-AM
DF124-AM
DF126-AM
DF127-AM
DF129-AM

0.15
0.70
0.40
1.00
1.00

0.45
0.15
0.10
0.18
0.18

0.15
0.20
0.15
0.18
0.18

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.35
DF100 Series
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

DF112 desktop modem for u.s./Canada

DF112-AA

DF112 modem module for u.s./Canada

DF112-AM

DF124 desktop modem for u.s./Canada

DF124-AA

DF124 modem module for u.s./Canada

DF124-AM

DF126 desktop modem for u.s./Canada

DF126-AA

DF126 modem module for u.s./Canada

DF126-AM

DF127 des_ktop modem for u.s./Canada*

DF127-AA

DF127 modem module for u.s./Canada*

DF127-AM

DF129 desktop modem for u.s./Canada*

DF129-AA

DF129 modem module for u.s./Canada*

DF129-AM

*Also available in Holland.

DF224

The DF224, "Scholar," is a low profile desktop modem with external wall mount
power supply. It operates at 2400, 1200, and 300 bps full duplex over dial-up
(PSTN) lines. The DF224 asynchronous and synchronous integral autodialer stores
up to 15 telephone numbers, which may also be identified by an ID name of 6
characters or less. Phone number linking capabilities are also provided. The
DF224 is designed for supporting Digital and non-digital, asynchronous or
synchronous terminals, personal computers and workstation applications in the
u. s. and Canada. The DF224-AA is compatible in operation to CCITT v .22bis,
CCITT v.22 and Bell 103/212A modems.

4.43

Hardware

Statistical Multiplexers

Specifications

Physical Size for DF224-AA:
Height: 30.3 mm (1.19 in)
Width: 152.4 mm (6. 00 in)
Depth: 219.0 mm (8.62 in)
Weight: .539 Kg (1.19 lbs) including power supply
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5V: 0.80
DC amps drawn at +12V: 0.10
DC amps drawn at -12V: 0.10
Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.36
DF224 Modem Order Code

Multiple Modem (Rack Mount)
Enclosure

Table 4.37
Multiple Modem Enclosure
Order Code

Option

Order Code

2400/1200/300 FDX desktop modem "Scholar" for u.s.
and Canada

DF224-AA

2400/1200/300 FDX desktop modem "Scholar" for Japan

DF224-AJ

The multiple modem (rack mount) enclosure provides on-line computer services to distributed remote terminal users. The enclosure can house up to 12
combination DF100 modem modules. Modules can be added or changed from
the front of the enclosure without disconnecting AC power or disrupting other
on-line users. The enclosure connects to either dial-up or leased telephone lines.
For dial-up communications, RJ21x telephone service is required, and for leased
line communications, either 2 or 4 wire telephone service is required. All enclosures have a self-contained power supply that provides power to all modem
modules within the enclosure. The enclosure is available with 6 Amp integral
power supply.

Option

Order Code

6 amp multiple modem enclosure for u.s./Canada

DFlOO-RM

Statistical Multiplexers

This product set is currently available in the u. s., Canada, Holland, England,
and Germany only.

DFM Series

The DFM Series oflntelligent Communication Processors (1cP) are free standing
units that utilize statistical time division multiplexing techniques for concentrating four to sixteen EIA RS232c data channels over a single high speed communication link. These data channels interface to terminals, personal computers,
workstations, modems, and computer ports.
The DFM Series has been designed with multi-microprocessor architecture
utilizing internal DMA data transfer for high efficiency; The DFM uses a total modular design concept. This allows users to easily expand and upgrade the units
from 4to16 channels with and without integral 4.8 and 9.6 K/bps modems.

4.44 Hardware

Statistical Multiplexers

DFMSeries
(Continued)

Channel switching and contention features provide the flexibility required in
the rapidly changing data tommunication environments. Any switched channel
end can be connected to any other authorized switched channel in the network.
The contention feature allows a DFM at one end of the network to be connected
to a DFM with fewer channels at the host end of the network. Users at one end
may contend for connections on a first come, first served basis.
DFM concentrated link configurations include conventional terrestrial link facilities, as well as microwave, fiber optics or satellite components. Digital's DDCMP
protocol is supported on synchronous channels. The DFM handles synchronous
data traffic on up to one-half of its channels. Each of these channels can be
configured to support various data speeds and block sizes. DFM's are available
for sale in the u. s., Canada, Holland, and England. They may be purchased
bundled with data cables designated by the sx order code. Call the css Sales
Support Team at 800-832-6277 for further information. Add on options with
an VAX order code do not include cables. Cables may be purchased separately
from the DECdirect Catalog. Verify with specific countries for particular
options available.

Features

• Asynchronous and synchronous data channels
• Network control and management
• Channel switching
• Port contention with queueing
• Modem control, all channels
• Network diagnostics
• Optional 4.8/9.6 K/bps integral modems
• Automatic speed detection
• Speed conversion
• Flow control conversion
• Local and remote echo
• Easy expansion from 4 lines to 16 lines

Figure 4.5
DFM Statistical Multiplexer

Configuration

VAX or

PDP-11

Specifications

DFM with

Integral
Modem

Physical Size:
Height: 32 cm (12.5 in)
Width: 32 cm (12.5 in)
Length: 23 cm (9.0 in)

Power Requirements:
120 V, 60 Hz: 92 W
240 V, 50 Hz: 92 W

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

4.45

Hardware

Statistical Multiplexers

Table 4.38
DFM Series

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

4-channel DFM with no modem and:
With 5 Cables
With No Cables

DFM04-SA
DFM04-AA

4-channel DFM with 4.8K bps integral modem and:
With 5 Cables
With No Cables

DFM04-SB
DFM04-AB

4-channel DFM with 9.6K bps integral modem and:
With 5 Cables
With No Cables

DFM04-SC
DFM04-AC

8-channel DFM with no modem and:
With 9 Cables
With No Cables

DFM08-SA
DFM08-AA

8-channel DFM with 4.8K bps integral modem and:
With 9 Cables
With No Cables

DFM08-SB
DFM08-AB

8-channel DFM with 9;6K bps integral modem and:
With 9 Cables
With No Cables

DFM08-SC
DFM08-AC

12-channel DFM with no modem and:
With 13 Cables
With No Cables

DFM12-SA
DFM12-AA

12-channel DFM with 4.8K bps integral modem and:
With 13 Cables
With No Cables

DFM12-SB
DFM12-AB

12-channel DFM with 9.6K bps integral modem and:
With 13 Cables
With No Cables

DFM12-SC
DFM12-AC

16-channel DFM with no modem and:
With 17 Cables
With No Cables

DFM16-SA
DFM16-AA

16-channel DFM with 4.8K bps integral modem and:
With 17 Cables
With No Cables

DFM16-SB
DFM16-AB

16-channel DFM with 9.6K bps integral modem and:
With 17 Cables
With No Cables

DFM16-SC
DFM16-AC

4-channel expansion line card for DFM08 option

DFMXX-4E

s-channel expansion line card for DFM08 option

DFMXX-SE

2.4K bps integral modem for all DFM models

DF126-AM

4.8K bps integral modem for all DFM models

DF127-AM

9.6K bps integral modem for all DFM models

DF129-AM

4.46 Hardware

Packet Assembler/Disassembler

Packet Assembler/Disassembler
DFMX.25PAD

The DFM x.25 PAD (Packet Assembler/Disassembler) is a freestanding concentrator that connects asynchronous devices to x.25 Public and Private Packet
Data Networks. With the same enclosure as the DFM satistical multiplexer, the
DFM x.25 PAD is available in basic units of 4-, 8-, and 16-channel models. To
accommodate growing networks, the basic 4- and 8-channel units are expandable to a maximum of 16 channels. When the number of terminals or computer
ports to be networked increases, the DFM x.25 PAD's channel expansion cards
(DFMXX-4E or DFMXX-8E) are available for field upgradable expansion in increments of 4 and 8 channels.
The DFM x.25 PAD concentrates the asynchronous data from four, eight, twelve
or sixteen terminals or host computer ports onto a single high speed synchronous x.25 leased access line. The DFM x.25 PAD is compatible with 1980 x.25
industry standards recommended by the international standards committee
(ccnT). Video terminals and personal computers connected to the local DFM
x.25 PAD can use it as a data switch to access and share local computer ports,
printers, or modems. This combines comprehensive local communication with
access to remote hosts via the PSDN.
The DFM x.25 PAD supports a single synchronous access line to the PSDN at
speeds ranging from 2400 bps up to 64K bps. Most public applications will
provide, as part of the basic service, the pair ofleased line modems and the
leased telephone line to access the x.25 network. However, in private applications, Digital's two optional integral modems may be used to access the
x.25 network: the DF127-AM operates at 4800 bps and the DF129-AM operates at
9600 bps.
The DFM x.25 PAD is certified for connection to TYMNET and TELENET networks
in the United States and the DATAPAC network in Canada.

Features

• Fully compatible with 1980 CCITT recommendations x.3, x.28, x.29 and x.25.
• Certified for use on TYMNET and TELENET in the u.s. and Canada's (1980)
DATAPAC x.25 Public Networks.
•Enhanced terminal interface parameters in addition to standard x.3 settings
provide customized support for a wide variety of applications.
• Local port switching and contention combines local resource sharing with
access to remote hosts on the x.25 networks.
•Easy field upgradable channel expansion up to 16 channels with 4- and 8-channel
expansion modules.
• Easy to use calling features such as AUTOCALL, and ABBREVIATED-CALL allow
users to save time and eliminate the occurrence of wrong numbers when
connecting to the remote x.25 destination.
• Composite link supports speeds of up to 64K bps.
• Dedicated supervisory channel and user friendly self prompting software
commands allow independent configuring of system, channel and link parameters in non volatile memory.

4.47 Hardware

Packet Assembler/Disassembler

Figure 4.6
DFMX.25PAD
Terminal to Host
Application

Host
System

DFM X.25 PAD

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height: 32 cm (12. 5 in)
Width: 32 cm (12.5 in)
Length: 23 cm (9.0 in)
Power Requirements:
120 V, 60 Hz: 92 W
240 V, 50 Hz: 92 W

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.39
DFMX.25PAD

Order Codes

Option

Order Code

4 Channel x.25 PAD

DFX04-AA

8 Channel x.25 PAD

DFXOS-AA

16 Channel x.25 PAD

DFX16-AA

Optional x.25 Control Module

DFX25-CM

Channel Expansion Modules:
4 channel expansion module for DFX08

DFMXX-4E

8 channel expansion module for DFX04 and DFX08

DFMXX-SE

Integral Modems:
4800 bps synchronous modem

DF127-AM

9600 bps synchronous modem

DF129-AM

4.48

Hardware

Computer-to-PBX Interface

This product is currently available only in the u.s. and Canada.

CPI32

CPI32isa1.54 megabit per second, 24-channel asynchronous multiplexed link
that provides local and remote interconnection between UNIBUS VAX systems
and a compatible interface at a voice/data Private Branch Exchange (PBX). CPI32
implements the Computer-to-PBX Interface (CPI) specification developed jointly
by Digital and Northern Telecom Inc. CPI32 channels operate at programselectable speeds up to 19,200 bits per second. It uses T1 carrier technology to
permit direct copper wire connection up to 400 meters (1310 feet) between PBX
and VAX systems. CPI32 is a low-cost and efficient means of connecting a VAX
to an advanced voice/ data PBX. A compatible interface on the PBX side is sold
by Northern Telecom Inc. for their Meridian SL-1 PBX models. CPI32 is supported only on UNIBUS vAx systems. It is not currently supported on the
BI-based VAX systems (VAX 8200, 8300, 8500, 8550, 8700, 8800) either through the
UNIBUS adapter or in native mode. Call 1-800-832:-6277, extension CPI, for
further information.

Features and Bene.fits

• Reduced complexity-cPI32 simplifies configuration requirements because it
eliminates the need for data access modules and associated cabling between the
PBX and VAX.
•Lower costs-Through reduced hardware needs (e.g. DAMS, cabling, etc.), the
customer's PBX-to-VAX connection cost is reduced substantially.
• LAN/WAN interconnection-CPI32 allows a customer to integrate voice and data
communications through a PBX to a VAX and utilize the communication facilities
on a VAX such as ETHERNET and DECnet.
• Transparent Integration-Digital and Northern Telecom will attempt to make
the support and service of two different products (the computer and the PBX) as
transparent to the customer as is reasonable.
• Compatibility with existing applications-CPI uses standard VMS v4.x and a
standard DMF32 driver. The entire PBX system becomes invisible to the application, and data coming into the VAX appears as ifit is coming from directly
connected terminals.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 2 hex slots
Power Requirements:
M7883-Dc amps drawn at +5V: 6.5, +15V: 0.1
M7884-DC amps drawn at +5V: 6.5
Bus Loads: DC 1
I/o Connection Panel Inserts: 2 panel inserts
Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.40
CPI32

Order Code

Option

Order Code

24-channel UNIBUS-to-PBX asynchronous multiplexer for
use with asynchronous terminals. Includes intermodule,
M7883-to-I/o panel ribbon cables.
Required cabling is two, twisted, shielded wire pairs
specified for T1 use. Provision/installation of Tl cabling
between the PBX and VAX systems and a 15-pin, D
sub-miniature, male connector (Cannon ITT DAU-15P or
equivalent) is the joint responsibility of the customer and the
PBX vendor.

4.49 Hardware

CPI32-A

Personal Computer Port Selector

Mini-Exchange
Personal Computer
Port Selector

The Mini-Exchange is a microprocessor-based, standalone, asynchronous circuit switch designed for local connection of up to eight ofDigital's personal
computers (DECmate II, Rainbow personal computer, and Professional 300
series). It operates at speeds of up to 19,200 bits per second. Modem control is
offered on line eight only. The Mini-Exchange offers ncs product support for
file transfer operations to IBM PC/XT, Apple II and III, and TRS-80 systems.
The Mini-Exchange is the least costly method of connecting personal computers and associated devices within a 60 meter (200 foot) area. It provides
flexibility in designing local hardware configurations and allows asynchronous
communications to other Mini-Exchanges for host systems over modems.

Specifications

Physical Size:
Height: 10.16 cm (4.0 in)
Width: 22.86 cm (9.0 in)
Length: 31. 75 cm (12.5 in)
Weight: 2. 7 kg (6 lbs)
Power Requirements:
120 V, 60 Hz: 92 W
240 V, 50 Hz: 92 W

Environmental Class: Class B (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.41
Mini-Exchange
Order Code

Option

Order Code

Asynchronous circuit switch for local connection of up to
eight-lines. Mini-Exchange circuit switch

DFMSA-AA

Associated Cables:
The Mini-Exchange circuit switch requires standard EIA
(Bcc04 type) cables.

4.50 Hardware

Communications Cables

Table 4.42 lists the order codes and the available lengths (designated by the
extension) for all the cables required by the networking and communications
products described in this catalog. For information about custom cables and
longer-length cables, contact Digital's Accessories & Supplies Group.

Table 4.42
Communications Cables
Order Codes
Order
Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC04R-10
BC04R-12
BC04R-15
BC04R-18
BC04R-25
BC04R-50
BC04R-60
BC04R-75
BC04R-AO
BC04R-A5
BC04R-BO
BC04R-CO
BC04R-DO

Round, 6-wire, general purpose module
termination cable assembly

20mA r/o devices (nz11)

3.05 m (10 ft)
3.66 m (12 ft)
4.57 m (15 ft)
5.49 m (18 ft)
7.62 m (25 ft)
15.24 m (50 ft)
18.29 m (60 ft)
22.86 m (75 ft)
30.48 m (100 ft)
45. 72 m (150 ft)
60. 98 m (200 ft)
91.46 m (300 ft)
121. 95 m (400 ft)

BC05F-15
BC05F-50
BC05F-AO

Round, 6-wire, male 8-pin connector

20mA r/o devices (DL11)

4.6 m (15 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)

BC16C-10
BC16C-25

36 position, straight-to-right angle,
male to male, shielded, 18 twisted pair
cable assembly.

DEcconnect, DEC423 Q-bus products

3.05 m (10 ft)
7.62 m (25 ft)

BC16D-10
BC16D-25
BC16D-50
BC16D-150

36 position, right angle-to-right angle,
male to male, shielded, 18 twisted pair
extension cable.

DEcconnect, DEC423 Q-bus products

3.05 m (10 ft)
7.62 m (25 ft)
15.24 m (50 ft)
45. 7 m (150 ft)

BC16E-02
BC16E-10
BC16E-25
BC16E-50

Terminated six-conductor cable
for terminal interconnection
(DEC Office Cable)

DECconnect standard terminal
interconnect cable

BC16K-02
BC16K-10

ThinWire patch cord

Patches ThinWire patch panel to DEMPR

0.6 m (2ft)
3.05 m (10 ft)

BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30

RG58 c/u-type ThinWire Ethernet PVC
cable with connectors and boots

ThinWire Ethernet Products

1.8 m (6ft)
4.6 m (15 ft)
9.2 m (30ft)

4.51 Hardware

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)

Communications Cables

Table 4.42
Communications Cables
Order Codes (Continued)
Order
Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC16N-10

36 pin to 8-25 pin adaptor cable

DECconnect products, connects
patch panel to DSRVA in Satellite
Equipment Room

3.05 m (10 ft)

BC17C-10
BC17C-25
BC17C-35
BC17C-50
BC17C-75
BC17C-AO
BC17C-BO
BC17C-B5

Full EIA RS-232-c/CCITT v.28 modem
cable, round, 25-wire, fully-shielded,
male to female molded connectors

Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LA line cards)

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22. 9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC17D-02
BC17D-10
BC17D-25
BC17D-50
BC17D-AO

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT v.28, fully-shielded,
null modem, 10-wire, female to female
molded connectors

Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LB line cards)

0.6 m (2 ft)
3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)

BC17E-25
BC17E-50
BC17E-AO
BC17E-A5
BC17E-BO
BC17E-B5

CCITT v.35, fully-shielded, modem cable
(Note: This cable has a RS-449 connector
on the CPU end, and a v.35 connector on
the modem end.)

Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LB line cards), DMR

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45. 7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC17L-04

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, 25-wire,
fully-shielded, male to female connectors
adapter cable

Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LA or DCSAX-LC line cards)

1.22 m (4ft)

BC22D-10
BC22D-25
BC22D-35
BC22D-50
BC22D-75
BC22D-AO
BC22D-A5
BC22D-BO
BC22D-B5

Null modem cable, round, 6-wire, fully
shielded, EIA RS-232-c/cCITT V.28, female
to female molded connectors

Local connection of asynchronous
terminals

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22. 9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45. 7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

4.52 Hardware

Communications Cables

Table 4.42
Communications Cables
Order Codes (Continued)
Order
Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC22E-10
BC22E-25
BC22E-35
BC22E-50
BC22E-75
BC22E-AO
BC22E-A5
BC22E-BO
BC22E-B5

Modem cable, round, 16-wire, fully
shielded, EIA RS-232-c/CCITT V.28, male
to female molded connectors

Connection of asynchronous modems

3.1 m (10ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45. 7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC22F-10
BC22F-25
BC22F-35

Full, EIA RS-232-c/ccITT v.28 modem
cable, round, 25-wire, fully shielded,
male to female molded connectors

Connection of synchronous and asynchronous modems

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22. 9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45. 7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

RS-423/Rs-449 interface connectors

Connection ofoMR, OMP, OMV options

3.lm(lOft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)

Integral modem, triaxial cable with

Connection of current, fully-shielded
OMR, OMP, OMV options

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22. 9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304. 9 m (1000 ft)
1,067 m (3500 ft)

Used to connect current, fully-shielded
OMR, OMP, OMV options

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22. 9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304.9 m (1000 ft)
1,067 m (3500 ft)

BC22F-50
BC22F-75
BC22F-AO
BC22F-A5
BC22F-BO
BC22F-B5
BC55D-1U
BC55D-25
BC55D-50
BC55S-25
BC55S-50
BC55S-75
BC55S-AO
BC55S-B5
BC55S-EO
BC55S-LO
BC55S-YA
BC55T-25
BC55T-50

BNC connectors

Integral modem, twinaxial cable with
BNC connectors

BC55T-75
BC55T-AO
BC55T-B5
BC55T-EO
BC55T-LO
BC55T-YA

4.53

Hardware

Communications Cables

Table 4.42
Communications Cables
Order Codes (Continued)
Order
Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC56A-02

Male to male BC55S to BCSSM
adapter cable

Used to connect current, fully-shielded
DMR, DMP, DMV options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

0.6m (2ft)

BC56B-02

Male to female BCSSS to BC55M
adapter cable

Used to connect current, fully-shielded
DMR, DMP, DMV options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

0.6m (2ft)

BC56D-02

Male to male BC55T to BC55N
adapter cable

Used to connect current, fully-shielded
DMR, DMP, DMV options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

0.6 m (2 ft)

BC56E-02

Male to female BC55T to BC55N
adapter cable

Used to connect current, fully-shielded
DMR, DMP, DMV options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

0.6m (2ft)

BN25B-15
BN25B-30
BN25B-60
BN25B-90
BN25B-A5
BN25B-CO
BN25B-EO
BN25B-H5
BN25B-LO

General purpose fiber-optic cable

Used to connect Ethernet remote
repeaters (DEREP-RA/RB) and with
fiber-optic LAN BRIDGE 100

15 m (49.2 ft)
30 m (98.4 ft)
60 m (196.8 ft)
90 m (295.2 ft)
150 m (492 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1640 ft)
750 m (2460 ft)
1000 m (3280 ft)

BNE2A-MA
BNE2A-MB
BNE2A-MC
BNE2A-ME

Teflon-insulated coaxial cable

Ethernet

23.4 m (76.8 ft)
70.2 m (230.3 ft)
117 m (383. 9 ft)
500 m (1640.4 ft)

BNE2B-MA
BNE2B-MB
BNE2B-MC
BNE2B-ME

PVC-insulated coaxial cable

Ethernet

23.4 m (76.8 ft)
70.2 m (230.3 ft)
117 m (383;9 ft)
500 m (1640.4 ft)

H8244-A

Teflon-insulated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire Ethernet products

300 m (1000 ft)

H8243-A

PVC-insulated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire Ethernet products

300 m (1000 ft)

BNE3A-05
BNE3A-10
BNE3A-20
BNE3A-40

Straight angle PVC-insulated
transceiver cable

Ethernet

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3B-05
BNE3B-10
BNE3B-20
BNE3B-40

Right angle PVC-insulated
transceiver cable

Ethernet

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

4.54 Hardware

Communications Cables

Table 4.42
Communications Cables
Order Codes (Continued)
Order
Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BNE3C-05
BNE3C-10
BNE3C-20
BNE3C-40

Straight angle Teflon-insulated
transceiver cable

Ethernet

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3D-05
BNE3D-10
BNE3D-20
BNE3D-40

Right angle Teflon-insulated
transceiver cable

Ethernet

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3H-05
BNE3H-10
BNE3H-20
BNE3H-40

Straight angle PVC-insulated
transceiver cable

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3K-05
BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

Right angle PVC-insulated
transceiver cable

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3L-05
BNE3L-10
BNE3L-20
BNE3L-40

Straight angle Teflon-insulated
transceiver cable

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3M-05

Right angle Teflon-insulated
transceiver cable

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

Office Transceiver Cable with PVC
insulation, straight connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE4C-05

2 m (6.6 ft)
5 m (16.4 ft)

BNE4D-02
BNE4D-05

Office Transceiver Cable with PVC
insulation, right-angle connector

IEEE 802.3

2 m (6.6 ft)
5 m (16.4ft)

BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40
BNE4C-02

4.55 Hardware

Additional Hardware Product

Additional Hardware Product
DT07

The DT07 is a family of UNIBUS switches designed to connect a section of
UNIBUS and associated peripherals to any one of up to four PDP-11 and/or VAX-11
processors. Switching may be accomplished manually or under program
control to permit dynamic reconfiguration ofuNrnus peripherals for resource
sharing or high-availability applications. The DT07 includes a watchdog timer
that can be used to sense when the processor owning the switched section has
halted or is executing an invalid program. When this occurs, the switched
UNIBUS is automatically disconnected from the failing CPU and connected to the
backup processor. A separate cabinet is recommended for the BAll-K switched
UNIBUS box.

Specifications

Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
DC amps drawn at +5 v:3.5-4.5
DC amps drawn at +15 v:0.015
DC amps drawn at -15 v:0.05
Bus Loads: DC 1
Environmental Class: A (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Table 4.43
DT07

Option

Order Code

Order Codes

4-port radial package (120/240 VAC)

DT07-DV/DW

3-port radial package (120/240 VAC)

DT07-DT/DU

2-port isolated loop package (120/240 VAC)

DT07-BR/BS

2-port radial package (120/240 vAc)

DT07-DR/DS

2-port isolated loop component

DT07-BX

Dual control panel

DT07-FF

Mounting box (120/240 VAC)

BAll-KU/KV

4.56 Hardware

Section5
DECconnect Communications
System
Overview

DECconnect communications includes the full family of Digital products
from network electronics to cabling and connections. DECconnect provides
access to corporate computer networks, teleph~me communications, and a
video network.
DEcconnect provides a simple, cost-effective cabling system that brings both
high-performance baseband Ethernet and enhanced terminal interconnection to
offices and work areas. Through specialized office wiring radiating from a
faceplate to a centralized equipment area called the Satellite Equipment Room,
DECconnect cabling allows a customer to connect terminals, PCs, and workstations to each other. And with standard Ethernet as a backbone, the customer has
access to the data center and large mainframe resources throughout a company.
DECCOnnect combines four separate communications technologies into one
cohesive networking solution:
• High-speed local area network (LAN) at 10Mb/s ThinWire Ethernet communications for PCs, workstations and departmental systems.
• Unshielded twisted-pair. terminal communications (up to 19.2 Kb/s).
• Unshielded twisted pair cable connection for telephone systems.
• Standard broadband connection for video applications.
Separate cables are used for low speed data, high speed data, telephone, and, if
required, video communications technologies. These cables follow standard
industry wiring patterns and use radial topology from a centralized Satellite
Equipment Room (SER) to a faceplate in the local work area. (The voice
communications feature of the DECconnect Communications System does not
apply in all European countries.)
As a central communications hub, the Satellite Equipment Room (SER) houses
the active communications components. From the SER, communications cables
radiate to the DECconnect faceplate in each office in the area.
The network cohesiveness is most apparent at the DECconnect faceplate, which
provides plug-in connections for all four communications technologies. Each
technology is immediately available to every user. Users can plug their terminals, personal computers, workstations, or departmental systems into the
DEcconnect faceplate as easily as they would plug in their telephones.
This section provides an overview of the DECconnect Communications System
and component products. For a complete discussion of all aspects of DECconnect, refer to the DECconnect publications listed in Apendix D.

5.1 DECconnect

DECconnect Overview

The DECconnect Communications System has the following features:
• DEcconnect Faceplate
• Satellite Equipment Rooms (SER)
• ThinWire Ethernet Cabling (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
• DEC423-RS423 Signalling with Eos/Eso Protection
• Terminal Interconnect Support
• Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Support
• DEcsite Planning and Installation

Radial Topology

Cables are pulled in a radial topology with two easily accessible points: an office
wall faceplate and a satellite equipment room (SER). A radial topology combines
maximum office space coverage with ease of network management and maintenance. Figure 5.1 illustrates DECconnect's radial topology.

Figure 5.1
DECconnect Radial Topology

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

STANDARD
ETHERNET CABLE
(BACKBONE I

DECconnect Faceplate

FACEPLATE

The single connection point for all network services in the office or work area
is the H3111 faceplate. There are two types of faceplates, one for mounting flush
to a standard electrical box and one for mounting on modular furniture. The
user's terminal, personal computer or workstation, telephone, and video equipment plug into four outlets on the same faceplate. This faceplate features
connection points for the following services:
• ThinWire Ethernet Cable for high speed data transmission (10 Mbit/second)
• DEC423 Cable (4 unshielded twisted pair) for terminal data transmission
• Standard unshielded twisted-pair cable from Digital or the PBX vendor of choice
for voice communication
• Video coaxial cable connection for video transmission

5.2

DECconnect

DECconnect Overview

Satellite Equipment Room

The second connection point is the satellite equipment room.
Digital recommends that a satellite equipment room serve up to 64 users and
15, 000 to 20, 000 square feet of floor space. Unshielded twisted pair cables run
from faceplates in the work areas to a terminal server in the satellite equipment
room. The ThinWire cables for personal computer or workstation connections run from faceplates to a ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR)
in the satellite equipment room. Telephone cables run from faceplates to crossconnect wires in the satellite equipment room. The Digital faceplate will
accommodate AT&T, Rolm, Northern Telecom, and other PBXS.

ThinWire Ethernet Cabling

ThinWire Ethernet enables the configuration oflow-cost local area networks
in the work area by the use of inexpensive coaxial cable and BNC connectors.
ThinWire delivers 10 Mb/s Ethernet performance at a lower cost than standard
Ethernet.
In the DECconnect System, ThinWire cable runs from a multiport repeater
(DEMPR) in a satellite equipment room to H3111 faceplates in a local work area.
From the faceplates, desktop systems such as personal computers, workstations, and low-end systems are connected. Non-ThinWire devices are connected
to ThinWire Ethernet using the ThinWire Station Adapter (DESTA). Disk and
print servers can also be connected to ThinWire cable. (Most Digital Ethernet
devices connect to ThinWire cable via adapters; some Digital Ethernet devices
connect directly.)
The DEMPR can be used in two configurations: standalone, or connected to a
backbone Ethernet. In a standalone configuration, the DEMPR links desktop
systems in several offices in a resource sharing network. In standard Ethernet
configurations, the DEMPR gives users access to all the systems on the network.

DEC423-RS423 Signalling
with EOS/ESD Protection

DEC423 is an RS423-based interface for low speed terminal interconnection.
DEC423 provides all the improved signalling benefits of RS423 interconnection.
RS423 was chosen as the signalling standard due to its much improved performance over the current RS232 standard and its backwards compatibility with
existing RS232 equipment. With DEC423, Digital supports terminal-to-CPU
distances of 1000 feet compared with the RS232 standard of 50 feet. RS423 is also
fully compatible with all existing RS232 installations making major equipment
changes unnecessary. Digital provides adapters which enable the physical
connector changes required for RS232 terminals to plug into DEC423 communications controllers. DEC423 has the following features:
• RS423 signalling benefits, including CPU to terminal distances of up to 1000 feet at
19.2 Kb/s.
• Increased line density at the back of the CPU and remote connection through the
use of cable concentrators.
• Simplified cabling requirements with all cables having male connectors on both
ends and female connectors being designed into all future DEC423 devices.
• Improved cabling capabilities due to the use of unshielded cables while still
meeting full FCC certification.
Digital asynchronous devices with DEC423 signalling capabilities have the
enhancement of Electrical Over Stress/Electro Static Discharge (EOS/ESD) protection. This enhancement improves equipment reliability and availability by
protecting it from EOS damage due to static discharge, lightning, or AC power
surges, while still being 100% compliant with the RS423 standard ..

5.3

DECconnect

DECconnect Overview

Terminal Interconnect Support

Digital's DECconnect System moves the user from RS232 to DEC423 signalling,
cables, connectors and office products. To provide transition between these new
products, Digital has developed adapters, connectors and cables.
These products allow customers to install the DEcconnect system without
having to replace existing computing equipment. Digital supports the connection of new cabling to old products, new cabling to new products, and old
cabling to new products.
Digital has also developed a standard connection cable and modified modular
plug that can be used to connect terminals to DEC423 cabinet kits or to Digital
faceplates. The new standard cable is the DEC OFFICE CABLE (BC16E), an unshielded 6-conductor flat cable that is flexible and easy to coil. The BC16E cable
alleviates many current problems, such as cables which require special shielding, cables with critical length restrictions, and confusion regarding which
cables to use in a given situation.
Refer to Terminal Interconnect Products in this section for more information.

Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
Standard Support

All Digital second generation Ethernet products support the IEEE 802.3 LAN
standard, which is technically very similar to Ethernet. Digital is committed to
international standards so that customers can enjoy the benefits of multivendor
networking and have flexibility in the choice of equipment for their companies.

DECsite Planning and
Installation

Digital offers a complete line of planning and installation services for the
DECconnect Cabling System under the DECsite program. Refer to Field Service
Network Services in Section 7 for more information.

5.4

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

ThinWire Ethernet Products

ThinWire Ethernet delivers 10 Mb/s Ethernet to the desk, work area, and local
area systems for connection of Pcs, workstations, and computing systems.
ThinWire cabling and connection products are designed to the IEEE 802.3
Specification for Ethernet. The IEEE 802.3 Specification provides a simple,
inexpensive and flexible means of attaching devices to the local area network medium by recommending the use of industry standard cable and
BNC-type connectors.
ThinWire cable is a thin, flexible, and easy to install coaxial cable that is
compatible with standard Ethernet cable. These qualities make it very suitable
for horizontal interconnections of devices on a work area floor, and for
connecting local work areas to satellite equipment rooms.
In comparison, standard Ethernet cabling is recommended for vertical connections between work group areas because it can cover long distances (soom
compared to 185m for ThinWire) and has superior EMI/RFI resistance. These
qualities make it very suitable for interconnecting satellite equipment rooms on
facility floors, between floors, and between buildings.
ThinWire has the following characteristics:
• ThinWire products are compatible with the IEEE 802.3 specification, which allows users greater capability to participate in multi-vendor Ethernet networks.
• The maximum length of a ThinWire segment is 185 meters. 30 devices may
be connected to a single segment by daisy-~hained connections. When a
Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) is used 29 stations may be connected to each
segment ofThinWire cable.
• Most Ethernet devices are connected to ThinWire using a ThinWire Station
Adapter (DESTA).
• A ThinWire segment consists of sections linked together by BNC T-connectors.
The bottom of the "T" is inserted either into a DESTA, which is then connected
to the station, or into an Ethernet controller that supports a BNC connector.
T-connectors must be a minimum of0.5 meter apart.
• A maximum of eight ThinWire segments may be connected to a ThinWire
Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) to form a network of up to 232 stations. A Local
Network Interconnect (DELNI) may be used to concentrate up to eight DEMPRs.
These configurations can either stand alone or connect to the standard Ethernet
using an H4000 Transceiver (H4000-BA for DELNI/DEMPR combination).
• The Ethernet limit ofl,023 devices can be configured in a single ThinWire
Ethernet network.

5.5

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport
Repeater (DEMPR)

The DEMPR is a multiport repeater that provides eight ports for connection of
eight ThinWire Ethernet segments, and one port for connection to a transceiver.
It can be used as a standalone device, called a local DEMPR configuration, or
connected to a standard Ethernet, called a global DEMPR configuration. The
DEMPR retimes, amplifies, and repeats signals between each of its nine ports.
A DEMPR must be counted as a repeater when configuring a standard
Ethernet network.
Each ThinWire segment can be up to 185 meters in length (600 feet), and can accommodate connection of up to 29 stations, for a total of 232 stations per DEMPR.
Up to eight DEMPRs can be connected to a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI).
This configuration provides up to 64 cable segments for connection of up to
1,023 stations (Ethernet limit). This configuration, in turn, can be used either
in a standalone network, or connected to a standard Ethernet. An H4000-BA
transceiver is required for connecting the DELNI in this configuration to a
standard Ethernet cable. (A kit is available to convert an H4000 transceiver
to an H4000-BA.)
For DEMPR specifications and order codes, refer to Thin Wire Ethernet Products in
Section 2.

ThinWire Ethernet Station
Adapter (DESTA)

The DES TA allows connection of a single Ethernet station to ThinWire cabling.
The Station Adapter can be attached to standard-cable Ethernet controllers,
allowing UNIBUS, Q-bus, VAXBI, DEcsystem-20, and PRO 350/380 devices to
connect to ThinWire. It also allows Digital's Ethernet Communications and
Terminal Servers to connect to ThinWire.
The DESTA has one 15-pin connector port that allows it to be mounted in or near
the Ethernet station, and a second port for connection to the ThinWire cable. It
contains Ethernet transceiver (IEEE 802.3) circuitry and provides transceiver
functionality. DESTA is very compact, and is powered from the controller, like
the H4000.
For DESTA specifications and order codes, refer to Thin Wire Ethernet Products in
Section 2.

5.6

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

DECconnect ThinWire
Configurations

The DECconnect Communications System recommends an installation that
includes ThinWire coaxial cable, two twisted-pair cables (one for DEC423 and
one for the telephone), and (in some applications) video coaxial cable distributed in a radial topology from a local work area to a satellite equipment room.
The ThinWire cable extends, without interruption, from a DEMPR in the satellite
equipment room to an H3111 faceplate in the local work area, and then to PCs,
workstations, or systems. Devices in the local work area can be daisy-chained
on the ThinWire segment using T-connectors and DESTAs. The ThinWire cable
attaches to the faceplate with a BNC connector. The total length of a ThinWire
cable segment from DEMPR to furthest work area device is 185 meters. DECconnect ThinWire configurations are described below.

Standalone (Local) Configurations

In standalone or local configurations, a Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) acts as a
hub. Up to eight ThinWire segments run from the DEMPR to the local work
areas without interruption. In the local work area, ThinWire cables connect to
PCs, workstations, and low-end systems. The DEMPR interconnects devices from
up to eight local work areas in this configuration. The DEMPR will also isolate
faults in a segment, keeping the rest of the segments in operation. Figure 5.2
illustrates a standalone configuration in local work areas.

A larger standalone network can be formed by connecting up to eight DEMPR
hubs to a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). This configuration can service
up to 64 local work areas.

Figure 5.2
DECconnect Thin Wire
Standalone Configuration
(Local DEMPR Configuration)

,---------, ,------------------------------------------,
ThinWire Cable
I
I

L____________________~5~-~~~~~~~----------J
,-----------------------------------------! _. H3111 Face Plate
T-Connector
Terminator"Multiport
Repeater

DEQNA

Micro
Satellite :
Equipment:
1
Room _JI
L
_______

VAX II

Local Work Area-B

I
I
I
1

L------------------------------------------~

5.7 DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Connected Global Configurations

In connected or global configurations, multiple standalone configurations are
connected to a standard Ethernet coaxial cable. A DEMPR with up to eight
ThinWire segments attached can be connected to the Ethernet cable using an
H4000 Transceiver. This configuration provides standard Ethernet service for up
to eight local work areas. A maximum of two repeaters (DEREP or DEMPR) may
be connected between two stations.

A DELNI with up to eight attached DEMPRS must be connected to the Ethernet
cable using an H4000-BA Transceiver. This configuration provides standard
Ethernet service for up to 64 local work areas.
When a DELNI/DEMPR combination is connected to a standard Ethernet segment,
the following restrictions apply:
• The standard segment must be less than 300M.
• Connection to other standard Ethernet segments must be made using a LAN
Bridge (DEBET) only.
Both of the above configurations are suitable for installations that require both
local resource sharing and access to more powerful or remote computing
resources located on the standard Ethernet.
When connected to the standard Ethernet, the DEMPR will count as a repeater
in the standard Ethernet configuration restrictions.
Figure 5.3 illustrates a DEcconnect ThinWire connected configuration.

Figure 5.3
DECconnect Thin Wire
Connected Configuration

:---~4000--1 (Heartbeat Disabled)
I

Standard Ethernet "Back Bone" Coaxial Cable

I
I
I

r------------------------------------------~

ThinWire Cable

I
I
I
I

I
I

Local Work Area-A
L __________________________________________
_j

r------------------------------------~-----~

1... H.3111 Face Plate

T-Connector

Termmator ~

Multiport
Repeater
Micro

Satellite
Equipment l
1
Room _JI
L
_______

VAX II

Thin Wire Configuration Gutdelines

I
I
I
I

Local Work Area-B
1
L __________________________________________
_J
I

For more information about ThinWire Ethernet configuration guidelines, refer
to Ethernet Configuration Guidelines in Section 2.

5.8 DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Faceplate Products

DECconnect Faceplate Products can be used both in new installations or as
replacement products. The H3111-A and H3111-B faceplates have punch out jack
covers which can be removed for the installation of the proper connectors.

Flush Mount Faceplate

The H3111-B is a flat faceplate which provides connection to standard receptacle
boxes that have been installed in the wall. It mounts with two screws (included)
to the pre-installed wallbox after installation of the appropriate cables.

!Dl!!llDmD.

Suiface Mount Faceplate

The H3111-A is an alternate faceplate, self-enclosed for mounting to the walls of
modular furniture installations. It is cabled in a similar fashion to the H3111-B
except that cables run to the box from a raceway or along the floor, depending
on the type of furniture and panels installed. The cables enter the box from the
top or bottom, rather than from behind, and the box is mounted to the wall or
furniture with double-sided tape or magnets (included).
Both faceplates come with plugs to cover any unused openings. The desired
connectors are chosen separately. The MJ and MMJ are the same size and a customer may use two telephones or two data connectors, rather than one of each.
To install the faceplates, a tool kit (H8242) is required. The tool kit includes the
following equipment to install a faceplate of either type:
• A crimp tool which is used to attach the coaxial cable to the back of the
BNC connector
• A stripping tool to prepare the ThinWire before attaching the BNC connector
• A punch down tool which is used to attach the unterminated twisted pair cable
to the back of the MMJ and MJjacks
• A socket wrench which is used to attach the BNC connector and the F connector
to the faceplate
• Loop back connectors for testing
At least one tool kit is required per facility, but it is recommended that at least
one tool kit be ordered for each 100-120 faceplates installed. This is based on the
design center for the facility and not on the life expectancy of the tool.

5.9

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Faceplate Jacks and Connectors

DECconnectjacks and connectors are used to customize the faceplate to provide
essential network connections to office or other work areas. Several jacks and
connectors are available to customize the network to meet specific needs. Jacks
and connectors are available for four connection possibilities:
• High speed data over ThinWire Ethernet using a BNC connector (H3114) for use
with the H3111-A or H3111-B Faceplates (set of eight)
• Low speed data with DEC423 signalling using a modified modular jack
(H3113-A) for use with H3111-A or H3111-B Faceplates (set of eight)
• Voice connection combined with the PBX vendor of choice using one of three
modular jacks (H3112-A, H3112-B or H3112-D) for use with the H3111-A or H3111-B
Faceplates (set of eight)
• Video connection using a standard F video connector (H3115) for use with the
H3111-A or H3111-B Faceplates (set of eight)
The H3112-Ajack supports AT&T wiring, the H3112-Bjack supports a Northern
Telecom PBX or a Rolm PBX, and the H3112-D is a universal 8-pin modular jack
which can accommodate other PBXS. They can be snapped into the faceplate,
along with the H3113 for DEC423 wiring depending on PBX requirements.

Figure 5.4
Office Faceplate Con.figuration

TELEPHONE

VIDEO MONITOR

PC/WORKSTATION

5.10

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Satellite Equipment Room
Products

Satellite Equipment Room Products provide the necessary equipment to construct and outfit a Satellite Equipment Room. The H3120 SER Rack Package
provides the racks, frames, and additional hardware required to mount the
patch panels and construct the SER.
Two patch panels arc available for use in the Satellite Equipment Room with
low and high speed communications lines. The H3107-A Patch Panel is used to
patch twisted pair cable to a cable concentrator for low speed communications.
The H3107-B patch panel is used to patch ThinWire Ethernet cable to the
ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) for high speed communications. Both the H3107-A and the H3107-B arc designed for 16 users.
Adapter kits provide components to adapt Ethernet terminal servers for use
within the SER. The H3104-B DECserver 200 Adapter Kit is designed for eight
users and provides cable and a cable concentrator.
Two cable kits are also available for use with the SER. The H3117 Terminal
Interconnection SER Cable Kit provides 16 BC16E terminal patch cables. The
H3118 ThinWire SER Cable Kit provides 16 BC16K DEMPR connection cords and
16 BC16P ThinWire patch cables.
The DECserver 200/DL and ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR)
are available in rackmount versions for use within the SER. Refer to Section 2
and Thin Wire Ethernet Products in this section for product descriptions.

Figure 5.5
Satellite Equipment Room Configuration

TO OFFICES
TRANSCEIVER

-L-

-r7'------j~!:i Th~ireAND

r:'r------ru!',,,'=,,
!

sTAZl8L
ETHERNET l,_'
CABLE

TWISTED-PAIR

':.!:

CABLES

TRANSCEIVER i
CABLE

·:,~:

-+- f -+:+-::j=

_t-

t-tt:=:t-t=

J
r~iiiirul~~~
:~
'...1.:1..'...l' ••••••••
~
.z
DEMPRs
~~ii~::::::.iiil~
~1=1='~[~±========::=4 ~~~NE~l~~T
['2]
D
II ..L
:~._!__::::::
~~~~~s
anoooooo

_/_

00000000

:Q":::: ::

.,) ·

'-..._../ .

,~·

5.11

DECconnect

0
:

.,.,

lf>l

32_

fl p'i'Oo

·L

CABLE

V CONCEN-

- I L:::: f-::::~R

!'f---:;;:==~"""--161:
~l~\lc~'i!ilJO~~
IDllD~O~OO~
fftt#.tt.f'. DO
r;.,il!Jooooo
DEC
SERVERS

}

[oo~o

~ ~OO[JMD

p:n:ru.looJ10
oo~o

~ ~~g~g

PATCH
PANEL

DECconnect Products

Table 5.1
Faceplate and SER
Product Order Codes

Option

Order Code

DECconnect faceplate (surface mount)

H3111-A

DEcconnect faceplate (flush mount)*

H3111-B

Modular jack (AT&T connection)*

H3112-A

Modular jack (Northern Telecom, Rolm PBX connection)*

H3112-B

Modular jack (universal phone connection)*

H3112-D

Modified modular jack, RS423 signalling

H3113-A

Modified modular jack, spare SER only

H3113-B

Thinwire Ethernet BNC connector

H3114

Video connector, F style

H3115

Faceplate installation tool kit

H8242

1000' spool of ThinWire PVC cable

H8243-A

1000' spool of ThinWire Teflon cable

H8244-A

DECconnect Twisted Pair PVC cable

H8245-A

DECconnect Twisted Pair Teflon cable

H8246-A

SER starter, racks, power strip, cable managers, cable trays,
patching frame, and miscellaneous hardware

H3120

DECserver 200 adapter kit

H3104-B

PATCH PANEL used to patch office wiring for low speed data to
two terminal servers (16 users)

H3107-A

PATCH PANEL used to patch RG58 ThinWire Ethernet for high
speed data to two multiport repeaters (16 users)

H3107-B

Package oflow speed patch cords (16 users)

H3117

Package ofhigh speed patch cords (16 users)

H3118

DECserver 100/200 mounting brackets*

H3119

*Package of eight.

Terminal Interconnection
Components

DECconnect terminal interconnection components are the cable, connectors, and
adapters used to link terminals, terminal servers, and computer hosts within the
DEcconnect System. Low speed terminal communication in the DECconnect
System is based on the RS423 signalling standard. The Digital RS423-based
products (DEC423) enhance the industry standard RS232 performance by
• improving transmission speed
• increasing the distance that terminals can be located from host computers, and
• incorporating EOS/ESD protection.Digital offers the following DEC423 products
to interconnect devices using the RS423 signalling standard and to adapt devices
from RS232 signalling to RS423 signalling:

5.12

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Office Components

H8571A

BC16E-The DEC423 standard cable is the DEC OFFICE Cable (BC16E), an unshielded 6-conductor flat cable. The BC16E cable is terminated with a modified
modular plug (MMP), which has an offset key to prevent it from being
accidentally plugged into the phone jack.

The MMP is the DEC423 standard connector. To connect MMPs into existing
terminals and printers, passive physical adapters are required. Passive adapters
allow both RS232 and RS423 signalling to pass through. However, when RS423
devices are connected to RS232 wiring they are limited to RS232 signalling
parameters. Each passive adapter has a modified modular jack (MMJ) to receive
theMMP.
For terminal connection, the H8571-A Adapter (25-pin D subminiature) is
required. For printer connection, the H8571-B Adapter (9-pin D subminiature)
is required.

Figure 5.6
Office Con.figuration
with Passive Adapters

VT220

25 PIN

ADAPTER
H8571B

DEC423 also offers the H3105 Active Converter which transforms the signal
from an RS232 interface to the signal for a DEC423 interface, thus allowing full
DEC423 implementation.

Figure 5. 7
Office Con.figuration
with Active Converter

H3105
25PIN

ADAPTER

The H8572 Cable Extender (6-conductor) is available, which can be used to
extend the length of two MMP pre-terminated cables.

H8572

5.13

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

SER Components

Terminal Servers-The DECserver 200/DL may be used in the SER. The
DECserver 200 supports DEC423 signalling and is packaged as a desktop unit
which can be easily adapted for use in the SER. The DECserver 200/DL requires
the H3104-B Adapter Kit, which contains a cable concentrator, loopback
connector, and BC16C-10 cable.
The following two cables are also available for use with the DECconnect System:
• BC16C/D-A PVC 36-conductor cable used in conjunction with the 36-pin

conductor on the H3104 cable concentrator. The BC16c has one right-angle
36-pin D-connector and one straight 36-pin D-connector. The BC16D has two
right-angle 36-pin D-connectors.
The H3106 Adapter adapts BC16cln/H/J cable to 25-pair (so-conductor) trunk
wiring. Both sides of the adapter are female connectors.
Two loopback connectors are used with the DECconnect System. The H3101
Loopback Connector has one female and one male 36-pin connector (only one
used at a time). The coupler is used to loopback BC16C/D cable or any other
36-pin component. The H3103 MM] Loopback Connector is used to loop back
SER-to-faceplate data lines in the SER. This is done during line testing and
line certification.
A cable concentrator is used in the SER to concentrate the BC16E terminal cables
for connection to terminal servers or host computers. The Cable Concentrator
(sold in the H3104-A or H3104-B) has eight female 8-pin modified modular plugs
that accept BC16E cables. These connections are physically converted into a
single female 36-pin connection that accepts a BC16c/D 36-conductor cable.
BC16E cable supports data only connections. Modems must still be used via
RS232 connections. RS232 will continue to be available to support modems and
other devices that require full control signalling, using the currently available
25-pin connectors.
An alternate to specifying pre-terminated lengths of cables is to allow the
installer to field terminate unterminated cable with the required MMPS. This is
accomplished with an H8241 CRIMP TOOL which is used to crimp Loose MMPs
(H8220} on unterminated cable (H8240). For configuration information about
terminal interconnection components, consult the DECconnect System Planning
and Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG).

5.14

DECconnect

DECconnect Products

Table 5.2
Terminal Interconnection Products
Order Codes

Option

Order Code

36-conductor cable, right
angle-to-straight o-connectors

BC16C

36-conductor cable, right
angle-to-right angle o-connectors

BC16D

36-pin Loopback Connector

H3101

36-pin Cable Coupler

H3102

MMJ Loopback Connector

H3103

DECserver 200 Adapter Kit

H3104-B

25-pin Active Converter (nov)

H3105-A

25-pin Active Converter (220/240v)

H3105-B

36-pin to SO-pin Adapter

H3106

Package of so MMP

H8220

1000 foot spool of unterminated,
6-conductor cable

H8240

Crimp tool for 6-conductor cable

H8241

25-pin Passive Adapter

H8571A

9-pin Passive Adapter

H8571B

6-conductor Cable Extender

H8572

5.15

DECconnect

Section 6
Standard Network Packages
Introduction

The Standard Network Packages are available only in the United States.
Digital has developed a set of Standard Network Packages to make it easier for
customers to configure and order network solutions. Each of the Standard
Network Packages represents a basic network building block that includes the
major communications hardware, cabling, and in some cases, software required
to implement that specific network solution. This modular approach to network
design and ordering can be effectively utilized by customers whose networking
requirements vary from a small standalone work group to a large multiple site
installation. This can be accomplished by purchasing the appropriate Standard
Network Packages individually, or in combination with other packages to form
larger networks.
The Standard Network Packages have been designed to work with existing
Digital equipment in current system installations. All Digital computer systems
having DECnet capability can be used with the Standard Network Packages.
The hardware and software products contained in the Standard Network
Packages are described in Section 2: Ethernet Local Area Networks and
Section 5: DEcconnect Communications System.
The packages are organized into four categories, based on typical customer
requirements. Three of the categories are based on geographic considerations.
The fourth provides the capability to integrate another vendor's network into
the Digital network.
The four categories of Standard Network Packages are:
• Local Area Work Group Interconnection
• Extended Local Area Interconnection
• Wide Area Interconnection
• Multivendor Interconnection

6.1

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Local Area Work Group Interconnection provides connectivity among users
that are typically involved in related activities and are located on the same floor.
There are four Local Area Work Group Interconnection Packages:
• The DECconnect Integrated Communications Package-provides integration
and full access to the communication technologies commonly used in the office:
low speed data, high speed data, voice (telephone), and video. This system uses
a simple faceplate at the user locations to provide easy "plug in" access to the
desired communications technologies.
• The Low Speed Work Group Package-provides network access for areas
where the equipment used in work groups includes terminals, printers, and
personal computers in terminal emulation mode.
• The High Speed Work Group Package-is used in areas where the equipment is
primarily PCs and/or workstations, and the applications require rapid transfer of
large amounts of data.
• The IBM PC Interconnection Package-is a special application of the High Speed
Work Group Package in which IBM personal computers are being used at the
customer site. This package allows full utilization of the Digital network using
IBM PCS.

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Extended Local Area Interconnection links individuals, groups, or departments
in geographically distinct work areas that are relatively close to each other.
There are three Standard Network Packages in this category:
• The Building Package-links all, or selected, floors of a building together
in one common network. It is used to connect separate departments or
work groups.
• The Site Package-connects multiple buildings in a site, such as a university
campus or an office complex.
• The Computer Room Package-efficiently connects up to eight computers in
one location to the network through one interface. Each of the computers may,
in turn, support its own.local area network.

Wide Area Interconnection

Wide Area Interconnection provides for network access between sites that are
geographically remote from one another. A typical application links a headquarters operation with all of its manufacturing plants, sales offices, and distribution
centers. There are two Wide Area Interconnection Packages:
• The Wide Area Gateway Package-connects a local area network at one site
with a local area network at another site.
• The Remote Site Interconnection Package-allows organization members
at a geographically remote site to gain access to the organization's local area
network via a leased line, when there is no computer/network in operation at
the remote site.

Multivendor Interconnection

Multivendor Interconnection allows information to be transferred between a
Digital network and the network of another vendor, and enables the information to be used on either system. There is one Multivendor Interconnection
Package:
• The DECnet/SNA Gateway Package-allows communication between an IBM
SNA network and a DECnet network. Users may send and retrieve information
or perform specific functions on IBM host systems connected to the SNA
network.

6.2

Standard Network Packages

The relationship of the standard network packages in a large network is
illustrated in Figure 6.1. The network configuration is greatly simplified in the
diagram in order to clearly indicate the purpose of each package.

Figure 6.1
Relationship of Standard Network
Package in a Large Network

1 DEC connect Integrated Communications Package
2 Low Speed Work Group Package
3 High Speed Work Group Package
4 IBM PC Interconnection Package
5 Computer Room Package
6 Building Package
7 Site Package
8 Wide Area Gateway Package

9 Remote Site Interconnection Package
10 nEcnet/SNA Gateway Package

6.3

Standard Network Packages

Ordering Standard Network Packages

Service Solutions

Digital's service solutions are an important part of an ongoing commitment
to meet the customer's needs. Digital can tailor a service solution to meet
requirements for designing, implementing, or operating a Digital network.
The services available include network design consulting, network installation
(for hardware, software, and cabling), ongoing maintenance and remedial
support, and network management tools and support. Refer to Section 7:
Network Services for more information.
All hardware products sold in Standard Network Packages include a one-year
warranty from Digital.

Ordering Standard Network
Packages

Each Standard Network Package consists of one or two product areas:
• Network hardware products (required for all packages)
• Network software products (required for many packages)
A product description and ordering table for each Standard Network Package is
contained in the following pages. The exact ordering requirements for these products
must be followed. This ensures that all the appropriate hardware and software
necessary to implement the desired network solution are ordered. The installation of standard Ethernet backbone cable, to which the electronic hardware
connects, is not included in the Standard Network Packages. Digital custom
designs and installs the backbone cable as needed, to meet specific customer
requirements.
In addition to the products that are required for each base package, there may
be the need to order additional network hardware, software, and/or services to
provide the desired network solution. The need for these optional products and
services vary according to customer requirements of such things as number
of offices, type of equipment requiring connection, physical facility layouts,
and existing customer software. The optional products can also be ordered
to expand an existing network installation, where the customer already has
many of the required base package components. The most common of
these optional products are listed in the ordering tables of each Standard
Network Package.

6.4

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Local Area Work Group
Interconnection

Local Area Work Group Interconnection provides connectivity among users
that are typically involved in related activities and are located on the same floor.
Local Area Work Group Interconnection enhances work communications,
allows effective and efficient sharing of computer resources, and provides
information consistency through a common database.

DECconnect Integrated
Communications Package

The DECconnect Integrated Communications Package includes all of the hardware and software necessary to establish a Local Area Network using Digital's
DECconnect strategy. The DECconnect solution utilizes Satellite Equipment
Rooms (sER) as the centralized location for the required electronic hardware and
wiring connections. The required cables radiate from the SER to each office/user
location, where a DEcconnect faceplate provides convenient user access to low
speed (terminal), high speed (work system), and voice (telephone) communications. Figure 6.2 illustrates the DECconnect configuration in an office environment. Refer to Section 5 for additional information on the DECconnect system.

Figure 6.2

THINWIRE
ETHERNET CABLE

DECconnect System

ETHERNET
BACKBONE

6.5

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

The number of offices (users) and type of devices (low speed/high speed)
that are connected on the local area network largely determines the number of
required Satellite Equipment Rooms and hardware products. The physical office
layout on the floor is another important consideration when designing the
appropriate DECconnect solution. Wiring of the backbone Ethernet cable in the
building (for connection to the SER) is not part of the DEcconnect Package.
Digital performs this function on a custom basis to meet individual
customer needs.
Figure 6.3 illustrates the set up and hardware configuration of a typical Satellite
Equipment Room in a network that requires both low speed and high
speed connections.

Figure 6.3
Satellite Equipment
Room Configuration

TO DECconnect
FACEPLATES
IN OFFICES
TRAN~EIVER

.l ETHERNET BACKBONE

..l

.L.

sTANZ
ETHERNET

l':'~::ir-------1",M-,-r._.-----~'"'!,l Th~ireAND

CABLE

TWISTED-PAIR

CABLES

IJ
L_

DEMPRs

LI.
LI.

: '...1.:.r.l.l..

l ll. :1_::: :::

LI.

~:::: ::

\\\\Tl

1 ~_,1
:

'-....__../

~·o
:IL
W

~·

~~900

~-TELEP
EQUIPMENT I
ANYVENDORlDELNI

~\~

000000000 D ~ ~ D

CABLE

V CONCEN-

L:J~::::~R
~DODOO

: lt:IE

__,oO

~~~NE";'.;::T
~~~~ts

:~~._;__::::::

D
LI.

DEC
SERVERS

PATCH
PANEL

DODOO
:
••

l:!DDOO~I 0

"-..\

~gg_¢og

-\.

~-~--~~00~0~~~0
mooobo
ooqgjfo_o
'7

!
l

~l"'r-------~~-------w'~
'

SER RACKING

6.6

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Ordering Guidelines for the
DECconnect System

The configuration guidelines and ordering rules in this section provide a
methodology for selecting the appropriate number of DECconnect package
components to meet various networking needs.
To determine the appropriate quantity of hardware and software products
required to implement the network, follow these steps:
• Order one Satellite Equipment Room rack (DEPKF-Sl) for each 64 offices, or part
thereof Additional Satellite Equipment Rooms may be required if physical
distances between offices are large, or if a high proportion of offices utilizes low
and high speed connections simultaneously.
• Determine the number of required low speed and high speed connections
in total for all offices (for each SER). Refer to the following sections on Low
Speed and High Speed Work Group Packages for additional detail. Find the
appropriate letter in Table 6.1 (Low Speed/High Speed Connections), corresponding to the connection requirements.
• Using Table 6.2 (DEcconnect Ordering Matrix), find the letter selected from
Table 6.1 in the previous step. Read across the.row to determine the quantity of
hardware, software, and service product components to order. Repeat these
steps for each multiple of 64 offices to be connected or portion thereof. Add
together the quantities of similar components to determine the total order
requirements for the DECconnect installation.
• Use Table 6.3 (nEcconnect Order Codes) to fill in the cumulative totals of each
component in the quantity column next to the corresponding order code. All
quantities were determined previously from Table 6.2. The above steps must
be followed to ensure that all necessary products are ordered to complete the
desired network solution.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order either NMCc/vAx
ETHERnim or NMCC/DEcnet Monitor. Refer to Network and System Management Products in Section 3 for product descriptions. Order codes for both the
software license and media/ documentation are required.

6.7

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection
Table 6.1
Low Speed/High Speed
Connections
No. of Required
High Speed
Connections

No. of Required Low Speed Connections

0
1-8
9-16
17-24

9-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

G2*

H2*

NIA

N2*

02*

NIA

T2*

U2*

NIA

Y2*

Z2*

NIA

C3*

D3*

NIA

F3*

G3*

NIA

A
--- ---

--- ----- ----- ---

25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64

1-8

---

--- ----- ---

-----

*In Floor Package configurations with over 64 connections, up to a maximum of 80 can be supported within the standard
rack; a slot is available for an additional DEcserver 200 or DEMPR. In these cases two base packages must be ordered.

Table 6.2
DECconnect Ordering Matrix
Required Package Component Order No.
Selected Letter From Table D

DEPKL-01

DEPKL-A1

DEPKH-01

DEPKH-At

Q*Z06-UZ

s
T

6.8

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection
Table 6.2
DECconnect Ordering Matrix (Continued)

DEPKL-01

DEPKL-Al

DEPKH-01

DEPKH-Al

Q*Z06-UZ

u
v
w
x

A2
B2

2
2
-----

G2*

H2*

K2
L2

---------

----~-----·---

N2*

02*

T2*

U2*

Y2*

Z2*

C3*

D3*

F3*

G3*

7
6.9

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 6.3
DECconnect Integrated
Communications Package Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Satellite equipment room

SER rack

DEPKF-S1

Low speed products

Low speed base package

DEPKL-01

(Refer to Table 6.5 for contents)

Low speed add-on

DEPKL-A1

DECserver 200 software license

Q*Z06-UZ

DEcserver 200 software media and
documentation (order one per load host
computer)

Q*z06-H#

High speed products

High speed base package

DEPKH--01

(Refer to Table 6. 7 for contents)

High speed add-on

DEPKH-A1

*Refer to Section 2: DECserver 200 Software Order Codes for a list of supported processors and distribution media.

6.10 Standard Network Packages

Quantity
(Fill in)

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Low Speed Work Group
Package-Terminal
Interconnection

Network Hardware Products

The Low Speed Work Group Package links devices operating at speeds between
75 b/s and 19.2 Kb/s (terminals, printers, and personal computers in terminal

emulation mode) to a local area network. The preconfigured base package
supplies the products required to connect up to eight terminals to the Ethernet
backbone of the network.
The Low Speed Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4000)
• One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
• One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server (DSRVB-BA)
• One DEC423 Cable Kit (H3104-B)
• Two baseband Ethernet transceiver cables

Network Software

• DECserver 200 software media and documentation (1 per load host)
• DECserver 200 software license (1 per DECserver 200)
Figure 6. 4 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the Low Speed Base Package. Add-on packages allow for the connection of
up to 56 additional terminals, in multiples ofs, to the base network connection
outlined above.

Figure 6.4
Low Speed Work Group
Package- Terminal Interconnection
Con.figuration

H4000

twisted pair
cable

1 ••• 8

to DECconnect faceplates
in offices
*nEcserver 200/n1

6.11

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Ordering Guidelines for Low Speed
Work Group Package

Use Table 6.4 to determine the quantity of products required to satisfy each
terminal interconnection (low speed) situation. The table should be used each
time a distinct work group and/or a work group of more than 64 offices is
connected to the network backbone. To use the table:
• List all of the distinct work groups and the number of users within each
work group.
• If a distinct work group has more than 64 users, divide it by 64 and round up to
the next whole number. For ordering purposes in using the table, the one large
work group is treated as several different work groups. (As an example, assume
that there are two work groups consisting of14 users and 80 users. The second
work group of80 would be treated as two groups, since 80 divided by 64 rounds
up to two.)
• Use Table 6.4 once for each work group by reading down the appropriate
column corresponding to the number oflow speed connections in that work
group to determine the exact quantity of each package component listed on the
left, for example, DEPKL-01 or DEPKL-Al. (In the above example, the matrix
would be used once for the first work group of14 users and two more times for
the larger work group of 80. The breakdown of the larger work group into two
groups should consider relative office locations and future expansion requirements. In this example, the larger group could become two groups of 40 each,
one group of 64 and one group of 16, or other combinations totaling 80.)
• After using the matrix for each work group, add together the quantities of each
package component to find the total order requirements for each component.
• Use Table 6.5 (Low Speed Work Group Package Order Codes) to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities that were determined above. Follow
all Product/Order Requirements exactly.

Table 6.4
Low Speed Work Group Package
Ordering Matrix
Number ofTerminal Connections
Per Work Group
Required Package
Component Order No.

1-8

9-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

DEPKL-01

41-48

49-56

57-64

---

DEPKL-Al
Q*Z06-UZ

Q*Z06-H#

1 per load host computer**

**Typically one per local area network

6.12

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 6.5
Low Speed Work Group Package
Order Codes
Quantity
Network hardware

Product Description

Order Code

Base package

DEPKL-01

(Fill in)

One H4000 transceiver
OneDELNI
One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server
One DEC423 Cable Kit (H3104-B)
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)

Add-on

DEPKL-Al

One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)

Network software 1

DECserver 200 software license
(One required per DEcserver 200)
DECserver 200 software media and
documentation (One required per load host
computer)

Q*Z06-UZ
Q*Z06-H#

*Refer to Section 2: DECserver 200 Software Order Codes for a list of supported processors and distribution media.
1 The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU operating system and the DECserver 200 software.
Refer to Software Product Description 27.53.xx.

6.13

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

High Speed Work Group
Package-Work System
Interconnection

Network Hardware Products

The High Speed Work Group Package links workstations, personal computers, and low-end systems operating at speeds greater than 19.2 Kb/s to a
local area network. The preconfigured base package supplies the products
required to connect up to eight work systems to the Ethernet backbone of the
network.
The High Speed Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4000-BA)
• One Local Network Interconnect (nELNI)
• One ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR)
• Two baseband Ethernet transceiver cables
Figure 6. 5 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the high speed base package. Add-on packages allow for the interconnection
of up to 56 additional work systems, in multiples of 8, to the base network
connection outlined above.

Figure 6.5
High Speed Work Group
Package-Work System Interconnection
Configuration

H4000-BA

1 ,,, 8

ThinWire
Ethernet cable

to DECconnect faceplates
in offices

6.14 Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Ordering Guidelines for
High Speed Work Group Package

Use Table 6.6 to determine the quantity of products and services required
to satisfy each work system interconnection (i.e. high speed) situation. The
matrix should be used each time a distinct work group and/or a work group
of more than 64 offices is connected to the network backbone. To use the
ordering matrix:
• List all the distinct work groups and the number of users within each
work group.
• If a distinct work group has more than 64 users, divide it by 64 and round up to
the next whole number. For ordering purposes in using the matrix, one large
work group is treated as several smaller work groups. (As an example, assume
that there are two work groups consisting of14 users and 80 users. The second
work group of80 would be treated as two groups, since 80 divided by 64 rounds
up to two.)

• Use Table 6.6 once for each work group by reading down the appropriate
column corresponding to the number of high speed connections in that work
group to determine the exact quantity of each package component that is listed
on the left, for example, DEPKH-01 or DEPKH-A1: (In the above example, the
matrix would be used once for the first work group of fourteen users, and two
more times for the larger work group of 80. The breakdown of the larger work
group into two groups should consider relative office locations and future
expansion requirements. In this example, the larger group could become two
groups of 40 each, one group of64 and one group of16, or other combinations
totaling 80.)
• After using the table for each work group, add together the quantities of each
package component to find the total order requirements for each component.
• Use Table 6. 7 (High Speed Work Group Package Order Codes) to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities that were determined above. Follow
all Product/Order Requirements exactly.

Table 6.6
High Speed Work Group Package
Ordering Matrix
·
Number of Work System Connections
Per Work Group
Required Package
Component Order No.

1-8

. 9-16

17-24

25-32

33-40

41-48

49-56

57-64

DEPKH-01
DEPKH-A1

6.15

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 6. 7
High Speed Work Group Package
Order Codes

Network hardware

Product Description

Order Code

Base package
One H4000-BA transceiver
OneDELNI
OneDEMPR
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)
Add-on
OneDEMPR
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)

DEPKH-01

6.16

Standard Network Packages

DEPKH-Al

Quantity
(Fill in)

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

IBM PC Interconnection
Package

Network Hardware

The IBM PC Interconnection Package provides the hardware and software
products necessary to connect up to eight IBM PCs to the Digital network. This
is accomplished through the use of an Ethernet controller in each of the IBM PCs,
which enables communication on the network. The IBM PCS connect to the
Ethernet backbone through a multiport repeater (DEMPR) which consolidates
the eight connections through one transceiver.
The IBM PC Interconnection Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver cable
• One ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater
• Eight Ethernet controller boards with software licenses for DECnet-DOS and
VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS Client software

Network Software

• One DECnet-DOS software media and documentation (one required
per network)
Figure 6.6 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the IBM PC Interconnection Package. This configuration is appropriate when
up to eight IBM PC connections are required. (When more than eight IBM PC
network connections are required from the same transceiver, refer to Ordering
Guidelines for More Than Eight IBM PCs.)

Figure 6.6
IBM PC Interconnection Package

H4000

Transceiver Cable

1 ••• 8

ThinWire
Ethernet cable

to IBM PCS

6.17

Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Ordering Guidelines for Eight or Less
IBM PCs per Work Group

Use Table 6.9 (IBM PC Interconnection Package Order Codes) to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities determined:
• Order one hardware base package for each eight IBM PC connections in a distinct
office area. (If there arc more than eight users in the same work group, up to 64
IBM PCs in total, refer to Ordering Guidelines for More than Eight IBM PCs per Work

Group.)
• Order the DECnet-DOS software media and documentation (QVAOS-HI). Only
one of these order codes is required per network. When there are many IBM PC
users connected to the network, it may be desirable to order additional software
media and documentation kits.

Ordering Guidelines for More than Eight
IBM PCs per Work Group

When there are more than eight IBM PCs per work group, use the High Speed
Work Group Package Order Codes as well as IBM PC Add-on Order Codes
as follows:
• Follow the Ordering Guidelines for the High Speed Work Group Package to
determine the number of High Speed Hardware Base and High Speed Add-on
Packages needed.
• For every eight IBM PCs (or portion thereof), order one IBM PC Add-on Package
from Table 6. 9. (The IBM PC Add-on Package consists of eight IBM PC Ethernet
controller boards.)
•Order the DECnet-DOS software media and documentation (QVAOS-HI). Only
one of these order codes is required per network. When there are many IBM PC
users connected to the network, it may be desirable to order additional software
media and documentation kits.

Table 6.9
IBM PC Interconnection Package

Order Codes

Network hardware

Network software

Product Description

Order Code

Base package
One H4000 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
OneDEMPR
Eight Ethernet controller boards with
DECnet-DOS and VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS
Client software licenses (DEPCA-BA)
Add-on
Eight Ethernet controller boards with
DECnet-DOS and VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS
Client software licenses (DEPCA-BA)

DEPKP-01

One DECnet-DOS software media and
documentation (one required per network)

QVAOS-HI

6.18

Standard Network Packages

DEPKP-Al

Quantity
(Fill in)

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Extended Local Area
Interconnection

Extended Local Area Interconnection links individuals, groups, or departments
in geographically distinct work areas that are relatively close to each other.
Extended Local Area Interconnection enhances communication between individuals and departments that are not easily accessible to each other, facilitates
better decision-making through more timely and accurate information
flow, and provides effective and efficient use of computing power and
support resources.

Computer Room Package

The Computer Room Package provides the base network hardware necessary
to link up to eight computers within a computer room environment to an
existing Ethernet backbone. Any systems with Digital Ethernet communication controllers and DECnet software can be used with this package. Depending
on internal cabling, computers may be located up to 40 meters from the
transceiver in this package.

Network Hardware Products

The Computer Room Package includes the following products:
• One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (tt4000)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver cable
Figure 6. 7 details the hardware configuration of the network products
provided in the Computer Room Package. Note that, due to variations in
distance between the Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) and computers
being connected to the network, the transceiver cables are available only on
a custom basis.

Figure 6. 7
Computer Room
Package Configuration

H4000

.,.Transceiver Cable

Transceiver

Cables

to computers

6.19

Standard Network Packages

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Computer Room Package
Ordering Guidelines

Use Table 6.10 (Computer Room Package Order Codes) to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities that are determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package for each group of eight computers
in the computer room.
• Digital can provide the required cabling and installation to connect each
computer to the DELNI on a custom basis.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation, order the
NETstart Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34-sz).
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order either NMcc/vAx
ETHERnim or NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Refer to Network and System Management Products in Section 3 for product descriptions. Order codes for both
the software license and media/ documentation are required.

Table 6.10
Computer Room Package
Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware

OneDELNI
One H4000 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)

DEPKC-01

Optional Network service

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

6.20

Standard Network Packages

Quantity
(Fill in)

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Building Package

The Building Package provides the capability to connect different floors of a
building to a local area network (LAN). The Building Package allows a customer
to isolate traffic within an Ethernet segment and to extend Ethernet LANS
beyond the usual 2,800 meter limitation. This package delivers 10 Mb/s Ethernet
capability in either of two configurations: Package A connects two floors of a
building, up to 100 meters apart, for use with coaxial Ethernet cable (not
included); Package B connects two floors of a building, up to 1000 meters apart,
for use with fiber optic cable (not included).
The Building Package includes the following products:

Network Hardware Products

Order one of the following packages:
• Package A-For economical, local connection to the Ethernet coaxial cable
between floors of a building, up to 100 meters:
One standard LAN Bridge 100
Two Baseband Ethernet transceivers (tt4000)
Two Baseband Ethernet transceiver cables
• Package B-For local connection to the Ethernet fiber optic cable between floors
of a building, up to 1000 meters:
One Remote Ethernet Repeater
One Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100
Two baseband Ethernet transceivers (H4000)
Two baseband Ethernet transceiver cables
Figures 6.8 and 6. 9 detail the hardware configuration of the network products
provided in each of the two Building Package alternatives.

Figure 6.8
Building Package A
Con.figuration

---

H4000

I. .

Transceiver
Cable

Standard
Bridge

Transceiver Cable

Figure 6.9
Building Package B
Con.figuration

H4000

.... Transceiver

Cable

Transceiver Cable

.----~~~~~~

6.21

Standard Network Packages

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Building Package
Ordering Guidelines

Use Table 6.11 (Building Package Order Codes) to compile the complete order
by filling in the quantities determined:
• Determine the base network hardware package required to interconnect the
floors and/or buildings in the network. Order one hardware package for each
Building Package.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation, order one
NETstart-Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34-sz) per building.
• For customers who require long-range network planning, order one Network
Planning and Design Package (QSNET-sz) per building.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local area
networks. If network management is required, order either NMcc/vAx ETHERnim
or NMcc/nEcnet Monitor. Refer to Network and System Management Products
in Section 3 for product descriptions. Order codes for both the software license
and media/ documentation are required.
Digital can provide the design and installation of coaxial and fiber optic cabling
on a custom basis. They are not included in the Building Package.

Table 6.11
Building Package
Order Codes

Network hardware

Optional Network services

Product Description

Order Code

Package A (local coaxial connections)
One LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-AA)
Two H4000 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)
Package B (local fiber optic connections)
One Remote Ethernet Repeater (DEREP-RC)
One Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RC)
Two H4000 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-OS)

DEPKB-Bl

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

6.22

Standard Network Packages

DEPKB-B2

Quantity
(Fill in)

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Site Package

The Site Package provides the capability to extend the LAN between buildings
that are in close proximity, such as a university campus or office complex.
Hence, the Site Package allows a customer to extend Ethernet LANs beyond the
usual 2,800 meter limitation. This package delivers 10 Mb/s Ethernet capability
between buildings within an extended local area, up to 2000 meters using fiber
optic cable (not included).

Network Hardware Products

The Site Package includes the following products:
• Two Fiber Optic LAN Bridge lOOs
• Two baseband Ethernet transceivers (H4000)
• Two baseband Ethernet transceiver cables
Figure 6.10 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the Site Package.

Figure 6.10
Site Package
Configuration

H4000

..... Transceiver

Cable

6.23

Standard Network Packages

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Site Package
Ordering Guidelines

Use Table 6.12 (Site Package Order Codes) to compile the complete order by
filling in the quantities determined:
• Determine the base network hardware package required to interconnect the
floors and/or buildings in the network. Order one hardware package for each
Site Package.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation, order one
NETstart-Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34-sz) per building.
• For customers who require long-range network planning, order one Network
Planning and Design Package (QSNET-sz) per building.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local area
networks. If network management is required, order either NM CC/VAX ETHERnim
or NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Refer to Network and System Management Products
in Section 3 for product descriptions. Order codes for both the software license
and media/ documentation are required.

Table 6.12
Site Package
Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware

Two Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100s (DEBET-RC)
Two H4000 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)

DEPKB-B3

Optional Network services

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

6.24

Standard Network Packages

Quantity
(Fill in)

Wide Area Interconnection

Wide Arca Interconnection provides for network access between sites that are
geographically remote from one another. A typical application links a headquarters operation with all of its manufacturing plants, sales offices, and distribution
centers. Wide Arca Interconnection facilitates better management control
through more accurate and timely information gathering, processing, and
reporting. It provides immediacy and uniformity for information updates to
field operations in areas such as pricing, policy, and product availability. And it
enables an organization to coordinate its efforts in response to market
conditions.

Wide Area Gateway Package

The Wide Area Gateway Package provides the capability for customers with
a local Digital network to connect to remote Digital networks or systems.
Communication can be accomplished via either private or public data networks. The Wide Area Gateway Package can be used with any standard
systems or CPUS with Digital Ethernet communication controllers and DECnet
software. Digital can provide individual site survey and installation plans to
ensure proper routing of cable and placement of electronics. Digital can also
quote materials and labor necessary to route and install the appropriate cabling.
The following products are included in the Wide Area Gateway Package:

Network Hardware Products

• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4000)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver cable
• One DECnet Router Server hardware (DECSA-EA)
•One DECSA u.s. Country Kit (DECSK-AA)

Network Software

Order one of the following:
•DECnet Router Server software (Q*725-xx), or
•DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway software (Q*727-xx)
Figure 6.11 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the Wide Area Gateway Package.

Figure 6.11
Wide Area Gateway
Package Configuration

H4000

*Router Server or x.25 Gateway

6.25

Standard Network Packages

•••

Wide Area Interconnection

Wide Area Gateway
Ordering Guidelines

Use Table 6.13 (Wide Area Gateway Package Order Codes) to compile the
coniplete order by filling in the quantities determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package (DEPKR-01) for each Wide Area
Gateway Package.
• Order one of the following software packages for each Wide Area Gateway
Package (* refers to the CPU that will downline-load the software, # refers to
the type of media)
DECnet Router Server License (Q*725-uz) and Media and Documentation
(Q*725-H#), or
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway License (Q*727-uz) and Media and Documentation (Q*727-H#)
Note: The level of software service contract must be the same for both the
CPU operating system and the DECnet Router Server or DECnet/x.25 Gateway
software. Refer to SPD 30.34.xx or SPD 30.41.xx.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation, order one
NETstart Plus Network Startup Package (QSC3+.-sz) per building.
• For customers who require long-range network planning, order one
Network Planning and Design Package (QSNET-sz) per building.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order the NM CC/DECnet
Monitor. Refer to Network and System Mahagement Products in Section 3
for a product description. Order Codes for both the software license and
media/ documentation are required.

6.26

Standard Network Packages

Wide Area Interconnection

Table 6.13
Wide Area Gateway Package
Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware

One H4000 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One DECSA DECnet router server
One DECSA u.s. Country Kit

DEPKR-01

Network software 1

DECnet Router Server software license
(one per package only)

Q*725-uz

DECnet Router Server software media and
documentation (one per package)
or
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway software license
(one per package only)

Q*725-H#

DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway software media and
documentation, (one per package)

Q*727-H#

NETstart Plus Network Startup package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

Optional Network services

Quantity
(Fill in)

Q*727-uz

*Refer to Section 2: DECnet Router Software Order Codes and Section 3: DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway Software Order Codes for
a list of supported processors and distribution media.
1 The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU operating system and the DECnet Router Server or
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway software. Refer to the appropriate Software Product Descriptions.

6.27

Standard Network Packages

Wide Area Interconnection

Remote Site Interconnection
Package

The Remote Site Interconnection Package links terminals, printers, and persoqal computers (in terminal emulation mode) in a remote site to an Ethernet
local area network via one leased phone line. The products in this package
combine terminal server and statistical multiplexing techniques to enable
remote site connection.
The Base Package supplies the products and services required to connect up
to eig~t remote devices over a leased phone line to a local Ethernet. The base
package plus the Add-on Package connects up to 16 devices from one remote
site over a leased phone line to a local Ethernet. External modems that run at
9.6 Kb/s a~e used in this package to connect over the leased phone line.

Network Hardware Products

The Remote Site Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4000)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver cable
• One Muxserver 100 (DSRZA-BA)
• One DEcmux n (DFMZA-BA)
•Two 9600 bis synchronous modems (DF129-AA)
• Two modem cables

Network Software

• Muxserver 100 software media and documentation (one per load host)
• Muxserver 100 software license (one per Muxserver 100)

Figure 6.12
Remote Site Interconnection
Configuration

H4000

Ethernet Coaxial Cable

DEC

MUX
Modem ,____

6.28

Standard Network Packages

__...,

Wide Area Interconnection

Table 6.14
Remote Site Interconnection
Package Order Codes
Quantity

Network hardware

Product Description

Order Code

Base Package:

DEPKM-01

(Fill in)

One H4000 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One MUXserver 100 (DSRZA-BA)
One DEC:mux II (DFMZA-BA)
Two 9.6 Kb/s synchronous modems (DF129-AA)
Two modem cables (BC:22F-10)

Add-On Package:

DEPKM-Al

One DEC:mux II (DFMZA-BA)
One connection cable (Bc:17o-10)

Network software 1

MUxserver 100 software license (one required per
MUXserver 100)
MUXserver 100 software media and
documentation (one required per load host)

Q*ZAW-UZ
Q*ZAW-H#

*Refer to Section 2: MUXserver 100/DECmux II Remote Terminal Server for a list of supported processors and distribution
media.

6.29

Standard Network Packages

Multivendor Interconnection

Multivendor interconnection allows information to be transferred between a
Digital network and the network of another vendor, and enables the information to be used on either system. Multivendor interconnection protects a
company's investment in existing equipment, and provides freedom of choice
for future equipment decisions.

DECnet/SNA Gateway Package

The DECnet/SNA Gateway Package allows communication with an IBM SNA
network using the Ethernet-based DECnet/SNA Gateway and the DECnet/SNA
Gateway Access Routines. DECnet/SNA Access Routines are software packages,
residing on a VAX or MicroVAX host, that allow users to perform specific
functions on IBM host systems connected to the SNA network.
Three DECnet/SNA Access Routines are included in the DECnet/SNA Package
as listed below. For detailed product descriptions of all DECnet/SN A Gateway
Access Routines, refer to Digital-to-IBM Communications Software in Section 3.
The following products are included in the DECnet/SNA Gateway Package:

Network Hardware

• One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4000)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver cable
• One Ethernet-based DEcnet/SNA Gateway (nECSA-FA)
•One Ethernet-based DEcnet/SNA Gateway u.s. Country Kit (DECSK-AA)

Network Software

• DECnet/SNA Gateway software (Q*545-xx)
• DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management (Q*452-xx)
• DEcnet/sNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator (Q*454-xx)
• DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry (Q*453-xx)

Network Service

• DECnet/SNA Gateway Software Installation and Orientation (QSF01-sz)
Figure 6.13 details the hardware configuration of the network products provided
in the DECnet/SNA Gateway Package.

Figure 6.13
DECnet/SNA Gateway Package
Con.figuration

H4-000

··.

*oEcnet/SNA Gateway

6.30

to JBM/SNA
network

Standard Network Packages

Multivendor Interconnection

DECnet/SNAGateway Package
Ordering Guidelines

Use Table 6.15 (mcnet/SNA Gateway Package Order Codes) to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities that are determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package for each DECnet/sNA Gateway
Package (DEPKS-01)
• Order the DECnet/SNA Gateway software, license, and documentation.
(Q*545-UZ, Q*545-H#)
• Order all the required DECnet/SNA Access Routines. Both a software license code
and a media/ documentation code are required for each Access Routine. Refer to
the order code table.
Note: The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU
operating system and the DECnet/SN A Gateway software. Refer to SPD 30.15.xx.
• Order one DEcnet/SNA Gateway Software Installation and Orientation Service
(QSF01-sz) for each DECnet/SNA Gateway Package.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation, order one
NETstart Plus startup service (QSC34-sz) per building.
• For customers who require long-range network planning, order one Network
Planning and Design Package (QSNET-sz) per building.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local area
networks. If network management is required, order the NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Refer to Network and System Management Products in Section 3 for a product
description. Order codes for both the software license and media/ documentation are required.

6.31

Standard Network Packages

Multivendor Interconnection

Table 6.15
DECnet/SNA Gateway Package
Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware

One H4000 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One DECnet SNA Gateway
One DEcnet/SNA Gateway u.s. Country Kit

DEPKS-01

Network software 1

License
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway software
(one each per package)

Q*545-UZ

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway management

Q*452-uz

DECnet/sNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

Q*454-UZ

DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry

Q*453-UZ

Quantity
(Fill in)

Media and documentation
DECnet/sNA Gateway software
(one each per package)

Q*545-H#

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management

Q*452-H#

DECnet/sNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

Q*454-H#

DEcnet/sNA VMS Remote Job Entry

Q*453-H#

Network service

Software installation and orientation

QSF01-SZ

Optional Network services

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

*Refer to Section 3: DECnet/SNA Gateway and DECnet/SNA Access Routines for a list of supported processors and
distribution media.
1 The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU operating system and the DECnet/SNA Gateway
software. Refer to Software Product Description 30.15. xx.

6.32

Standard Network Packages

Section 7
Network Services

Digital provides services to help customers with planning, designing, implementing, and operating local and wide area networks. Digital's Network
Services are provided through its Customer Services organizations, including
Educational Services, Field Service, Software Services, and the Computer
Special Systems group.
Digital's Network Services address customer needs in each phase of the network
life cycle with services for:
• The network planning and design phase
• The network implementation and startup phase
• The network operations and growth phase
Services for each phase have a modular structure so that the customer can select
only those services needed. In addition, for complex network projects, program
management resources are available from the service organizations to help plan
and manage the delivery of all the network services needed throughout the
network life cycle.
This section describes the following:
• Network Planning and Design Services
• Network _Implementation and Startup Services
• Network Operations and Growth Services
• Related Network Services
• Computer Special Systems (css)
Although Digital's Network Services are developed for worldwide availability,
packaging and delivery models as well as service availability may differ initially
outside the United States. Check with the local Digital service organizations to
determine the services available in your area. Specific differences that exist in the
European network services are noted in this section.

7.1

Services

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

Services for the Planning
and Design Phase

Services provided in the Planning and Design Phase aid customers in planning
and designing their new or expanding networks. This includes the design of
distributed applications, the design and analysis of the network topology, the
actual layout of the hardware components of the network, and training seminars
to aid in determining appropriate network strategies. These services include:
• NETplan/Requirements Analysis
• NETplan/Design Analysis
• NETplan/Application Design
• NETplan/Protocol Design
• NETplan/Physical Design
• NETplan/Planning Seminars

NETplan/Requirements Analysis

NETplan/Requirements Analysis consists of customer interviews and data
interpretation by Software Services to plan local or wide area networks.
The service assists the customer in planning a new network or modifying an
existing one to meet identified business needs, organizational constraints, and
operational requirements. Digital Software Service specialists analyze information flows, network requirements based on business needs, organizational
structures, and operational procedures in order to establish network design
criteria and constraints.
NETplan/Requirements Analysis provides the planning needed to enable the
customer to meet current network requirements and plan for future growth.
The service also assists the customer in identifying potential problem areas that
might affect the network design.
In Ngplan/Requirements Analysis, Software Service specialists interview
customers to identify their business plans, applications, and users, as well as
network performance, availability, reliability, and cost constraints. Software
Services then interprets the data by translating the customer's business needs
and application requirements into network design criteria. The result of these
activities is a comprehensive requirements analysis document describing business and network requirements and network design assumptions, and providing a network inventory.
In Europe, the activities performed and documentation provided in NETplan/
Requirements Analysis are offered in combination with NETplan/Design Analysis. This combined Network Planning and Design Service is offered as the DEC
NETplan service.

7.2

Services

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

NETplan/Design Analysis

NETplan/Design Analysis, delivered by Software Services, consists of designing
and analyzing alternative network solutions, and selecting a recommended
network design for local and wide area networks. The service assists the
customer in designing a new network or redesigning an existing one to meet
identified network design criteria and constraints.
NETplan/Design Analysis assists the customer in selecting a recommended
network design based on an in-depth analysis of predicted performance,·
associated communications facilities, and approximate cost. The service also
provides the customer with an indication of potential problem areas or limitations of the network design. The results of the design analysis are compiled in
a written report and discussed with the customer in a presentation. Topics
addressed are alternate network designs, the analysis conducted on each alternative, and the recommended network design.
In Europe, the activities performed and documentation provided in NETplan/
Design Analysis are offered in combination with NETplan/Requirements
Analysis. This combined Network Planning and Design Service is called the
DEC NETplan Service.

NETplan/ Application Design

The NETplan/Application Design Service is a Professional Software Services
(PSS) offering that assists customers with distributed application design. The
service is tailored to meet the customer's needs in any of the following areas:
• Distributed application requirements analysis
• Distributed application design
• Distributed application specification development
• Project leadership of complex distributed application design efforts

Features

• Digital's design skills fit the customer's requirements
• Tasks performed remain under the supervision, management, and control of
the customer
• Expertise is provided hi the manufacturer of the customer's.hardware, system
software, and layered product software
• The cost is minimized by buying exactly the service needed.
The deliverables for any distributed application design project are specified as
part of project planning activities, and typically include the results of application requirements analyses, application design documentation, and functional
design specifications.

7.3

Services

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

NETplan/Protocol Design

The NETplan/Protocol Design Service assists customers in using application
interface options available within the Digital environment to design distributed
applications for communication between Digital and other vendor's hardware
and software. This assistance is currently limited to Digital's DECnet/SNA
Gateway set of products to facilitate communication between applications on
VAX systems and IBM mainframes.
This service is a Professional Software Services (Pss) offering tailored to meet
customer distributed application design needs in a multivendor network environment for any of the following areas:
• Distributed application requirements analysis
• Distributed application design
• Distributed application specification development
• Project leadership of complex distributed application design efforts
For a list of service features, refer to NETplan/Application Design in this section. The deliverables for any protocol design project are specified as part of
project planning activities, and are typically similar to those ofNETplan/Application Design.

NETplan/Physical Design

When planning and designing the physical layout of a network, issues such as
the type of building, type of occupancy, local codes, and restrictions must be
taken into consideration. To ensure that the physical design fully meets the
needs of the customer's application and minimizes potential problems during
installation, Digital Field Service offers a comprehensive NETplan/Physical
Design service.
In addition to the cable routing, the cableplant topology, design frequencies,
component input and output levels, and anticipated network expansion must all
be included in the electrical design.

Site Survey Report

Initially, Field Service conducts a site survey and prepares a Site Survey Report.
This identifies all existing equipment to be connected to the network, outlines
any structural work required (including aerial and underground cable runs), and
identifies any other factors that may affect installation costs or timeframes.

Physical Layout Design

From the Network Design and Site Survey Report, Field Service develops
the Physical Layout Design for the network. This includes a set of working
drawings indicating the proposed cableplant runs and location of all networked
equipment, proposed cable frequency allocations, calculated input/output levels
at design frequencies of the cable components, and a bill of material for the
components used in the design. The Physical Layout Design is used as the basis
for generating a comprehensive Installation Plan with schedules and costs,
including quotations from vendors or contractors.
In Europe, the NETplan/Physical Design activities are offered as a mcsite/Local
Area Network Physical Design Service providing support for network physical
implementation services.

7.4

Services

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

NETplan/Planning Seminars

NETplan/Planning Seminars are provided by Educational Services to aid the
customer's staff in determining the networking strategy and multivendor
interconnect strategy most appropriate for the customer environment. The
seminars, which are targeted toward network planners and managers, include:
• Open Systems Interconnection, which discusses the International Standards
Organization (1so) Model for a layered network architecture, the need for
standards among product vendors, advantages of a layered architecture, functions of the OSI, DNA, and SNA layers, and Digital's product set that is compatible
with OSI.
• Digital-to-IBM Interconnect Strategy, which presents an introduction to the
complete DNA/SNA interconnect product line, including the DECnet/SNA Gateway and the VMS/SN A link to IBM networks.

7.5

Services

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

Services for the Implementation
and Startup Phase

These services assist customers in all network implementation and startup
activities. This includes managing installations, orienting users, establishing
operating procedures and standards, developing applications, and training.
The services are:
• NETstart/Installation Management
• NETstart/Certification
• NETstart/Startup Assistance
• NETstart/Application Development
• NETstart/Protocol Development
• NETstart/Startup Training

NETstart/Installation
Management

Field Service manages all of the installation activities to ensure a smooth, timely,
and well-coordinated network installation. Working from the Network Design
and Physical Layout Design, Field Service manages the site preparation and installation activities to ensure on-time completion with high-quality standards.

Network Installation Plan

The first step in the installation process is the development ofthe Network
Installation Plan. This plan defines the schedules for all site preparation and
installations, and identifies the individuals responsible for each activity. The
scope of a network installation may require that part of the work be subcontracted to a qualified contractor able to meet Digital's high quality standards.
As the customer's prime contractor, Digital manages and schedules all subcontractor activities.

Pre-Installation Inspection

Field Service conducts a pre-installation inspection of the site with the installer
and reviews all details of the required work. This allows Field Service to prepare the final, detailed quotation for the installation.

Installation Inspections

During site preparation and installation, Field Service carries out installation
inspections and any interim testing required. These inspection and testing
services are also available to customers who are either using their own personnel
or dealing directly with a contractor for site preparation or installation work.
For broadband networks, installation inspections include cableplant certification.

Network Acceptance Testing

Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, Field Service carries out
Network Acceptance Testing of the cable installation and associated communications equipment.

Network Documentation

Field Service provides site documents including "As-Built" drawings of the installed network (showing cable routing, equipment location), and electrical test
results. This documentation becomes part of the Site Management Guide for sites
under Digital Service Agreements.
In Europe, the NETstart/Installation Management activities are currently offered
as a DECsite Turnkey/Installation Management Service providing support for
network physical implementation services.

7.6

Services

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

NE Ts tart/ Certification

Digital Field Service conducts broadband network certification tests to ensure
that the network meets or exceeds all design specifications.

Channel Certification

Field Service conducts certification ofDigital's broadband Ethernet channel
prior to installation ofDigital's broadband Ethernet products (DECOM and
DEFTR). This channel certification insures successful product connectivity and
qualifies the customer's network products for on-site maintenance agreements.

Certification Report

Certification tests are conducted for continuity, frequency response, signal-tonoise ratios, hum modulation, and RF radiation. Field Service then provides a
Certification Report that includes documentation of critical signals and noise
levels and photographs of cable frequency responses. Any areas for which
specifications are not met are highlighted and corrective actions are proposed.

NETstart/Startup Assistance

Digital's Software Services offers start-up assistance to help users and network
support personnel get up to speed quickly. Consultation and assistance is offered
for network software implementation, orientation on how to use the network,
and establishing standards for network operation and management. Specific
subjects, such as account and security procedures, application development
considerations and network troubleshooting procedures, are also addressed.
These services cover Digital's DECnet software, and are structured to ensure
an efficient startup of the customer's DECnet network. They arc designed for
managers, operations personnel, and program developers who are either just
starting to learn about network communications and DECnet, understand
network communications but are new to DECnet, or are familiar with DECnet
but need assistance in expanding their DECnet configuration.
In the United States, these services are offered as DECnet DECstart and DECnet
DECstart-Plus. They are packaged to deliver a defined set of tasks at the
customer's site for a fixed price.
In Europe, these services are offered as DEC NETstart. Tasks are selected based
on the level of service required, then adapted to each customer's needs through
planning discussions with a Digital network specialist. As a result of the level of
service selected and the planning discussions conducted, a fixed quote and
delivery plan are proposed.
The DEC NETstart service consists of22 structured tasks made available in three
levels of service:
• NETstart 3 intended for first-time users of Digital network products, or for users
with some experience but with limited manpower resources
• NETstart 2 intended for users with some DECnet experience who are expanding
their network and need support during this period
• NETstart 1 intended for users with a good level of DECnet experience who need
support only in implementing the network software.

7. 7

Services

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

NETstart/ Application
Development

The NETstart/Application Development Service is a Professional Software Services (Pss) offering to assist customers in distributed application development
and implementation. The service is tailored to meet customer's needs in any of
the following areas:
• Distributed application coding and testing
• Distributed application design (software code) reviews
• Distributed application performance analysis and tuning
• Distributed application implementation and acceptance testing
• Project leadership of complex distributed application development efforts
The deliverables for any distributed application development project are specified as part of project planning activities, and typically include coded and tested
applications, distributed application documentation, and implementation of the
distributed application in the customer's network.

NETstart/Protocol Development

NETstart/Protocol Development Services assists customers in using application
interface options available within the Digital environment to develop and implement distributed applications that communicate between Digital and other
vendor's hardware and software. This assistance is currently limited to Digital's
DEcnet/sNA Gateway product set to facilitate communications between VAX
systems and IBM mainframes.
This Professional Software Services (PSS) offering is provided as a project
tailored to meet customer needs in a multivendor environment for any of the
following areas:
• Distributed application coding and testing
• Distributed application design (software code) reviews
• Distributed application performance analysis and tuning
• Distributed application implementation and acceptance testing
• Project leadership of complex distributed application development efforts
The deliverables for any protocol development or implementation project
are specified as part of project planning activities, and are similar to those
of NETstart/Application Development.

NETstart/Startup Training

NETstart/Startup Training is training courses offered by Educational Services
that prepare the customer's staff to design, develop and use distributed applications, and to use the network. The training courses include:
• Using DECnet-VAX: How to Use vAxmail and other DECnet Utilities
•Programming DECnet-VAX
• Programming DECnet-RSX
•Managing and Programming VAX P.s.r.
• Managing and Programming DECnet-RSX
Using DECnet-VAX provides an introduction to DECnet as it is implemented
on the VMS operating system to aid users in communicating with other users
within the network. The remaining courses provide details about the implementation of the communications software (DECnet-VAX, DECnet-RSX and VAX
P.s.r.) on Digital's systems as an aid to managing and developing applications
that utilize the network.

7.8

Services

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase

Services for the Operations
and Growth Phase

These services provide network operations support including network maintenance management, management tools assistance and operations training. The
services are:
• NETsupport/Maintenance Management
• NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance
• NETsupport/Operations Training

NETsupport/Maintenance
Management

NETsupport/Maintenance Management provides customers with a single point
of contact and a single service contract to resolve all network maintenance issues
for Digital networks and multivendor networks. This service focuses on the
maintenance of a customer's entire network in a partnership role with the
customer. NETsupport/Maintenance Management enables Digital to act as the
customer's agent to the service vendors for all of the equipment in the network.
Digital negotiates the contractual levels of service and pricing with each vendor,
and presents the customer with a single-source solution for managing all
network maintenance services.
NETsupport/Maintenance Management provides services that extend to the
entire network and include multivendor equipment, non-Digital protocols, and
integrated voice/data networks.
NETsupport/Maintenance Management provides five major service elements:
maintenance planning, configuration management, fault isolation, fault resolution management, and predictive maintenance. Digital Support Centers provide fault isolation and diagnosis, fault resolution management, maintenance
planning, technical assistance, vendor relations, and reporting. Configuration
management is performed at the customer site.
NETsupport/Maintenance Management includes the installation on the customer's network of a Digital Service processer with network management software tools. This processor acts as Digital's "tool box" containing network fault
isolation tools. The service processor is accessible from the Digital Support
Centers and serves as the network remote diagnostic console.
In Europe, network maintenance management service activities are offered as
the NETsystem Maintenance Management Service.

NETsupport/Management
Tools Assistance

NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance is provided by Software Services
to assist customers in implementing and utilizing Digital's advanced network
management products. This service is currently limited to the NMCC/DECnet
Monitor. Assistance is provided in planning, implementation, and startup.
In the United States, this service is provided as the NMCC/DECnet Monitor
Startup Service. This service provides assistance in implementing NMCC/DECnet
Monitor, Digital's comprehensive software product that monitors the nodes,
lines, and circuits in a DECnet network. The service helps customers use the
NMCC/DECnet monitor to maximize their network performance, and consists
of pre-installation assistance, software implementation, and user orientation.
As part of this service, the Digital software specialist assists in selecting the
operating parameters and options that best address customer network management goals. The Digital software specialist also helps the customer plan, install,
and evaluate NMCC/DEcnet Monitor operations against stated goa,ls.

7. 9

Services

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase

Europe offers an enhanced version of this service called NETmon Traffic
Monitoring and Consulting Service, which focuses on Digital implementing
and using the software to assist customers in monitoring and analyzing the
performance of the network. NETmon is a structured, modular service that is
adapted to a customer's needs. The principal elements of the service are:
• A Digital network specialist assists in defining the various aspects of monitoring
and analysis, and establishes a base of software tools, parameters, and data
structures that are used in the monitoring activity.
• The customer receives on-site orientation in the use of the principal monitoring
tool (NMCC/DECnet Monitor).
• Digital provides two consulting reports per year that analyze the network
performance and capacity characteristics, and interpret the traffic data.
• The customer can also use the monitoring tool (NMCC/DECnet Monitor) and
the associated prerequisite software (RDB Relational Database and GKS Graphic software).
• Digital provides support on the installed tools and the monitoring activity.
NETmon is provided primarily as an annual service agreement with emphasis
in the first year on establishing sound monitoring practices and gaining firm
operational control over the network. In subsequent years, the emphasis shifts
to pro-active capacity management and price/performance decisions. For customers with temporary network performance consulting and traffic monitoring
or audit service needs covering a limited time period (maximum three months),
a one-time NETmon Audit Service is also available.

NETSupport/Operations
Training

NETsupport/Operations Training is provided by Educational Services to help
customers effectively manage and operate their computer network. Training
courses are provided in the areas of:
• VAX and PDP-11 Data Communications

• Network Troubleshooting
• Digital Ethernet Hardware Maintenance
• Network Management
• DECnet Programming and Internals
The courses are designed for network managers, system managers with
network responsibilities, maintenance engineers, technicians, data communications specialists, and network programmers.

7.10

Services

Related Network Services

Digital's Network Services provide a coordinated network-level solution to a
customer's network planning, implementation, startup, and operational needs.
These services complement many existing network component-level services
and packages available from Digital's Customer Services organizations.
Seminars and training courses addressing the design, implementation and
operations phases are part of a complete Network Training Curriculum offered
by Digital's Educational Services. This includes courses for people at all the skill
levels required to run a successful and efficient network.
As part ofDigital's commitment to meet the total computing needs of its
customers, Field Service provides a single-source service for its own products
and those of selected manufacturers in the networks market. Most networks,
including those with non-Digital products, may be completely maintained
under a standard Digital Service Agreement. Field Service delivers its services
on a worldwide basis, thus ensuring a consistent and high quality response to
distributed or multinational networking requirements.
The related network services that Field Service· provides include:
• Software installation services for network and communications products
• Maintenance services for the network hardware and software products
• Network tools
• DEcsite and DECmove services
Software Services provides a comprehensive set of related network services that
offer cust~mers support for individual layered networking products, network
management and operations, and customer-specific networking needs. The
related network services include Startup Packages, Network Tools, and the Computer Services Business, which provides automated information and software access to customers. The Computer Services Business includes service
bureau services, disaster back-up services, and facility management services.

Related Educational Services
Training Courses

Digital Educational Services has worldwide education centers in the United
States, Japan, Canada, Mexico, Europe, and Australia. They offer basic concept
courses such as Data Communications Fundamentals and Packet-Switching
Concepts; courses for programmers to teach them Digital's Network Architecture and to help them design and implement applications on the network;
courses that teach a specific implementation of the Digital Network Architecture, such as DECnet-RSX or DECnet-VAX; and advanced courses for network
designers that examine design alternatives based on price and performance
needs and include the latest developments and trends in networks.

7.11

Services

Related Network Services

Digital Educational Services also offers the following self-paced courses:
• Manager's Introduction to Data Communications
•Introduction to Networks
• Introduction to Data Communications Concepts
• Data Communications Fundamentals
• Network Concepts
• Networking: Design and Implementation of Computer Communications
Networks
• Digital Network Architecture
• DECnet-RT
• Packet Switching Concepts
• RSX P.S.I. User/Manager
• VAX P.S.I. User/Manager
A complete list of the courses offered by Educational Services is available in the
Educational Services Digest.

Software Installation Services

Installation Services are available for the VMs/sNA, DECnet/SNA Gateway, and
DECnet products. This service provides assistance in installing the equipment
and familiarizing the customer with the operation of these products.
Digital installs most Digital network and communications products at no
additional cost when they are purchased with an operating system and System
Startup Service Package for that operating system. There are some exceptions
to this.
The following networking products are not installed with a System Startup
Package:
DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway
Micro/RSX 2780/3780 Emulator
Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator
MUX200/VAX
NMCC/ DECnet Monitor
NMCC/VAX Ethernim
RSX-11/P.S.I./M

UN1004/RSX
VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator
VAX NTR Protocol Emulator
VAX OSI Transport Service
VAX P.S.I. and P.S.I. Access
VMS/SN A

The DECnet/SNA Gateway and VMS/SNA products are not installed with a System
Startup Package, but the installation service may be purchased separately as an
Orientation and Installation Service. Any DECnet/SNA Access Routines purchased with the DECnet/SN A Gateway or VMS/SN A are installed as part of the
Orientation and Installation Service. This includes:
DECnet/sNA VMS APPC/Lu6.2 Programming Interface
DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface
DECnet/SN A VMS Data Transfer Facility (vMs server and VMS client)
DEcnet/SNA VMS msoss Document Exchange Facility
DECnet/sNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility
DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator
DEcnet/sNA VMS Remote Job Entry
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface
DEcnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator
Refer to the appropriate SPD for more information about installation services.
7.12

Services

Related Network Services

Ongoing Maintenance

Field Service provides the full range of on-site and off-site contractual services for the network and its associated communications equipment including
Digital-qualified vendor products and broadband network interconnection
cables. Baseband network interconnection cables (such as coaxial, fiber optic,
or twisted pair cables) will be repaired or replaced on a time and materials basis
only. Digital may use a qualified contractor to carry out cable repair work.

DECservice

DECservice is Digital's most comprehensive on-site service product, providing
a commitment to fast response time, continuous service effort, extended-hours
coverage, preventive maintenance, installation of the latest engineering changes,
and automatic priority attention for complex problems.

Basic Service

For those customers who do not need the level of service provided by
DECservice, Digital offers the Basic Service Agreement, which provides economical, full service coverage. Customer service calls receive priority second
only to DEcservice calls. Services provided include preventive maintenance,
installation of the latest engineering changes, and automatic priority attention
for complex problems.

Cableplant Maintenance Service

Cableplant Maintenance Service for broadband networks is available to customers with DEcservice or Basic Service agreements, with a Cableplant Maintenance Service to match the service agreement level. The cableplant must have
the same coverage as the most critical Digital-serviced hardware attached to it.
Scheduled preventive maintenance is provided according to equipment standards as specified by Digital and component manufacturers. Cableplant realignment is performed approximately six months after the precontract inspection.
Preventive maintenance, including a recertification, is performed annually
thereafter. For European options, contact the local Digital sales office.

Software Product Services

For customers who do not require startup assistance for their operating system,
Software Product Services offers DECsupport, Basic, and Self-Maintenance
annual service contracts that cover Digital networking software products and
selected non-Digital communications software products. (Refer to the Software
Services Startup Packages in this section for an explanation of the startup
assistance available.)

DECsupport Service for Software

DECsupport provides maximum user productivity and system utilization by
saving customers the time and associated costs of doing their own routine software maintenance and installation of updates. It also provides critical on-site
assistance when required. DEcsupport provides:
• Installation of updates
• Preventive maintenance
• Onsite remedial support if required
• Telephone support
• Digital's Software Information Network
• Software media and documentation updates
• Technical newsletters
• Software Performance Reports

7.13 Services

Related Network Services

Basic Service for Software

Basic Service for Software is designed for customers who have the time,
technical expertise, and resources to maintain their own systems, but who
need highly responsive answers to questions or problems. Basic Service for
Software provides:
• Telephone support
• Digital's Software Information Network
• Software media and documentation updates
• Technical newsletters
• Software Performance Reports

Self-Maintenance Service
for Software

Self-Maintenance Service for Software is for customers who have technical
staffs with the time and resources to maintain their own system software, and
who require only software updates and written communication channels with
Digital. Self-Maintenance Service for Software provides:
• Software media and documentation updates
• Technical newsletters
• Software Performance Reports

Network Tool: NMCC/VAX
ETHERnim

NMCc/vAx ETHERnim, an addition to the Network Management Control Center
(NMCC), is a network maintenance application program for Ethernet. It runs as
a layered product on VMS and is designed to test the local area network (LAN)
communications path using the Ethernet protocol and DECnet. NMcc/vAx
ETHERnim has the ability to gather system information for its database from
remote VMS and RSX nodes by invoking remote command files. In addition, the
program utilizes Phase IV DECnet software on a system configured as a DECnet
router. (Refer to Network and System Management Products in Section 3 for more
information.)
In Europe, NMcc/vAx ETHERnim is currently available on request to customers
whose network nodes are covered by a Digital Field Service contract.

Network Tool:
NMCC/DECnet Monitor

NMCC/DECnet Monitor is Digital's network monitoring software product for
a Network Management Control Center (NMCC). This VMS layered software
product can monitor all the Phase III and Phase IV DECnet systems in a network.
No additional hardware or software is required.
NMCC/DECnet Monitor utilizes simple commands to control network monitoring activity and to request on-line displays or reports from a central database.
Screen displays present traffic data, error statistics, and status information using
text and color graphics to highlight important network conditions. (Refer to
Network and System Management Products in Section 3 for more information.)
In Europe, the NMCC/DECnet Monitor is provided to customers under the
NETmon Traffic Monitoring and Consulting Service.

7.14

Services

Related Network Services

DECsite Services

DECsite Services are available when customers require professional help to
prepare new space for new equipment, or to move equipment to a new site.
A project to meet these needs falls into three phases: decision, design, and
delivery. DEcsite Services are structured to meet customer needs in each phase
and allow customers to control the extent ofDigital's involvement and the pace
of the project.

Features

• Modular services to plan, design, and build new, expanded, or renovated
computer sites for Digital customers.
• Three levels of service-oEcsite I, II, and III-and five forms of agreement
let customers choose the extent ofDigital's involvement. Customers control
financial and timing commitments for the project.
• Digital brings a professional understanding of cost effectiveness to computer
site projects.
• All necessary physical elements are included: space allocation, power service,
air conditioning, data wiring, fire security, access security, and materials.
• Digital provides professional project management and computer-site design
knowledge during the decision and design phases, and uses experienced,
Digital-qualified subcontractors for the delivery phase.
In Europe, DEcsite services include the network physical design and installation
services described elsewhere in this section.·

DECsite I

In DEcsite I, the decision phase, Digital professionals analyze the customer's
computer environmental needs from the perspectives of operations, equipment
complement, available space, building services, and future expansion. Digital
provides the engineering analysis and budget estimates needed to determine
building requirements.

DECsite II

In DECsite II, the design phase, Digital provides detailed construction drawings,
specifications, and wire lists. DECsite 11 design documents can be used by the
customer to build the facility using internal or contracted resources with confidence that the design will meet planned data processing needs. If customers
elect to build their own facilities, construction phase consultations are available.

DECsite III

In DEcsite III, the delivery phase, Digital provides the finished facility. At the
end of the design phase (DEcsite II), Digital presents a price and schedule quote
for customer approval. The advantage of choosing DECsite III is that a coordinated design/build project is usually the quickest way to complete construction,
and Digital's DECsite professionals serve as the single source for the entire project. Only Digital-qualified building subcontractors are hired, and the DEcsite
professionals apply Digital's knowledge and experience to computer-related
issues, thus providing complete project management. The customer can work
with the Digital construction manager throughout the project instead of having
to manage several vendors. Digital will complete the project to the customer's
satisfaction and guarantee workmanship and materials for one year.

7.15

Services

Related Network Services

DECmove Service

DEcmove provides a comprehensive solution to the problems of moving
computer equipment from one site to another. With the DECmove service,
Digital handles all aspects of moving computer equipment, from qualifying
movers to coordinating the moving schedule.

Features

• Management of all aspects of the customer's move, including selecting and
qualifying movers, and defining the type of moving equipment and transportation required. When necessary, Digital arranges for temporary storage of
customer's equipment.
• Handling of all aspects of deinstallation and reinstallation. Digital verifies
equipment operation prior to dismantling and runs diagnostics after reinstallation to ensure that the equipment runs properly.
• Insuring the equipment against all risks except war and nuclear disaster.
Damaged equipment manufactured or supported by Digital is repaired or
replaced on a priority-one basis (bypassing normal manufacturing queues).
Damaged equipment not manufactured or supported by Digital is replaced
as promptly as possible.
• Coordinating the schedule of the move to minimize the impact on the customer's operations.
• Surveying the customer's new site to ensure that all the appropriate environmental and power conditions are optimized for efficiency and availability.
• Preparing a fixed price quote for the entire move. This prevents any hidden
expenses and lets the customer handle Digital's moving services with a single
purchase order.

Eligibility

DECmove is available only for equipment covered by a DECservice or Basic
Service Agreement.

7.16

Services

Related Network Services

Startup Packages

For customers buying new systems, Startup Packages provide the support
necessary to successfully install software, to use the system, and to maintain the
software during the first year.
Digital offers three Startup Packages. Each service package provides training
(available immediately upon purchase), software installation, DECstart (where
applicable), and one year of service for the operating system and dependent
software. In Europe, these service packages are referred to as Optimum
Services.
These packages are priced at the system level, that is, they cover all Digitallicensed software operating on a particular system at no additional charge.

Startup Package III

Startup Package III provides technical assistance and training for system users.
It provides the most comprehensive full year of service support for operating
systems and their dependent software. Startup Package III provides:
• SPS DECsupport Agreement

• Initial media/ documentation
•Training
• DECstart Plus
• Software installation

Startup Package II

Startup Package II is appropriate when a customer's technical staff has the
time and resources to support the new system after Digital has trained the staff,
installed the product, and oriented the staff concerning system operation.
Startup Package II provides:
• SPS Basic Agreement

• Initial media/documentation
•Training
• DECstart
• Software Installation

Startup Package I

Startup Package I is appropriate for a technical staff requiring minimal training
and having the time, resources and skills to install and support the new system.
Digital provides telephone advisory support and media updates to maintain the
software at its most current level. Startup Packager provides:
• SPS Basic Agreement

• Initial media/ documentation
• Training on selected systems

7.17

Services

Related Network Services

Computer Services Business

Digital Computer Services Business is supplied by Software Services to provide
automated information and software access to its customers. The services
provided are available in the United States and the General International Area
(GIA) only. There are three principal service offerings: Service Bureau Services,
Disaster Back-up Services, and Facility Management Services.

Service Bureau Services

These services are accessed locally and delivered remotely from Digital's
Computer Services Centers:
• Enhanced Application Network Services-Digital provides a combination
of terminals/micros, customer host processors, Digital host processors,
and Digital's nationwide network to develop and implement integrated
applications.
• Hardware/Software Evaluation Services-Digital provides the availability
ofvAx, PDP, and DECSYSTEM 20 systems and software to enable customers to
evaluate hardware and software products. Customers can evaluate products
through demonstrations, benchmarks, and trial use.
• Project Resource Services-Digital provides VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM 20
computing resources and associated software to support Software Services
consulting projects.
• Incremental Computer Resources-VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM 20 computing
resources are provided to meet special customer needs such as peak load
processing. Timesharing access is also available for pre-delivery software
development and peak load processing.
A telephone support service offering a 24-hour-a-day, 365 day-a-year hotline
staffed by Digital software experts is also available.

Disaster Backup Services

Backup and disaster recovery services allow customers to anticipate and plan
for disruptions involving their computer facilities, and to continue processing
critical applications at computer facilities other than their own. The services
include:
• Restart-Disaster Backup Services for VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM 20 computing
resources available within 24 hours for emergency processing
• Disaster/Plan 80-A planning methodology available to customers in developing their own contingency plan

Facility Management Services

Facility Management Services are long term, customized, dedicated services
consisting of computing resources and operational staff available either at the
customer site or at a Digital site. Facility Management services free customers
from the need to develop operations resources to support information systems.

7.18

Services

Computer Special Systems

Digital's Computer Special Systems (css) group offers design and manufacturing services for developing and supplying special function hardware, firmware,
and software networking products to meet custom requirements. Typically,
these services are available to provide:
• Digital to non-Digital host and terminal interconnect
• Links to public and private networks
• Network bridges
• High performance, intelligent front end communications processors
Through css, Digital can provide efficient network performance and flexible
network configurations that meet custom needs with full Digital hardware,
software, and service support.

7.19

Services

Appendix A
Performance Guidelines
Terminal Server
Performance Guidelines

Terminal Server performance is characterized best by the following metrics:
• Host CPU interrupt load (for protocol messages)
• Server system throughput
• Average response time
• Ethernet utilization
These metrics are constrained by the terminal workload on the host. Obviously,
a large number of EDT users will generate a greater load than users running VMS
MAIL. For the information presented below, an average workload is defined as a
mix of terminal users running applications such as MAIL or doing program
development with editing.
The LAT protocol is an Ethernet-based virtual circuit protocol. Since LAT buffers
characters from many terminals into LAT messages, the interrupt load (protocol
message processing) on the host can be greatly reduced. Testing indicates that
the host load for LAT terminals is comparable for that of terminals connected
directly through a DMF32 device. LAT terminals may provide some savings in the
character interrupt load of nzll terminals.
The DECserver 200 Vl.O can process an aggregate output throughput of over
14,000 characters per second, and an aggregate input throughput of over 12,000
characters per second for 8 terminals running at 19,200 bits per second.
The average response time is 45-125 milliseconds, depending whether the
terminal driver or the applications program on the host performs character
echoing. Expect the response time to approximate 45-50 milliseconds
when the terminal dr:iver handles echoing.
Ethernet utilization will vary with the number ofhosts connected to a server
and the speed at which terminals are transmitting data. Estimates indicate that
this utilization should be well below one percent in most cases.
Note that overall server performance is highly dependent on the value of the
circuit timer and the number of hosts connected to the server. The shorter the
value, the lower the response time. However, this increases the general overhead on the server, hosts, and the Ethernet. The higher the value, the lower this
overhead becomes. However, this will increase the response times. For the
above information, the circuit timer default of 80 milliseconds is assumed.

A.1

Performance Guidelines

DECrouter 200

DECrouter 200
Performance Guidelines

The process of properly configuring the DECrouter 200 is based on an understanding of the desired performance characteristics of the network as well as the
desired network topology. The DECrouter 200 does not trade off configuration
characteristics against memory requirements. The DEcrouter 200 has sufficient
memory to accommodate a maximally configured network, and sufficient
memory allocated for a large number oflarge buffers. Even with all eight asynchronous lines fully active, the DECrouter 200 can support the maximum ofl,023
nodes within the area, the maximum of32 other routing nodes in the same area
and on the same Ethernet, and a network buffer size of up to 1,482 bytes.

Communication Line Characteristics

It is important to note that the rate at which user data can be transmitted over a
communications line may approach, but will never reach, the actual line speed.
The actual throughput is a function of many factors including the line quality,
protocol overhead, topology, and network applications.
The DEcrouter 200 supports all eight asynchronous lines simultaneously active
at line speeds of up to 19.2 Kb/s. The DECrouter 200 operates these lines in full
duplex point-to-point mode only. The DECrouter 200 does not support multipoint lines.

System Throughput Characteristics

In addition to the asynchronous line characteristics, the processing power of the
DECrouter 200 must be taken into consideration. Assuming equal distribution of
Ethernet-to-asynchronous and asynchronous-to-Ethernet traffic in an office
environment, the respective maximum values can be averaged to a value of175
packets per second. Thus on average, the DECrouter 200 can route a maximum
of175 packets per second when all eight asynchronous lines are running at
speeds of19.2 Kb/s each.
The DEcrouter 200 can support all eight asynchronous lines, each running at
19.2 Kb/s (full-duplex), in all types of communications except asynchronous
to asynchronous.
The following table lists the maximum throughput for different types of
communications.

Table A.1
Maximum Packets per Second

Type of Communication

100 data bytes/packet

1500 data bytes

Ethernet to Ethernet
Ethernet to asynchronous
Asynchronous to Ethernet
Asynchronous to asynchronous

786.3
205.2
144.8
100.7

786.3
20.5
15.6
9.0

Care must be taken when designing a valid configuration that the average
route through packet per second rate does not exceed 170 packets per second.
Determining the average packet per second rate requires an understanding of
the applications that will generate data routed by the DECrouter 200 in the overall
network. For more detailed information on configuring the DECrouter 200, refer
to the Software Product Description (sPD 27. 72.xx).
In order to achieve a viable configuration, the user and/or a Digital software
specialist should perform a level of application analysis which addresses both
communication-line characteristics and system throughput characteristics.

A.2

Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router Vt.2

DECnet Router Vl.2
Performance and Configuration
Information

Configuring the DECnet Router node is based primarily on tradeoffs of cost and
performance while satisfying the user's application requirements. It can be
expected that network applications will range from low-speed situations (for
example, connecting few remote nodes over low speed communications lines)
to those of relatively high performance (for example, connecting two Ethernets). Primarily, the performance of a given DECnet Router node is a function of
the expected network traffic and normal workload. Thus Router performance
depends on several factors:
• Communication line characteristics
• System throughput characteristics
• Server memory characteristics
All three factors must be considered when configuring a DECnet Router node.

Communication Line Characteristics

It is important to note that the rate at which user data can be transmitted
(throughput) over a communications line may approach, but will never reach,
the actual line speed. The actual throughput is a function of many factors,
including the line quality, protocol overhead, topology, and network application(s), as well as the factors cited in this section.
The table below describes the physical hardware configurations (number of
communications lines) supported by the DECnet Router server.

Maximum Line Speed (Kilobits/sec)
Line Card Type

9.6

19.2

250

500

DCSAX-LA (FDXIHDX)

NIA

DCSAX-LB (FDXIHDX)

NIA

DCSAX-LC (FDXIHDX)

NIA

Note that the maximum number oflines supported by the hardware unit is
thirty-two, and that the aggregate line throughput cannot exceed 500 kilobits
per second. You can mix the line card types within the same system as long as
you adhere to the aggregate bandwidth restriction. Total system throughput
(below) must also be considered when configuring the DECnet Router Server.
The Router software supports dynamic hardware configuration while the
system is running, with the following restrictions:
• You cannot use line slots which do not have a line card in place when the system
is loaded.
• If you want to run one line at 500 kilobits, you may only have one line card in
the unit when the system is loaded.
• If you want to run two lines at 250 kilobits or four lines at 125 kilobits, you must
have the line cards in consecutive order in slots 1-4 of the unit. None can be in
slots 5-8.
•After the system is loaded, you may not swap incompatible line cards.

A.3

Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router V1.2

In order to achieve a viable configuration, the user and/or a Digital software
specialist should perform a level of application analysis which addresses the
factors above. In the preceding table, the following definition applies: Maximum line speed-the fastest clock rate at which the number ofline cards
specified can be driven under the DECnet Router Server. The actual maximum
data throughput can not be calculated by multiplying the number of lines by
the line speed, since many factors already discussed in this section will reduce
the actual throughput.

System Throughput Characteristics

Having determined that the line card limitations are not exceeded, the processing power of the DECnet Router Server must be taken into consideration. The
DECnet Router Server is able to route a maximum of140 packets per second.
Care must be taken when designing a viable configuration that the average
route"'."through packet-per-second rate does not exceed this value. Determining
the average packet-per-second rate requires an understanding of the types of
applications which generate data routed by the DECnet Router Server in the
overall network.

Computing Packet Per Second
Rate From Available Routers

DECnet Packets (messages to be routed) are 150 bytes long on average. The actual
average packet size for your network may be different depending upon the
types and amounts of different traffic. The average can be computed from an
existing router by examining the various circuit counters for that router and
using the following equations:
total packets= (Transit Packets Sent+ Transit Packets Received
+ Originating Packets Sent+ Terminating Packets Received)
total bytes= (Bytes received+ Bytes sent)
Average Packet Size = [(total packets) I (total bytes)]
In the absence of existing routers, use 150 bytes per packet as the average
packet size.
·
Once the average packet° size has been selected, the average packet per second
rate can be computed. The average can be computed from an existing router by
examining the various circuit counters for that router and using the following
equation:
Average transit packets =
[(Transit Packets Sent+ Transit Packets Received) I 2]
Average Packets per Second=
[(Average transit packets) I (seconds since counters were last cleared)]
Note that the "Transit Packet" counters should contain values much larger than
the "Originating Packets" or the "Terminating Packets" counters. If not, then
the circuit under investigation is not being used for route-through traffic. Note
also that the counters being used for these computations should accumulate
statistics for as long as possible in order to make the results of the equation as
accurate as possible.

A.4

Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router V1.2

Computing Packet Per Second
Rate From Line Speeds

An alternate metric is the maximum possible packet delivery rate possible for
any particular line. This value is computed as follows:
characters per seeond = [(line speed) I (bits per character)]
where asynchronous lines have 10 bits per character and synchronous lines
have 8 bits per character, and where line speed is expressed in bits per second.
Max packets per second= [(characters per second) I (avg packet size)]
Note that if the line is full duplex, the resulting Max packets per second must
be doubled.
If the actual packet per second rate which will be delivered to the DECnet Router
Server can be determined, then this value should be used to assure that the
maximum of140 packets per second is not exceeded.
If the actual packet per second rate cannot be determined ahead of time, then the
computation of the maximum packet per second rate based upon the line speed
should be used, and the total of the maximum packet per second rates for all the
proposed lines should be kept below the 140 packet per second limit. By using
this technique to configure the DECnet Router Server, it is very possible that the
resulting configuration is overly restrictive. After the DECnet Router Server has
been run for some time and the actual packet per second rate has been determined, it may be possible to add more line~ based upon the actual packet per
second rate measured.
In configurations where the DECnet Router Server is used to link large sections
of your network (such as linking two large Ethernet segments with DECnet
Router Servers), it is expected that the actual packet per second rate will
approach the maximum packet per second rate as computed based upon line
speed. This is because the DECnet Router Servers are the focus of traffic for
many nodes on both sides of the large network sections.
In configurations where the DECnet Router Server is used to couple a small
network section, or a series of endnodes, to the Ethernet, it is expected that the
actual packet per second rate may not approach the maximum packet per
second rate as computed based upon line speed. This is because individual
nodes generally do not saturate the communications lines in both directions for
extended periods of time.
Also, note that configuring the DECnet Router Server as the "designated"
router will reduce the amount of processing power available to be used for
routing packets. It is desirable in many configurations to configure the DECnet
Router Server as the designated router in order to offioad· this function from a
host system. However, it is important that this additional work be taken into
account when designing the DECnet Router Server into a viable configuration.
Typically, configuring the DECnet Router Server as the "designated" router will
reduce the maximum packet per second rate from 140 to 120 packets per second.

A.5

Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router V1.2

Router Server Memory Configuration

The DECnet Router Server has a fixed amount of memory to use for storing
routing databases. The number of nodes within an area supported by the
DECnet Router Server is determined by the number of other Routing nodes on
the same Ethernet segment as the DECnet Routing Server, and by the number of
lines configured into the DECnet Routing Server. Note that the other routing
nodes on the Ethernet segment can be any Phase IV routing node. The
relationship between these is described as follows:
Number oflines in the image is determined by which DECnet Router Server
system image is to be used. If there are 8 or less synchronous lines to be used,
and no asynchronous lines, then the number oflines in the image is 8.
Otherwise, if [number of asynchronous lines+ (2 * [number of synchronous
lines])] is less than or equal to 16, then the number oflines in the image is 16. If
neither of these two cases apply, the number oflines in the image is 32.
Using the following relationship, the number of lines, the number of routers on
the same Ethernet segment, and the maximum node address supported can be
traded off against each other. Note that the number of Ethernet Routers is
defined as the number of Level 1 routers which are on the same Ethernet
segment and in the same area as the DECnet Router Server being configured.
An Ethernet segment is defined as containing the DELNI or Coax Ethernet cable
to which the DECnet Router Server is directly connected, and any DELNIS or
Coax Ethernet cable segments directly connected or connected via a DEBET or
a DEREP.
[(Maximum Nodes)* (3.5 +(Number oflines in the image)+
Ethernet routers)] must be less than or equal to 24500.

A.6 Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway
Performance Guidelines

Configuring the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway node is influenced primarily by
tradeoffs of cost and performance while satisfying the user's application requirements. It can be expected that network applications will range from low-speed,
low-cost situations (that is, connecting a few remote lines over low-speed
communications lines) to those of relatively high performance (that is, connecting two Ethernets). The addition ofx.25 packet-switching considerations to
those associated with point-to-point DECnet communications necessarily makes
arriving at the optimum configuration more difficult.
Primarily, the performance of the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway is a function
of the expected network traffic and resultant processing. The following factors
should be taken into consideration when reviewing DECnet Router/x.25
Gateway performance:
• Communications line characteristics
• Buffer size
• Quantity and frequency of route-through traffic
• Total number of Data Link Mapping circuits
• Concurrent use of DECnet routing with native-mode x.25 operations such as
incoming/outgoing x. 29 terminal traffic
It is important to note that the rate at which user data can be transmitted
(throughput) over a communications line will approach, but never reach, the
actual line speed. The actual throughput is a function of many factors, including
the line quality, protocol overhead, topology, and network application(s).
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway supports six lines at 56.0 Kb/s, eight lines at
9.6 Kb/s, seven lines at 19.2 Kb/s, two lines at 250 Kb/s, and 1 line at 500 Kb/s.
Two lines are reserved for x.25 communications with a total line speed of
19.2 Kb/s, (either 19.2 Kb/son one line or 9.6 Kb/son two lines). If one or both
of the x. 25 lines are used, the other six lines are limited to a maximum speed
of19.2 Kb/s.

A. 7 Performance Guidelines

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway

The DCSAX-LB line card (for connection to CCITT v.35 lines) cannot be used
when the DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway has been configured for x.25 communications. It may be used only for point-to-point DDCMP connections, and
then only when no concurrent connections to an x.25 PSDN are required. The
maximum number ofDCSAX-LB line cards that can be configured for x.25 PSDN
connection is two, with the remaining six slots available for DCSAX-LA line cards
for point-to-point DDCMP communications.
Note that the total number ofline cards supported by the hardware unit is
eight, and that the aggregate line throughput cannot exceed 500,000 bits per
second. Line card types can be mixed within the same system as long as the
user adheres to the line card restriction defined above, and this aggregate
bandwidth restriction.
The DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway software supports dynamic hardware reconfiguration while the system is running, with the following restrictions:
• Line slots that do not have a line card in place when the system is loaded cannot
be used.
• In order to run one line at 500 Kb/s, only one line card can be in the unit when
the system is loaded.
• In order to run two lines at 250 Kb/s or four lines at 125 Kb/s, the line cards must
be in consecutive order in slots 1-4 of the unit. No line cards can be in slots 5-8.
• After the system is loaded, DCSAX-LB and D(.:SAX-LA line cards cannot
be swapped.
In order to achieve a viable configuration, the user or a Digital software specialist
should perform a level of application analysis which addresses these factors.

A.8

Performance Guidelines

DECnet

DECnet Performance Guidelines

A major performance enhancement to DECnet-VAX v3.1 or later is support
for the DEUNA at the datalink layer. The port (device) driver in vAx/vMs interfaces directly to the DEUNA Ethernet controller and provides a datalink that
can transmit user data faster and with less host system load than a 1 megabit
DMR11. Other performance enhancements in DECnet-VAX allow higher-level
layers of software access to over 90% of port driver bandwidth. VAX/VMS v.3.4
permits users to access the DEUNA's QIO interface for other protocols of their
own invention while simultaneously using the DECnet protocols. Access to
this driver interface is standard in VAX/VMS; users need not purchase a
DECnet-VAX license for this purpose although it is highly recommended for
network management.
Several major enhancements have been made to the End-to-End Communications layer of DECnet. One of these changes reduces the number of messages
exchanged between nodes during a data transfer. With this new "flow control"
algorithm, less network latency is experienced-an important issue for satellite
communication or multihop routing traffic. Furthermore, since fewer messages
are exchanged, this algorithm reduces host system loading. Another enhancement is the inclusion of a feature called "transmitter pipelining" that facilitates
multibuffering within the End-to-End Communications layer. Because
of"transmitter pipelining," applications now incur fewer delays waiting for
communications transmissions.
The third major enhancement in the End-to-End Communications layer is
an optimization called "one hop logical links." (A hop is the logical distance
between two adjacent nodes in a network.) VAX/VMS using the algorithm "one
hop logical links" to transfer data between VAX/VMS systems that are connected
to the same Ethernet. This algorithm is actually an option that users can enable
or disable. It allows a pair of nodes that are "one hop" away from one another
to negotiate the use oflarge buffers (more than the typical 576 bytes) for the
datagrams used between them. By using larger buffers for functions such as
file transfer, fewer interrupts are generated to transfer the same amount of
data; consequently, there is less overhead and performance tends to increase.
The "one hop logical links" algorithm is optional for the following reason: when
a pair of nodes agree on a large buffer size, they disable the use of adaptive routing for those logical links between them that are using the "one hop logical link"
algorithm. Therefore, if two nodes using the "one hop logical links" algorithm
start a file transfer and the line between them drops, the file transfer will stop
(even though ordinarily the nodes would use adaptive routing to reroute the
data packets via other DECnet physical links). At the moment, DECnet-VAX
v3.1 supports "one hop logical links" only between two routing nodes.
At the Session layer, DECnet-VAX v3.1 uses a new method for activating
network processes. This new technique helps to reduce the time it takes to
establish a logical link by reusing an active network process, called NETSERVER,
instead of creating a new one whenever a logical link is initiated. As a result,
link creation time is reduced to 1.4 seconds on vAx-11/780s (versus 2.6 seconds
in previous releases).

A.9

Performance Guidelines

DECnet

Finally, at the Network Applications layer, RMS and FAL, and the File Access
Listener, have been modified to use a larger buffer (up to 4 Kbytes). This
permits up to eight disk blocks in block mode file transfers to be sent in one QIO
request. It also increases the maximum record size to 4,096 bytes. In addition,
FAL now uses a multiblocking algorithm that greatly reduces the number of
disk accesses required to store or retrieve a file. Consequently, FAL's CPU usage
is reduced by over 50%. The net effect of these changes greatly improves
file transfer throughput.
These enhancements will improve performance for all users. The new network
process creation and "flow control" techniques will apply to everyone running
DECnet-VAX. The other enhancements are targeted more at Ethernet customers
than at users of slower-speed links.

DECnet Performance Data

Table A.2
Maximum Task-to- Task
Data Transfer Rates

Tables A.2 and A.3 are some actual performance measurements including the
magnitude of the improvements in DECnet-VAX v3.1. Note that during these
measurements, DECnet was the only application on the system. Task-to-task
data was obtained with no computation involved in generating the message
content. For file transfer testing, large (1,024 block) files were used. Other
parameters were set to typical values for all tests. All measurements were taken
with a line buffer size of576 bytes except where "one hop logical links" were
used. In those cases, the algorithm permitted the use oft,498-byte buffers.

lMGDMRs

Ethernet

DECnet
Version

3.1 without 1
hop log. link
optimization

2.0

3.0

3.1

Bytes
User
buffer size

512

Bytes
4096

4096

Kbits/s
VAX-11/780
VAX-11/750
VAX-11/730

Table A.3
Maximum File Transfer
Data Rates

500
320

*4096

660
530
200

800

800
600

tMGDMRs

Ethernet
3.1 without
1 hop log. link
optimization

3.0

3.1

Kbits/s
VAX-11/780
VAX-11/750
VAX-11/730

105

2920

Kbits/s

DECnet
Version

2.0

3.1with1
hoplog.link
optimization

1300
1200

3.1 with
1 hop log. link
optimization

Kbits/s
140

NIA

1\..10 Performance Guidelines

340
185

420
350
225

500
390

DECnet-RSX Phase IV

DECnet-RSX Phase IV
Performance Guidelines

The following paragraphs provide performance guidelines for file transfer and
task-to-task communication for DECnet-RSX-UM-PLUS V3.0. DECnet-RSX Phase
IV performs like DECnet-RSX Phase III (within 10%), with an increased capability due to Ethernet support.
The performance of a network can be affected by several different factors. One
major consideration is the type of processor used. The CPU can be a limiting
factor in terms of performance.
Another factor to consider in determining network performance is the communication devices used. Those with a low line speed can bottleneck a configuration, so it is important to choose a line that meets the user's needs. Note that the
user bit transfer rate should not be expected to equal the line speed.
The buffering level of task-to-task communication has an impact on the bit
transfer rate. Multibuffering uses more of the available network buffers than
single-buffering. In a small memory machine, multibuffering could degrade
system performance. The increased difficulty in programming with multibuffering and the increased possibility of system performance degradation must be
weighed against improved network performance. With this performance
tradeoff, it is necessary to evaluate and determine how the user's needs will be
best satisfied.

Throughput Data

When writing programs for task-to-task communications there are tradeoffs to
consider. It is much more difficult to develop software that uses multibuffering
than software that uses single-buffering. Also, when tasks use multibuffering,
it may be necessary to increase the number of network buffers. A program's
buffering level may actually slow down execution time and increase user response time on the system. Each configuration and application has an "optimal"
buffering level. It is important to consider at what point the small increase in
performance is no longer worth the additional buffering required to extract the
extra throughput.
Figure A.1 illustrates (1) how an increase in the buffering rate improves the bit
rate and (2) the dramatic increase in throughput as the buffering level increases
from 1 to 2. In a typical situation, one could expect results of 150 Kb to 400 Kb
for multibuffering.

A.11

Performance Guidelines

DECnet-RSX Phase IV

Figure A.1
Effects ofMultibuffering
on Bit Rate
Bit Rate (Bits/Sec)
300
Thousands

250

150
100

0
2
4 0
User Message Size (Bytes)

1000

1200

D·- - -····- -o BUFS=S
D······················O BUFS=4

D-·-·-·-·-·-·-D BUFS = 3

o- - - - - -o BUFS = 2

DBUFS=l

Transmission of a large message will generally have a higher throughput than
that of a small message. All messages have an associated CPU overhead, independent ofthe message size. If the CPU is a limiting factor, the transmission of a
long message will pusp more bits through than a small one. In other words,
holding the CPU utilization constant, a higher bit transfer rate will be realized
with a longer message.
Large user message sizes are more demanding on a system than small ones.
With a limited capacity, an increase in throughput may not be worth the degradation of the total system. However, it is also not advisable to have a system
buffer size smaller than normal user message size. In that situation, each message
would have to be segmented.
The user should never expect to reach a bit rate equal to the line speed because
there will always be some protocol overhead to consider. For a given level of
buffering, throughput depends on processor speed, message size, and line
speed. For single-buffering situations, one might typically expect rates of so Kb
to 200 Kb.
CPU utilization generally decreases as message size increases primarily because
of the fixed costs associated with transmission of each message. A large message
has a lower CPU cost-per-byte and CPU cost-per-second because the fixed cost is
distributed over a larger message and a longer transmission time period. For a
PDP-11/24, the user could expect CPU utilization to peak between 58% and 78%.

File Transfers

The time required to transfer a file can be divided into two categories, either
connection time or transfer time. There is a fixed amount of connection time
required to execute start-up functions (ie: opening files and creating logical
links). The transfer time is a function of the number of bits per unit of time that
can be transmitted over the network by NFT/FAL and the file size.
In an actual case, an RMS FAL was installed on the remote node. ASCII files of
different lengths were transferred from a local node to a remote node over the
Ethernet. The results from the NFT task are shown in Table A.4.

A.12

Performance Guidelines

DECnet-RSX Phase IV

Table A.4
Network File Transfer
Over Ethernet

Configuration
11/24~11/24
11/44~11/44

11/44~11/750

Routing Nodes

Connection
Time (secs)

Blocks/second
Transferred

4
2.3
3.7

23.3
36.1
36.7

Information regarding the amount of routing done by a system can be gathered
by using NCP circuit counters. This tells how many packets have been routed
through each circuit since the counters were zeroed.
Routing nodes are affected by many factors including the amount of traffic
on the network, the stability of the nodes in the network, the topology of
the network, and the amount of work (other than routing) done by the
routing node.
In a study of the packet throughput performance of two DECnet routing nodes,
the following measurements resulted. The highest number of transit packets an
11/44 and 11/24 node can route each second are 314and167, respectively. Note
that these numbers will decrease if routing updates are required, system activity
increases, and network activity increases. The number of milliseconds required
to transmit a packet through an 11/750, 11/44, and 11/24 are 3.9, 3.2, and 6.0,
respectively. Note too, that as the factors mentioned above increase, these
will also.

A.13

Performance Guidelines

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer
Facility
Configurations and Methods

All measurements were conducted on standalone systems. Only the tasks
necessary for measuring were running on the VMS v4.5 system. All unnecessary
applications on the IBM system were stopped during testing. Although this
method yields benchmarks for the product, users in a timesharing environment
may not see the same response time and throughput as observed in a test
environment. However, the percentage of CPU used by the application will be
consistent.

Figure A.2
Test Configuration Using
Micro VAX II or VAX 8200
as Server and Client

VMS/DTP
Client and Server
MicroVAX II

or
VAX 8200

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
MVS/DTP
IBM

3725

9.6 Kb/s
or 56 Kb/s

Figure A.3
Test Configuration Using
One Micro VAX II as Server
and One as Client

IBM 4381

VMS/DTP Server

VMS/D TF Client

Micro
VAX II

Terminator

Ethernet Coaxial Cable
MVS/DTP
IBM

3725

IBM 4381

A.14

Performance Guidelines

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility

Figure A.4
Test ConfiJluration Using
VMS/SNA on VAX 8200

VMS/DTP
Client and Server

MVS!DTF
IBM

VAX 8200

3725

IBM 4381

56 Kb/s
synchronous

The file transfer measurements were designed to transfer a variety of file sizes,
1 to 1000 blocks, from the local node to the IBM host (inbound to IBM) and from
the IBM host to the local node (outbound from IBM). Files with record sizes of so,
512 ad 4096 bytes were transferred using a Request Unit (Ru) of512, 1024, 2048 or
4096 bytes. The frame sizes were 521 bytes on the 9.6 Kb/s line and 1417 bytes on
the 56 Kb/s line. The pacing is set to 4 for all measurments. Measurements
included the CPU utilization of the application, the response time for transferring
the file, and the synchronous line utilization, since the synchronous line was the
gating factor in most of the measurements.

A.ts

Performance Guidelines

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility

Results

The optimal RU size is 1024 or 2048 bytes considering response time inbound and
outbound as well as CPU and line utilization. This is true for all configurations
studied.
Note: The operating system used for all VMS nodes is VMS v4.5. Increased
funtionality in subsequent versions of VMS may impact performance. VMS V4.6
handles the establishment oflogical links between nodes differently. With
increased functionality, this leads to longer connect times.
When using the configuration in Figure A.2 with the MicroVAX n as the local
node, the maximum throughput is 45.3 Kb/s (11.1 blocks/second) with a line
utilization of80. 97% of the 56 Kb/s line. The following table gives the
maximum observed throughput for varying RU and record sizes over the
56 Kb/s line (outbound, 1000 blocks).
REC SIZE
(bytes)

RESPONSE TIME
(seconds, V4.5)

THROUGHPUT
bits/sec
blocks/sec

80
512
4096

92.7
98.7
103.0

44201
41513

10.8
10.1

39766

9.7

19.9
18.9
17.9

1024

80
512
4096

96.3
94.3
93.0

42519
43420
44043

10.4
10.6
10.8

19.1
19.5
19.8

2048

80
512
4096

93.0
90.3
90.7

44043
45343
45176

10.8
11.1
11.0

19.8
20.4
20.3

100.0

40960

10.0

18.4

RU
512

4096

MB/hr

The throughput on the 9.6 Kb/s line is limited by the line speed. The maximum
observed throughput was 8.5 Kb/s for an 89% line utilization. This is true also
for 1000 blocks outbound with RU 1024 bytes and record size of512.

A.16

Performance Guidelines

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility

Some of the measurements were taken when transferring files without data
translation. It was observed that the response time was 13% longer on the
average if data translation takes place.
When a VAX 8200 is used as the local node, as shown in Figure A.2, the
throughput is increased about 12%. The following is a list of maximum
throughputs observed with RU set to 1024 bytes over a 56 Kb/s line.
RU

1024

REC SIZE
(bytes)

RESPONSE TIME
(seconds, V 4.5)

THROUGHPUT
blocks/sec
bits/sec

80
512
4096

94.0
90.7
90.3

43574
45176
45343

19.6
20.3
20.4

MB/hr

15.6
16.2
16.3

In the configurations shown in Figures A.2 and A.4, the DTF/VMS client and
server software arc resident in the same node. In the configuration shown in
Figure A.3, the client and server are in separate MicroVAX ns, each running VMS
v4.5 operating system. The test file was sent from the client node to the server
node to the DECnet/SN A Gateway, then over the synchronous line to the IBM
system. The following table compares the CPU utilization of a file transfer on a
single DTF/VMS client/server node to the utilization on separate client and server
nodes.
RU
File size
Record size

Response time
Throughput
CPU utilization (%)

2048 bytes
1000 blocks
80 bytes

Single Node

Separate Client/Server

93.0 seconds
44.0 Kb/s
55.9%

96.3 seconds
42.5 Kb/s
client: 18.2%
server: 34.8%

The client CPU utilization is record-size dependent: the larger the record size, the
less CPU time used per block.
The configuration shown in Figure A.4 uses VMS/SNA Vl.1 software on the VAX
8200 node as a connection to the IBM system rather than the DECnet/SNA
Gateway. The CPU utilization on the VAX 8200 generally increases 22% when
transferring files of50 blocks or less when using VMS/SNA vl.1 as a gateway. The
user may see an increase of 30% in the CPU utilization when transferring files
with small (so byte) records. The increase in CPU load is due to the VMS/SNA
software residing on the sending node. The maximum throughput in this
configuration is 45.2 Kb/s observed when transferring 1000 blocks outbound
from IBM with the RU size set to 2048 bytes and a file record of512 bytes. The
outbound throughput will be similar to throughput using the DECnet/SNA
Gateway Vl.3 for large files (over 100 blocks). When transferring files inbound
or small files outbound, the throughput is an average of3o% less using VMS/SNA
Vl.1 than DECnet/SNA Gateway vl.3.

A.17

Performance Guidelines

BISYNC Emulators

BISYNC Emulators
Performance Guidelines

This subsection presents guidelines and examples of test results of performance
measurements for several bisync emulators. The purpose of these tests was to
produce a set of results on a typical configuration for each of these bisync emulators. These results can then be extrapolated to other systems to allow the user
to estimate the capabilities of these emulators on different configurations.
Bisync terminal emulators have traditionally been positioned as low performance and high functionality, that is, performance was not an issue.

Issues for 3270
Terminal Emulation

Issues for 3270 Terminal Emulation are:
• Number of terminals supported on a single system
• Incremental response time
•Line speed
• CPU load

The following configuration was used to test the VAX 3271 protocol emulator:
VAX-11/780, VAX/VMS V3.4, and a 9,600 bits per ~econd synchronous line using a
modem eliminator. Note that 9,600 bits per second is the highest possible line
speed that offers the greatest throughput, but also has the highest impact (CPU
cycles) on the VAX system. Two rates of data entry were used: a typical software
engineering environment and a "worst case" simulation using the autorepeat
feature of the VT100. For the typical software engineering environment, the
protocol emulator and the first terminal used 10 percent of the CPU. Each
subsequent terminal used an additional 2 percent of the CPU. When the
autorepeat mode of the VT100 was used for simulating "worst case" data entry,
the protocol emulator and one terminal required 25 percent of the CPU (each
additional terminal required another 6 percent).
As far as response time is concerned, the test results do not add significant
incremental delay to what the IBM host system imposes.

A.18

Performance Guidelines

BISYNC Emulators

These figures can be extrapolated to other configurations to give a general idea
of typical performance capabilities-that is, a VAX-11/750 increases the VAX11/780 figures by a factor of approximately 1.5, and the vAx-11/730 increases
the VAX-11/780 figures by a factor of approximately three.
The following configuration was used to test the RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator:
PDP-11/70, RSX-11M (no extended memory support), and a 9,600 bits per second
synchronous line using a modem eliminator.
Two rates of data entry were used: a typical software engineering environment
and a "worst case" simulation using the autorepeat feature of the vTlOO.
For the typical software engineering environment, the protocol emulator and
the first terminal used ten percent of the CPU. Each subsequent terminal used an
additional five percent of the CPU. When the autorepeat mode of the VTlOO was
used for simulating "worst case" data entry, the protocol emulator and one
terminal required 15 percent of the CPU (each additional terminal required
another 10 percent).
The CPU use on the RSX-11M configuration is somewhat lower than on
the VAX configuration because the VAX terminal emulation utility runs in
compatibility mode.

Issues for 2780/3780
Protocol Emulation

Issues for 2780/3780 Protocol Emulation are:
• Throughput (number of records transferred per unit of time)
• CPU load

•Line speed
The 2780/3780 protocol emulator includes many different options for translating
and manipulating records: use of space compression, transparency or nontransparency, 2780 or 3780, fixed or variable length records, and so on. Because of
the variety of options for record translation and manipulation, it is difficult to
present any conclusive results.
Typically, a 9,600 bits per second line on a VAx-11/750 with a DUP11 device uses
about ten percent of the CPU. Lower line speeds will result in decreased CPU use.
In addition, using a DMF32 device on a VAX instead of the DUPll decreases the
CPU use by about one-half.
Typically, a 9,600 bits per second line using a modem eliminator on a PDP-11/70
also uses about ten percent of the CPU. As is to be expected, CPU use will
increase on processors smaller than those tested.
For example, the results for the vAx-11/750 configuration (ten percent CPU
usage) can be extrapolated to 20 percent CPU use for the VAX-11/730. The results
for the PDP-11/70 configuration (ten percent CPU use) can be extrapolated to
20 percent CPU use for the PDP-11/34 and 14 percent for the PDP-11/44.
On the other hand, CPU use will decrease on processors larger than those tested.
For example, the results for the VAX-11/750 configuration (ten percent CPU use)
can be extrapolated to seven percent CPU use for the VAX-11/780.

A.19

Performance Guidelines

DECnet-DOS and DECnet-Rainbow File Transfer

DECnet-DOS and
DECnet-Rainbow
File Transfer
Performance Guidelines

Software testing for file transfer performance was conducted on standalone
systems connected by unshared transmission media. Only those machines
under test are on the network at the time of the tests, and the remote node is
running no other processes except those required to carry out the experiments.
In general, the user cannot expect to see the same throughput and response
times, since most hosts and networks have multiple users contending for the
available resources.
The total transfer time of a file is composed of two parts. The first is a fixed
overhead to initialize the process. This is referred to as the startup cost. The
second is the time to transfer the file. The transfer time is expressed in seconds
per block.
With the asynchronous line, the line speed is the bottleneck of the system and
the transfer time for all the machines is approximately the same. The difference
in throughput is a result of the difference in startup time. Since the IBM PC/ AT is
a faster processor then the IBM Pc/xT, it has a shorter startup time, a faster
overall response time, and a higher throughput.
With the Ethernet, the line speed is not the limiting factor. Therefore, the speed
of the processor is a factor in both the startup cost and the block transfer cost.

Table A.5
DECnet-DOS Startup Times
and Transfer Costs

Startup
Time

Transfer Cost
per Block

100+ -i> MVAX

5.12

0.61

PC/XT -i> MVAX

6.53

0.75

PC/ AT-i> MVAX (6 MHZ)

4.26

0.61

PC/ AT-i> MVAX (8 MHZ)

4.64

0.60

PC/XT -i> MVAX

4.96

0.104

PC/AT -i> MVAX (6 MHZ)

3.25

0.039

PC/ AT-i> MVAX (8 MHZ)

3.05

0.031

Processor
9600 baud line

Ethernet line

To calculate an approximate response time, multiply the transfer time by the
number of blocks of the file and add the startup cost.
For example, to transfer a 1000 block file from a Rainbow 100 + to a MicroVAX II
over a 9600 baud line:
(blocks *transfer cost per block) + startup time = response time
(1000 * 0.61) + 5.12 = 615 seconds

Ethernet Performance

In an Ethernet configuration, maximum throughput using DECnet-DOS for file
transfer on the 6 MHZ IBM PC/ AT is 95 Kbaud, on the 8 MHZ IBM PC/ AT is 117
Kbaud, while the maximum on the PC/XT is 36 Kbaud. These measurements
are the same for both of the supported third-party interfaces. With the greater
speed of the IBM PC/ AT there is a greater load on the remote node. This is
negligible with small files ofless than 50 blocks, but when transferring larger
files this could effect network performance if the remote node is multi-tasking
and highly utilized.

A.20

Performance Guidelines

LAN Bridge 100

LAN Bridge 100
Performance Guidelines

The LAN Bridge 100 is a very high performance device which connects two
Ethernet segments. The bridge receives frames from both Ethernet segments.
When a frame is transmitted, the LAN Bridge 100 determines which segment
contains the destination node. If the destination node for the frame is not on the
same Ethernet segment as the source node, the bridge transmits the frame to the
other segment. If the destination node of a frame is on the same segment as its
origin, the bridge discards the frame.
Factors affecting the performance of the LAN Bridge 100 include the latency
that the bridge adds to the transmission of a frame and the maximum
throughput of the Bridge. The latency of the bridge is the amount of time
the Ethernet frame spends in the bridge, i.e. time to process and transmit an
incoming Ethernet frame. Maximum throughput is the rate at which the bridge
can receive frames on one Ethernet segment and forward them to the other
Ethernet segment.
The latency introduced by the bridge is very small. The Bridge introduces
a latency of approximately 107 microseconds for minimum length (64byte) frames.
The LAN Bridge 100 is designed with a high throughput capability. Under test
conditions, the bridge can forward bursts of frames at full Ethernet bandwidth.
However at "steady state" (continuous steady stream of Ethernet frames), the
bridge can forward 13,397 minimum size packets, and 811 maximum size
Ethernet packets per second.

A.21

Performance Guidelines

AppendixB
Environmental Specifications

Detailed site preparation information is provided in the individual site preparation guide for the specific products. The environmental information in this
section is provided to help you plan for installation when ordering products.
Hardware products are classified and tested according to one of the classes of
temperature/humidity environments shown in Table B.1.

Table B.1
Environment Classes

Relative Humidity
Class

Temperature

Max
Wet Bulb

Min
Dew Point

15°C (59°F) to 32°C (90°F)

20-80

2s 0 c (77°F)

2°C (36°F)

10°C (S0°F) to 40°C (104°F)

10-90

28°C (82°F)

2°C (36°F)

5°C (41°F) to 50°C (122°F)

10 or less
to 95

32°C (90°F)

2°C (36°F)

B.1

Environmental Specifications

AppendixC
Software Product
Description Listing

Software Product

SPD

Version

DECnet-11M

10.7S.xx*

4.2

DECnet-11M-Plus

10.66.xx

3.0

DECnet-Micro/RSX

18.27.xx

1.1

DECnet-11S

10.74.xx

4.2

DECnet-VAX

2S.03.xx

4.4

PRO/DECnet

40.09.xx

2.1

DECnet/E

10. 73.xx

4.0

DECnet-RT

10.72.xx

2.1

DECnet-10

08.60.xx

4.0

DECnet-20 (DECSYSTEM 2020)

23.20.xx

2.1

DECnet-20 (DECSYSTEM 2040/2060)

23.02.xx

4.0

DECnet-ULTRIX

26.83.xx

1.1

DECnet-Rainbow

S0.14.xx

1.2

DECnet-DOS

SO. lS.xx

1.2

DECnet-VAXmate

SS.OS.xx

1.0

vAx/vMs Services for MS-Dos'"

30.SO.xx

1.0

PCSA/Pc Client

SS.07.xx

1.0

PC ALL-IN-1

28.39.xx

1.0

Networks and
Communications Software

Ethernet
Communications Servers
---

DECserver 200 for VMS and MicrovMs

27.S3.xx

1.0

DEcserver 200 for
11M-PLUS/Micro/RSX

lS.72.xx

1.0

DECserver 200 for ULTRIX

27.S4.xx

1.0

DEcserver 200 for TOPs-10/20

30.49.xx

1.0

Muxserver 100/DECmux II

28.4S.xx

2.0

DECnet Router Server

30.34.xx

1.1

DECrouter 200

27.72.xx

1.0

VAX Print Server 40 Client

27.67.xx

1.0

27.68.xx

1.0

VAX Printer Server 40 Supporting
Host
~~

---------------------------~

*"xx" designates the current SPD version number.

C.1

Appendix C

Software Product Description Listing

AppendixC
Software Product
Description Listing

Software Product

(Continued)

Internet
Communications Software

SPD

Version

30.15.xx

1.3

30.15.xx

1.3

DECnet/SNA VMS DDXF

26.72.xx

1.2

DECnet/SNA VMS DHCF

26.71.xx

1.1

DECnet/SNA DTF

27.85.xx

1.0

DECnet/SNA PrE

26.70.xx

1.1

DECnet/SNA 3270 TE

26.84.xx

1.3

DECnet/SNA VMS RJE

26.85.xx

1.2

DECnet/SNA VMS API

26.86.xx

2.1

DECnet/SNA VMS APPC!Lu6.2

26.88.xx

1.1

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 DS

26.87.xx

1.2

EDE with IBM DISOSS

26.92.xx

1.1

EDE-W Document Exchange

26.37.xx

1.1

VMS/SN A

27.01.xx

1.0

VIDA

27.25.xx

1.0

DECnet/SNA Gateway
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway
Management

WPS-PLUS/PC

30.75.xx

1.0

RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator

10.88.xx

3.1

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

25.21.xx

2.3

RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator

10.01.xx

4.1

RSX-llM/M-PLUS RJE/HASP Emulator

10.48.xx

1.3

VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator

25.07.xx

1.5

RSX-llM/IAs RJE/HASP Emulator

10.51.XX

1.1

TOPS-20 2780/3780 Emulator-Terminator

30.23.xx

2.1

TOPS-20 2780/3780/HASP

30.24.xx

1.1

TOPS-20 2780/3780/HASP for 2020

23.07.xx

1.1

TOPS-10 2780/3780 Emulator-Terminator

30.23.xx

4.0

TOPS-10 2780/3780/HASP

30.24.xx

1.0

VAX NTR Protocol Emulator

25.68.xx

1.1

Mux200/vAx Protocol Emulator

25.02.xx

2.0

Message Router VMSmail Gateway

26.33.xx

2.1

RSX-11 P.S.I./M

10.42.xx

2.1

RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS

10.43.xx

2.1

VAX P.S.I. and P.S.I. ACCESS

25.40.XX

4.0

DECnet Router/x.25 Gateway

30.41.xx

1.2

TOPS-20 P.S.I. Gateway

21.22.xx

1.1

Packetnet System Interfaces

C.2 Appendix C

Software Product Description Listing

Appendix C
Software Product
Description Listing
(Continued)

Software Product

SPD

Version

---

File Transfer and
Terminal Emulation
Professional Host Communications

30.29.xx

1.7

poly-COM

A3.23.xx

1.2

Network and System
Management Products

---

NMCC/DECnct Monitor

26.91.xx

1.1

Remote System Manager

27.32.xx

1.0

NMCC/VAX ETHERnim

26.96.xx

1.0

LAN Traffic Monitor

27.80.xx

1.0

Remote Bridge Management
Software

26.71.xx

1.0

Terminal Server Manager

27.64.xx

1.0

P/FM (PBX/Facilities
Management System)

A4.38.xx

2.2

c/FM (Cable/Facilities
Management System)

27.48.xx

1.0

KMVll-A HDLC Framing Software

14.22.XX

1.0

KMV11-A Development Tools

13.41.xx

1.0

VAX KMSll-BD/BE
x.25 Link Level Software

25.80.xx

1.2

VAX KMS11-BD/BE HDLC/BSC
Framing Software

26.55.xx

1.1

KMS11 RSX X.25 LAPB
Link Level Software (UNIBUS)

13.42.xx

2.0

KMVll RSX X.25 LAPB
Link Level Software (Q-Bus)

13.43.xx

1.0

KMVll MicrovMs Driver

28.23.xx

1.0

KMVll MicrovMs Software Tools

28.24.XX

1.0

KMVll MicrovMs x.25 Link Level

28.25.xx

1.0

VAX KCT32

26.04.XX

1.0

VAX Public Access Communications
(VAXPAC)

28.51.xx

1.0

VAX DEC/MAP

27.66.XX

1.0

VAX os1 Transport Service (voTS)

27.14.XX

1.1

Additional Software Products

- - · - - - ------ -----

-·---

Open System Interconnection
Products

VAX OSI Applications Kernel (osAK)

27.47.xx

1.0

Message Router x.400 Gateway

27.50.xx

1.0

C.3

Appendix C

AppendixD
Related Documentation

Document

Order Code

Networks and
Communications Handbooks
Introduction to VAX-11 PSI

AA-L067C-TE

Introduction to RSX-11 PSI

AA-M369B-TC

The DECconnect Communications
System Handbook

EB-28987-42

Digital's Networks: An Architecture
With A Future

EB-26013-42

Digital Network Architecture and
Personal Computing: The
DECnet-DOS Family of Software

EJ-28958-42

Architecture SpecificatiOns*
DECnet-DNA Network Management
Functional Specification V4.0

AA-X437 A-TK

DECnet-DNA Routing Layer
Functional Specification v2. o

AA-X435A-TK

DECnet-DNA Ethernet Node Product
Architecture Specification Vl. O

AA-X440A-TK

DECnet-DNA Ethernet Data Link
Functional Specification vl.O

AA-Y298A-TK

DECnet-DNA Maintenance Operations
Functional Specification V3.0

AA-X436A-TK

DECnet-DNA NSP Functional
Specification v 4. o

AA-X439A-TK

DECnet-DNA General Description

AA-N149A-TC

Ethernet Specification v2.0

AA-K759B-TK

*Order architecture specifications through DEcdirect.

D.1

Appendix D